Peter S. Riseborough
April 19, 2011
Contents
1 Principles of Classical Mechanics 9
1.1 Lagrangian Mechanics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
1.1.1 Exercise 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
1.1.2 Solution 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
1.1.3 The Principle of Least Action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
1.1.4 The EulerLagrange Equations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
1.1.5 Generalized Momentum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
1.1.6 Exercise 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
1.1.7 Solution 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
1.2 Hamiltonian Mechanics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
1.2.1 The Hamilton Equations of Motion . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
1.2.2 Exercise 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
1.2.3 Solution 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
1.2.4 Time Evolution of a Physical Quantity . . . . . . . . . . . 22
1.2.5 Poisson Brackets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
1.3 A Charged Particle in an Electromagnetic Field . . . . . . . . . . 25
1.3.1 The Electromagnetic Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
1.3.2 The Lagrangian for a Classical Charged Particle . . . . . 26
1.3.3 Exercise 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
1.3.4 Solution 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
1.3.5 The Hamiltonian of a Classical Charged Particle . . . . . 27
1.3.6 Exercise 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
1.3.7 Solution 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
2 Failure of Classical Mechanics 32
2.1 SemiClassical Quantization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
2.1.1 Exercise 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
2.1.2 Solution 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
2.1.3 Exercise 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
2.1.4 Solution 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
1
3 Principles of Quantum Mechanics 37
3.1 The Principle of Linear Superposition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
3.2 Wave Packets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
3.2.1 Exercise 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
3.2.2 Solution 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
3.2.3 Exercise 9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
3.2.4 Solution 9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
3.3 Probability, Mean and Deviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
3.3.1 Exercise 10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
3.3.2 Solution 10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
3.3.3 Exercise 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
3.3.4 Solution 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
3.3.5 Exercise 12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
3.3.6 Solution 12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
3.4 Operators and Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
3.4.1 Operator Equations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
3.4.2 Operator Addition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
3.4.3 Operator Multiplication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
3.4.4 Commutators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
3.4.5 Exercise 13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
3.4.6 Solution 13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
3.4.7 Exercise 14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
3.4.8 Solution 14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
3.4.9 Exercise 15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
3.4.10 Solution 15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
3.4.11 Exercise 16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
3.4.12 Solution 16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
3.4.13 Exercise 17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
3.4.14 Solution 17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
3.4.15 Exercise 18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
3.4.16 Solution 18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
3.4.17 Eigenvalue Equations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
3.4.18 Exercise 19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
3.4.19 Exercise 20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
3.4.20 Solution 20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
3.4.21 Exercise 21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
3.4.22 Solution 21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
3.4.23 Exercise 22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
3.4.24 Solution 22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
3.4.25 Adjoint or Hermitean Conjugate Operators . . . . . . . . 80
3.4.26 Hermitean Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
3.4.27 Exercise 23 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
3.4.28 Exercise 24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
3.4.29 Solution 24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
3.4.30 Exercise 25 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
3.4.31 Solution 25 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
2
3.4.32 Exercise 26 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
3.4.33 Solution 26 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
3.4.34 Eigenvalues and Eigenfunctions of Hermitean Operators . 91
3.4.35 Exercise 27 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
3.4.36 Solution 27 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
3.4.37 Exercise 28 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
3.4.38 Solution 28 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
3.4.39 Exercise 29 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
3.4.40 Solution 29 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
3.4.41 Exercise 30 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
3.4.42 Solution 30 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
3.4.43 Exercise 31 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
3.4.44 Exercise 32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
3.4.45 Solution 32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
3.4.46 Hermitean Operators and Physical Measurements . . . . . 103
3.4.47 Exercise 33 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
3.4.48 Solution 33 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
3.4.49 Exercise 34 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
3.4.50 Solution 34 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
3.4.51 Exercise 35 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
3.4.52 Solution 35 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
3.5 Quantization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
3.5.1 Relations between Physical Operators . . . . . . . . . . . 111
3.5.2 The Correspondence Principle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
3.5.3 The Complementarity Principle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
3.5.4 Coordinate Representation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
3.5.5 Momentum Representation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
3.5.6 Exercise 36 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
3.5.7 Exercise 37 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
3.5.8 Exercise 38 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
3.5.9 Solution 38 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
3.5.10 Exercise 39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
3.5.11 Solution 39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
3.5.12 Exercise 40 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
3.5.13 Solution 40 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
3.5.14 Exercise 41 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
3.5.15 Solution 41 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
3.5.16 Commuting Operators and Compatibility . . . . . . . . . 129
3.5.17 NonCommuting Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
3.5.18 Exercise 42 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
3.5.19 Solution 42 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
3.5.20 The Uncertainty Principle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
3.5.21 Exercise 43 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
3.5.22 Solution 43 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
3.5.23 Exercise 44 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
3.5.24 Solution 44 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
3
3.5.25 Exercise 45 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
3.5.26 Solution 45 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
3.5.27 Exercise 46 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
3.5.28 Solution 46 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
3.6 The Philosophy of Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
3.6.1 Exercise 47 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
3.6.2 Solution 47 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
3.6.3 Exercise 48 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
3.6.4 Solution 48 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
3.6.5 Exercise 49 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
3.6.6 Solution 49 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
3.7 Time Evolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
3.7.1 The Schr¨odinger Picture. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
3.7.2 Exercise 50 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
3.7.3 Solution 50 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
3.7.4 The Heisenberg Picture. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
3.7.5 Exercise 51 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
3.7.6 Solution 51 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
3.7.7 Exercise 52 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
3.7.8 Solution 52 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
3.7.9 Exercise 53 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
3.7.10 Exercise 54 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
3.7.11 Solution 54 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
3.7.12 Exercise 55 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
3.7.13 Exercise 56 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
3.7.14 The Schr¨odinger Equation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
3.7.15 Exercise 57 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
3.7.16 Solution 57 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
3.7.17 Time Development of a Wave Packet . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
3.7.18 Exercise 58 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
3.7.19 Solution 58 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
3.7.20 Time Evolution and Energy Eigenfunctions . . . . . . . . 163
3.7.21 Exercise 59 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
3.7.22 Solution 59 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
3.7.23 The Correspondence Principle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
3.7.24 The Continuity Equation and Particle Conservation . . . 168
4 Applications of Quantum Mechanics 173
4.1 Exact Solutions in One Dimension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
4.1.1 Particle Conﬁned in a Deep Potential Well . . . . . . . . 173
4.1.2 Time Dependence of a Particle in a Deep Potential Well . 181
4.1.3 Exercise 60 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
4.1.4 Particle Bound in a Shallow Potential Well . . . . . . . . 182
4.1.5 Exercise 61 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
4.1.6 Solution 61 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
4.1.7 Scattering from a Shallow Potential Well . . . . . . . . . 193
4
4.1.8 Exercise 62 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
4.1.9 Solution 62 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
4.1.10 Exercise 63 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
4.1.11 Solution 63 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
4.1.12 The Threshold Energy for a Bound State . . . . . . . . . 202
4.1.13 Transmission through a Potential Barrier . . . . . . . . . 203
4.1.14 Exercise 64 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
4.1.15 Solution 64 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
4.1.16 The Double Well Potential . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
4.1.17 The delta function Potential . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
4.1.18 Bound States of a delta function Potential . . . . . . . . . 214
4.1.19 Exercise 65 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
4.1.20 Solution 65 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
4.1.21 Exercise 66 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
4.1.22 Solution 66 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
4.1.23 Exercise 67 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
4.1.24 Solution 67 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
4.1.25 Exercise 68 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
4.1.26 Solution 68 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
4.2 The OneDimensional Harmonic Oscillator . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
4.2.1 The Raising and Lowering Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
4.2.2 The Eﬀect of the Lowering Operator . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
4.2.3 The Ground State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
4.2.4 The Eﬀect of The Raising Operator . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
4.2.5 The Normalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
4.2.6 The Excited States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
4.2.7 Exercise 69 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
4.2.8 Solution 69 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
4.2.9 Exercise 70 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
4.2.10 Solution 70 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
4.2.11 Exercise 71 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
4.2.12 Time Development of the Harmonic Oscillator . . . . . . 246
4.2.13 Exercise 72 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
4.2.14 Solution 72 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
4.2.15 Hermite Polynomials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
4.2.16 Exercise 73 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
4.2.17 Solution 73 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
4.2.18 Exercise 74 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
4.2.19 Solution 74 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
4.2.20 The Completeness Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
4.3 Dualsymmetry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
4.4 Bargmann Potentials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
4.4.1 Exercise 75 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
4.4.2 Solution 75 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
4.4.3 Exercise 76 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
4.4.4 Solution 76 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
5
4.4.5 Exercise 77 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
4.4.6 Solution 77 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
4.5 Orbital Angular Momentum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
4.5.1 Exercise 78 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
4.5.2 Solution 78 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
4.5.3 Exercise 79 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
4.5.4 Simultaneous Eigenfunctions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
4.5.5 The Raising and Lowering Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
4.5.6 The Eigenvalues and Degeneracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
4.5.7 The Eﬀect of the Raising Operators. . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
4.5.8 Explicit Expressions for the Eigenfunctions . . . . . . . . 286
4.5.9 Legendre Polynomials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
4.5.10 Associated Legendre Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
4.5.11 Spherical Harmonics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
4.5.12 Exercise 80 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
4.5.13 Solution 80 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
4.5.14 Exercise 81 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
4.5.15 Solution 81 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
4.5.16 Exercise 82 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
4.5.17 Solution 82 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
4.5.18 The Addition Theorem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
4.5.19 FiniteDimensional Representations . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
4.5.20 Exercise 83 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
4.5.21 Exercise 84 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
4.5.22 Solution 84 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
4.5.23 The Laplacian Operator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
4.5.24 An Excursion into dDimensional Space . . . . . . . . . . 316
4.5.25 Exercise 85 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
4.5.26 Solution 85 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
4.6 Spherically Symmetric Potentials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
4.6.1 Exercise 86 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
4.6.2 Solution 86 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
4.6.3 The Free Particle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
4.6.4 The Spherical Square Well . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
4.6.5 Exercise 87 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
4.6.6 Solution 87 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
4.6.7 Exercise 88 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
4.6.8 Exercise 89 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
4.6.9 Solution 89 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
4.6.10 Exercise 90 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
4.6.11 Solution 90 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
4.6.12 Exercise 91 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
4.6.13 Solution 91 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
4.6.14 Exercise 92 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
4.6.15 Solution 92 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
4.6.16 Ladder operators for a free particle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
6
4.6.17 The Rayleigh Equation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
4.6.18 The Isotropic Planar Harmonic Oscillator . . . . . . . . . 357
4.6.19 The Spherical Harmonic Oscillator . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
4.6.20 Exercise 93 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
4.6.21 Solution 93 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
4.6.22 Exercise 94 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
4.6.23 The Bound States of the Coulomb Potential . . . . . . . . 366
4.6.24 Exercise 95 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
4.6.25 Exercise 96 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
4.6.26 Solution 96 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
4.6.27 Exercise 97 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
4.6.28 Ladder Operators for the Hydrogen Atom . . . . . . . . . 375
4.6.29 Rydberg Wave Packets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
4.6.30 Laguerre Polynomials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
4.6.31 Exercise 98 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
4.6.32 Solution 98 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
4.6.33 Exercise 99 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
4.6.34 Solution 99 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
4.6.35 Exercise 100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
4.6.36 Solution 100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
4.7 A Charged Particle in a Magnetic Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
4.7.1 Exercise 101 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
4.7.2 Exercise 102 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
4.7.3 Solution 102 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
4.7.4 The Degeneracy of the Landau Levels . . . . . . . . . . . 400
4.7.5 Exercise 103 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
4.7.6 Solution 103 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
4.7.7 The AharonovBohm Eﬀect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
4.8 The Pauli Spin Matrices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
4.8.1 Exercise 104 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
4.8.2 Solution 104 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
4.8.3 Exercise 105 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
4.8.4 Solution 105 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
4.8.5 Exercise 106 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
4.8.6 Solution 106 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
4.8.7 Exercise 107 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
4.8.8 Solution 107 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
4.8.9 Exercise 108 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
4.8.10 Solution 108 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
4.8.11 The Pauli Equation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
4.8.12 Spin Dynamics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
4.8.13 Exercise 109 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
4.8.14 Solution 109 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
4.8.15 Exercise 110 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
4.8.16 Solution 110 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
4.8.17 The Berry Phase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
7
4.9 Transformations and Invariance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
4.9.1 Time Translational Invariance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
4.9.2 Translational Invariance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
4.9.3 Periodic Translational Invariance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
4.9.4 Exercise 111 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
4.9.5 Solution 111 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
4.9.6 Rotational Invariance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
4.9.7 Exercise 112 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460
4.9.8 Solution 112 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460
4.9.9 Exercise 113 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462
4.9.10 Solution 113 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462
4.9.11 Exercise 114 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467
4.9.12 Solution 114 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467
4.9.13 Gauge Invariance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470
4.9.14 Exercise 116 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471
4.9.15 Solution 116 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472
4.9.16 Galilean Boosts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473
5 The Rotating Planar Oscillator 475
6 Dirac Formulation 481
6.1 Dirac Notation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481
6.1.1 Bracket Notation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482
6.1.2 Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483
6.1.3 Adjoints and Hermitean Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484
6.1.4 Representation of Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485
6.2 Representations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486
6.3 GramSchmidt Orthogonalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488
7 Appendices 489
8
1 Principles of Classical Mechanics
Newton’s laws can be reformulated in a variety of diﬀerent ways. These diﬀer
ent formulations provide more powerful and elegant methods for solving prob
lems which involve many diﬀerent variables and have a natural formulation in
nonCartesian coordinate systems, such as spherical polar coordinates. In non
Cartesian coordinate systems, vector formulations are complicated by the fact
that the orthogonal directions associated with the variables depend upon the
values of the generalized coordinates. The advantage of the alternate formula
tion of Newton’s laws is based on the fact that they involve scalar quantities
rather than vector quantities, therefore, they do not require transforming the
equations of motion between the Cartesian coordinates and the nonCartesian
system.
1.1 Lagrangian Mechanics
The Lagrangian approach to classical mechanics is based on a scalar quantity,
the Lagrangian L, which depends upon the generalized coordinates and veloci
ties.
For a Cartesian coordinate system, the coordinates are the position of the
particle x, y and z. The generalized velocities are the time derivatives of the
coordinates, which we represent by ˙ x, ˙ y and ˙ z.
For a nonCartesian coordinate system, such as spherical polar coordinates,
the generalized coordinates for one particle are r, θ, and ϕ. The generalized
velocities are the time derivatives of the coordinates, which are ˙ r,
˙
θ, and ˙ ϕ.
The Lagrangian is given by the diﬀerence of the kinetic energy T and the
potential energy V ,
L = T − V (1)
In Cartesian coordinates, we have
L =
m
2
˙ x
2
+
m
2
˙ y
2
+
m
2
˙ z
2
− V (x, y, z) (2)
In spherical polar coordinates, we have
L =
m ˙ r
2
2
+
m r
2 ˙
θ
2
2
+
m r
2
sin
2
θ ˙ ϕ
2
2
− V (r, θ, ϕ) (3)
9
ϕ ϕϕ ϕ
θ θθ θ
x
y
z
r
r
Figure 1: The Spherical Polar Coordinate System. A general point is labelled
by the coordinates (r, θ, ϕ).
——————————————————————————————————
1.1.1 Exercise 1
Find the Lagrangian for a particle in terms of spherical polar coordinates.
——————————————————————————————————
1.1.2 Solution 1
The Lagrangian for a particle in a potential is given by
L =
m
2
˙ r
2
− V (r) (4)
and with r ≡ (r, θ, ϕ) one has
˙ r =
∂r
∂r
dr
dt
+
∂r
∂θ
dθ
dt
+
∂r
∂ϕ
dϕ
dt
(5)
but the three orthogonal unit vectors of spherical polar coordinates ˆ e
r
, ˆ e
θ
and
ˆ e
ϕ
are deﬁned as the directions of increasing r, increasing θ and increasing ϕ.
10
ϕ ϕϕ ϕ
θ θθ θ
x
y
z
dr e
r
r
r dθ θ θ θ e
θ θθ θ
r sinθ θθ θ dϕ ϕ ϕ ϕ e
ϕ ϕϕ ϕ
dθ θθ θ
dϕ ϕϕ ϕ
Figure 2: The Spherical Polar Coordinate System. An orthogonal set of unit
vectors ˆ e
r
, ˆ e
θ
and ˆ e
ϕ
can be constructed which, respectively, correspond to the
directions of increasing r, θ and ϕ.
Thus,
∂r
∂r
= ˆ e
r
∂r
∂θ
= r ˆ e
θ
∂r
∂ϕ
= r sin θ ˆ e
ϕ
(6)
Hence
˙ r = ˆ e
r
dr
dt
+ r ˆ e
θ
dθ
dt
+ r sin θ ˆ e
ϕ
dϕ
dt
(7)
and as the unit vectors are orthogonal
L =
m
2
_ _
dr
dt
_
2
+ r
2
_
dθ
dt
_
2
+ r
2
sin
2
θ
_
dϕ
dt
_
2
_
− V (r) (8)
——————————————————————————————————
11
For a problem involving N particles, we denote the generalized coordinates
by q
i
, where i runs over the 3N values corresponding to the 3 coordinates for
each of the N particles, and the generalized velocities by ˙ q
i
. The Lagrangian
L is a function of the set of q
i
and ˙ q
i
, and we shall write this as L(q
i
, ˙ q
i
) in
which only one set of coordinates and velocities appears. However, L depends
on all the coordinates and velocities. The Lagrangian is the sum of the kinetic
energy of the particles minus the total potential energy, which is the sum of the
external potentials acting on each of the particles together with the sum of any
interaction potentials acting between pairs of particles.
1.1.3 The Principle of Least Action
The equations of motion originate from an extremum principle, often called the
principle of least action. The central quantity in this principle is given by the
action S which is a number that depends upon the speciﬁc function which is
a trajectory q
i
(t
). These trajectories run from the initial position at t
= 0,
which is denoted by q
i
(0), to a ﬁnal position at t
= t, denoted by q
i
(t).
These two sets of values are assumed to be known, and they replace the two
sets of initial conditions, q
i
(0) and ˙ q
i
(0), used in the solution of Newton’s laws.
There are inﬁnitely many arbitrary trajectories that run between the initial and
ﬁnal positions. The action for any one of these trajectories, q
i
(t
) is given by a
number which has the value of the integration
S =
_
t
0
dt
L(q
i
(t
), ˙ q
i
(t
)) (9)
The value of S depends on the particular choice of trajectory q
i
(t
). The action
is an example of a functional S[q
i
(t
)] as it yields a number that depends upon
the choice of a function. The extremum principle asserts that the value of S
is an extremum, i.e. a maximum, minimum or saddle point, for the trajectory
which satisﬁes Newton’s laws.
To elucidate the meaning of the extremal principle, we shall consider an
arbitrary trajectory q
i
(t
) that goes between the initial and ﬁnal position in a
time interval of duration t. Since this trajectory is arbitrary, it is diﬀerent from
the trajectory that satisﬁes Newton’s laws, which as we shall show later is an
extremal trajectory q
ex
i
(t
). The diﬀerence or deviation between the arbitrary
trajectory and the extremal trajectory is deﬁned by
δq
i
(t
) = q
i
(t
) − q
ex
i
(t
) (10)
An important fact is that this deviation tends to zero at the end points t
= 0
and t
= t since our trajectories are deﬁned to all run through the speciﬁc
initial q
i
(0) and ﬁnal positions q
i
(t) at t
= 0 and t
= t. Let us consider
the variety of the plots of δq
i
(t
) versus t
. There are inﬁnitely many diﬀerent
curves. Let us concentrate on a single shape of the curve, then we can generate
12
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
1 0 1 2 3
t
q
(
t
)
q
ex
(t)
q(t
f
)
q(t
i
)
t
i
t
f
q(t)
Figure 3: Arbitrary trajectories q
i
(t) originating from a speciﬁc initial point
q
i
(t
i
) at t = t
i
and ending up at a speciﬁc ﬁnal point q
i
(t
f
) at time t = t
f
.
a whole family of such curves by either increasing or decreasing the magnitude
of the deviation by a factor of λ. The family of trajectories is given by
q
i
(t
) = q
ex
i
(t
) + λ δq
i
(t
) (11)
When λ = 0 the original curve reduces to the extremal curve and when λ = 1
we recover our initial choice for the arbitrary trajectory.
If we substitute this family of trajectories into the action, we would ﬁnd a
number S(λ) that depends on λ. This function S(λ) should be extremal, i.e.
either a maximum, minimum, or a saddle point as a function of λ at λ = 0 if
the action is an extremum at the extremal trajectory. The condition that the
action is extremal is just that
∂S
∂λ
= 0 (12)
at λ = 0, or the ﬁrst order term in the Taylor series expansion of S(λ) in λ is
zero.
Let us ﬁrst look at a simple example of motion in one dimension, where the
Lagrangian is given by
L(x, ˙ x) =
m
2
˙ x
2
− V (x) (13)
13
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
1 0 1 2 3
t
q
(
t
)
q
ex
(t)
q(t
f
)
q(t
i
)
t
i
t
f
q(t)
δ δδ δ
q(t)
Figure 4: Arbitrary trajectories q
i
(t) going between speciﬁc initial and ﬁnal
points, and the extremal trajectory q
ex
i
(t). The deviation δq
i
(t) is deﬁned as
δq
i
(t) = q
i
(t) − q
ex
i
(t).
and let us substitute
x(t
) = x
ex
(t
) + λ δx(t
) (14)
in S(λ) and expand in powers of λ,
S(λ) =
_
t
0
dt
L(x
ex
(t
) + λ δx(t
) , ˙ x
ex
(t
) + λ δ ˙ x(t
))
=
_
t
0
dt
L(x
ex
(t
), ˙ x
ex
(t
))
+ λ
_
t
0
dt
_
∂
∂x
L(x(t
), ˙ x(t
))
¸
¸
¸
¸
λ=0
δx(t
) +
∂
∂ ˙ x
L(x(t
), ˙ x(t
))
¸
¸
¸
¸
λ=0
δ ˙ x(t
)
_
+ O(λ
2
) (15)
In the above expression, the partial derivatives of the Lagrangian are evaluated
with the extremal trajectory. Since we are only concerned with the condition
that S is extremal at λ = 0, the higher order terms in the Taylor expansion
in λ are irrelevant. If S is to be extremal, then the extremum condition means
that the term linear in λ must vanish, no matter what our particular choice of
14
δx(t
) is. Thus, we require that
_
t
0
dt
_
∂
∂x
L(x(t
), ˙ x(t
))
¸
¸
¸
¸
λ=0
δx(t
) +
∂
∂ ˙ x
L(x(t
), ˙ x(t
))
¸
¸
¸
¸
λ=0
δ ˙ x(t
)
_
= 0
(16)
for any shape of δx(t
). Since this expression involves both δx(t
) and δ ˙ x(t
), we
shall eliminate the time derivative of the deviation in the second term. To do
this we integrate the second term by parts, that is
_
t
0
dt
∂
∂ ˙ x
L(x(t
), ˙ x(t
))
¸
¸
¸
¸
λ=0
δ ˙ x(t
) =
∂
∂ ˙ x
L(x(t
), ˙ x(t
))
¸
¸
¸
¸
λ=0
δx(t
)
¸
¸
¸
¸
t
0
−
_
t
0
dt
_
d
dt
∂
∂ ˙ x
L(x(t
), ˙ x(t
))
¸
¸
¸
¸
λ=0
_
δx(t
)
(17)
The boundary terms vanish at the beginning and the end of the time interval
since the deviations δx(t
) vanish at both these times. On substituting the
expression (17) back into the term of S(λ) linear in λ, one obtains
_
t
0
dt
_
∂
∂x
L(x(t
), ˙ x(t
))
¸
¸
¸
¸
λ=0
−
_
d
dt
∂
∂ ˙ x
L(x(t
), ˙ x(t
))
¸
¸
¸
¸
λ=0
_ _
δx(t
) = 0
(18)
This integral must be zero for all shapes of the deviation δx(t
) if x
ex
(t
) is the
extremal trajectory. This can be assured if the term in the square brackets is
identically zero. This gives the equation
∂
∂x
L(x(t
), ˙ x(t
))
¸
¸
¸
¸
λ=0
−
_
d
dt
∂
∂ ˙ x
L(x(t
), ˙ x(t
))
¸
¸
¸
¸
λ=0
_
= 0 (19)
which determines the extremal trajectory. Now using the form of the Lagrangian
given in equation 13, one ﬁnds
∂V (x
ex
(t
))
∂x
+ m
d ˙ x(t
)
dt
= 0 (20)
which is identical to the equations found from Newton’s laws. Thus, the ex
tremal principle reproduces the results obtained from Newton’s laws.
1.1.4 The EulerLagrange Equations
Let us now go back to the more general case with N particles, and arbitrary
coordinates q
i
and arbitrary Lagrangian L. It is straight forward to repeat the
derivation of the extremal condition and ﬁnd that the equations of motion for
the extremal trajectory q
i
(t
) reduce to the 3N equations,
∂
∂q
i
L(q
j
(t
), ˙ q
j
(t
)) −
_
d
dt
∂
∂ ˙ q
i
L(q
j
(t
), ˙ q
j
(t
))
_
= 0 (21)
15
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
1 0 1 2 3
t
x
(
t
)
x
ex
(t)
x(t
f
)
x(t
i
)
t
i
t
f
δ δδ δ
x(t)
Figure 5: Arbitrary trajectories x(t) going between speciﬁc initial and ﬁnal
points, and the extremal trajectory x
ex
(t). The deviation δx(t) is deﬁned as
δx(t) = x(t) − x
ex
(t).
where there is one equation for each value of i. The value of j is just the dummy
variable which reminds us that L depends on all the coordinates and velocities.
These equations are the EulerLagrange equations, and are a set of second order
diﬀerential equations which determine the classical trajectory.
1.1.5 Generalized Momentum
The angular momentum is an example of what we call a generalized momentum.
We deﬁne a generalized momentum in the same way as the components of
momentum are deﬁned for a particle in Cartesian coordinates. The generalized
momentum p
i
conjugate to the generalized coordinate q
i
is given by the equation
p
i
=
_
∂ L
∂ ˙ q
i
_
(22)
Thus, in a Cartesian coordinate system, we ﬁnd the xcomponent of a particle’s
momentum is given by
p
x
=
_
∂ L
∂ ˙ x
_
= m˙ x (23)
16
Likewise, for the y and z components
p
y
=
_
∂ L
∂ ˙ y
_
= m˙ y (24)
and
p
z
=
_
∂ L
∂ ˙ z
_
= m˙ z (25)
The EulerLagrange equations of motion for the general case is rewritten in
terms of the generalized momentum as
∂ L
∂q
i
−
_
d p
i
dt
_
= 0 (26)
This equation has the same form as Newton’s laws involving the rate of change
of momentum on one side and the derivative of the Lagrangian w.r.t a coordi
nate on the other side.
——————————————————————————————————
1.1.6 Exercise 2
Find the classical equations of motion for a particle, in spherical polar coordi
nates.
——————————————————————————————————
1.1.7 Solution 2
The generalized momenta are found via
p
r
=
∂L
∂ ˙ r
= m ˙ r
p
θ
=
∂L
∂
˙
θ
= m r
2
˙
θ
p
ϕ
=
∂L
∂ ˙ ϕ
= m r
2
sin
2
θ ˙ ϕ (27)
17
The EulerLagrange equations become
dp
r
dt
=
∂L
∂r
= m r
_
˙
θ
2
+ sin
2
θ ˙ ϕ
2
_
−
∂V
∂r
dp
θ
dt
=
∂L
∂θ
= m r
2
sin θ cos θ ˙ ϕ
2
−
∂V
∂θ
dp
ϕ
dt
=
∂L
∂ϕ
= −
∂V
∂ϕ
(28)
——————————————————————————————————
18
1.2 Hamiltonian Mechanics
Hamiltonian Mechanics formulates mechanics not in terms of the generalized
coordinates and velocities, but in terms of the generalized coordinates and mo
menta. The Hamiltonian will turn out to be the equivalent of energy. Since
Newton’s laws give rise to a second order diﬀerential equation and require two
initial conditions, to solve Newton’s laws we need to integrate twice. The ﬁrst
integration can be done with the aid of an integrating factor. For example, with
m ¨ x = −
∂V
∂x
(29)
the integrating factor is the velocity, ˙ x. On multiplying the equation by the
integrating factor and then integrating, one obtains
m
2
˙ x
2
= E − V (x) (30)
where the constant of integration is the energy E. Note that the solution is
now found to lie on the surface of constant energy in the twodimensional space
formed by x and ˙ x. The solution of the mechanical problem is found by in
tegrating once again. The point is, once we have obtained the energy, we are
closer to ﬁnding a solution of the equations of motion. Hamiltonian mechanics
results in a set of ﬁrst order diﬀerential equations.
The Hamiltonian, H(q
i
, p
i
, t), is a function of the generalized coordinates q
i
and generalized momentum p
i
. It is deﬁned as a Legendre transformation of
the Lagrangian
H(q
i
, p
i
, t) =
i
˙ q
i
p
i
− L(q
i
, ˙ q
i
, t) (31)
The Legendre transformation has the eﬀect of eliminating the velocity ˙ q
i
and
replacing it with the momentum p
i
.
The equations of motion can be determined from the Lagrangian equations
of motion. Since the Hamiltonian is considered to be a function of coordinates
and momenta alone, an inﬁnitesimal change in H occurs either through an
inﬁnitesimal change in the coordinates dq
i
, momenta dp
i
or, if the Lagrangian
has any explicit time dependence, through dt,
dH =
i
_
∂H
∂q
i
dq
i
+
∂H
∂p
i
dp
i
_
+
∂H
∂t
dt (32)
However, from the deﬁnition of H one also has
dH =
i
_
˙ q
i
dp
i
+ p
i
d ˙ q
i
−
∂L
∂ ˙ q
i
d ˙ q
i
−
∂L
∂q
i
dq
i
_
−
∂L
∂t
dt (33)
19
The terms proportional to d ˙ q
i
cancel as, by deﬁnition, p
i
is the same as
∂L
∂ ˙ qi
.
Thus, we have
dH =
i
_
˙ q
i
dp
i
−
∂L
∂q
i
dq
i
_
−
∂L
∂t
dt (34)
The cancellation of the terms proportional to the inﬁnitesimal change d ˙ q
i
is a
result of the Legendre transformation, and conﬁrms that the Hamiltonian is a
function of only the coordinates and momenta. We also can use the Lagrangian
equations of motion to express
∂L
∂qi
as the time derivative of the momentum ˙ p
i
.
1.2.1 The Hamilton Equations of Motion
We can now compare the speciﬁc form of the inﬁnitesimal change in H found
above, with the inﬁnitesimal diﬀerential found from its dependence on p
i
and
q
i
. On equating the coeﬃcients of dq
i
, dp
i
and dt, one has
˙ q
i
=
∂H
∂p
i
˙ p
i
= −
∂H
∂q
i
−
∂L
∂t
=
∂H
∂t
(35)
The ﬁrst two equations are the Hamiltonian equations of motion. The Hamilto
nian equations are two sets of ﬁrst order diﬀerential equations, rather than the
one set of second order diﬀerential equations given by the Lagrangian equations
of motion.
An example is given by motion in one dimension where
L =
m
2
˙ x
2
− V (x) (36)
the momentum is given by
p =
∂L
∂ ˙ x
= m ˙ x (37)
Then, the Hamiltonian becomes
H = p ˙ x − L
= p ˙ x −
m
2
˙ x
2
+ V (x)
=
p
2
2m
+ V (x) (38)
20
which is the same as the energy.
For a single particle moving in a central potential, we ﬁnd that the Hamil
tonian in spherical polar coordinates has the form
H =
p
2
r
2 m
+
p
2
θ
2 m r
2
+
p
2
ϕ
2 m r
2
sin
2
θ
+ V (r) (39)
which is the energy of the particle in spherical polar coordinates.
——————————————————————————————————
1.2.2 Exercise 3
Find the Hamiltonian and the Hamiltonian equations of motion for a particle
in spherical polar coordinates.
——————————————————————————————————
1.2.3 Solution 3
Using the expression for the Lagrangian
L =
m
2
_ _
dr
dt
_
2
+ r
2
_
dθ
dt
_
2
+ r
2
sin
2
θ
_
dϕ
dt
_
2
_
− V (r) (40)
one ﬁnds the generalized momenta
p
r
=
∂L
∂ ˙ r
= m ˙ r
p
θ
=
∂L
∂
˙
θ
= m r
2
˙
θ
p
ϕ
=
∂L
∂ ˙ ϕ
= m r
2
sin
2
θ ˙ ϕ (41)
The Hamiltonian is given by
H = p
r
˙ r + p
θ
˙
θ + p
ϕ
˙ ϕ − L (42)
which on eliminating ˙ r,
˙
θ and ˙ ϕ in terms of the generalized momenta, leads to
H =
p
2
r
2 m
+
p
2
θ
2 m r
2
+
p
2
ϕ
2 m r
2
sin
2
θ
+ V (r) (43)
The equations of motion become
˙ r =
p
r
m
˙
θ =
p
θ
m r
2
˙ ϕ =
p
ϕ
m r
2
sin
2
θ
(44)
21
and
˙ p
r
= −
_
p
2
θ
m r
3
+
p
2
ϕ
m sin
2
θ r
3
_
−
∂V
∂r
˙ p
θ
= − cos θ
p
2
ϕ
m sin
3
θ r
2
−
∂V
∂θ
˙ p
ϕ
= −
∂V
∂ϕ
(45)
——————————————————————————————————
1.2.4 Time Evolution of a Physical Quantity
Given any physical quantity A then it can be represented by a function of the
all the coordinates and momenta, and perhaps explicitly on time t, but not on
derivatives with respect to time. This quantity A is denoted by A(q
i
, p
i
, t). The
rate of change of A with respect to time is given by the total derivative,
dA
dt
=
i
_
∂A
∂q
i
˙ q
i
+
∂A
∂p
i
˙ p
i
_
+
∂A
∂t
(46)
where the ﬁrst two terms originate from the dynamics of the particle’s trajectory,
the last term originates from the explicit time dependence of the quantity A.
On substituting the Hamiltonian equations of motion into the total derivative,
and eliminating the rate of change of the coordinates and momenta, one ﬁnds
dA
dt
=
i
_
∂A
∂q
i
∂H
∂p
i
−
∂A
∂p
i
∂H
∂q
i
_
+
∂A
∂t
(47)
1.2.5 Poisson Brackets
The Poisson Brackets of two quantities, A and B, is given by the expression
[ A , B ]
PB
=
i
_
∂A
∂q
i
∂B
∂p
i
−
∂A
∂p
i
∂B
∂q
i
_
(48)
The equation of motion for A can be written in terms of the Poisson Bracket,
dA
dt
= [ A , H ]
PB
+
∂A
∂t
(49)
22
From the deﬁnition, it can be seen that the Poisson Bracket is antisymmetric
[ A , B ]
PB
= − [ B , A ]
PB
(50)
The Poisson Bracket of a quantity with itself is identically zero
[ A , A ]
PB
= 0 (51)
If we apply this to the Hamiltonian we ﬁnd
dH
dt
= [ H , H ]
PB
+
∂H
∂t
dH
dt
=
∂H
∂t
(52)
Thus, if the Hamiltonian doesn’t explicitly depend on time, the Hamiltonian is
constant. That is, the energy is conserved.
Likewise, if A doesn’t explicitly depend on time and if the Poisson Bracket
between H and A is zero,
[ A , H ]
PB
= 0 (53)
one ﬁnds that A is also a constant of motion
dA
dt
= [ A , H ]
PB
= 0 (54)
Another important Poisson Bracket relation is the Poisson Bracket of the
canonically conjugate coordinates and momenta, which is given by
[ p
j
, q
j
]
PB
=
i
_
∂p
j
∂q
i
∂q
j
∂p
i
−
∂p
j
∂p
i
∂q
j
∂q
i
_
= 0 −
i
δ
i,j
δ
i,j
= − δ
j,j
(55)
The ﬁrst term is zero as q and p are independent. The last term involves the
Kronecker delta function. The Kronecker delta function is given by
δ
i,j
= 1 if i = j
δ
i,j
= 0 if i ,= j (56)
and is zero unless i = j, where it is unity. Thus, the Poisson Bracket between
a generalized coordinate and its conjugate generalized momentum is − 1,
[ p
j
, q
j
]
PB
= − δ
j,j
(57)
23
while the Poisson Bracket between a coordinate and the momentum conjugate
to a diﬀerent coordinate is zero. We can also show that
[ p
j
, p
j
]
PB
= [ q
j
, q
j
]
PB
= 0 (58)
These Poisson Brackets shall play an important role in quantum mechanics,
and are related to the commutation relations of canonically conjugate coordi
nate and momentum operators.
24
1.3 A Charged Particle in an Electromagnetic Field
In the classical approximation, a particle of charge q in an electromagnetic ﬁeld
represented by E(r, t) and B(r, t) is subjected to a Lorentz force
F = q
_
E(r, t) +
1
c
˙ r ∧ B(r, t)
_
(59)
The Lorentz force acts as a deﬁnition of the electric and magnetic ﬁelds, E(r, t)
and B(r, t) respectively. In classical mechanics, the ﬁelds are observable through
the forces they exert on a charged particle.
In general, quantum mechanics is couched in the language of potentials in
stead of forces, therefore, we shall be replacing the electromagnetic ﬁelds by the
scalar and vector potentials. These are deﬁned as solutions of Maxwell’s equa
tions which express the ﬁelds in terms of the sources and also form consistency
conditions.
1.3.1 The Electromagnetic Field
The electromagnetic ﬁeld satisﬁes Maxwell’s eqns.,
∇ . B(r, t) = 0
∇ ∧ E(r, t) +
1
c
∂
∂t
B(r, t) = 0
∇ . E(r, t) = ρ(r, t)
∇ ∧ B(r, t) −
1
c
∂
∂t
E(r, t) =
1
c
j(r, t) (60)
where ρ(r, t) and j(r, t) are the charge and current densities. The last two
equations describe the relation between the ﬁelds and the sources. The ﬁrst two
equations are the source free equations and are automatically satisﬁed if one
introduced a scalar φ(r, t) and a vector potential A(r, t) such that
B(r, t) = ∇ ∧ A(r, t)
E(r, t) = − ∇ φ(r, t) −
1
c
∂
∂t
A(r, t) (61)
In classical mechanics, the electric and magnetic induction ﬁelds, E and B,
are regarded as the physically measurable ﬁelds, and the scalar φ(r, t) and a
vector potential A(r, t) are not physically measurable. There is an arbitrariness
in the values of the potentials φ(r, t) and A(r, t) as they are deﬁned to be the
solutions of diﬀerential equations which relate them to the physically measurable
E(r, t) and B(r, t) ﬁelds. This arbitrariness is formalized in the concept of a
gauge transformation, which means that the potentials are not unique and if one
replaces the potentials by new values which involve derivatives of any arbitrary
25
scalar function Λ(r, t)
φ(r, t) → φ(r, t) −
1
c
∂
∂t
Λ(r, t)
A(r, t) → A(r, t) + ∇ Λ(r, t) (62)
the physical ﬁelds, E(r, t) and B(r, t), remain the same. This transformation is
called a gauge transformation.
1.3.2 The Lagrangian for a Classical Charged Particle
The Lagrangian for a classical particle in an electromagnetic ﬁeld is expressed
as
L = − m c
2
¸
_
1 −
˙ r
2
c
2
_
− q φ(r, t) +
q
c
A(r, t) . ˙ r (63)
The canonical momentum now involves a component originating from the ﬁeld
as well as the mechanical momentum
p =
m ˙ r
¸
_
1 −
˙ r
2
c
2
_
+
q
c
A(r, t) (64)
The Lagrangian equations of motion for the classical particle are
d
dt
_
m ˙ r
1
_
1 −
˙ r
2
c
2
+
q
c
A(r, t)
_
= − q ∇ φ(r, t) +
q
c
∇
_
˙ r . A(r, t)
_
(65)
where the time derivative is a total derivative. The total derivative of the vector
potential term is written as
d
dt
A(r, t) =
∂
∂t
A(r, t) + ˙ r . ∇ A(r, t) (66)
as it relates the change of vector potential experienced by a moving particle.
The change of vector potential may occur due to an explicit time dependence
of A(r, t) at a ﬁxed position, or may occur due to the particle moving to a new
position in a nonuniform ﬁeld A(r, t).
——————————————————————————————————
1.3.3 Exercise 4
Show that these equations reduce to the relativistic version of the equations of
motion with the Lorentz force law
d
dt
_
m ˙ r
1
_
1 −
˙ r
2
c
2
_
= q
_
E(r, t) +
1
c
˙ r ∧ B(r, t)
_
(67)
26
——————————————————————————————————
1.3.4 Solution 4
The EulerLagrange equation is of the form
d
dt
_
m ˙ r
1
_
1 −
˙ r
2
c
2
+
q
c
A(r, t)
_
= − q ∇φ(r, t) +
q
c
∇
_
˙ r . A(r, t)
_
(68)
On substituting the expression for the total derivative of the vector potential
d
dt
A(r, t) =
∂
∂t
A(r, t) + ˙ r . ∇ A(r, t) (69)
one obtains the equation
d
dt
_
m ˙ r
1
_
1 −
˙ r
2
c
2
_
= − q ∇ φ(r, t) −
q
c
∂
∂t
A(r, t)
+
q
c
∇
_
˙ r . A(r, t)
_
−
q
c
_
˙ r . ∇
_
A(r, t) (70)
The last two terms can be combined to yield
d
dt
_
m ˙ r
1
_
1 −
˙ r
2
c
2
_
= − q ∇ φ(r, t) −
q
c
∂
∂t
A(r, t)
+
q
c
˙ r ∧
_
∇ ∧ A(r, t)
_
(71)
The ﬁrst two terms on the right hand side are identiﬁable as the expression for
the electric ﬁeld E(r, t) and the last term involving the curl A(r, t) is recognized
as involving the magnetic induction ﬁeld B(r, t) and, therefore, comprises the
magnetic component of the Lorentz Force Law.
——————————————————————————————————
1.3.5 The Hamiltonian of a Classical Charged Particle
The Hamiltonian for a charged particle is found from
H = p . ˙ r − L (72)
which, with the relation between the momentum and the mechanical momen
tum,
p −
q
c
A(r, t) = m ˙ r
1
_
1 −
˙ r
2
c
2
(73)
27
leads to
H =
¸
_
c
2
_
p −
q
c
A(r, t)
_
2
+ m
2
c
4
_
+ q φ(r, t) (74)
The presence of the electromagnetic ﬁeld results in the two replacements
p → p −
q
c
A(r, t)
H → H − q φ(r, t) (75)
An electromagnetic ﬁeld is often incorporated in a Hamiltonian describing free
charged particles through these two replacements. These replacements retain
relativistic invariance as both the pairs E and p and φ(r, t) and A(r, t) form
four vectors. This procedure of including an electromagnetic ﬁeld is based on
what is called the minimal coupling assumption. The nonrelativistic limit of
the Hamiltonian is found by expanding the square root in powers of
p
2
m
2
c
2
and
neglecting the rest mass energy m c
2
results in the expression
H =
1
2 m
_
p −
q
c
A(r, t)
_
2
+ q φ(r, t) (76)
which forms the basis of the Hamiltonian used in the Schr¨odinger equation.
——————————————————————————————————
1.3.6 Exercise 5
Derive the Hamiltonian for a charged particle in an electromagnetic ﬁeld.
——————————————————————————————————
1.3.7 Solution 5
The Lagrangian is given by
L = − m c
2
¸
1 −
˙ r
2
c
2
− q φ(r, t) +
q
c
˙ r . A(r, t) (77)
so the generalized momentum p is given by
p −
q
c
A(r, t) =
m ˙ r
_
1 −
˙ r
2
c
2
(78)
28
and so on inverting this one ﬁnds
˙ r
c
=
_
p −
q
c
A(r, t)
_
¸
m
2
c
2
+
_
p −
q
c
A(r, t)
_
2
(79)
and
1 −
˙ r
c
2
=
m
2
c
2
m
2
c
2
+
_
p −
q
c
A(r, t)
_
2
(80)
The Hamiltonian is then found from the Legendre transformation
H = p . ˙ r − L
=
_
p −
q
c
A(r, t)
_
. ˙ r + m c
2
¸
1 −
˙ r
2
c
2
+ q φ(r, t)
= c
¸
m
2
c
2
+
_
p −
q
c
A(r, t)
_
2
+ q φ(r, t) (81)
——————————————————————————————————
On expanding the quadratic kinetic energy term, one ﬁnds the Hamilto
nian has the form of a sum of the unperturbed Hamiltonian and an interaction
Hamiltonian H
int
,
H =
_
p
2
2 m
+ q φ(r, t)
_
+ H
int
(82)
The interaction H
int
couples the particle to the vector potential
H
int
= −
q
2 m c
_
p . A(r, t) + A(r, t) . p
_
+
q
2
2 m c
2
A
2
(r, t) (83)
where the ﬁrst term linear in A is the paramagnetic coupling and the last term
quadratic in A
2
is known as the diamagnetic interaction. For a uniform static
magnetic ﬁeld B(r, t) = B, one possible form of the vector potential is
A(r) = −
1
2
r ∧ B (84)
The interaction Hamiltonian has the form
H
int
= +
q
2 m c
_ _
r ∧ B
_
. p
_
+
q
2
8 m c
2
_
r ∧ B
_
2
(85)
29
The ﬁrst term can be written as the ordinary Zeeman interaction between the
orbital magnetic moment and the magnetic ﬁeld
H
int
= −
q
2 m c
_
B . L
_
+
q
2
8 m c
2
_
r ∧ B
_
2
(86)
where the orbital magnetic moment M is related to the orbital angular momen
tum via
M = +
q
2 m c
L (87)
Hence, the ordinary Zeeman interaction has the form of a dipole interaction
L
q
M = q / (2mc) L
Figure 6: A particle with charge q and angular momentum L, posseses a mag
netic dipole moment M given by M = +
q
2 m c
L.
with the magnetic ﬁeld
H
Zeeman
= − M . B (88)
which has the tendency of aligning the magnetic moment parallel to the ﬁeld.
Elementary particles such as electrons have another form of magnetic mo
ment and angular momentum which is intrinsic to the particle, and is not con
nected to any physical motion of the particle. The intrinsic angular momentum
of elementary particles is known as spin.
There are two general approaches that can be taken to Quantum Mechanics.
One is the path integral approach which was ﬁrst developed by Dirac and then
30
popularized by Feynmann. This approach is based on the use of the Lagrangian
formulation of classical mechanics. The other approach which is more common,
and is the one that we shall follow exclusively, is based on the Hamiltonian
formulation of classical mechanics.
31
2 Failure of Classical Mechanics
Classical Mechanics fails to correctly describe some physical phenomena. This
ﬁrst became apparent at the atomic level. Historically, the failure of classical
mechanics was ﬁrst manifested after Rutherford’s discovery of the structure of
the atom. Classically, an electron orbiting around a charged nucleus should
continuously radiate energy according to Maxwell’s Electromagnetic Theory.
The radiation leads to the electron experiencing a loss of energy, and thereby
continuously reducing the radius of the electrons orbit. Thus, the atom be
comes unstable as the electron spirals into the nucleus. However, it is a well
established experimental fact that atoms are stable and that the atomic energy
levels have discrete values for the energy. The quantization of the energy levels
is seen through the FranckHertz experiment, which involves inelastic collisions
between atoms. Other experimental evidence for the quantization of atomic en
ergy levels is given by the emission and absorption of electromagnetic radiation.
For example, the series of dark lines seen in the transmitted spectrum when
light, with a continuous spectrum of wavelengths, falls incident on hydrogen
gas is evidence that the excitation spectrum consists of discrete energies. Niels
Bohr discovered that the excitation energy ∆E and the angular frequency of
the light ω are related via
∆E = ¯ h ω (89)
The quantity ¯h is known as Planck’s constant and has the value of
¯h = 1.0545 10
−34
J s
= 0.65829 10
−15
eV s (90)
The Balmer, Lyman and Paschen series of electromagnetic absorption by hy
drogen atoms establishes that ∆E takes on discrete values.
Another step in the development of quantum mechanics occurred when Louis
de Broglie postulated wave particle duality, namely that entities which have the
attributes of particles also posses attributes of waves. This is formalized by the
relationships
E = ¯ h ω
p = ¯ h k (91)
The de Broglie relations were veriﬁed by Davisson and Germer in their exper
iments in which a beam of electrons were placed incident on the surface of a
crystalline solid, and the reﬂected beam showed a diﬀraction pattern indicative
of the fact that the electrons have a wave length λ. The diﬀraction condition
relates the angle of the diﬀracted beam to the ratio of the separation between
the planes of atoms and the wavelength λ. Furthermore, the diﬀraction condi
tion showed a variation with the particle’s energies which is consistent with the
wavelength momentum relation.
32
2.1 SemiClassical Quantization
The ﬁrst insight into quantum phenomena came from Niels Bohr, who imposed
an additional condition on Classical Mechanics
1
. This condition, when imposed
on systems where particles undergo periodic orbits, reduces the continuous val
ues of allowed energies to a set of discrete energies. This semiclassical quanti
zation condition is written as
_
p
i
dq
i
= n
i
h (92)
where p
i
and q
i
are the canonically conjugate momentum and coordinates
of Lagrangian or Hamiltonian Mechanics, and n
i
is an integer from the set
(0,1,2,3,4,. . . ,∞) and h is a universal constant. The integration is over one pe
riod of the particle’s orbit in phase space
2
. The discrete values of the excitation
energies found for the hydrogen atom produces reasonably good agreement with
the excitation energies found for the absorption or emission of light from hydro
gen gas.
——————————————————————————————————
2.1.1 Exercise 6
Assuming that electrons move in circular orbits in the Coulomb potential due
to a positively charged nucleus, (of charge Z e ), ﬁnd the allowed values of the
energy when the semiclassical quantization condition is imposed.
——————————————————————————————————
2.1.2 Solution 6
The Lagrangian L is given in terms of the kinetic energy T and the scalar
electrostatic potential V by L = T − V . Then in spherical polar coordinates
(r, θ, ϕ), one ﬁnds the Lagrangian
L =
m ˙ r
2
2
+
m r
2 ˙
θ
2
2
+
m r
2
sin
2
θ ˙ ϕ
2
2
+
Z e
2
r
(93)
The EulerLagrange equation for the radius r is given by
∂L
∂r
=
d
dt
_
∂L
∂ ˙ r
_
1
N. Bohr, Phil. Mag. 26, 1 (1913).
2
Einstein showed that this quantization rule can be applied to certain nonseparable sys
tems [A. Einstein, Deutsche Physikalische Gesellschaft Verhandlungen 19, 82 (1917)]. In a
nonergodic system, the accessible phase space deﬁnes a ddimensional torus. The quantiza
tion condition can be applied to any of the d independent closed loops on the torus. These
loops do not have to coincide with the system’s trajectory.
33
m r
˙
θ
2
+ m r sin
2
θ ˙ ϕ
2
−
Z e
2
r
2
= m ¨ r (94)
while the equation of motion for the polar angle θ is given by
∂L
∂θ
=
d
dt
_
∂L
∂
˙
θ
_
m r
2
2
sin 2θ ˙ ϕ
2
= m
d
dt
_
r
2
˙
θ
_
(95)
and ﬁnally we ﬁnd
∂L
∂ϕ
=
d
dt
_
∂L
∂ ˙ ϕ
_
0 = m
d
dt
_
r
2
sin
2
θ ˙ ϕ
_
(96)
According to the assumption, the motion is circular, which we choose to be in
the equatorial plane (r = a, θ =
π
2
). Thus, one has
Z e
2
a
2
= m a ˙ ϕ
2
0 = m a
2
¨ ϕ (97)
Hence, we ﬁnd that the angular velocity is a constant, ˙ ϕ = ω.
To impose the semiclassical quantization condition we need the canonical
momentum. The canonical momenta are given
p
r
=
∂L
∂ ˙ r
= 0
p
θ
=
∂L
∂
˙
θ
= 0
p
ϕ
=
∂L
∂ ˙ ϕ
= m r
2
sin
2
θ ˙ ϕ = m a
2
ω (98)
The semiclassical quantization condition becomes
_
p
ϕ
dϕ = m a
2
ω 2π = n
ϕ
h (99)
From the above one has the two equations
m a
2
ω = n
ϕ
¯h
Z e
2
a
2
= m a ω
2
(100)
On solving these for the Bohr radius a and angular frequency ω, one ﬁnds
ω =
Z
2
e
4
n
3
ϕ
¯h
3
a =
n
2
ϕ
¯h
2
Z e
2
m
(101)
34
Substituting these equations in the expression for the energy E, one ﬁnds the
expression ﬁrst found by Bohr
E =
m a
2
ω
2
2
−
Z e
2
a
E = −
Z e
2
2 a
E = −
m Z
2
e
4
2 n
2
ϕ
¯h
2
(102)
This agrees with the exact (nonrelativistic) quantum mechanical expression for
the energy levels of electrons bound to a H ion.
——————————————————————————————————
2.1.3 Exercise 7
Find the energy of a onedimensional simple Harmonic oscillator, of mass m and
frequency ω, when the semiclassical quantization condition is imposed.
——————————————————————————————————
2.1.4 Solution 7
The Hamiltonian is given by
H(p, q) =
p
2
2m
+
m ω
2
q
2
2
(103)
Hamilton’s equations of motions are
˙ p = −
∂H
∂q
= − m ω
2
q
˙ q = +
∂H
∂p
=
p
m
(104)
Thus, we have the equation of motion
¨ q + ω
2
q = 0 (105)
which has the solution in the form
q(t) = A sin(ωt +φ)
p(t) = m ω A cos(ωt +φ) (106)
35
The semiclassical quantization condition becomes
_
p(t) dq(t) = m ω A
2
_
2π
0
dϕ cos
2
ϕ
= m ω A
2
2 π = n h (107)
Thus, we ﬁnd A
2
=
2 n¯ h
m ω
where ¯ h =
h
2π
and the energy becomes
E = H(p, q) =
m ω
2
A
2
2
= n ¯h ω (108)
This should be compared with the exact quantum mechanical result E =
¯hω ( n +
1
2
). The diﬀerence between these results become negligible for
large n. That is for a ﬁxed Energy E, the results approach each other in the
limit of large n or equivalently for small ¯ h. This is example is illustrative of the
correspondence principle, which states that Quantum Mechanics, should closely
approximate Classical Mechanics where Classical Mechanics is known to provide
an accurate description of nature, and that this in this limit ¯h can be considered
to be small.
——————————————————————————————————
36
3 Principles of Quantum Mechanics
The Schr¨odinger approach to Quantum Mechanics is known as wave mechan
ics. The Schr¨odinger formulation is in terms of states of a system which are
represented by complex functions deﬁned in Euclidean space, Ψ(r) known as
wave functions and measurements are represented by linear diﬀerential opera
tors. The Schr¨odinger approach, though most common is not unique. An alter
nate approach was pursued by Heisenberg, in which the state of the system are
represented by column matrices and measurements are represented by square
matrices. This second approach is known as Heisenberg’s matrix mechanics.
These two approaches were shown to be equivalent by Dirac, who developed an
abstract formulation of Quantum Mechanics using an abstract representation of
states and operators.
We shall ﬁrst consider the system at a ﬁxed time t, say t = 0. The wave
function, Ψ(r), represents a state of a single particle at that instant of time,
and has a probabilistic interpretation. Consider an ensemble of N identical and
noninteracting systems, each of which contains a measurement apparatus and
a single particle. Each measurement apparatus has its own internal reference
frame with its own origin. A measurement of the position r (referenced to
the coordinate system attached to the measurement apparatus) is to be made
on each particle in the ensemble. Just before the measurements are made, each
particle is in a state represented by Ψ(r). Measurements of the positions of each
particle in the ensemble will result in a set of values of r that represents points in
space, referenced w.r.t. the internal coordinate system
3
. The probability that a
measurement of the position r of a particle will give a value in the inﬁnitesimal
volume d
3
r containing the point r, is given by
P(r) d
3
r = [ Ψ(r) [
2
d
3
r (109)
Thus, P(r) d
3
r is the probability of ﬁnding the particle in the inﬁnitesimal
volume d
3
r located at r. The probability is directly proportional to the size of
the volume d
3
r, and P(r) = [ Ψ(r) [
2
is the probability density. Since the
particle is somewhere in threedimensional space, the probability is normalized
such that _
[ Ψ(r) [
2
d
3
r = 1 (110)
This normalization condition will have to be enforced on the wave function if
it is to represent a singleparticle state. The normalization condition must be
true for all times, if the particle number is conserved
4
.
3
Alternatively, instead of considering an ensemble of identical systems, one could consider
performing N successive measurements on a single system. However, before each successive
measurement is made, one would have to reset the initial condition. That is, the system
should be prepared so that, just before each measurement is made, the particle is in the state
described by Ψ(r).
4
For wellbehaved functions, the normalization condition implies that  Ψ(r) 
2
vanishes as
r →∞.
37
Given two states, Ψ(r) and Φ(r), one can deﬁne an inner product or overlap
matrix element as the complex constant given by
_
d
3
r Φ
∗
(r) Ψ(r) (111)
where the integration runs over all volume of threedimensional space. It should
be noted that inner product of two wave functions depends on the order that
the wave functions are speciﬁed. If the inner product is taken in the opposite
order, one ﬁnds
_
d
3
r Ψ
∗
(r) Φ(r) =
_ _
d
3
r Φ
∗
(r) Ψ(r)
_
∗
(112)
which is the complex conjugate of the original inner product. The normalization
of the wave function Ψ(r) just consists of the inner product of the wave function
with itself. The interpretation of the squared modulus of the wave function as
a probability density requires that the normalization of a state is unity.
We should note that if all observable quantities for a state always involve the
wave function times its complex conjugate, then the absolute phase of the wave
function is not observable. Only phase diﬀerences are measurable. Therefore,
it is always possible to transform a wave function by changing its phase
Ψ(r) → Ψ
(r) = exp
_
i Λ(r)
¯h
_
Ψ(r) (113)
where Λ(r) is an arbitrary real function.
38
3.1 The Principle of Linear Superposition
In quantum mechanics, a measurement of a physical quantity of a single particle
which is in a unique state will result in a value of the measured quantity that is
one of a set of possible results a
n
. Repetition of the measurement on a particle
in exactly the same initial state may yield other values of the measured quantity
(such as a
m
). The probability distribution for the various results a
n
is governed
by the particular state of the system that the measurement is being performed
on.
This suggests that a state of a quantum mechanical system, at any instant,
can be represented as a superposition of states corresponding to the diﬀerent
possible results of the measurement. Let Φ
n
(r) be a state such that a mea
surement of A on the state will deﬁnitely give the result a
n
. The simplest way
of making a superposition of states is by linearly adding multiples of the wave
functions Φ
n
(r) corresponding to the possible results.
Thus, the principle of linear superposition can be stated as
Ψ(r) =
n
C
n
Φ
n
(r) (114)
where the expansion coeﬃcients C
n
are complex numbers. The expansion coef
ﬁcients can be determined from a knowledge of the wave function of the state
Ψ(r) and the set of functions, Φ
n
(r), representing the states in which a mea
surement of A is known to yield the result a
n
. The expansion coeﬃcients C
n
are related to the probability that the measurement on the state Ψ(r) results in
the value a
n
.
The principle of linear superposition of the wave function can lead to inter
ference in the results of measurements. For example, the results of a measure
ment of the position of the particle r, leads to a probability distribution P(r)
according to
P(r) d
3
r = [ Ψ(r) [
2
d
3
r
=
n,m
C
∗
m
C
n
Φ
∗
m
(r) Φ
n
(r) d
3
r (115)
On isolating the terms with n = m, one ﬁnds terms in which the phases of
the wave functions Φ
n
(r) and the phases of the complex numbers C
n
separately
cancel. The remaining terms, in which n ,= m, represent the interference
terms. Thus
P(r) d
3
r =
n
[ C
n
[
2
[ Φ
n
(r) [
2
+
n=m
C
∗
m
C
n
Φ
∗
m
(r) Φ
n
(r) d
3
r (116)
The coeﬃcient [ C
n
[
2
is the probability that the state represented by Ψ(r) is
in the state n.
39
As an example, consider a state which is in a superposition of two states each
of which represents a state of deﬁnite momentum, p = ¯h k and p = − ¯h k.
The forward and backward travelling states are
Φ
k
(r) = C
k
exp
_
+ i k . r
_
Φ
−k
(r) = C
−k
exp
_
− i k . r
_
(117)
These states are not normalizable and, therefore, each state must represent
beams of particles with deﬁnite momentum in which the particles are uniformly
distributed over all space. Since the integral
_
[ Ψ(r) [
2
d
3
r → ∞, the beam
must be considered to contain an inﬁnite number of particles.
The probability densities or intensities of the two independent beams are
given by
P
k
(r) = [ Φ
k
(r) [
2
= [ C
k
[
2
P
−k
(r) = [ Φ
−k
(r) [
2
= [ C
−k
[
2
(118)
We shall assume that these beams have the same intensities, that is [ C
−k
[
2
=
[ C
+k
[
2
. Then, in this case the wave function can be expressed in terms of the
phases of C
±
= [ C [ exp[ i δ
±
]. When the beams are superimposed, the state
is described by the wave function
Ψ(r) = [ C [ exp
_
i
(δ
+
+ δ
−
)
2
_
_
exp
_
+ i (k . r +
(δ
+
− δ
−
)
2
)
_
+ exp
_
− i (k . r +
(δ
+
− δ
−
)
2
)
_
_
(119)
This state is a linear superposition and has a probability density for ﬁnding the
particle at r given by P(r) where
P(r) = 4 [ C [
2
cos
2
_
k . r +
(δ
+
− δ
−
)
2
_
(120)
Thus, the backward and forward travelling beam interfere, the superposition
gives rise to consecutive planes of maxima and minima. The maxima are located
at
k . r +
(δ
+
− δ
−
)
2
= π n (121)
and the minima are located at
k . r +
(δ
+
− δ
−
)
2
=
π
2
( 2 n + 1 ) (122)
40
There is a strong analogy between Quantum Mechanics and Optics. The
wave function Ψ(r, t) plays the role corresponding to the electric ﬁeld E(r, t).
Both the wave function and the electric ﬁeld obey the principle of linear super
position. The probability density of ﬁnding the particle at point r, [ Ψ(r, t) [
2
plays the role of the intensity of light, I, which is proportional to [ E(r, t) [
2
. In
fact, the intensity of light is just proportional to the probability density of ﬁnd
ing a photon at the point r. The phenomenon of interference occurs in Quantum
Mechanics and also in Optics. The analogy between Quantum Mechanics and
Optics is not accidental, as Maxwell’s equations are intimately related to the
”Schr¨odinger equation” for a massless particle with intrinsic spin S = 1.
41
3.2 Wave Packets
By combining momentum states with many diﬀerent values of the momentum,
one can obtain states in which the particle is essentially localized in a ﬁnite
volume. These localized states are deﬁned to be wave packets. Wave packets
are the closest one can get to a classical state of a free particle, which has a
well deﬁned position and momentum. For a quantum mechanical wave packet,
the distribution of results for measurements of the position and momentum are
sharply peaked around the classical values. The wave function can be expressed
1
0.5
0
0.5
1
3 2 1 0 1 2 3
x
Ψ
(
Ψ
(
Ψ
(
Ψ
(
x
) )) )
Re
Im
Figure 7: The real and imaginary parts of a wavefunction Ψ(x) representing a
Gaussian wave packet in one dimension.
as a Fourier transform
Ψ(r) =
_
1
2 π
_3
2
_
d
3
k Φ(k) exp
_
+ i k . r
_
(123)
where Φ(k) is related to the momentum probability distribution function
5
. Since
the exponential factor represents states of diﬀerent momenta, this relation is an
example of how a wave function can be expanded in terms of states correspond
ing to the various possible results of a physical measurement. The momentum
5
This is an example of the principle of linear superposition, in which the discrete variable
n has been replaced by a Riemann sum over the continuous variable k and the expansion
coeﬃcients Cn are proportional to Φ(k).
42
probability distribution function is related to the wave vector probability dis
tribution function P
k
(k), deﬁned by
P
k
(k) d
3
k = [ Φ(k) [
2
d
3
k (124)
The function Φ(k) can be determined from knowledge of Ψ(r) from the inverse
relation
Φ(k) =
_
1
2 π
_3
2
_
d
3
r Ψ(r) exp
_
− i k . r
_
(125)
These results are from the mathematical theory of Fourier Transformations.
The consistency of the Fourier Transform with the Inverse Fourier Transform
can be seen by combining them via
Ψ(r) =
_
1
2 π
_3
2
_
d
3
k Φ(k) exp
_
+ i k . r
_
=
_
1
2 π
_
3
_
d
3
k
_
d
3
r
Ψ(r
) exp
_
i k . ( r − r
)
_
(126)
together with the representation of the threedimensional Dirac delta function
δ
3
( r − r
) =
_
1
2 π
_
3
_
d
3
k exp
_
i k . ( r − r
)
_
(127)
On inserting the integral representation of the Dirac delta function eqn(127)
into eqn(126), one ﬁnds an equation which is the formal deﬁnition of the Dirac
delta function
Ψ(r) =
_
d
3
r
Ψ(r
) δ
3
( r − r
) (128)
That equation (127) provides a representation of the threedimensional Dirac
delta function can by seen directly by factorizing it into the product of three
independent onedimensional delta functions as
δ
3
( r − r
) = δ( x − x
) δ( y − y
) δ( z − z
) (129)
and then comparing with the right hand side which can also be factorized
into three independent onedimensional integrals. Each factor in the three
dimensional delta function of eqn(127) can be replaced by the representation
of the onedimensional delta function as a limit of a sequence of Lorentzian
functions of width ,
δ( x − x
) = lim
→ 0
1
π
( x − x
)
2
+
2
(130)
The sequence of function is shown in ﬁg(8). Then on evaluating the integrations
over each of the onedimensional variables in the right hand side of eqn(127)
43
Dirac delta dunction
0
0.5
1
1.5
2
2 1.5 1 0.5 0 0.5 1 1.5 2
x
δ
ε
(
x
)
δ
ε
(x) = 1/π ε/(ε
2
+x
2
)
lim ε → 0
Figure 8: The Dirac delta function δ(x). The Dirac delta function is deﬁned as
the limit, → 0 of a sequence of functions δ
(x).
and using the replacement ( x − x
) → ( x − x
) ± i needed to keep the
integral convergent, one ﬁnds that each of the three factors have the same form
=
1
2 π
lim
L→∞
_
+L
−L
dk exp
_
i k ( x − x
)
_
=
1
2 π
lim
L→∞
__
+L
0
dk exp
_
i k ( x − x
) − k
_
+
_
0
−L
dk exp
_
i k ( x − x
) + k
_ _
=
1
2 π
_
−
1
i ( x − x
) −
+
1
i ( x − x
) +
_
= lim
→ 0
1
π
( x − x
)
2
+
2
(131)
which equals the corresponding representation of the delta function on the left
hand side. This completes the identiﬁcation, and proves that the inverse Fourier
transform of the Fourier transform is the original function. It has also proved
that any square integrable function, i.e. normalizable function, can be expanded
as a sum of momentum eigenfunctions. The momentum eigenstates interfere de
structively almost everywhere, except at the position where the wave packet is
44
peaked.
In general, the ddimensional momentum distribution is related to the dis
tribution of k vectors, [ Φ(k) [
2
by the relation
P
p
(p) =
_
d
d
k δ
d
( p − ¯h k )
¸
¸
¸
¸
Φ(k)
¸
¸
¸
¸
2
=
1
¯h
d
¸
¸
¸
¸
Φ
_
p
¯h
_ ¸
¸
¸
¸
2
(132)
In future, we shall ﬁnd it convenient to include factors of ¯ h
−
d
2
into the deﬁnition
of the ddimensional Fourier transform so that, on squaring the modulus, they
give the properly normalized momentum distribution function.
——————————————————————————————————
3.2.1 Exercise 8
Given a wave function Ψ(x) where
Ψ(x) = C exp
_
−
( x − x
0
)
2
4 δx
2
_
exp
_
+ i k
0
x
_
(133)
determine C, up to an arbitrary phase factor, and determine Φ(k
x
). Later, we
shall see that [ Φ(k
x
) [
2
is proportional to the probability distribution of the x
component of momentum of the system. In three dimensions [ Φ(k) [
2
d
3
k is
the probability of ﬁnding the system with a wave vector k in an inﬁnitesimal
volume d
3
k around the point k.
——————————————————————————————————
3.2.2 Solution 8
The magnitude of the coeﬃcient C is determined from the normalization con
dition
_
+ ∞
− ∞
dx [ Ψ(x) [
2
= 1 (134)
which is evaluated as
[ C [
2
_
+ ∞
− ∞
dx exp
_
−
( x − x
0
)
2
2 δx
2
_
= 1 (135)
On changing the variable of integration from x to y where
y =
x − x
0
√
2 δx
(136)
45
the normalization condition becomes
1 = [ C [
2
√
2 δx
_
+ ∞
− ∞
dy exp
_
− y
2
_
1 = [ C [
2
√
2 π δx (137)
Hence, the magnitude of C is found as
[ C [ =
1
(2 π)
1
4
δx
1
2
(138)
Realspace distribution function
0
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
2 1.5 1 0.5 0 0.5 1 1.5 2
x
l
ψ
(
x
)
l
2
x
0
Figure 9: The real space distribution function [ Ψ(x) [
2
. The distribution func
tion is centered around x
0
.
The kspace wave function is found from
Φ(k
x
) =
1
√
2 π
_
+ ∞
− ∞
dx Ψ(x) exp[ − i k
x
x ]
=
1
(2 π)
3
4
δx
1
2
_
+ ∞
− ∞
dx exp
_
−
( x − x
0
)
2
4 δx
2
_
exp[ + i k
0
x ] exp[ − i k
x
x ]
(139)
Combining the exponential factors and completing the square by changing vari
able from x to z where
z = x − x
0
+ 2 i ( k
x
− k
0
) δx
2
(140)
46
one ﬁnds that
Φ(k
x
) =
1
(2 π)
3
4
δx
1
2
_
+ ∞
− ∞
dz exp
_
−
( z )
2
4 δx
2
_
exp
_
− ( k
0
− k
x
)
2
δx
2
_
exp
_
− i ( k
x
− k
0
) x
0
_
= δx
1
2
_
2
π
_1
4
exp
_
− ( k
0
− k
x
)
2
δx
2
_
exp
_
− i ( k
x
− k
0
) x
0
_
(141)
Thus, we see that in k
x
space the modulus squared wave function [ Φ(k
x
) [
2
is
centered around k
0
and has a k width which is proportional to δx
−1
.
Momentumspace distribution function
0
0.2
0.4
0.6
0.8
1
2 1.5 1 0.5 0 0.5 1 1.5 2
p
l
Φ
(
p
)
l
2
p
0
Figure 10: The momentum space distribution function [ Φ(p) [
2
. The momen
tum distribution is centered about p
0
.
——————————————————————————————————
3.2.3 Exercise 9
Given the wave function
Ψ(x) = C exp
_
− λ [ x [
_
(142)
47
where λ is a positive real number, ﬁnd C and the properly normalized momen
tum distribution function.
Realspace distribution function
0
0.2
0.4
0.6
0.8
1
1.2
2 1.5 1 0.5 0 0.5 1 1.5 2
x
l
ψ
(
x
)
l
2
Figure 11: The real space distribution function [ Ψ(x) [
2
.
——————————————————————————————————
3.2.4 Solution 9
The normalization condition is given by
_
+ ∞
− ∞
dx [ Ψ(x) [
2
= 1 (143)
which is evaluated as
[ C [
2
_
+ ∞
− ∞
dx exp
_
− 2 λ [ x [
_
= 1 (144)
The integration can be broken up into two parts, one over the range ( − ∞, 0 )
and the second over the range ( 0 , + ∞ ). On replacing [ x [ by ± x in the
appropriate interval, we have
1 = [ C [
2
_ _
0
− ∞
dx exp
_
+ 2 λ x
_
+
_
+ ∞
0
dx exp
_
− 2 λ x
_ _
48
1 = [ C [
2
_
1
2 λ
+
1
2 λ
_
(145)
Thus, the normalization is given by
[ C [ =
√
λ (146)
Momentumspace distribution function
0
0.2
0.4
0.6
0.8
1
2 1.5 1 0.5 0 0.5 1 1.5 2
p
l
Φ
(
p
)
l
2
Figure 12: The momentum space distribution function [ Φ(p) [
2
.
The kspace wave function is given by
Φ(k
x
) =
1
√
2 π
_
+ ∞
− ∞
dx Ψ(x) exp
_
− i k
x
x
_
=
_
λ
2 π
_
+ ∞
− ∞
dx exp
_
− λ [ x [
_
exp
_
− i k
x
x
_
(147)
This is evaluated, as before, by breaking up the integral into two intervals. The
ﬁrst interval is an integration over the range ( − ∞, 0 ) and the second interval
has x in the range ( 0 , + ∞ ). Thus, we ﬁnd
Φ(k
x
) =
_
λ
2 π
_
1
λ − i k
x
+
1
λ + i k
x
_
49
=
_
λ
2 π
2 λ
λ
2
+ k
2
x
(148)
The width of the k
x
distribution is proportional to λ. The momentum distribu
tion P
p
(p
x
) is given by
P
p
(p
x
) dp
x
=
¸
¸
¸
¸
Φ
_
p
x
¯h
_ ¸
¸
¸
¸
2
dp
x
¯h
(149)
Thus, we ﬁnd that the momentum distribution function is given by
P
p
(p
x
) =
2
π
¯h
3
λ
3
( ¯h
2
λ
2
+ p
2
x
)
2
(150)
which is properly normalized to unity.
——————————————————————————————————
50
3.3 Probability, Mean and Deviations
In Quantum Mechanics one often deals with systems in a well deﬁned state,
however, the result of a particular measurement is indeterminate. That is, usu
ally, the result of the measurement cannot be predicted with absolute certainty.
Therefore, we shall review some aspects of probabilities and averages.
Sequential measurements of A
0
0.5
1
1.5
2
0 5 10 15 20
i
A
i
< A >
∆A
9
∆A
4
∆A
rms
N=20
Figure 13: The set of results of N sequential measurements of A. The average
value < A > and the magnitude of the root mean squared deviation ∆A
rms
of this set of measurements are indicated in red. Also shown are ∆A
i
which
represent the deviations of some individual data points from the average value.
The average or mean value of a measured quantity A, denoted by A, is
expressed as an integral (and/or a sum) over all the possible values of the
measurement A, weighted with the probability distribution function P(A) via
A =
_
dA P(A) A (151)
The integration runs over all possible (real) values of A. The higher moments
A
m
have averages, A
m
, which are given by
A
m
=
_
dA P(A) A
m
(152)
51
Probability of measurements of A
0
0.05
0.1
0.15
0.2
0.1 0.3 0.5 0.7 0.9 1.1 1.3 1.5 1.7 1.9
A
P
(
A
)
N →∞
Figure 14: The probability distribution P(A) is deﬁned as the relative frequency
of the occurrence of result A, in the limit N → ∞ where N is the number of
measurements.
The deviation of the variable A from its mean value is deﬁned by
∆A = A − A (153)
The average value of ∆A is zero, as can be seen from
∆A = A − A = 0 (154)
which just reﬂects the fact that the variable A ﬂuctuates equally on both sides
of the average value A. A measure of the size of the ﬂuctuations can be found
from the mean squared deviation ∆A
2
via
∆A
2
=
_
dA P(A) ( A − A )
2
=
_
dA P(A) ( A
2
− 2 A A + A
2
)
= A
2
− A
2
(155)
The mean squared deviation is nonzero as ∆A
2
is always positive deﬁnite. The
variance or root mean squared (r.m.s.) deviation ∆A
rms
provides a measure of
the ﬂuctuations in A.
∆A
rms
=
_
∆A
2
52
=
_
( A − A )
2
=
_
( A
2
− A
2
) (156)
The r.m.s. deviation is a measure of the uncertainty in the value of A.
From the examples of wave packets given in exercise 4, it can be found that
the uncertainty in the ith component of the momentum and the ith component
of the particle’s position satisﬁes the inequality
∆r
i rms
∆p
i rms
≥
¯h
2
(157)
This is an example of the Heisenberg uncertainty relation, applied to the vari
ables r and p.
——————————————————————————————————
3.3.1 Exercise 10
Given P(x) where
P(x) =
_
1
2 π
_1
2
δx
−1
exp
_
−
( x − x
0
)
2
2 δx
2
_
(158)
ﬁnd x, x
2
, ∆x
2
and ∆x
4
.
——————————————————————————————————
3.3.2 Solution 10
The average value of x, denoted as x is given by
x =
_
+ ∞
− ∞
dx P(x) x
=
_
+ ∞
− ∞
dx [ Ψ(x) [
2
x
=
1
√
2 π
_
+ ∞
− ∞
dx δx
−1
exp
_
−
( x − x
0
)
2
2 δx
2
_
x
(159)
Changing variable to y = x − x
0
, one has
x =
1
√
2 π
_
+ ∞
− ∞
dy δx
−1
exp
_
−
y
2
2 δx
2
_
( y + x
0
)
(160)
53
The term linear in y is odd and, therefore, vanishes. The term proportional to
x
0
factors out of the integral to yield
x = x
0
1
√
2 π
_
+ ∞
− ∞
dy δx
−1
exp
_
−
y
2
2 δx
2
_
= x
0
_
+ ∞
− ∞
dx P(x)
= x
0
(161)
as P(x) is normalized to unity. Thus, the average value of x is x
0
.
The average value of x
2
is given by
x
2
=
_
+ ∞
− ∞
dx P(x) x
2
=
_
+ ∞
− ∞
dx [ Ψ(x) [
2
x
2
=
1
√
2 π
_
+ ∞
− ∞
dx δx
−1
exp
_
−
( x − x
0
)
2
2 δx
2
_
x
2
(162)
Changing variable to y = x − x
0
one has
x
2
=
1
√
2 π
_
+ ∞
− ∞
dy δx
−1
exp
_
−
y
2
2 δx
2
_
( y
2
+ 2 y x
0
+ x
2
0
)
(163)
The term linear in y is odd and, therefore, vanishes. The term proportional to
x
2
0
factors out of the integral to yield
x
2
=
1
√
2 π
_
+ ∞
− ∞
dy δx
−1
y
2
exp
_
−
y
2
2 δx
2
_
+
+ x
2
0
1
√
2 π
_
+ ∞
− ∞
dy δx
−1
exp
_
−
y
2
2 δx
2
_
=
1
√
2 π
_
+ ∞
− ∞
dy δx
−1
y
2
exp
_
−
y
2
2 δx
2
_
+
+ x
2
0
_
+ ∞
− ∞
dx P(x)
= x
2
0
+
1
√
2 π
_
+ ∞
− ∞
dy δx
−1
y
2
exp
_
−
y
2
2 δx
2
_
(164)
as P(x) is normalized to unity. Since we have
1
√
π
_
+ ∞
− ∞
dy exp
_
− α y
2
_
=
1
√
α
(165)
54
then by diﬀerentiating with respect to α we ﬁnd
1
√
π
_
+ ∞
− ∞
dy y
2
exp
_
− α y
2
_
= −
∂
∂α
1
√
π
_
+ ∞
− ∞
dy exp
_
− α y
2
_
= −
∂
∂α
1
√
α
= +
1
2
1
√
α
3
(166)
Hence
x
2
= x
2
0
+ δx
2
(167)
Thus, the average value of x
2
is x
2
0
+ δx
2
.
The mean squared deviation is then found as
∆x
2
rms
= ∆x
2
=
_
+ ∞
− ∞
dx P(x) ( x − x
0
)
2
=
1
√
2 π
_
+ ∞
− ∞
dy δx
−1
y
2
exp
_
−
y
2
2 δx
2
_
(168)
The integration was previously evaluated, and yields
∆x
2
rms
= δx
2
(169)
Finally, we can show that
∆x
4
=
_
+ ∞
− ∞
dx P(x) ( x − x
0
)
4
=
1
√
2 π
_
+ ∞
− ∞
dy δx
−1
y
4
exp
_
−
y
2
2 δx
2
_
(170)
The integration can be performed by taking the second derivative with respect
to α of
1
√
π
_
+ ∞
− ∞
dy exp
_
− α y
2
_
=
1
√
α
(171)
Then, by diﬀerentiating with respect to α, we ﬁnd
1
√
π
_
+ ∞
− ∞
dy y
4
exp
_
− α y
2
_
= +
∂
2
∂α
2
1
√
π
_
+ ∞
− ∞
dy exp
_
− α y
2
_
= +
∂
2
∂α
2
1
√
α
= +
3
4
1
√
α
5
(172)
55
Thus, we have
∆x
4
=
_
+ ∞
− ∞
dx P(x) ( x − x
0
)
4
=
1
√
2 π
_
+ ∞
− ∞
dy δx
−1
y
4
exp
_
−
y
2
2 δx
2
_
= 3 δx
4
(173)
——————————————————————————————————
3.3.3 Exercise 11
Find the r.m.s. deviation in the particle’s position ∆x
rms
and momentum
∆p
x rms
for the wave packet
Ψ(x) =
_
1
2 π
_1
4
δx
−
1
2
exp
_
−
( x − x
0
)
2
4 δx
2
_
exp
_
+ i k
0
x
_
(174)
——————————————————————————————————
3.3.4 Solution 11
From the results of Exercise 10 we immediately ﬁnd that ∆x
rms
= δx.
The k
x
space wave function is given by
Φ(k
x
) = δx
1
2
_
2
π
_1
4
exp
_
− ( k
0
− k
x
)
2
δx
2
_
exp
_
− i ( k
x
− k
0
) x
0
_
(175)
Thus, with p
x
= ¯h k
x
one has the momentum probability distribution P(p
x
)
given by
P(p
x
) dp
x
=
¸
¸
¸
¸
Φ
_
p
x
¯h
_
¸
¸
¸
¸
2
dp
x
¯h
=
_
2
π
_1
2
exp
_
− 2 ( k
0
− k
x
)
2
δx
2
_
δx
¯h
dp
x
(176)
Hence, this is a Gaussian distribution centered at p
x
= ¯ h k
0
, so the average
value of the momentum is ¯ h k
0
. The width of the Gaussian is =
¯ h
2 δx
, so
∆p
x rms
∆x
rms
=
¯h
2
(177)
56
which is an example of the Heisenberg uncertainty principle in which the equal
ity holds.
——————————————————————————————————
3.3.5 Exercise 12
Given that a particle moving in one dimension is in a state given by
_
1
2 L
_1
2
if [ x [ < L
Ψ(x) =
0 otherwise (178)
ﬁnd the probability that it is found in a momentum eigenstate, and verify that
0
0.2
0.4
0.6
0.8
2 1 0 1 2
x/L
Ψ ΨΨ Ψ
(
x
)
Figure 15: The wavefunction Ψ(x) given in Exercise 12.
the probability distribution is properly normalized.
——————————————————————————————————
57
3.3.6 Solution 12
The real space wave function is expressed in terms of the momentum space wave
function via
Ψ(x) =
_
dp
√
2 π ¯h
exp
_
+ i
p x
¯h
_
Φ(p) (179)
and the inverse relation is
Φ(p) =
_
dx
√
2 π ¯h
exp
_
− i
p x
¯h
_
Ψ(x) (180)
The properly normalized momentum space wave function Φ(p) is evaluated as
Φ(p) =
_
+ L
− L
dx
√
2 π ¯h
1
√
2 L
exp
_
− i
p x
¯h
_
=
1
√
4 π L ¯h
_
+ L
− L
dx exp
_
− i
p x
¯h
_
=
_
L
π ¯h
sin
_
p L
¯ h
_
p L
¯ h
(181)
The normalized momentum probability density P(p) is given by the modulus
squared of the momentum space wave function
P(p) =
¸
¸
¸
¸
Φ(p)
¸
¸
¸
¸
2
=
L
π ¯h
sin
2
_
p L
¯ h
_
_
p L
¯ h
_
2
(182)
The distribution P(p) is properly normalized since
_
+ ∞
− ∞
dx
sin
2
x
x
2
= π (183)
——————————————————————————————————
58
Momentum Probability Distribution
0
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
8 6 4 2 0 2 4 6 8
pL/!
P
(
p
)
!
/
L
Figure 16: The momentum probability distribution function P(p) for the Ψ(x)
given in Exercise 12.
3.4 Operators and Measurements
In Schr¨odinger’s wave mechanics, a physical or measurable quantity is repre
sented by a (linear) diﬀerential operator
ˆ
A. An operator
ˆ
A is deﬁned by its
action on the states represented by arbitrary wave functions Ψ(r). The opera
tor
ˆ
A transforms the state Ψ(r) into another state Φ(r) via
ˆ
A Ψ(r) = Φ(r) (184)
A measurement on a quantum mechanical system generally disturbs the sys
tem thereby causing a change in the state of the system. As the measurement
results in a change in the state of a system, the measurement is represented by
an operator.
A linear operator
ˆ
A is deﬁned by its action on a state Ψ(r) that is a linear
superposition,
Ψ(r) =
n
C
n
Φ
n
(r) (185)
An operator
ˆ
A acting on a state Ψ(r) formed as a linear superposition is deﬁned
59
to be a linear operator if, and only if, it produces the result
ˆ
A
n
C
n
Φ
n
(r) =
n
C
n
ˆ
A Φ
n
(r) (186)
That is, the resulting state must be equivalent to the superposition of the states
formed by
ˆ
A acting on the components Φ
n
(r).
The position operator ˆr is given by the vector r. Its operation on the state
Ψ(r) is just that of multiplication by r.
ˆr Ψ(r) = r Ψ(r) (187)
The momentum operator ˆ p is given by − i ¯h ∇. The operator ∇ is given in
Cartesian coordinates as
∇ = ˆ e
x
∂
∂x
+ ˆ e
y
∂
∂x
+ ˆ e
z
∂
∂z
(188)
where ˆ e
x
, ˆ e
y
and ˆ e
z
are the three orthogonal unit vectors used to deﬁne a
Cartesian coordinate system. The action of the momentum operator on a state
Ψ(r) is given by
ˆ p Ψ(r) = − i ¯h ∇Ψ(r) (189)
The kinetic energy operator is given by
ˆ
T = −
¯ h
2
2m
∇
2
. Its action on a
state Ψ(r) is given by
ˆ
T Ψ(r) = −
¯h
2
2m
∇
2
Ψ(r) (190)
where the Laplacian is given in Cartesian coordinates as
∇
2
=
∂
2
∂x
2
+
∂
2
∂y
2
+
∂
2
∂z
2
(191)
The operators have no mathematical meaning except when they act upon a
wave function.
3.4.1 Operator Equations
Just as in Hamiltonian Mechanics, the operators corresponding to physically
measurable quantities can be expressed in terms of the momentum and position
operators. This requires compounding operators, via addition and multiplica
tion. The results of compounding operators can lead to operator equations.
Operator equations, if valid, must be true if the same expression results when
the operators on both side of the equality sign act on the same arbitrary wave
function. Usually in writing an operator equation the wave function is sup
pressed, but it is implicitly assumed to be present.
60
3.4.2 Operator Addition
Given two diﬀerential operators
ˆ
A and
ˆ
B, each deﬁned by their action on every
wave function Ψ(r) by
ˆ
A Ψ(r) = Φ
A
(r)
ˆ
B Ψ(r) = Φ
B
(r) (192)
where the ﬁnal wave functions Φ
X
(r) are dependent on the particular choice of
the wave function Ψ(r). The sum of two operators is deﬁned as (
ˆ
A +
ˆ
B ) and
is given by the linear sum
(
ˆ
A +
ˆ
B ) Ψ(r) = Φ
A
(r) + Φ
B
(r)
=
ˆ
A Ψ(r) +
ˆ
B Ψ(r) (193)
An example is given by the diﬀerential operator
∂
2
∂x
2
+ 3
∂
∂x
+ x
4
(194)
Another example is given by the kinetic energy operator for a particle in
Cartesian coordinates
ˆ
T = −
¯h
2
2m
_
∂
2
∂x
2
+
∂
2
∂y
2
+
∂
2
∂z
2
_
(195)
where the kinetic energies for motion along the x, y and z axis add.
3.4.3 Operator Multiplication
Given two diﬀerential operators
ˆ
A and
ˆ
B, each deﬁned by their action on every
conceivable wave function Ψ(r) by
ˆ
A Ψ(r) = Φ
A
(r)
ˆ
B Φ
A
(r) = Φ
BA
(r) (196)
then the product of two operators is deﬁned by their successive actions.
ˆ
B
ˆ
A Ψ(r) =
ˆ
B Φ
A
(r)
= Φ
BA
(r) (197)
61
Two examples are given by multiplying two operators
∂
n
∂x
n
and
∂
m
∂x
m
which
yields the compound operator
∂
n+m
∂x
n+m
and similarly by multiplying the opera
tors x
n
and x
m
yields x
n+m
.
Important examples of the multiplication of two operators are given by :
The kinetic energy for motion in one dimension.
The kinetic energy operator is derived from the classical expression
ˆ
T
x
=
ˆ p
2
x
2 m
=
ˆ p
x
. ˆ p
x
2 m
=
1
2 m
_
− i ¯h
∂
∂x
_ _
− i ¯h
∂
∂x
_
= −
¯h
2
2 m
∂
2
∂x
2
(198)
The kinetic energy for motion in three dimensions.
The kinetic energy operator is derived as
ˆ
T =
ˆ p
2
2 m
=
ˆ p . ˆ p
2 m
=
1
2 m
_
− i ¯h ˆ e
x
∂
∂x
− i ¯h ˆ e
y
∂
∂y
− i ¯h ˆ e
z
∂
∂z
_
2
= −
¯h
2
2 m
_
∂
2
∂x
2
+
∂
2
∂y
2
+
∂
2
∂z
2
_
(199)
where we have used the representation of the vector momentum p in terms of
its components and the unit vectors ˆ e
x
, ˆ e
y
and ˆ e
z
.
The (vector) orbital angular momentum operator
ˆ
L is given by the vector
product of two vector operators
ˆ
L = ˆ r ∧ ˆ p (200)
and is expressed as
ˆ
L = ˆ e
x
ˆ
L
x
+ ˆ e
y
ˆ
L
y
+ ˆ e
z
ˆ
L
z
(201)
62
where
ˆ
L
z
= − i ¯h
_
x
∂
∂y
− y
∂
∂x
_
ˆ
L
y
= − i ¯h
_
z
∂
∂x
− x
∂
∂z
_
ˆ
L
x
= − i ¯h
_
y
∂
∂z
− z
∂
∂y
_
(202)
This is actually a pseudovector, as it transforms like a vector under every sym
metry operation except inversion.
It should be noted that in general, unlike in the previous two examples, the
product of two operators depends on the order in which they act on the wave
function. If two operators have the eﬀect
ˆ
B Ψ(r) = Φ
B
(r)
ˆ
A Φ
B
(r) = Φ
AB
(r) (203)
then the product of the two operators is deﬁned by their successive actions
ˆ
A
ˆ
B Ψ(r) =
ˆ
A Φ
B
(r)
= Φ
AB
(r)
,= Φ
BA
(r) (204)
For example, in multiplying
ˆ
A =
∂
∂x
and
ˆ
B = x
m
one has
ˆ
A
ˆ
B Ψ(x) =
∂
∂x
_
x
m
Ψ(x)
_
= m x
m−1
Ψ(x) + x
m
∂
∂x
Ψ(x) (205)
whereas on taking the product in the opposite order one obtains a diﬀerent
result
ˆ
B
ˆ
A Ψ(x) = x
m
∂
∂x
_
Ψ(x)
_
(206)
3.4.4 Commutators
The commutator of two operators
ˆ
A and
ˆ
B is deﬁned as the diﬀerence of the
products of two operators taken in diﬀerent orders
[
ˆ
A ,
ˆ
B ] =
ˆ
A
ˆ
B −
ˆ
B
ˆ
A (207)
63
In this equation, like other operator equations, it should always be remembered
that the operators are assumed to act on an arbitrary wave function. Note that
the commutator is antisymmetric
[
ˆ
A ,
ˆ
B ] = − [
ˆ
B ,
ˆ
A ] (208)
From the previous example, where
ˆ
A =
∂
∂x
and
ˆ
B = x
m
, one has
[
ˆ
A ,
ˆ
B ] Ψ(x) =
ˆ
A
ˆ
B Ψ(x) −
ˆ
B
ˆ
A Ψ(x)
=
∂
∂x
_
x
m
Ψ(x)
_
− x
m
∂
∂x
_
Ψ(x)
_
= m x
m−1
Ψ(x) (209)
Since the above equation is true for every arbitrary Ψ(x), one has the operator
equation
∂
∂x
x
m
− x
m
∂
∂x
= m x
m−1
(210)
where the presence of the wave function is implicitly assumed. An important
example is given by the commutator of ˆ x = x and ˆ p
x
= − i ¯h
∂
∂x
then
[ ˆ x , ˆ p
x
] = [ x , − i ¯h
∂
∂x
] = i ¯h (211)
The commutators of the x, y, and z components of the momentum and position
operators are given by
[ ˆ x , ˆ p
x
] = [ ˆ y , ˆ p
y
] = [ ˆ z , ˆ p
z
] = i ¯h (212)
If the commutator of two operators is zero, then the two operators are said
to commute. An example of two commuting operators is given by ˆ x = x and
ˆ p
y
= − i ¯h
∂
∂y
. In general, the commutators between diﬀerent components of
the particle’s coordinates and momenta are zero.
[ ˆ x , ˆ p
y
] = [ ˆ y , ˆ p
x
] = 0
[ ˆ y , ˆ p
z
] = [ ˆ z , ˆ p
y
] = 0
[ ˆ x , ˆ p
z
] = [ ˆ z , ˆ p
x
] = 0 (213)
The commutator of an operator
ˆ
A and the sum of two operators
ˆ
B and
ˆ
C
is given by
[
ˆ
A ,
ˆ
B +
ˆ
C ] = [
ˆ
A ,
ˆ
B ] + [
ˆ
A ,
ˆ
C ] (214)
64
whereas the commutator of an operator and a product of two operators
ˆ
B and
ˆ
C is given by
[
ˆ
A ,
ˆ
B
ˆ
C ] = [
ˆ
A ,
ˆ
B ]
ˆ
C +
ˆ
B [
ˆ
A ,
ˆ
C ] (215)
and
[
ˆ
A
ˆ
B ,
ˆ
C ] =
ˆ
A [
ˆ
B ,
ˆ
C ] + [
ˆ
A ,
ˆ
C ]
ˆ
B (216)
Repeated application of the above relations allows one to express the com
mutator of [
ˆ
A ,
ˆ
B
n
] as
[
ˆ
A ,
ˆ
B
n
] = [
ˆ
A ,
ˆ
B ]
ˆ
B
n−1
+
ˆ
B [
ˆ
A ,
ˆ
B ]
ˆ
B
n−2
+
ˆ
B
2
[
ˆ
A ,
ˆ
B ]
ˆ
B
n−3
+ ..... +
ˆ
B
n−1
[
ˆ
A ,
ˆ
B ]
ˆ
B +
ˆ
B
n−1
[
ˆ
A ,
ˆ
B ] (217)
which involves the sum of n commutators.
If the commutator [
ˆ
A ,
ˆ
B ] is not an operator but is a constant instead,
the above expression simpliﬁes to
[
ˆ
A ,
ˆ
B
n
] = n [
ˆ
A ,
ˆ
B ]
ˆ
B
n−1
(218)
This can be used to prove that if the commutator [
ˆ
A ,
ˆ
B ] is a constant then,
for any function f(
ˆ
B) which has a power series expansion, one has
[
ˆ
A , f(
ˆ
B) ] = [
ˆ
A ,
ˆ
B ] f
(
ˆ
B) (219)
where f
(x) is the derivative of f(x), that is f
(x) =
∂f
∂x
. Examination of this
operator equation gives justiﬁcation for representing any pair of operators that
have a constant commutator as a pair which consists of the variable and the
commutation constant times a derivative w.r.t. the variable.
——————————————————————————————————
3.4.5 Exercise 13
Determine the commutator [ ˆ p , V (ˆ r) ]. This expression occurs in the equation
which determines the time derivative of the average value of the momentum, p.
——————————————————————————————————
3.4.6 Solution 13
The commutators between the components of momentum and the components
of the position are given by
[ ˆ p
i
, x
j
] = − i ¯h δ
i,j
(220)
65
These commutators are constants. Thus, on deﬁning the potential as a Taylor
series expansion in r one has
[ ˆ p
i
, V (r) ] = − i ¯h
∂V (r)
∂x
i
(221)
which is the ith component of the commutator
[ ˆ p , V (r) ] = − i ¯h ∇ V (r) (222)
The commutator of the momentum and the potential is related to the gradient
of the potential and thus is related to the force.
——————————————————————————————————
3.4.7 Exercise 14
Determine the three commutators [ ˆ x ,
ˆ
L
z
] , [ ˆ y ,
ˆ
L
z
] and [ ˆ z ,
ˆ
L
z
] of the
components of the position vector and the z component of the angular momen
tum operator.
Also ﬁnd the commutator of
ˆ
L
z
with the components of the momentum ˆ p ,
[ ˆ p
x
,
ˆ
L
z
] , [ ˆ p
y
,
ˆ
L
z
] and [ ˆ p
z
,
ˆ
L
z
] .
——————————————————————————————————
3.4.8 Solution 14
The z component of the angular momentum is given by
ˆ
L
z
= ˆ x ˆ p
y
− ˆ y ˆ p
x
(223)
Then, the commutator with the x component of the position is given by
[ ˆ x ,
ˆ
L
z
] = [ ˆ x , ˆ x ˆ p
y
] − [ ˆ x , ˆ y ˆ p
x
]
= − ˆ y [ ˆ x , ˆ p
x
]
= − i ¯h ˆ y (224)
The commutator with the y component of the position is given by
[ ˆ y ,
ˆ
L
z
] = [ ˆ y , ˆ x ˆ p
y
] − [ ˆ y , ˆ y ˆ p
x
]
= + ˆ x [ ˆ y , ˆ p
y
]
= + i ¯h ˆ x (225)
The third commutator is given by
[ ˆ z ,
ˆ
L
z
] = [ ˆ z , ˆ x ˆ p
y
] − [ ˆ x , ˆ y ˆ p
x
]
= 0 (226)
66
Hence, we obtain
[ ˆ x ,
ˆ
L
z
] = − i ¯h ˆ y
[ ˆ y ,
ˆ
L
z
] = + i ¯h ˆ x
[ ˆ z ,
ˆ
L
z
] = 0 (227)
The remaining commutators can be obtained from the two nonzero commuta
tors by cyclically permuting x, y and z.
Similarly, the commutation relations between the components of the angular
momentum and the components of the momentum are evaluated from
[ ˆ p
x
,
ˆ
L
z
] = [ ˆ p
x
, ˆ x ˆ p
y
] − [ ˆ p
x
, ˆ y ˆ p
x
]
= [ ˆ p
x
, ˆ x ] ˆ p
y
= − i ¯h ˆ p
y
(228)
Hence, the commutators of the z component of angular momentum with the
components of the momentum are found as
[ ˆ p
x
,
ˆ
L
z
] = − i ¯h ˆ p
y
[ ˆ p
y
,
ˆ
L
z
] = + i ¯h ˆ p
x
[ ˆ p
z
,
ˆ
L
z
] = 0 (229)
The other commutators can be found by cyclic permutation of the subscripts x,
y and z.
——————————————————————————————————
3.4.9 Exercise 15
Determine the double commutator [ x , [ x ,
ˆ
H ] ], where the Hamiltonian is
given by
ˆ
H =
ˆ p
2
2 m
+ V (r). This commutator forms the basis of the Thomas
ReicheKuhn Sum rule for the intensity of optical absorption by atoms.
——————————————————————————————————
3.4.10 Solution 15
The commutator between the x component of the position and the Hamiltonian
ˆ
H can be decomposed into the sum of the commutators between x and the
potential V (r) and the commutator of x with the potential energy
ˆ p
2
2m
[ x ,
ˆ
H ] = [ x , V (r) ] + [ x ,
ˆ p
2
2 m
] (230)
67
The commutator between the x component of the position and the potential
vanishes
[ x , V (r) ] = 0 (231)
The only nonzero part of the commutator is the commutator between the x
component of the kinetic energy and the position. This nonzero commutator
is evaluated as
[ x ,
ˆ p
2
x
2 m
] =
1
2 m
_
[ x , ˆ p
x
] ˆ p
x
+ ˆ p
x
[ x , ˆ p
x
]
_
=
i ¯h
2 m
2 ˆ p
x
(232)
Hence, the double commutator is given by
[ x , [ x ,
ˆ
H ] ] = −
¯h
2
m
(233)
——————————————————————————————————
Another special example of an operator equation that we shall extensively
use is in the deﬁnition of an exponential of an operator
exp
_
λ
ˆ
A
_
=
n
λ
n
ˆ
A
n
n!
(234)
where λ is any complex number.
Consider the operator which is a function of λ and deﬁned via,
ˆ
f(λ) = e
λ
ˆ
A
ˆ
B e
− λ
ˆ
A
(235)
then it is easy to prove that the derivatives are given by the series of expressions,
_
d
ˆ
f
dλ
_
=
ˆ
A
ˆ
f(λ) −
ˆ
f(λ)
ˆ
A
= [
ˆ
A ,
ˆ
f(λ) ]
_
d
2 ˆ
f
dλ
2
_
= [
ˆ
A ,
d
ˆ
f
dλ
]
= [
ˆ
A , [
ˆ
A ,
ˆ
f(λ) ] ] (236)
This inﬁnite set of equations can be used in the Taylor expansion of
ˆ
f(λ) to
yield
e
λ
ˆ
A
ˆ
B e
− λ
ˆ
A
=
ˆ
B + λ [
ˆ
A ,
ˆ
B ] +
λ
2
2!
[
ˆ
A , [
ˆ
A ,
ˆ
B ] ]
+
λ
3
3!
[
ˆ
A , [
ˆ
A , [
ˆ
A ,
ˆ
B ] ] ] + . . .
(237)
68
where we have used the fact that
ˆ
f(0) =
ˆ
B.
——————————————————————————————————
3.4.11 Exercise 16
Given the ﬁrst order diﬀerential equation
i ¯h
d
ˆ
U(t)
dt
=
ˆ
H
ˆ
U(t) (238)
and
ˆ
U(0) = 1, ﬁnd an expression for
ˆ
U(t). This equation and operator is
usually seen in the context of the time evolution of a wave function, and the
initial condition expresses the fact that the wave function is continuous at t = 0.
——————————————————————————————————
3.4.12 Solution 16
The solution for the time evolution operator is found by integrating the equation
ˆ
U(t) =
ˆ
U(0) −
i
¯h
_
t
0
dt
ˆ
H
ˆ
U(t
) (239)
and then iterating
ˆ
U(t) =
ˆ
U(0) −
i
¯h
_
t
0
dt
ˆ
H
ˆ
U(0) −
1
¯h
2
_
t
0
dt
_
t
0
dt”
ˆ
H
ˆ
H
ˆ
U(t”)
=
ˆ
U(0) −
i
¯h
_
t
0
dt
ˆ
H
ˆ
U(0) −
1
¯h
2
_
t
0
dt
_
t
0
dt”
ˆ
H
ˆ
H
ˆ
U(0) + . . .
=
ˆ
U(0) −
i
¯h
t
ˆ
H
ˆ
U(0) −
1
¯h
2
t
2
2
ˆ
H
ˆ
H
ˆ
U(0) + . . .
= exp
_
−
i t
¯h
ˆ
H
_
ˆ
U(0) (240)
In the last line the series is recognized as the expansion of the exponential. Since
the initial condition corresponds to
ˆ
U(0) = 1, we obtain the solution as
ˆ
U(t) = exp
_
−
i t
¯h
ˆ
H
_
(241)
——————————————————————————————————
69
3.4.13 Exercise 17
Given the ﬁrst order linear diﬀerential operator equation
d
ˆ
B(λ)
dλ
= [
ˆ
A ,
ˆ
B(λ) ] (242)
with the boundary condition
ˆ
B(0) =
ˆ
C, ﬁnd an expression for
ˆ
B(λ).
——————————————————————————————————
3.4.14 Solution 17
Since
∂
ˆ
B(λ)
∂λ
= [
ˆ
A ,
ˆ
B(λ) ] (243)
one can integrate the equation to yield
ˆ
B(λ) −
ˆ
B(0) =
_
λ
0
dλ
[
ˆ
A ,
ˆ
B(λ
) ]
ˆ
B(λ) −
ˆ
C =
_
λ
0
dλ
[
ˆ
A ,
ˆ
B(λ
) ] (244)
This equation can be iterated to yield
ˆ
B(λ) =
ˆ
C +
_
λ
0
dλ
[
ˆ
A ,
ˆ
C ] +
_
λ
0
dλ
_
λ
0
dλ” [
ˆ
A , [
ˆ
A ,
ˆ
B(λ”) ] ]
ˆ
B(λ) =
ˆ
C +
_
λ
0
dλ
[
ˆ
A ,
ˆ
C ] +
_
λ
0
dλ
_
λ
0
dλ” [
ˆ
A , [
ˆ
A ,
ˆ
C ] ] + . . .
(245)
which can be evaluated as
ˆ
B(λ) =
ˆ
C + λ [
ˆ
A ,
ˆ
C ] +
λ
2
2!
[
ˆ
A , [
ˆ
A ,
ˆ
C ] ] + . . . (246)
which is the Taylor series of
ˆ
B(λ).
From eqn(237) of the previous example, the Taylor series can be recognized
as the expansion of
ˆ
B(λ) = exp
_
+ λ
ˆ
A
_
ˆ
C exp
_
− λ
ˆ
A
_
(247)
Alternatively, the series can be rearranged as
ˆ
B(λ) =
_
1 + λ
ˆ
A +
λ
2
2!
ˆ
A
2
+ . . .
_
ˆ
C
_
1 − λ
ˆ
A +
λ
2
2!
ˆ
A
2
+ . . .
_
= exp
_
+ λ
ˆ
A
_
ˆ
C exp
_
− λ
ˆ
A
_
(248)
70
giving the same result.
——————————————————————————————————
3.4.15 Exercise 18
The Baker  Campbell  Hausdorf relation
6
exp
_
ˆ
A
_
exp
_
ˆ
B
_
= exp
_
(
ˆ
A +
ˆ
B )
_
exp
_
1
2
[
ˆ
A ,
ˆ
B ]
_
(249)
is only valid for operators
ˆ
A and
ˆ
B that have commutator which is a constant,
i.e.
[
ˆ
A ,
ˆ
B ] = Const. (250)
Derive the Baker  Cambell  Hausdorﬀ relation.
——————————————————————————————————
3.4.16 Solution 18
First we note that, from the series expansion of the exponential, one can show
_
exp
_
λ
ˆ
B
_
,
ˆ
A
_
= λ exp
_
λ
ˆ
B
_
[
ˆ
B ,
ˆ
A ] (251)
Now let us consider the operator function
ˆ
f(λ) deﬁned by
ˆ
f(λ) = exp
_
λ
ˆ
A
_
exp
_
λ
ˆ
B
_
exp
_
− λ (
ˆ
A +
ˆ
B )
_
(252)
Then the derivative with respect to λ is given by
∂
ˆ
f
∂λ
= exp
_
λ
ˆ
A
_
ˆ
A exp
_
λ
ˆ
B
_
exp
_
− λ (
ˆ
A +
ˆ
B )
_
+ exp
_
λ
ˆ
A
_
exp
_
λ
ˆ
B
_
ˆ
B exp
_
− λ (
ˆ
A +
ˆ
B )
_
− exp
_
λ
ˆ
A
_
exp
_
λ
ˆ
B
_
(
ˆ
A +
ˆ
B ) exp
_
− λ (
ˆ
A +
ˆ
B )
_
(253)
6
J.E. Campbell, Proc. London Math. Soc. 29, 14 (1898).
H.F. Baker, London Math. Soc. Ser. 3, 24 (1904).
F. Hausdorf, Ber. Vehr. Sachs. Wissen. Leipzig, Math.Naturwiss. Kl. 58, 19 (1906).
71
On commuting exp[ λ
ˆ
B ] with
ˆ
A in the ﬁrst term, we ﬁnd
∂
ˆ
f
∂λ
= λ exp
_
λ
ˆ
A
_
exp
_
λ
ˆ
B
_
[
ˆ
A ,
ˆ
B ] exp
_
− λ (
ˆ
A +
ˆ
B )
_
(254)
as the other terms cancel identically. Furthermore as the commutator is a
constant it may be factored out, thus we have
∂
ˆ
f
∂λ
ˆ
f
= λ [
ˆ
A ,
ˆ
B ] (255)
which on integrating and rearranging yields
exp
_
λ
ˆ
A
_
exp
_
λ
ˆ
B
_
= exp
_
λ (
ˆ
A +
ˆ
B )
_
exp
_
λ
2
2
[
ˆ
A ,
ˆ
B ]
_
(256)
and on setting λ = 1 we have proved the relationship.
——————————————————————————————————
The TaylorMacLaurin expansion of a function f(x) is given by
f(x +a) = exp
_
a
∂
∂x
_
f(x) (257)
which has the threedimensional analogue
f(r +a) = exp
_
a . ∇
_
f(r) (258)
This is equivalent to a shift of the origin by + a, or a shift of the function by − a.
3.4.17 Eigenvalue Equations
Given a diﬀerential operator
ˆ
A one can ﬁnd eigenfunctions ϕ
a
(r) and eigenval
ues a. The eigenfunctions and eigenvalues are determined from the eigenvalue
equation,
ˆ
A ϕ
a
(r) = a ϕ
a
(r) (259)
An example is given by the eigenfunctions of the x component of the mo
mentum, ˆ p
x
, deﬁned on the interval (−∞,∞). The eigenvalue equation is
ˆ p
x
ϕ
p
(r) = p
x
ϕ
p
(r)
− i ¯h
∂
∂x
ϕ
p
(r) = p
x
ϕ
p
(r) (260)
72
The eigenfunctions are of the form
ϕ
p
(r) ∝ exp
_
i
p
x
x
¯h
_
(261)
and the eigenvalue p
x
is any real number. Thus, the eigenvalues form a continu
ous spectra with values in the interval (−∞,∞). The momentum eigenfunctions
are also eigenfunctions of the kinetic energy operator
ˆ
T
x
, since
ˆ
T
x
=
ˆ p
2
x
2 m
. We
should note that two eigenfunctions correspond to the same eigenvalue of
ˆ
T
x
.
These two eigenfunctions are those which correspond to the momentum eigen
values + p
x
and − p
x
. When an eigenvalue corresponds to more than one
eigenfunction, the eigenvalue is said to be degenerate. The above eigenfunc
tions of T
x
are doubly degenerate. The degeneracy is the number of linearly
independent
7
eigenfunctions corresponding to the same eigenvalue, and this de
pends on the space of the functions being considered. For example, if the wave
functions depend on x, y and z, one can ﬁnd eigenfunctions of ˆ p
x
of the form
Ψ(x, y, z) =
_
1
2 π ¯h
_3
2
exp
_
i
p
x
x
¯h
_
exp
_
i
p
y
y
¯h
_
exp
_
i
p
z
z
¯h
_
(262)
the eigenvalue p
x
is inﬁnitely degenerate.
Note that a factor of ¯ h
−
d
2
has been introduced into the normalization of the
ddimensional momentum eigenstates, or equivalently the ddimensional Fourier
transform. This factor was introduced in order that the momentum distribution
function is properly normalized.
In general, given an eigenfunction Ψ
a
(r) of an operator
ˆ
A with eigenvalue
a, then any function of the operator f(
ˆ
A) satisﬁes the eigenvalue equation
f(
ˆ
A) Ψ
a
(r) = f(a) Ψ
a
(r) (263)
where the eigenvalue is f(a).
Another example is given by the energy eigenfunctions of the onedimensional
harmonic oscillator, which has the Hamiltonian operator
ˆ
H
ˆ
H = −
¯h
2
2 m
∂
2
∂x
2
+
m ω
2
2
x
2
(264)
7
A set of functions φn is said to be linearly independent if any function of the set cannot
be expressed as a linear superposition of the other members of the set. That is, if the set of
φn is linearly independent, the only solution of the equation
n
Cn φn = 0
is the trivial solution in which all the coeﬃcients are zero Cn = 0.
73
The energy eigenvalue equation for the harmonic oscillator is
ˆ
H Ψ
n
(x) =
_
−
¯h
2
2 m
∂
2
∂x
2
+
m ω
2
2
x
2
_
Ψ
n
(x)
= E
n
Ψ
n
(x) (265)
which has the energy eigenvalues E
n
= ¯h ω ( n +
1
2
) where n is any positive
integer ( including 0 ). The energy eigenfunctions are Ψ
n
(x), where
Ψ
n
(x) =
( − 1 )
n
_
2
n
n!
_1
2
_
m ω
¯hπ
_1
4
exp[ +
m ω
2 ¯h
x
2
]
_
¯h
m ω
_n
2
d
n
dx
n
exp[ −
m ω
¯h
x
2
]
(266)
In this case the eigenvalues are in the form of a discrete set of numbers, and
the eigenfunctions are localized about the origin. The harmonic oscillator, clas
sically, corresponds to a situation in which a particle would be bound to the
origin by the quadratic potential, for any value of the energy E.
——————————————————————————————————
3.4.18 Exercise 19
Show that if
Ψ(r) = exp
_
− φ(r)
_
(267)
satisﬁes appropriate boundary conditions then it represents a bound state wave
function with energy eigenvalue E for a particle moving in the potential
V (r) =
¯h
2
2 m
_
( ∇φ(r) )
2
− ∇
2
φ(r)
_
+ E (268)
——————————————————————————————————
3.4.19 Exercise 20
An electron is moving in one dimension and is constrained to the region outside
a perfect conductor x > 0, where the potential is given by the image potential
V (x) = −
e
2
2 x
(269)
where e is the charge of the electron. Find a bound state energy eigenfunction
φ(x) and the average value of x.
74
Image potential for electrons near a metal surface
2
1.5
1
0.5
0
0.5
1
2 0 2 4 6 8 10
x / x
0
V
(
x
)
x
0
/
e
2
V(x) =  e
2
/ 2 x
Figure 17: The onedimensional image potential V (x) which conﬁnes an electron
close to the surface of a metal. The bound state energy is marked by a horizontal
line.
Hint: Try a wave function of the form x exp[ − α x ] for x > 0.
——————————————————————————————————
3.4.20 Solution 20
The trial wave function is chosen as
φ(x) = A x exp
_
− α x
_
(270)
for x > 0 and is zero for negative values of x, and is shown in ﬁg(18). Thus,
the wave function is localized as x → ∞and vanishes at the surface at x = 0,
representing a particle trapped in the attractive image potential. The electron
does not penetrate into the metal. On substituting the wave function into the
energy eigenvalue equation
_
−
¯h
2
2 m
∂
2
∂x
2
−
e
2
2 x
_
φ(x) = E φ(x) (271)
and on noting that
∂φ
∂x
= (
1
x
− α ) φ(x) (272)
75
Bound state wave function
0
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
2 0 2 4 6 8 10
x / x
0
Ψ
0
(
x
)
Figure 18: The wave function Ψ(x) of an electron bound to the surface of a
metal.
and the second derivative is given by
∂
2
φ
∂x
2
= − (
2
x
− α ) α φ(x) (273)
one ﬁnds that the eigenvalue equation reduces to
_
−
¯h
2
2 m
( α
2
− 2
α
x
) −
e
2
2 x
_
φ(x) = E φ(x) (274)
This is an algebraic equation, which is solved by choosing α such that
α =
m e
2
2 ¯h
2
(275)
and the energy eigenvalue E is then given by
E = −
m e
4
8 ¯h
2
(276)
The eigenvalue E is negative, corresponding to the fact that classically the elec
tron is trapped in the potential well and does not have enough energy to reach
x → ∞. The threshold energy for the particle to reach inﬁnity is E = 0, and
hence the particle must have a negative energy.
——————————————————————————————————
76
3.4.21 Exercise 21
A particle of mass m is conﬁned to the region x > 0 and is subjected to a
potential V (x) given by
V (x) = V
0
_
a
2
x
2
−
a
x
_
(277)
where V
0
and a are constants. The potential is sketched in ﬁg(19). Derive the
0.5
0
0.5
1
0 2 4 6 8 10
x/a
V
(
x
)
V(x) = V
0
[ (a/x)
2
 (a/x) ]
Figure 19: The potential V (x) for a onedimensional hydrogenlike atom.
bound state energy and wave function.
Hint: Try a wave function of the form x
s
exp[ − α x ] for x > 0.
——————————————————————————————————
3.4.22 Solution 21
We shall consider the trial wave function
φ(x) = C x
s
exp
_
− α x
_
(278)
77
which has the second derivative given by
∂
2
∂x
2
φ(x) =
_
s ( s − 1 )
x
2
− 2 α
s
x
+ α
2
_
φ(x) (279)
On substituting into the energy eigenvalue equation one ﬁnds the consistency
equations
s ( s − 1 ) =
2 m V
0
¯h
2
a
2
2 s α =
2 m V
0
¯h
2
a
α
2
= −
2 m E
¯h
2
(280)
Thus, we ﬁnd the exponent s as
s =
1
2
±
_
1
4
+
2 m V
0
¯h
2
a
2
(281)
Since the wave function should be square integrable we take the positive root.
Then from the second equation we ﬁnd
α =
2 m V0
¯ h
2
a
1 +
_
1 +
8 m V0
¯ h
2
a
2
(282)
from which one can ﬁnd the energy E.
——————————————————————————————————
3.4.23 Exercise 22
Prove that the energy eigenfunctions of the harmonic oscillator are given by
Ψ
n
(x) given above.
——————————————————————————————————
3.4.24 Solution 22
The wave function Ψ
n
(x) should satisfy the energy eigenvalue equation,
_
−
¯h
2
2 m
∂
2
∂x
2
+
m ω
2
2
x
2
_
Ψ
n
(x) = ¯ hω ( n +
1
2
) Ψ
n
(x) (283)
First let us transform to the dimensionless variable y where
y =
_
m ω
¯h
x (284)
78
Then, the energy eigenvalue equation can be simpliﬁed to
_
−
∂
2
∂y
2
+ y
2
_
Φ
n
(y) = ( 2 n + 1 ) Φ
n
(y) (285)
We have to show that Φ
n
(y) given by
Φ
n
(y) = exp
_
+
y
2
2
_ _
∂
∂y
_
n
exp
_
− y
2
_
(286)
satisﬁes the above dimensionless eigenvalue equation. We shall prove this by
induction.
We ﬁrst note that the above trial wave function with n = 0 satisﬁes the
eigenvalue equation as
_
−
∂
2
∂y
2
+ y
2
_
exp
_
−
y
2
2
_
= exp
_
−
y
2
2
_
(287)
So the trial wave function satisﬁes the equation for n = 0, and is thus a solu
tion for this particular n.
Then we shall prove that, if the trial wave function satisﬁes the eigenvalue
equation for an arbitrary n, then the function also satisﬁes the equation for
( n + 1 ).
Let us ﬁrst note that
exp
_
+
y
2
2
_ _
∂
∂y
_
n
exp
_
−
y
2
2
_
=
_
exp
_
+
y
2
2
_ _
∂
∂y
_
exp
_
−
y
2
2
_ _
n
=
_
+
∂
∂y
− y
_
n
(288)
The trial wave function is assumed to satisfy the equation
_
−
∂
2
∂y
2
+ y
2
_ _
+
∂
∂y
− y
_
n
exp
_
−
y
2
2
_
= ( 2 n + 1 )
_
+
∂
∂y
− y
_
n
exp
_
−
y
2
2
_
(289)
and we aim to show that if the above equation is true then the equation with
n + 1
_
−
∂
2
∂y
2
+ y
2
_ _
+
∂
∂y
− y
_
n+1
exp
_
−
y
2
2
_
= ( 2 n + 3 )
_
+
∂
∂y
− y
_
n+1
exp
_
−
y
2
2
_
(290)
79
is also true. We note that the operator identity
_
−
∂
2
∂y
2
+ y
2
_ _
+
∂
∂y
− y
_
=
_
+
∂
∂y
− y
_ _
−
∂
2
∂y
2
+ y
2
+ 2
_
(291)
is always valid. On substituting this identity into the eigenvalue equation with
the n + 1 th trial function, we have
_
+
∂
∂y
− y
_ _
−
∂
2
∂y
2
+ y
2
+ 2
_ _
+
∂
∂y
− y
_
n
exp
_
−
y
2
2
_
=
_
+
∂
∂y
− y
_
( 2 n + 3 )
_
+
∂
∂y
− y
_
n
exp
_
−
y
2
2
_
(292)
and on cancelling the term
_
+
∂
∂y
− y
_
2
_
+
∂
∂y
− y
_
n
exp
_
−
y
2
2
_
(293)
from both sides of the equation, we obtain
_
+
∂
∂y
− y
_ _
−
∂
2
∂y
2
+ y
2
_ _
+
∂
∂y
− y
_
n
exp
_
−
y
2
2
_
=
_
+
∂
∂y
− y
_
( 2 n + 1 )
_
+
∂
∂y
− y
_
n
exp
_
−
y
2
2
_
(294)
This is true if eqn(289) holds true, as we are only taking a derivative of eqn(289).
Equation(289) is true for n = 0 and so from the above we have shown that it
is true for n = 1. By induction this equation is also true for all higher integer
values of n.
——————————————————————————————————
Given an operator,
ˆ
A, which corresponds to a physical measurement A and
a system that has a wave function that is an eigenfunction of the operator cor
responding to the eigenvalue a then a measurement of that physical quantity A
deﬁnitely results in the value a.
3.4.25 Adjoint or Hermitean Conjugate Operators
Given an operator
ˆ
A one can construct its adjoint or Hermitean conjugate,
ˆ
A
†
.
The adjoint operator or Hermitean conjugate operator is deﬁned by the matrix
elements between two arbitrary wave functions
_
d
3
r Φ
∗
(r)
ˆ
A Ψ(r) =
_ _
d
3
r Ψ
∗
(r)
ˆ
A
†
Φ(r)
_
∗
(295)
80
This deﬁnition involves the inner product of the wave function
ˆ
A Ψ(r), which
is the state Ψ(r) after it is transformed by the operator
ˆ
A, and Φ(r). The deﬁ
nition relates this inner product to the complex conjugate of the inner product
of the state
ˆ
A
†
Φ(r) with Ψ(r).
From the deﬁnition of the adjoint or Hermitean conjugate, it is easy to prove
that the Hermitean conjugate of the Hermitean conjugate of an operator
ˆ
A is
the same as the original operator
ˆ
A,
_
ˆ
A
†
_
†
=
ˆ
A (296)
This is proved by using the deﬁnition of the adjoint twice
_
d
3
r Φ
∗
(r)
ˆ
A Ψ(r) =
_ _
d
3
r Ψ
∗
(r)
ˆ
A
†
Φ(r)
_
∗
=
_ _ _
d
3
r Φ
∗
(r)
_
ˆ
A
†
_
†
Ψ(r)
_
∗
_
∗
(297)
which, since (z
∗
)
∗
= z for any complex number, yields the identiﬁcation
(
ˆ
A
†
)
†
=
ˆ
A.
Also a complex constant a, when regarded as an operator, has a Hermitean
conjugate which is just its complex conjugate a
∗
.
An example of ﬁnding the Hermitean conjugate of an operator is given by
considering the diﬀerential operator in one dimension.
ˆ
A =
∂
∂x
(298)
The Hermitean conjugate or self adjoint operator,
ˆ
A
†
, is found from
_
+∞
−∞
dx Φ
∗
(x)
∂
∂x
Ψ(x) =
= Φ
∗
(x) Ψ(x)
¸
¸
¸
¸
∞
−∞
−
_
+∞
−∞
dx
∂
∂x
_
Φ
∗
(x)
_
Ψ(x)
= −
_
+∞
−∞
dx
∂
∂x
_
Φ
∗
(x)
_
Ψ(x) (299)
where the second line involves integration by parts and the third line utilizes
the boundary conditions on the wave functions
lim
x → ∞
Ψ(x) = 0 (300)
81
which are implied by the normalization condition. From this, one identiﬁes the
Hermitean conjugate operator as
ˆ
A
†
= −
∂
∂x
(301)
Another example of a Hermitean conjugate of an operator is given by trans
lation operator, which translates the wave function by the vector a.
ˆ
S(a) = exp
_
− a . ∇
_
(302)
This, when acting on a wave function Ψ(r) generates the Taylor MacLaurin
series expansion of the function Ψ(r − a). The Hermitean conjugate is found
from the series expansion of the exponential operator, and integrating by parts
to yield
ˆ
S
†
(a) = exp
_
+ a . ∇
_
(303)
which coincides with the inverse of
ˆ
S(a), as
ˆ
S
†
(a)
ˆ
S(a) =
ˆ
S(a)
ˆ
S
†
(a) = 1 (304)
Thus, we have
ˆ
S
†
(a) =
ˆ
S
−1
(a) (305)
Operators that have their Hermitean conjugate operators equal to their inverses
are called unitary operators. Thus, an operator
ˆ
A is a unitary operator if
ˆ
A
†
=
ˆ
A
−1
(306)
Hence,
ˆ
S(a) is a unitary operator.
Another unitary operator is given by the time translation operator
ˆ
U(t)
which is found to be
ˆ
U(t) = exp
_
− i
ˆ
H t
¯h
_
(307)
where
ˆ
H is the Hamiltonian operator
ˆ
H = −
¯h
2
2m
∂
2
∂x
2
+ V (x) (308)
and V (x) is a real function. Then it can be shown that the Hermitean conjugate
of
ˆ
U is given by
ˆ
U
†
(t) = exp
_
+ i
ˆ
H t
¯h
_
(309)
82
Translation through a distance a
0
0.2
0.4
0.6
0.8
1
φ(x) φ(xa)
x
0
x
0
+a
0 0 1 2 2 3 1 3
x
x
φ'(x)=φ(T
1
x)=φ(xa)
x'=Tx=x+a
Figure 20: The unitary operator
ˆ
S(a) produces a translation of the wave func
tion by a. The translation operator
ˆ
T acts on the coordinates and transforms
the point x to the point x
= x + a, i.e. x
=
ˆ
T x. Under the translation,
the wave function φ(x) is transformed to φ
(x), such that the value of φ
at x
is the same as the value of φ at the point x. Therefore, φ
(x
) = φ(x) so,
φ
(x) = φ(
ˆ
T
−1
x). The unitary operator which transforms the wave function
is then speciﬁed as φ
(x) =
ˆ
S(a) φ(x) = φ(
ˆ
T
−1
x).
In this case, the Hermitean conjugate is just the complex conjugate of the op
erator. Also we have that the Hermitean conjugate coincides with the inverse
operator
ˆ
U
†
(t)
ˆ
U(t) =
ˆ
U(t)
ˆ
U
†
(t) = 1 (310)
This is the condition that has to be satisﬁed for an operator to be a unitary
operator. The unitary condition for the time evolution operator ensures that
the normalization of the states is independent of time.
The Hermitean conjugate of a product of two operators (
ˆ
A
ˆ
B )
†
is given
by the product of the Hermitean conjugates taken in reverse order, (
ˆ
B
†
ˆ
A
†
).
This can be proved by starting with the deﬁnition of the Hermitean conjugate
of the product
__
d
3
r Ψ
∗
(r)
_
ˆ
A
ˆ
B
_
Φ(r)
_
∗
=
_
d
3
r Φ
∗
(r)
_
ˆ
A
ˆ
B
_
†
Ψ(r)
(311)
The product operator is deﬁned in terms of the state which results when the
83
operator
ˆ
A acts on the state
ˆ
B Φ(r). On using the deﬁnition of the Hermitean
conjugate twice, successively, one ﬁnds
=
__
d
3
r Ψ
∗
(r)
ˆ
A
_
ˆ
B Φ(r)
_ _
∗
=
_
d
3
r
_
ˆ
B Φ(r)
_
∗
_
ˆ
A
†
Ψ(r)
_
=
__
d
3
r
_
ˆ
A
†
Ψ(r)
_
∗
_
ˆ
B Φ(r)
_ _
∗
=
_
d
3
r Φ
∗
(r)
ˆ
B
†
_
ˆ
A
†
Ψ(r)
_
=
_
d
3
r Φ
∗
(r)
ˆ
B
†
ˆ
A
†
Ψ(r) (312)
which completes the proof.
3.4.26 Hermitean Operators
A Hermitean operator (or self Adjoint operator) is any operator that satisﬁes
the condition
ˆ
A
†
=
ˆ
A (313)
That is, if an operator is Hermitean, the Hermitean conjugate of the operator
is equal to the operator.
Examples of Hermitean operators are given by, the components of the mo
mentum operators ˆ p
x
= − i ¯h
∂
∂x
, ˆ p
y
= − i ¯h
∂
∂y
and ˆ p
z
= − i ¯h
∂
∂z
, and
also the singleparticle Hamiltonian deﬁned by
ˆ
H = −
¯h
2
2m
_
∂
2
∂x
2
+
∂
2
∂y
2
+
∂
2
∂z
2
_
+ V (r) (314)
is Hermitean.
In spherical polar coordinates (r,θ,ϕ), the canonical generalized momenta
could correspond to the Hermitean operators
ˆ p
r
= −
i ¯h
r
∂
∂r
r
ˆ p
θ
= −
i ¯h
sin
1
2
θ
∂
∂θ
sin
1
2
θ
ˆ p
ϕ
= − i ¯h
∂
∂ϕ
(315)
These operators are Hermitean operators. Note that when these operators are
taken between two wave functions, and integrated over the volume r
2
dr sin θ dθ dϕ
84
the resulting factors of r and sin θ in the expressions are symmetrically placed
with respect to the diﬀerential operator.
——————————————————————————————————
3.4.27 Exercise 23
Prove that the canonical momenta in spherical polar coordinates given in eqn(315)
are Hermitean operators.
——————————————————————————————————
3.4.28 Exercise 24
The expression for the kinetic energy in the Hamiltonian of eqn(39) when quan
tized involves the sum of the three operators
ˆ p
2
r
= −
¯h
2
r
2
∂
∂r
r
2
∂
∂r
ˆ p
2
θ
= −
¯h
2
sin θ
∂
∂θ
sin θ
∂
∂θ
ˆ p
2
ϕ
= − ¯h
2
∂
2
∂ϕ
2
(316)
Show that these three operators are Hermitean.
——————————————————————————————————
3.4.29 Solution 24
The Hermitean conjugate of ˆ p
2
ϕ
is calculated from the matrix elements
_
2 π
0
dϕ
_
π
0
dθ sin θ
_
∞
0
dr r
2
Φ
∗
(r, θ, ϕ) ˆ p
2
ϕ
Ψ(r, θ, ϕ)
= − ¯h
2
_
2 π
0
dϕ
_
π
0
dθ sin θ
_
∞
0
dr r
2
Φ
∗
(r, θ, ϕ)
∂
2
∂ϕ
2
Ψ(r, θ, ϕ)
(317)
by integrating by parts twice with respect to ϕ. On integrating by parts for the
ﬁrst time, one obtains
− ¯h
2
_
2 π
0
dϕ
_
π
0
dθ sin θ
_
∞
0
dr r
2
Φ
∗
(r, θ, ϕ)
∂
2
∂ϕ
2
Ψ(r, θ, ϕ)
85
= − ¯h
2
_
π
0
dθ sin θ
_
∞
0
dr r
2
Φ
∗
(r, θ, ϕ)
_
∂
∂ϕ
Ψ(r, θ, ϕ)
_¸
¸
¸
¸
2 π
0
+ ¯h
2
_
2 π
0
dϕ
_
π
0
dθ sin θ
_
∞
0
dr r
2
_
∂
∂ϕ
Φ
∗
(r, θ, ϕ)
_ _
∂
∂ϕ
Ψ(r, θ, ϕ)
_
(318)
The boundary term vanishes since the wave functions are 2π periodic in ϕ, i.e.,
Ψ(r, θ, ϕ) = Ψ(r, θ, ϕ + 2π). On integrating by parts once again, one obtains
− ¯h
2
_
2 π
0
dϕ
_
π
0
dθ sin θ
_
∞
0
dr r
2
∂
2
∂ϕ
2
Φ
∗
(r, θ, ϕ) Ψ(r, θ, ϕ)
= − ¯h
2
_ _
2 π
0
dϕ
_
π
0
dθ sin θ
_
∞
0
dr r
2
Ψ
∗
(r, θ, ϕ)
∂
2
∂ϕ
2
Φ(r, θ, ϕ)
_
∗
(319)
where the boundary terms have vanished once again. Thus, we have found that
_
ˆ p
2
ϕ
_
†
= − ¯h
2
∂
2
∂ϕ
2
(320)
Hence, ˆ p
2
ϕ
is Hermitean.
The Hermitean conjugate of ˆ p
2
θ
is calculated from the matrix elements
_
2 π
0
dϕ
_
π
0
dθ sin θ
_
∞
0
dr r
2
Φ
∗
(r, θ, ϕ) ˆ p
2
θ
Ψ(r, θ, ϕ)
= − ¯h
2
_
2 π
0
dϕ
_
π
0
dθ
_
∞
0
dr r
2
Φ
∗
(r, θ, ϕ)
∂
∂θ
_
sin θ
∂
∂θ
Ψ(r, θ, ϕ)
_
(321)
by integrating by parts twice with respect to θ. Note that the factor sin θ in the
metric for the volume integral has cancelled with a factor from the component
of the kinetic energy. On integrating by parts for the ﬁrst time, one obtains
− ¯h
2
_
2 π
0
dϕ
_
π
0
dθ
_
∞
0
dr r
2
Φ
∗
(r, θ, ϕ)
∂
∂θ
_
sin θ
∂
∂θ
Ψ(r, θ, ϕ)
_
= − ¯h
2
_
2 π
0
dϕ
_
∞
0
dr r
2
Φ
∗
(r, θ, ϕ) sin θ
_
∂
∂θ
Ψ(r, θ, ϕ)
_¸
¸
¸
¸
π
0
+ ¯h
2
_
2 π
0
dϕ
_
π
0
dθ sin θ
_
∞
0
dr r
2
_
∂
∂θ
Φ
∗
(r, θ, ϕ)
_ _
∂
∂θ
Ψ(r, θ, ϕ)
_
(322)
The boundary term vanishes since the wave functions are ﬁnite at the poles
where sin θ = 0 . On integrating by parts once again, one obtains
− ¯h
2
_
2 π
0
dϕ
_
π
0
dθ
_
∞
0
dr r
2
∂
∂θ
_
sin θ
∂
∂θ
Φ
∗
(r, θ, ϕ)
_
Ψ(r, θ, ϕ)
86
= − ¯h
2
_ _
2 π
0
dϕ
_
π
0
dθ
_
∞
0
dr r
2
Ψ
∗
(r, θ, ϕ)
∂
∂θ
_
sin θ
∂
∂θ
Φ(r, θ, ϕ)
_ _
∗
(323)
where the boundary terms have vanished once again. Thus, we have found that
_
ˆ p
2
ϕ
_
†
= − ¯h
2
1
sin θ
∂
∂θ
_
sin θ
∂
∂θ
_
(324)
Hence, ˆ p
2
ϕ
is Hermitean. Note that the weight factor sin θ in the integral over
the solid angle played a crucial role in the proof of Hermiticity.
The radial component of the kinetic energy have the matrix elements
_
2 π
0
dϕ
_
π
0
dθ sin θ
_
∞
0
dr r
2
Φ
∗
(r, θ, ϕ) ˆ p
2
r
Ψ(r, θ, ϕ)
= − ¯h
2
_
2 π
0
dϕ
_
π
0
dθ sin θ
_
∞
0
dr Φ
∗
(r, θ, ϕ)
∂
∂r
_
r
2
∂
∂r
Ψ(r, θ, ϕ)
_
(325)
by integrating by parts twice with respect to r. On integrating by parts for the
ﬁrst time, one obtains
− ¯h
2
_
2 π
0
dϕ
_
π
0
dθ sin θ
_
∞
0
dr Φ
∗
(r, θ, ϕ)
∂
∂r
_
r
2
∂
∂r
Ψ(r, θ, ϕ)
_
= − ¯h
2
_
2 π
0
dϕ
_
π
0
dθ sin θ r
2
Φ
∗
(r, θ, ϕ)
_
∂
∂r
Ψ(r, θ, ϕ)
_¸
¸
¸
¸
∞
0
+ ¯h
2
_
2 π
0
dϕ
_
π
0
dθ sin θ
_
∞
0
dr r
2
_
∂
∂r
Φ
∗
(r, θ, ϕ)
_ _
∂
∂r
Ψ(r, θ, ϕ)
_
(326)
The boundary term vanishes since the wave function vanishes as r → ∞, i.e.,
lim
r → ∞
Ψ(r, θ, ϕ) = 0 and the weight function vanishes at r = 0 . On
integrating by parts once again, one obtains
− ¯h
2
_
2 π
0
dϕ
_
π
0
dθ sin θ
_
∞
0
dr
∂
∂r
_
r
2
∂
∂r
Φ
∗
(r, θ, ϕ)
_
Ψ(r, θ, ϕ)
= − ¯h
2
_ _
2 π
0
dϕ
_
π
0
dθ sin θ
_
∞
0
dr Ψ
∗
(r, θ, ϕ)
∂
∂r
_
r
2
∂
∂r
Φ(r, θ, ϕ)
_ _
∗
(327)
where the boundary terms have vanished once again. Thus, we have found that
_
ˆ p
2
r
_
†
= −
¯h
2
r
2
∂
∂r
_
r
2
∂
∂r
_
(328)
87
is Hermitean. In the proof, the weight factor r
2
played a crucial role in showing
the radial part of the kinetic energy is Hermitean.
——————————————————————————————————
3.4.30 Exercise 25
Using the expression for the momentum operator p = − i ¯h ∇ in spherical
polar coordinates
p = − i ¯h
_
ˆ e
r
∂
∂r
+ ˆ e
θ
1
r
∂
∂θ
+ ˆ e
ϕ
1
r sin θ
∂
∂ϕ
_
(329)
where the unit vectors are given in terms of the Cartesian unit vectors via
ˆ e
r
= sin θ cos ϕ ˆ e
x
+ sin θ sin ϕ ˆ e
y
+ cos θ ˆ e
z
ˆ e
θ
= cos θ cos ϕ ˆ e
x
+ cos θ sin ϕ ˆ e
y
− sin θ ˆ e
z
ˆ e
ϕ
= − sin ϕ ˆ e
x
+ cos ϕ ˆ e
y
(330)
show that the resulting expression for the kinetic energy agrees with the expres
sion inferred from the previous exercise.
——————————————————————————————————
3.4.31 Solution 25
First we shall note that the unit vectors are independent of r and are only
functions of the angles, so
∂ˆ e
r
∂θ
= ˆ e
θ
∂ˆ e
r
∂ϕ
= sin θ ˆ e
ϕ
∂ˆ e
θ
∂θ
= − ˆ e
r
∂ˆ e
θ
∂ϕ
= cos θ ˆ e
ϕ
∂ˆ e
ϕ
∂θ
= 0
∂ˆ e
ϕ
∂ϕ
= −
_
sin θ ˆ e
r
+ cos θ ˆ e
θ
_
(331)
Then, we have
ˆ p
2
= − ¯h
2
_
ˆ e
r
∂
∂r
. ˆ e
r
∂
∂r
+ ˆ e
r
∂
∂r
. ˆ e
θ
1
r
∂
∂θ
88
+ ˆ e
r
∂
∂r
. ˆ e
ϕ
1
r sin θ
∂
∂ϕ
+ ˆ e
θ
1
r
∂
∂θ
. ˆ e
r
∂
∂r
+ ˆ e
θ
1
r
∂
∂θ
. ˆ e
θ
1
r
∂
∂θ
+ ˆ e
θ
1
r
∂
∂θ
. ˆ e
ϕ
1
r sin θ
∂
∂ϕ
+ ˆ e
ϕ
1
r sin θ
∂
∂ϕ
. ˆ e
r
∂
∂r
+ ˆ e
ϕ
1
r sin θ
∂
∂ϕ
. ˆ e
θ
1
r
∂
∂θ
+ ˆ e
ϕ
1
r sin θ
∂
∂ϕ
. ˆ e
ϕ
1
r sin θ
∂
∂ϕ
_
(332)
which on evaluating the derivatives and evaluating the scalar products of the
orthogonal unit vectors becomes
ˆ p
2
= − ¯h
2
_
∂
2
∂r
2
+
2
r
∂
∂r
+
1
r
2
∂
2
∂θ
2
+
cos θ
r
2
sin θ
∂
∂θ
+
1
r
2
sin
2
θ
∂
2
∂ϕ
2
_
(333)
The terms containing the ﬁrst derivatives come from the change in the unit
vectors of the fourth, seventh and eight terms of the previous equation. Then
this can be simpliﬁed to yield
ˆ p
2
= − ¯h
2
_
1
r
2
∂
∂r
_
r
2
∂
∂r
_
+
1
r
2
sin θ
∂
∂θ
_
sin θ
∂
∂θ
_
+
1
r
2
sin
2
θ
∂
2
∂ϕ
2
_
(334)
which involves the appropriate expression for the Laplacian in spherical polar
coordinates.
——————————————————————————————————
Given an arbitrary operator
ˆ
B which is not Hermitean, i.e.
ˆ
B ,=
ˆ
B
†
, then
one can always construct a Hermitean operator
ˆ
A as
ˆ
A =
1
2
_
ˆ
B +
ˆ
B
†
_
(335)
since
ˆ
A
†
=
1
2
_
ˆ
B
†
+ (
ˆ
B
†
)
†
_
=
1
2
_
ˆ
B
†
+
ˆ
B
_
=
ˆ
A (336)
The operator
ˆ
A is the Hermitean part of the arbitrary operator
ˆ
B.
——————————————————————————————————
89
3.4.32 Exercise 26
Construct the Hermitean operators corresponding to the operators
ˆ
B
r
= − i
∂
∂r
and
ˆ
B
θ
= − i
∂
∂θ
, expressed in spherical polar coordinates r, θ and ϕ.
——————————————————————————————————
3.4.33 Solution 26
The Hermitean conjugate of
ˆ
B
r
is found by considering the matrix elements and
by integrating by parts with respect to r,
− i
_
∞
0
dr r
2
_
π
0
dθ sin θ
_
2 π
0
dϕ Φ
∗
(r, θ, ϕ)
∂
∂r
Ψ(r, θ, ϕ)
= +
_
i
_
∞
0
dr
_
π
0
dθ sin θ
_
2 π
0
dϕ Ψ
∗
(r, θ, ϕ)
∂
∂r
r
2
Φ(r, θ, ϕ)
_
∗
(337)
where we have assumed that the wave function satisﬁes the boundary conditions
lim
r → ∞
Ψ(r, θ, ϕ) → 0 (338)
Thus, the Hermitean conjugate,
ˆ
B
†
r
, is given by
ˆ
B
†
r
= − i
1
r
2
∂
∂r
r
2
(339)
From this we can construct a Hermitean operator as the Hermitean part of
ˆ
B,
via
ˆ
A
r
= −
i
2
_
∂
∂r
+
1
r
2
∂
∂r
r
2
_
= − i
_
∂
∂r
+
1
r
_
= − i
_
1
r
∂
∂r
r
_
(340)
Similarly, the Hermitean conjugate of
ˆ
B
θ
is found from
− i
_
∞
0
dr r
2
_
π
0
dθ sin θ
_
2 π
0
dϕ Φ
∗
(r, θ, ϕ)
∂
∂θ
Ψ(r, θ, ϕ)
= +
_
i
_
∞
0
dr r
2
_
π
0
dθ
_
2 π
0
dϕ Ψ
∗
(r, θ, ϕ)
∂
∂θ
sin θ Φ(r, θ, ϕ)
_
∗
(341)
90
The boundary term vanishes at θ = 0 and θ = π due to the presence of the
sin θ term. Thus,
ˆ
B
†
θ
is given by
ˆ
B
†
θ
= − i
1
sin θ
∂
∂θ
sin θ (342)
From this we can construct a Hermitean operator
ˆ
A
θ
via
ˆ
A
θ
= −
i
2
_
∂
∂θ
+
1
sin θ
∂
∂θ
sin θ
_
= − i
_
∂
∂θ
+
cos θ
2 sin θ
_
= − i
1
sin
1
2
θ
_
∂
∂θ
sin
1
2
θ
_
(343)
——————————————————————————————————
3.4.34 Eigenvalues and Eigenfunctions of Hermitean Operators
Hermitean operators have eigenvalues and eigenfunctions that have three im
portant properties. These are :
(i) The eigenvalues are real numbers.
(ii) Any two eigenfunctions corresponding to diﬀerent eigenvalues have ma
trix elements which are zero. Wavefunctions that have this property are said to
be orthogonal.
(iii) Any wave function can be expanded in terms of a complete set of the
eigenfunctions of a Hermitean operator.
We shall now prove the ﬁrst two statements. Consider a set of eigenfunctions
of the operator
ˆ
A. These satisfy the eigenvalue equation
ˆ
A φ
a
(r) = a φ
a
(r) (344)
Then take the matrix elements with an eigenfunction corresponding to the eigen
value b,
_
d
3
r φ
∗
b
(r)
ˆ
A φ
a
(r) = a
_
d
3
r φ
∗
b
(r) φ
a
(r) (345)
but since
ˆ
A is Hermitean
=
_ _
d
3
r φ
∗
a
(r)
ˆ
A
†
φ
b
(r)
_
∗
=
_ _
d
3
r φ
∗
a
(r)
ˆ
A φ
b
(r)
_
∗
(346)
91
However, φ
b
(r) is an eigenstate of
ˆ
A with eigenvalue b, so
=
_ _
d
3
r φ
∗
a
(r) b φ
b
(r)
_
∗
= b
∗
_
d
3
r φ
∗
b
(r) φ
a
(r) (347)
Thus, we ﬁnd the equality
( a − b
∗
)
_ _
d
3
r φ
∗
b
(r) φ
a
(r)
_
= 0 (348)
Thus, if the two eigenvalues are the same, b = a, and φ
a
(r) is normalized
to unity, one must have a = b
∗
= a
∗
. Hence, we have proved that the
eigenvalues of a Hermitean operator are real.
If the eigenvalues are diﬀerent, b ,= a, one then has
_
d
3
r φ
∗
b
(r) φ
a
(r) = 0 (349)
Thus, eigenfunctions of the Hermitean operator corresponding to diﬀerent eigen
values are orthogonal.
If an eigenvalue is degenerate, then the eigenfunctions corresponding to this
eigenvalue are not necessarily orthogonal. However, by choosing appropriate
linear combinations of these eigenfunctions one can construct a set of eigen
functions which are orthogonal. This procedure is known as GramSchmidt
orthogonalization. We shall implicitly assume that this procedure has always
been performed on any set of eigenfunctions.
We shall delay the proof of the expansion of an arbitrary wave function
till later. However, we shall show how the orthonormality properties of the
eigenfunctions allow a simple evaluation of the expansion coeﬃcients C
n
of an
arbitrary wave function
Ψ(r) =
n
C
n
φ
n
(r) (350)
Taking the matrix elements with the eigenfunction φ
m
(r), one ﬁnds
_
d
3
r φ
∗
m
(r) Ψ(r) =
n
C
n
_
d
3
r φ
∗
m
(r) φ
n
(r)
=
n
C
n
δ
n,m
= C
m
(351)
92
Therefore, the expansion of an arbitrary wave function Ψ(r) can be written in
the form
Ψ(r) =
n
_
d
3
r
φ
∗
n
(r
) Ψ(r
) φ
n
(r) (352)
After rearranging, one recognizes that the sum over the eigenfunctions has the
same property as the Dirac delta function. Thus, we have found the complete
ness condition
n
φ
∗
n
(r
) φ
n
(r) = δ
3
( r − r
) (353)
This condition has to be satisﬁed if any wave function can be expanded in terms
of a complete set of eigenfunctions. On going back to the example of momen
tum eigenfunctions and wave packets, one recognizes that the sum over the
eigenvalues n is to be replaced by an integral over the continuous eigenvalues
k. Furthermore, the completeness condition is just the representation of the
Dirac delta function given by eqn(127). In the case of degenerate eigenvalues,
an appropriate orthonormal set of eigenfunctions should be constructed.
——————————————————————————————————
3.4.35 Exercise 27
Express the x, y and z components of the orbital angular momentum oper
ator
ˆ
L in terms of the spherical polar coordinate variables (r,θ,ϕ). Find all
the eigenfunctions and eigenvalues of the z component of the (Hermitean) or
bital angular momentum operator
ˆ
L
z
. Show that they form an orthonormal set.
By using the theorems of discrete Fourier transforms for ﬁxed r and θ, show
that any wave function can be expanded in terms of the complete set of eigen
functions of
ˆ
L
z
, φ
m
(ϕ) as
Ψ(r, θ, ϕ) =
m
Φ
m
(r, θ) φ
m
(ϕ) (354)
where the expansion coeﬃcients Φ
m
(r, θ) are functions of r and θ.
——————————————————————————————————
3.4.36 Solution 27
Since the momentum is given by
p = − i ¯h
_
ˆ e
r
∂
∂r
+ ˆ e
θ
1
r
∂
∂θ
+ ˆ e
ϕ
1
r sin θ
∂
∂ϕ
_
(355)
93
and r = r ˆ e
r
then with
ˆ
L = r ∧ ˆ p, one ﬁnds that the angular momentum
solely has ˆ e
θ
and ˆ e
ϕ
components. The total orbital angular momentum can then
be resolved into the Cartesian components as
L
x
= − i ¯h
_
− sin ϕ
∂
∂θ
− cos ϕ cot θ
∂
∂ϕ
_
L
y
= − i ¯h
_
+ cos ϕ
∂
∂θ
− sin ϕ cot θ
∂
∂ϕ
_
L
z
= − i ¯h
∂
∂ϕ
(356)
The eigenfunctions of the z component of the orbital angular momentum oper
ator are
φ
m
(ϕ) =
_
1
2 π
_1
2
exp
_
i m ϕ
_
(357)
where, because of the condition that φ
m
(ϕ) is single valued
φ
m
( ϕ ) = φ
m
( ϕ + 2 π ) (358)
then one ﬁnds exp[ i m 2 π ] = 1 which implies that m can only have integer
values. Since these eigenfunctions only involve ϕ, and not r and θ, the normal
ization is only due to the integration over ϕ between 0 and 2 π. Any function
of ϕ which has period 2 π can be expanded in terms of this set of orthonormal
eigenfunctions.
——————————————————————————————————
3.4.37 Exercise 28
Find the expectation value of the nested commutation relation [ ˆ x , [ ˆ x ,
ˆ
H ] ]
between the Hermitean operators ˆ x and the energy
ˆ
H between the lowest energy
eigenfunctions φ
0
, i.e., evaluate
_
d
3
r φ
∗
0
(r) [ x , [ x ,
ˆ
H ] ] φ
0
(r) (359)
and then use the completeness relation to prove the ThomasReicheKuhn sum
rule
n
¸
¸
¸
¸
_
d
3
r φ
∗
0
(r) x φ
n
(r)
¸
¸
¸
¸
2
( E
n
− E
0
) = +
¯h
2
2 m
(360)
which relates the intensities of optical dipole allowed transitions [
_
d
3
r φ
∗
0
(r) x φ
n
(r) [
2
and the energies of the photon involved in the transitions ( E
n
− E
0
). If all
these quantities are measured experimentally, multiplied and summed over all
possible transitions, one should obtain unity. If the sum is diﬀerent from unity
94
the experiment has failed to identify some transitions or the experimental ap
paratus has not been calibrated correctly.
——————————————————————————————————
3.4.38 Solution 28
Starting from the commutation relation
[ x , [ x ,
ˆ
H ] ] = −
¯h
2
m
_
x
2
ˆ
H +
ˆ
H x
2
− 2 x
ˆ
H x
_
= −
¯h
2
m
(361)
and taking the matrix elements between Ψ
∗
0
(x) and Ψ
0
(x), one has
_
+ ∞
− ∞
dx Ψ
∗
0
(x)
_
x
2
ˆ
H +
ˆ
H x
2
− 2 x
ˆ
H x
_
Ψ
0
(x)
= −
¯h
2
m
_
+ ∞
− ∞
dx Ψ
∗
0
(x) Ψ
0
(x)
= −
¯h
2
m
(362)
since the wave functions are normalized to unity. The right hand side of the
commutator consists of four terms. The ﬁrst and second term will turn out to
be identical, although it may not seem obvious at ﬁrst. The third and fourth
are obviously identical and have already been combined and these give rise to
the term which contains a factor of 2.
We shall now examine the ﬁrst term which is given by
_
+ ∞
− ∞
dx Ψ
∗
0
(x) x x
ˆ
H Ψ
0
(x) (363)
and introduce a factor of 1 between the two x’s. This 1 can be written as an
integral over a Dirac delta function δ(x −x
) with respect to x
. Thus, we have
_
+ ∞
− ∞
dx
_
+ ∞
− ∞
dx
Ψ
∗
0
(x) x δ( x − x
) x
ˆ
H Ψ
0
(x
) (364)
where everything to the right of the delta function has been expressed in terms
of the primed variable x
. Since Ψ
0
(x
) is an energy eigenfunction it satisﬁes
ˆ
H Ψ
0
(x
) = E
0
Ψ
0
(x
) (365)
95
This can be substituted in the expression for the term we are trying to evaluate,
to yield
=
_
+ ∞
− ∞
dx
_
+ ∞
− ∞
dx
Ψ
∗
0
(x) x δ( x − x
) x
E
0
Ψ
0
(x
) (366)
On writing the delta function in terms of the completeness relation
δ( x − x
) =
n
Ψ
n
(x) Ψ
∗
n
(x
) (367)
one obtains
= E
0
_
+ ∞
− ∞
dx
_
+ ∞
− ∞
dx
Ψ
∗
0
(x) x
n
Ψ
n
(x) Ψ
∗
n
(x
) x
Ψ
0
(x
)
= E
0
n
_
+ ∞
− ∞
dx
_
+ ∞
− ∞
dx
Ψ
∗
0
(x) x Ψ
n
(x) Ψ
∗
n
(x
) x
Ψ
0
(x
)
= E
0
n
_
+ ∞
− ∞
dx Ψ
∗
0
(x) x Ψ
n
(x)
_
+ ∞
− ∞
dx
Ψ
∗
n
(x
) x
Ψ
0
(x
)
= E
0
n
_ _
+ ∞
− ∞
dx Ψ
∗
0
(x) x Ψ
n
(x)
_ _ _
+ ∞
− ∞
dx
Ψ
∗
n
(x
) x
Ψ
0
(x
)
_
= E
0
n
¸
¸
¸
¸
_
+ ∞
− ∞
dx Ψ
∗
0
(x) x Ψ
n
(x)
¸
¸
¸
¸
2
(368)
where we have interchanged the order of summation and integrations.
The second term can be immediately relate it to the ﬁrst term. The second
term is given by
_
+ ∞
− ∞
dx Ψ
∗
0
(x)
ˆ
H x x Ψ
0
(x) (369)
Let us note that the Hermitean conjugate of the operator
ˆ
H x x is just x x
ˆ
H.
Using the deﬁnition of the Hermitean conjugate of an operator, one ﬁnds
_
+ ∞
− ∞
dx Ψ
∗
0
(x)
ˆ
H x x Ψ
0
(x) =
_ _
+ ∞
− ∞
dx Ψ
∗
0
(x) x x
ˆ
H Ψ
0
(x)
_
∗
(370)
Thus, the second term is just the complex conjugate of the ﬁrst term, which we
have seen is real. The ﬁrst two terms are thus identical.
The remaining terms are evaluated in the same way as the ﬁrst term. We
start with the expression
_
+ ∞
− ∞
dx Ψ
∗
0
(x) x
ˆ
H x Ψ
0
(x) (371)
96
and introduce a factor of 1 between the
ˆ
H and an x. This 1 can be written as
an integral over a Dirac delta function δ(x − x
) with respect to x
. Thus, we
have
_
+ ∞
− ∞
dx
_
+ ∞
− ∞
dx
Ψ
∗
0
(x) x
ˆ
H δ( x − x
) x
Ψ
0
(x
) (372)
where everything to the right of the delta function has been expressed in terms
of the primed variable x
. On writing the delta function in terms of the com
pleteness relation
δ( x − x
) =
n
Ψ
n
(x) Ψ
∗
n
(x
) (373)
one obtains
=
_
+ ∞
− ∞
dx
_
+ ∞
− ∞
dx
Ψ
∗
0
(x) x
ˆ
H
n
Ψ
n
(x) Ψ
∗
n
(x
) x
Ψ
0
(x
)
(374)
Since Ψ
n
(x
) is an energy eigenfunction it satisﬁes
ˆ
H Ψ
n
(x
) = E
n
Ψ
n
(x
) (375)
This can be substituted in the expression for the term we are trying to evaluate,
to yield
=
_
+ ∞
− ∞
dx
_
+ ∞
− ∞
dx
Ψ
∗
0
(x) x
ˆ
H
n
Ψ
n
(x) Ψ
∗
n
(x
) x
Ψ
0
(x
)
=
_
+ ∞
− ∞
dx
_
+ ∞
− ∞
dx
Ψ
∗
0
(x) x
n
E
n
Ψ
n
(x) Ψ
∗
n
(x
) x
Ψ
0
(x
)
=
n
E
n
_
+ ∞
− ∞
dx
_
+ ∞
− ∞
dx
Ψ
∗
0
(x) x Ψ
n
(x) Ψ
∗
n
(x
) x
Ψ
0
(x
)
=
n
E
n
_
+ ∞
− ∞
dx Ψ
∗
0
(x) x Ψ
n
(x)
_
+ ∞
− ∞
dx
Ψ
∗
n
(x
) x
Ψ
0
(x
)
=
n
E
n
_ _
+ ∞
− ∞
dx Ψ
∗
0
(x) x Ψ
n
(x)
_ _ _
+ ∞
− ∞
dx
Ψ
∗
n
(x
) x
Ψ
0
(x
)
_
=
n
E
n
¸
¸
¸
¸
_
+ ∞
− ∞
dx Ψ
∗
0
(x) x Ψ
n
(x)
¸
¸
¸
¸
2
(376)
where we have interchanged the order of summation and integrations.
Combining the four term leads to the equation
2
n
( E
0
− E
n
)
¸
¸
¸
¸
_
+ ∞
− ∞
dx Ψ
∗
0
(x) x Ψ
n
(x)
¸
¸
¸
¸
2
= −
¯h
2
m
(377)
which was to be proved.
——————————————————————————————————
97
3.4.39 Exercise 29
Evaluate all the 6 commutation relations between the various pairs of the dif
ferent Cartesian components of the orbital angular momentum operators
ˆ
L.
——————————————————————————————————
3.4.40 Solution 29
The components of the angular momentum are given by
ˆ
L
x
= y ˆ p
z
− z ˆ p
y
ˆ
L
y
= z ˆ p
x
− x ˆ p
z
ˆ
L
z
= x ˆ p
y
− y ˆ p
x
(378)
The commutators can be evaluated by expanding them
[
ˆ
L
x
,
ˆ
L
y
] = [ y ˆ p
z
,
ˆ
L
y
] − [ z ˆ p
y
,
ˆ
L
y
]
= [ y ˆ p
z
, z ˆ p
x
] + [ z ˆ p
y
, x ˆ p
z
]
= − i ¯h y ˆ p
x
+ i ¯h x ˆ p
y
= + i ¯h
ˆ
L
z
(379)
so one has the result
[
ˆ
L
x
,
ˆ
L
y
] = i ¯h
ˆ
L
z
(380)
The set of commutators can be summarized as
[
ˆ
L
i
,
ˆ
L
j
] = i ¯h
i,j,k
ˆ
L
k
(381)
where
i,j,k
is the antisymmetric LeviCivita symbol, deﬁned as
i,j,k
= 1 (382)
if (i, j, k) is an even permutation of (x, y, z), and
i,j,k
= − 1 (383)
if (i, j, k) is an odd permutation of (x, y, z) or
i,j,k
is zero otherwise.
——————————————————————————————————
3.4.41 Exercise 30
In our discussion of the classical mechanics of a charged particle in an electro
magnetic ﬁeld, we have seen that the momentum of the particle is changed due
98
to the presence of the vector potential A(r, t) and that the Hamiltonian is of
the form
H =
p
2
2 m
−
q
m c
p . A(r, t) +
q
2
2 m c
2
A
2
(r, t) + q φ(r, t) (384)
In the radiation or Coulomb gauge, deﬁned by the condition ∇ . A(r, t) = 0,
electromagnetic waves are solely represented by the vector potential. Thus, to
lowest order in A, light couples to the particle via the interaction H
int
ˆ
H
int
= −
q
2 m c
_
ˆ p . A(ˆ r, t) + A(ˆ r, t) . ˆ p
_
(385)
Show that the momentum operator can be expressed as a commutator of the po
sition operator and the Hamiltonian for a charged particle in the scalar potential
represented by the Hamiltonian
ˆ
H
0
,
− i
¯h
m
ˆ p = [
ˆ
H
0
, ˆ r ] (386)
Hence, by using the energy eigenfunctions Ψ
n
(r) and eigenvalues E
n
of the
unperturbed Hamiltonian
ˆ
H
0
, show that if A(r, t) only varies over long length
scales, i.e. A(r, t) · A(t), then
_
d
3
r Ψ
∗
n
(r) ˆ p . A(r, t) Ψ
m
(r) =
i m
¯h
_
E
n
−E
m
_ _
d
3
r Ψ
∗
n
(r) ˆ r . A(r, t) Ψ
m
(r)
(387)
This provides the usual basis for discussing optical transitions involving the ab
sorption or emission of light in terms of dipole transitions, when the wave length
of light is much longer than the scale associated with the atomic or electronic
structure.
——————————————————————————————————
3.4.42 Solution 30
The matrix elements of the interaction term can be expressed as
−
q
m c
_
d
3
r φ
∗
m
(r) ˆ p . A φ
n
(r) (388)
where we are using the radiation gauge
∇ . A = 0 (389)
in which the vector potential is transverse to the direction of propagation. We
can substitute the expression for ˆ p given by
ˆ p = − i
m
¯h
[ r ,
ˆ
H
0
] (390)
99
in the matrix elements, to ﬁnd
i
q
¯h c
_
d
3
r φ
∗
m
(r) A . [ r ,
ˆ
H
0
] φ
n
(r) (391)
The matrix elements of the commutator can be expanded as two terms
+ i
q
¯h c
_
d
3
r φ
∗
m
(r) A . r
ˆ
H
0
φ
n
(r)
− i
q
¯h c
_
d
3
r φ
∗
m
(r)
ˆ
H
0
A . r φ
n
(r) (392)
Now on using the energy eigenvalue equation
ˆ
H
0
φ
n
(r) = E
n
φ
n
(r) (393)
and the approximate r independence of the vector potential A, the ﬁrst term
can be evaluated, yielding
+ i
q
¯h c
E
n
A .
_ _
d
3
r φ
∗
m
(r) r φ
n
(r)
_
− i
q
¯h c
A .
_ _
d
3
r φ
∗
m
(r)
ˆ
H
0
r φ
n
(r)
_
(394)
The matrix elements of r
ˆ
H
0
are related to the complex conjugate of its Her
mitean conjugate
ˆ
H
0
r, thus
_ _
d
3
r φ
∗
m
(r)
ˆ
H
0
r φ
n
(r)
_
=
_ _
d
3
r φ
∗
n
(r) r
ˆ
H
0
φ
m
(r)
_
∗
= E
m
_ _
d
3
r φ
∗
n
(r) r φ
m
(r)
_
∗
(395)
Hence, we ﬁnd
+ i
q
¯h c
_
E
n
− E
m
_
A .
_ _
d
3
r φ
∗
m
(r) r φ
n
(r)
_
(396)
which can be rewritten as
+ i
q
c
ω
n,m
A .
_ _
d
3
r φ
∗
m
(r) r φ
n
(r)
_
(397)
where E
n
− E
n
= ¯ h ω
n,m
is related to the frequency of the photon involved
in the transition. The matrix elements of q r can be considered to provide an
electric dipole for the transition, and hence the approximation that A is almost
r independent is called the dipole approximation.
——————————————————————————————————
100
3.4.43 Exercise 31
Extend the proof of the ThomasReicheKuhn sum rule to show
n
( E
n
− E
m
)
¸
¸
¸
¸
_
d
3
r φ
∗
n
(r) exp
_
i k . r
_
φ
m
(r)
¸
¸
¸
¸
2
=
¯h
2
k
2
2 m
(398)
——————————————————————————————————
3.4.44 Exercise 32
The scattering of light is encapsulated by the Kramers  Heisenberg formula.
This involves the square of matrix elements of the interaction between a charged
particle and the ﬁeld, which is of the order of the fourth power of the vector po
tential A. The contributions to the matrix elements for this process are second
order in the vector potential, and occurs as a combination of processes involving
the paramagnetic interaction squared and the lowest order diamagnetic interac
tion. At low frequencies, one has Rayleigh scattering of light, which involves a
partial cancellation between the contribution of the diamagnetic interaction and
the process involving the paramagnetic interaction. In this exercise, we shall
express the matrix elements of the diamagnetic interaction in a form similar
to that of the second order process involving the paramagnetic interaction, as
needed to demonstrate the partial cancellation.
The diamagnetic interaction term can be written as
H
dia
= +
q
2
2 m c
2
A(r, t) . A(r, t) (399)
The matrix elements of this interaction can be related to the scalar product of
two unit vectors
ˆ e
α
. ˆ e
β
(400)
Show that,
ˆ e
α
. ˆ e
β
=
1
m
m
1
E
m
− E
n
_ _
d
3
r φ
∗
m
(r) ( ˆ p . ˆ e
α
) φ
n
(r)
_
d
3
r
φ
∗
n
(r
) ( ˆ p . ˆ e
β
) φ
m
(r
)
+
_
d
3
r φ
∗
m
(r) ( ˆ p . ˆ e
β
) φ
n
(r)
_
d
3
r
φ
∗
n
(r
) ( ˆ p . ˆ e
α
) φ
m
(r
)
_
(401)
where φ
m
(r) are energy eigenstates with eigenvalues E
m
.
——————————————————————————————————
101
3.4.45 Solution 32
We shall ﬁrst write
ˆ e
α
. ˆ e
β
=
i,j
( ˆ e
α
. ˆ e
i
) δ
i,j
( ˆ e
j
. ˆ e
β
)
=
i,j
( ˆ e
α
. ˆ e
i
)
[ ˆ p
i
, x
j
]
i ¯h
( ˆ e
j
. ˆ e
β
)
= ˆ e
α
.
[ ˆ p , r ]
i ¯h
. ˆ e
β
(402)
It shall be understood that the scalar product of the operator ˆ p is taken with
ˆ e
α
, in both terms of the commutator. On taking the matrix elements between
φ
∗
n
(r) and φ
n
(r) and inserting the completeness relation, we have
ˆ e
α
. ˆ e
β
= ˆ e
α
.
_
d
3
r φ
∗
n
(r)
[ ˆ p , r ]
− i ¯h
φ
n
(r) . ˆ e
β
=
i
¯h
ˆ e
α
.
_
d
3
r φ
∗
n
(r) ˆ p r φ
n
(r) . ˆ e
β
−
i
¯h
ˆ e
β
.
_
d
3
r φ
∗
n
(r) r ˆ p φ
n
(r) . ˆ e
α
=
i
¯h
ˆ e
α
.
_
d
3
r φ
∗
n
(r) ˆ p
_
d
3
r
δ( r − r
) r
φ
n
(r
) . ˆ e
β
−
i
¯h
ˆ e
β
.
_
d
3
r φ
∗
n
(r) r
_
d
3
r
δ( r − r
) ˆ p
φ
n
(r
) . ˆ e
α
=
i
¯h
m
_
ˆ e
α
.
_
d
3
r φ
∗
n
(r) ˆ p φ
m
(r)
_
d
3
r
φ
∗
m
(r
) r
φ
n
(r
) . ˆ e
β
− ˆ e
β
.
_
d
3
r φ
∗
n
(r) r φ
m
(r)
_
d
3
r
φ
∗
m
(r
) ˆ p
φ
n
(r
) . ˆ e
α
_
(403)
On using the equality
( E
m
− E
n
) φ
∗
m
(r) r φ
n
(r) = φ
∗
m
(r) [
ˆ
H , r ] φ
n
(r)
= − i
¯h
m
φ
∗
m
(r) ˆ p φ
n
(r) (404)
one obtains the result
ˆ e
α
. ˆ e
β
=
1
m
m
_
1
E
m
− E
n
_ _ _
d
3
r φ
∗
n
(r) ( ˆ e
α
. ˆ p ) φ
∗
m
(r)
_
d
3
r
φ
m
(r
) ( ˆ p
. ˆ e
β
) φ
n
(r
)
_
+
1
m
m
_
1
E
m
− E
n
_ _ _
d
3
r φ
∗
n
(r) ( ˆ e
β
. ˆ p ) φ
∗
m
(r)
102
_
d
3
r
φ
m
(r
) ( ˆ p
. ˆ e
α
) φ
n
(r
)
_
(405)
as was to be proved.
——————————————————————————————————
3.4.46 Hermitean Operators and Physical Measurements
A physical measurements of a physical quantity A can result in a set of real
numbers a that are the possible results of the measurement. It is reasonable to
represent the operator corresponding to A as a Hermitean operator
ˆ
A, where
the eigenvalues correspond to the possible set of results a.
Given a state represented by Ψ(r) which has the expansion in terms of the
eigenfunctions of
ˆ
A
Ψ(r) =
a
C
a
φ
a
(r) (406)
then the probability of ﬁnding a speciﬁc result a in the measurement of A is
given by
P(a) = [ C
a
[
2
(407)
The orthonormality of the set of eigenfunctions ensures that the probability
distribution P(a) is properly normalized.
_
d
3
r [ Ψ(r) [
2
= 1
=
_
d
3
r
¸
¸
¸
¸
a
C
a
φ
a
(r)
¸
¸
¸
¸
2
=
a,b
C
∗
b
C
a
δ
a,b
=
a
[ C
a
[
2
(408)
Thus, the sum over probabilities P(a) is also normalized to unity.
The moments of the probability distribution are given by the matrix elements
of powers of the operator
A
n
=
_
d
3
r Ψ
∗
(r)
ˆ
A
n
Ψ(r)
=
_
d
3
r
m
C
∗
m
Φ
∗
m
(r)
ˆ
A
n
m
C
m
Φ
m
(r)
=
_
d
3
r
m
C
∗
m
Φ
∗
m
(r)
m
C
m
a
n
m
Φ
m
(r)
103
=
m,m
C
∗
m
C
m
δ
m,m
a
n
m
=
m
[ C
m
[
2
a
n
m
(409)
and in particular the average value of A is given by the matrix elements
A =
_
d
3
r Ψ
∗
(r)
ˆ
A Ψ(r) (410)
This is often called the expectation value of
ˆ
A in the state Ψ(r).
——————————————————————————————————
3.4.47 Exercise 33
Find the average values of the energy and the momentum of a particle in the
state represented by the wave function
Ψ(r) = C exp
_
− α ( r − r
0
)
2
_
(411)
where α
2
=
m ω
2 ¯ h
, and the Hamiltonian is given by
ˆ
H =
ˆ p
2
2 m
+
m ω
2
r
2
2
(412)
Also ﬁnd the mean squared deviation of the (vector) position operator.
——————————————————————————————————
3.4.48 Solution 33
The magnitude of the normalization constant is found from the condition
1 = [ C [
2
_
d
3
r exp
_
−2 α ( r − r
0
)
2
_
(413)
The integral is evaluated to yield
1 = [ C [
2
_
π
2 α
_3
2
(414)
Thus, we have the normalization
[ C [ =
_
2 α
π
_3
4
(415)
104
up to an arbitrary choice of phase.
The average value of the energy is given by the expectation value of the
Hamiltonian
E =
_
d
3
r Ψ
∗
(r)
ˆ
H Ψ(r)
=
_
d
3
r Ψ
∗
(r)
_
ˆ p
2
2 m
+
m ω
2
r
2
2
_
Ψ(r)
=
_
2 α
π
_3
2
_
d
3
r
_
¯h
2
2 m
_
6 α − 4 α
2
( r − r
0
)
2
_
+
m ω
2
r
2
2
_
exp
_
− 2 α ( r − r
0
)
2
_
(416)
The integral is evaluated as
E =
3 ¯h
2
α
m
+
m ω
2
r
2
0
2
−
3 ¯h
2
α
2 m
+
3 m ω
2
8 α
=
m ω
2
r
2
0
2
+
3 ¯h
2
α
2 m
+
3 m ω
2
8 α
(417)
where the ﬁrst term is the energy of a displaced classical harmonic oscillator.
On substituting α, one ﬁnds
E =
m ω
2
r
2
0
2
+
3
2
¯h ω (418)
where the last term represents the zeropoint energy for the three independent
degrees of freedom.
The average value of the momentum is zero, due to the fact that the wave
function has no spatially varying phase. Hence, the integrand of the expectation
value of ˆ p is antisymmetric around r
0
p = 2 i ¯h α [ C [
2
_
d
3
r ( r − r
0
) exp
_
− 2 α ( r − r
0
)
2
_
(419)
Thus, the expectation value of the momentum vanishes.
The average value of r
2
is given by
r
2
= r
2
0
+
3
4 α
(420)
Hence, the mean squared deviation is given by
∆r
2
rms
=
3
4 α
=
3 ¯h
2 m ω
(421)
105
which corresponds to the sum of the mean square displacements along the three
Cartesian axes.
——————————————————————————————————
3.4.49 Exercise 34
Find the average value of the z component of the orbital angular momentum
and square of the z component of the angular momentum for the following three
wave functions
Ψ
1a
(r) = C
1
r f(r) sin θ cos ϕ
Ψ
1b
(r) = C
1
r f(r) sin θ sin ϕ
Ψ
1c
(r) = C
1
r f(r) cos θ (422)
Do you need to evaluate the radial part of the integrations?
——————————————————————————————————
3.4.50 Solution 34
The operator corresponding to the z component of the angular momentum is
given by
ˆ
L
z
= − i ¯h
∂
∂ϕ
(423)
Thus, the expectation value of the angular momentum in a state Ψ(r, θ, ϕ) is
given by the expression
L
z
=
_
∞
0
dr r
2
_
π
0
dθ
_
2 π
0
dϕ Ψ
∗
(r, θ, ϕ)
ˆ
L
z
Ψ(r, θ, ϕ)
= − i ¯h
_
∞
0
dr r
2
_
π
0
dθ
_
2 π
0
dϕ Ψ
∗
(r, θ, ϕ)
∂
∂ϕ
Ψ(r, θ, ϕ)
(424)
The expectation value for the ﬁrst two states involve the integration
_
2 π
0
dϕ sin ϕ cos ϕ = 0 (425)
whereas the third state is an eigenstate of the z component of the angular mo
mentum operator with eigenvalue zero. Hence, the average value of
ˆ
L
z
is zero
in all three states.
106
The mean squared value of the z component of the angular momentum is
given by
L
2
z
=
_
∞
0
dr r
2
_
π
0
dθ
_
2 π
0
dϕ Ψ
∗
(r, θ, ϕ)
ˆ
L
2
z
Ψ(r, θ, ϕ)
= − ¯h
2
_
∞
0
dr r
2
_
π
0
dθ
_
2 π
0
dϕ Ψ
∗
(r, θ, ϕ)
∂
2
∂ϕ
2
Ψ(r, θ, ϕ)
(426)
In the ﬁrst two states one has the factors
− ¯h
2
_
2 π
0
dϕ cos ϕ
∂
2
∂ϕ
2
cos ϕ = ¯ h
2
_
2 π
0
dϕ cos
2
ϕ
= ¯ h
2
π
− ¯h
2
_
2 π
0
dϕ sin ϕ
∂
2
∂ϕ
2
sin ϕ = ¯ h
2
_
2 π
0
dϕ sin
2
ϕ
= ¯ h
2
π (427)
and the corresponding factor for the third state is identically zero as it is an
eigenstate with zero eigenvalue. One recognizes that the expectation values
are proportional to the normalization integral and, as the state are properly
normalized, one has
L
2
z
= ¯ h
2
(428)
for the ﬁrst two states and the expectation value is zero for the last state.
——————————————————————————————————
3.4.51 Exercise 35
Find the average values of the x, y and z component of the orbital angular
momentum and square of the component of the angular momentum for the
following three wave functions
Ψ
1a
(r) = C
1
( x + i y ) f(r)
Ψ
1b
(r) = C
1
( x − i y ) f(r)
Ψ
1c
(r) = C
1
z f(r) (429)
where f(r) is a function of the radial distance, deﬁned via r
2
= x
2
+ y
2
+ z
2
.
What can one conclude about the magnitude of the angular momentum of these
examples?
——————————————————————————————————
107
3.4.52 Solution 35
We shall ﬁrst note that the components of the angular momentum operator are
ˆ
L
x
= − i ¯h
_
y
∂
∂z
− z
∂
∂y
_
ˆ
L
y
= − i ¯h
_
z
∂
∂x
− x
∂
∂z
_
ˆ
L
z
= − i ¯h
_
x
∂
∂y
− y
∂
∂x
_
(430)
and that any radially symmetric function f(r) is an eigenfunction of the compo
nents of the angular momentum operator with a zero eigenvalue. For example,
on considering the action of the operator
ˆ
L
z
on an arbitrary radially symmetric
function f(r), one has
ˆ
L
z
f(r) = − i ¯h
_
x
∂f
∂y
− y
∂f
∂x
_
= − i ¯h
_
x
y
r
− y
x
r
_
∂f
∂r
= 0 (431)
as long as r ,= 0. Likewise, the other components also produce zero when
acting on an arbitrary radial function f(r).
The three functions given by Ψ
1
(r) are seen to be eigenfunctions of
ˆ
L
z
with
eigenvalues ± ¯h and 0, since
ˆ
L
z
Ψ
1a/b
(r) = − i ¯h C
1
f(r)
_
x
∂
∂y
− y
∂
∂x
_
( x ± i y )
= − i ¯h C
1
f(r)
_
± x i − y 1
_
= ± ¯h C
1
f(r) ( x ± i y )
= ± ¯h Ψ
1a/b
(432)
while
ˆ
L
z
Ψ
1c
(r) = − i ¯h C
1
f(r)
_
x
∂
∂y
− y
∂
∂x
_
z
= 0 (433)
Thus, these states are eigenstates of
ˆ
L
z
and the average value of L
z
is equal to
either ± ¯h or 0 respectively. Also the average values of L
2
z
are just 1 and 0.
The average value of
ˆ
L
x
and
ˆ
L
y
in states Ψ
1a/b
(r) can be found by noting
that
ˆ
L
x
Ψ
1a/b
(r) = ∓ ¯h Ψ
1c
(r)
ˆ
L
y
Ψ
1a/b
(r) = − i ¯h Ψ
1c
(r) (434)
108
and the expectation values of L
x
and L
y
are zero in these states since the origi
nal states and the transformed states are all eigenstates of
ˆ
L
z
corresponding to
diﬀerent eigenvalues, and the eigenstates of a Hermitean operator with diﬀerent
eigenvalues are orthogonal.
The expectation value of
ˆ
L
x
and
ˆ
L
y
in the state Ψ
1c
(r) can be found by
noting that
ˆ
L
x
Ψ
1c
(r) = − i ¯h C
1
y f(r)
= −
¯h
2
_
Ψ
1a
(r) − Ψ
1b
(r)
_
ˆ
L
y
Ψ
1c
(r) = + i ¯h C
1
x f(r)
= i
¯h
2
_
Ψ
1a
(r) + Ψ
1b
(r)
_
(435)
which are just linear combinations of the eigenstates of
ˆ
L
z
. The expectation
value is zero as the overlap between eigenstates of
ˆ
L
z
with diﬀerent eigenvalues
is zero.
We recognize that the set of functions Ψ
1a
(r), Ψ
1b
(r) and Ψ
1c
(r) form a
closed set under the angular momentum operators, as they operators acting on
any member of the set just transform them into linear combinations of the set.
By repeated use of the above relations one can show that
_
d
3
r Ψ
∗
1a
(r)
ˆ
L
2
x
Ψ
1a
(r) = − ¯h
_
d
3
r Ψ
∗
1a
(r)
ˆ
L
x
Ψ
1c
(r)
=
¯h
2
2
_
d
3
r Ψ
∗
1a
(r)
_
Ψ
1a
(r) − Ψ
1c
(r)
_
=
¯h
2
2
(436)
and also that
_
d
3
r Ψ
∗
1b
(r)
ˆ
L
2
x
Ψ
1b
(r) = + ¯ h
_
d
3
r Ψ
∗
1b
(r)
ˆ
L
x
Ψ
1c
(r)
= −
¯h
2
2
_
d
3
r Ψ
∗
1b
(r)
_
Ψ
1a
(r) − Ψ
1c
(r)
_
=
¯h
2
2
(437)
Likewise, for the expectation values of
ˆ
L
2
y
one ﬁnds that
_
d
3
r Ψ
∗
1a
(r)
ˆ
L
2
y
Ψ
1a
(r) = − i ¯h
_
d
3
r Ψ
∗
1a
(r)
ˆ
L
y
Ψ
1c
(r)
109
=
¯h
2
2
_
d
3
r Ψ
∗
1a
(r)
_
Ψ
1a
(r) + Ψ
1c
(r)
_
=
¯h
2
2
(438)
and also that
_
d
3
r Ψ
∗
1b
(r)
ˆ
L
2
y
Ψ
1b
(r) = − i ¯h
_
d
3
r Ψ
∗
1b
(r)
ˆ
L
y
Ψ
1c
(r)
= −
¯h
2
2
_
d
3
r Ψ
∗
1b
(r)
_
Ψ
1a
(r) + Ψ
1c
(r)
_
=
¯h
2
2
(439)
The expectation value of
ˆ
L
2
x
and
ˆ
L
2
y
in the state Ψ
1c
(r) are found from
_
d
3
r Ψ
∗
1c
(r)
ˆ
L
2
x
Ψ
1c
(r) = −
¯h
2
_
d
3
r Ψ
∗
1c
(r)
ˆ
L
x
_
Ψ
1a
(r) − Ψ
1b
(r)
_
= ¯ h
2
_
d
3
r Ψ
∗
1c
(r) Ψ
1c
(r)
= ¯ h
2
(440)
and also that
_
d
3
r Ψ
∗
1c
(r)
ˆ
L
2
y
Ψ
1c
(r) = + i
¯h
2
_
d
3
r Ψ
∗
1c
(r)
ˆ
L
y
_
Ψ
1a
(r) + Ψ
1b
(r)
_
= ¯ h
2
_
d
3
r Ψ
∗
1c
(r) Ψ
1c
(r)
= ¯ h
2
(441)
The average value of
´
L
2
=
ˆ
L
2
x
+
ˆ
L
2
y
+
ˆ
L
2
z
is 2 ¯h
2
for all these states. In fact
one can show that the states Ψ
1a
(r), Ψ
1b
(r), Ψ
1c
(r) are not only eigenstates of
ˆ
L
z
but are are all eigenstates of the operator
´
L
2
=
ˆ
L
2
x
+
ˆ
L
2
y
+
ˆ
L
2
z
(442)
with eigenvalues of 2 ¯h
2
. This operator corresponds to the squared length of the
vector angular momentum. These states can be thought of as having angular
momentum of the same magnitude, but with diﬀerent orientations.
——————————————————————————————————
110
3.5 Quantization
We have emphasized that because a physical measurement results in a change
of the state of the system, measurements should be represented by operators.
We have also asserted that a measurement of a physical quantity A yields a
real value a as the result of the measurement, and that immediately after the
measurement has been made it is certain that the resulting state corresponds
to the state in which A has the deﬁnite value a. This means that, immediately
after the measurement, the system is in an eigenstate of the operator
ˆ
A which
has an eigenvalue a. Furthermore, we have made a choice that the physical
operators should be Hermitean so that we know that the eigenvalues are real.
Thus far, we have been mainly examining the mathematics of operators and
wave functions using several physical examples. It remains to discuss how these
operators are chosen, and what the relationships between them are.
3.5.1 Relations between Physical Operators
A physical operator that appears in Quantum Mechanics is associated with the
name of an analogous quantity or variable in Classical Mechanics. That is,
we associate a classical variable with a quantum mechanical operator. In the
Hamiltonian formulation of classical mechanics, the classical quantities may be
expressed in terms of coordinates and momenta and perhaps time, but not in
terms of derivatives. These relationships are called constitutive or deﬁnitive re
lationships. In quantum mechanics, the various operators representing physical
quantities satisfy the same constitutive relationships as the classical variables
do. That is, the classical quantities in a deﬁnitive relationship are replaced by
the quantum operators. However, the order in which the quantum operators
appear in the deﬁnition may have to be chosen judiciously, as they may not be
commuting operators.
3.5.2 The Correspondence Principle
The relationships between the various quantum operators are chosen to corre
spond to the relations between variables in classical mechanics, for a speciﬁc
purpose. Classical Mechanics has a well deﬁned regime in which it provides an
excellent and accurate description of nature. This is often called the regime of
validity of Classical Mechanics. Quantum Mechanics, if it is to provide a better
description of nature, should produce results which are identical to the results
of classical mechanics (to within the experimental accuracy) within the regime
of validity of classical mechanics. By assuming that the same relationships hold
between classical variables and quantum operators, it is ensured that if the
quantum operators can, to a good approximation, be replaced by values, i.e.
real variables, then Quantum Mechanics will reduce to classical mechanics. We
shall examine the conditions that are required for a quantum state to lie within
the regime of validity of Classical Mechanics. One condition that is needed to be
111
satisﬁed, if quantum operators may be approximated by real variables, is that
the value associated with the commutator [
ˆ
A ,
ˆ
B ] between two operators
ˆ
A and
ˆ
B should be negligibly small when compared to the products of the values asso
ciated with
ˆ
A and
ˆ
B. The values or variables associated with the operators are
naturally identiﬁed with the expectation values for the quantum state in ques
tion. Since, in Hamiltonian mechanics, all quantities are expressed in terms of
the canonically conjugate momenta and coordinates q
i
and p
j
, the commutators
of all operators can be reduced to the nonzero combinations of the fundamental
commutator [ ˆ q
i
, ˆ p
j
]. The Complementarity Principle associates the value of
the fundamental commutators with the corresponding classical Poisson Brack
ets, up to a constant proportional to ¯ h. If the commutators, hence ¯ h, can be
considered to be negligibly small when compared with the average values of p
i
and q
j
in the physical state, then Quantum Mechanics will reduce to Classical
Mechanics in this limit. The Correspondence Principle can be embodied in the
concise statement that Quantum Mechanics should reduce to Classical Mechan
ics in the limit ¯ h → 0.
3.5.3 The Complementarity Principle
The complementarity principle has the eﬀect that the Poisson Brackets between
two classical variables are to be replaced by the commutator between two quan
tum operators
[ A , B ]
PB
→
[
ˆ
A ,
ˆ
B ]
i ¯h
(443)
where ¯h is a universal constant. The equivalence can be seen by examining
the Poisson Bracket algebra between two products of quantum operators, while
respecting the order
[
ˆ
A
1
ˆ
A
2
,
ˆ
B
1
ˆ
B
2
]
PB
= [
ˆ
A
1
,
ˆ
B
1
]
PB
ˆ
B
2
ˆ
A
2
+
ˆ
B
1
[
ˆ
A
1
,
ˆ
B
2
]
PB
ˆ
A
2
+
ˆ
A
1
[
ˆ
A
2
,
ˆ
B
1
]
PB
ˆ
B
2
+
ˆ
A
1
ˆ
B
1
[
ˆ
A
2
,
ˆ
B
2
]
PB
= [
ˆ
A
1
,
ˆ
B
1
]
PB
ˆ
A
2
ˆ
B
2
+
ˆ
A
1
[
ˆ
A
2
,
ˆ
B
1
]
PB
ˆ
B
2
+
ˆ
B
1
[
ˆ
A
1
,
ˆ
B
2
]
PB
ˆ
A
2
+
ˆ
A
1
ˆ
B
1
[
ˆ
A
2
,
ˆ
B
2
]
PB
(444)
Thus, on equating these two results we ﬁnd
[
ˆ
A
1
,
ˆ
B
1
]
PB
[
ˆ
A
2
,
ˆ
B
2
] = [
ˆ
A
2
,
ˆ
B
3
]
PB
[
ˆ
A
1
,
ˆ
B
1
] (445)
which, since the pair of operators
ˆ
A
1
and
ˆ
B
1
are independent of the pair
ˆ
A
2
and
ˆ
B
2
, leads to the discovery that the quantum Poisson bracket is proportional to
the commutator, with a universal constant of proportionality
[
ˆ
A
1
,
ˆ
B
1
] = i ¯h [
ˆ
A
1
,
ˆ
B
1
]
PB
(446)
On retaining the classical value of the Poisson bracket between canonically con
jugate coordinates q
i
and momentum p
j
, one ﬁnds that the quantum operators
112
must satisfy the commutation relations
[ ˆ p
j
, ˆ q
i
] = − i ¯h δ
j,i
[ ˆ p
j
, ˆ p
i
] = [ ˆ q
j
, ˆ q
i
] = 0 (447)
Having found the commutation relationships between the momenta and coor
dinate operators, the basis for quantization is complete as any operator can be
expressed in terms of the canonical conjugate momenta and coordinates. How
ever, it is usual to ﬁnd explicit representations for the operators.
The procedure of quantization is simplest and free from ambiguities, if one
quantizes in a Cartesian coordinate system and then transforms to other coor
dinate systems.
The classical limit is obtained when the operators can be replaced by their
eigenvalues and this implies that the commutators are negligible. As the com
mutation relation between two operators ultimately involves a commutation
relation between position and momentum, the commutation relation is propor
tional to ¯ h. The classical limit is approached when ¯ h is negligible compared
with the products of appropriate expectation values in a state.
3.5.4 Coordinate Representation
The coordinate representation is that usually used in Schr¨odinger’s wave me
chanics. In this case, the position operator ˆr is diagonal in that it is represented
by the vector variable r. The momentum operator ˆ p is represented by a Her
mitean ﬁrst order diﬀerential operator. The wave function is a function of the
position Ψ(r), as r is diagonal. The momentum operator is represented as the
sum of a gradient term and a real function
ˆr = r
ˆ p = − i ¯h ∇ + ∇ Λ(r) (448)
where Λ(r) is an arbitrary real function. The gradient of the real function, ∇ Λ,
is to be regarded as a function and not as an operator. Usually the arbitrary
function is removed from the momentum operator by an appropriate choice of
the phase of the wave function.
ˆ p → ˆ p
= − i ¯h ∇
Ψ(r) → Ψ
(r) = exp
_
+ i
Λ(r)
¯h
_
Ψ(r) (449)
This representation is the one we shall mostly use in this class.
For example, in generalized coordinate systems, the inﬁnitesimal displace
ment ds is given in terms of the metric g
i,j
and the inﬁnitesimal changes in the
113
generalized coordinates dq
j
via
ds
2
=
i,j
g
i,j
dq
i
dq
j
(450)
The metric is a symmetric tensor g
i,j
= g
j,i
. Since the kinetic energy is deﬁned
in terms of the square of the inﬁnitesimal displacement per unit time, (
ds
dt
)
2
, the
classical Lagrangian is given by
L(q, ˙ q) =
m
2
i,j
˙ q
i
g
i,j
˙ q
j
− V (q) (451)
The canonical momenta are deﬁned by the derivatives of the Lagrangian w.r.t.
the generalized velocities
p
i
=
∂L
∂ ˙ q
i
= m g
i,j
˙ q
j
(452)
The associated quantum mechanical operators have to be Hermitean with the
inner product
_
j
dq
j
√
g Φ
∗
(r) Ψ(r) (453)
where g is given by the determinant of the covariant metric tensor
g = det
_
g
i,j
(q)
_
(454)
The quantum mechanical operators must satisfy the canonical commutation
rules
[ ˆ p
i
, ˆ q
j
] = − i ¯h δ
j
i
[ ˆ p
i
, ˆ p
j
] = 0
[ ˆ q
i
, ˆ q
j
] = 0 (455)
In the coordinate representation, the generalized momenta are given by
ˆ p
j
= − i ¯h g
−
1
4
∂
∂q
j
g
1
4
(456)
or
ˆ p
j
= − i ¯h
_
∂
∂q
j
+
1
2
Γ
j
_
(457)
where
Γ
j
= g
−
1
2
_
∂
∂q
j
g
1
2
_
(458)
The position operators are given by
ˆ q
j
= q
j
(459)
114
As shown by Podolsky
8
, the Hamiltonian can be written in the symmetric Her
mitean form
ˆ
H =
1
2 m
i,j
g
−
1
4
ˆ p
i
g
1
4
g
i,j
g
1
4
ˆ p
j
g
−
1
4
+ V (q) (460)
where the contravariant metric tensor is given by g
i,j
= g
−1
i,j
.
In planar polar coordinates, (r, ϕ), the inﬁnitesimal length element is given
by
ds
2
= dr
2
+ r
2
dϕ
2
(461)
Thus, the covariant metric has the diagonal form
g
i,j
=
_
1 0
0 r
2
_
(462)
and the contravariant metric is
g
i,j
=
_
1 0
0
1
r
2
_
(463)
The inﬁnitesimal volume element is given by
dr dϕ
√
g = dr dϕ r (464)
The generalized momenta operators are given by
ˆ p
r
= − i ¯h r
−
1
2
∂
∂r
r
1
2
ˆ p
ϕ
= − i ¯h r
−
1
2
∂
∂ϕ
r
1
2
(465)
The Hamiltonian is given by
ˆ
H =
1
2 m
_
r
−
1
2
ˆ p
r
r ˆ p
r
r
−
1
2
+ r
−
1
2
ˆ p
ϕ
1
r
ˆ p
ϕ
r
−
1
2
_
+ V (r)
= −
¯h
2
2 m
_
1
r
∂
∂r
_
r
∂
∂r
_
+
1
r
2
∂
2
∂ϕ
2
_
+ V (r) (466)
In spherical polar coordinates, (r, θ, ϕ), the inﬁnitesimal length ds is given
by
ds
2
= dr
2
+ r
2
dθ
2
+ r
2
sin
2
θ dϕ
2
(467)
Thus, the covariant metric has the diagonal form
g
i,j
=
_
_
1 0 0
0 r
2
0
0 0 r
2
sin
2
θ
_
_
(468)
8
B. Podolsky, Phys. Rev. 32, 812 (1928).
115
and the contravariant tensor is given by the inverse matrix
g
i,j
=
_
_
1 0 0
0
1
r
2
0
0 0
1
r
2
sin
2
θ
_
_
(469)
Thus, the inﬁnitesimal volume element is given by
dr dθ dϕ
√
g = dr dθ dϕ r
2
sin θ (470)
and the canonical momentum ˆ p
j
are given by
ˆ p
r
= − i ¯h
1
r
√
sin θ
∂
∂r
r
√
sin θ
= − i ¯h
1
r
∂
∂r
r
ˆ p
θ
= − i ¯h
1
r
√
sin θ
∂
∂θ
r
√
sin θ
= − i ¯h
1
√
sin θ
∂
∂θ
√
sin θ
ˆ p
ϕ
= − i ¯h
1
r
√
sin θ
∂
∂ϕ
r
√
sin θ
= − i ¯h
∂
∂ϕ
(471)
Hence, the Hamiltonian has the form
ˆ
H =
1
2 m
_
1
r
ˆ p
r
r
2
ˆ p
r
1
r
+
1
r
√
sin θ
ˆ p
θ
sin θ ˆ p
θ
1
r
√
sin θ
+ ˆ p
ϕ
1
r
2
sin
2
θ
ˆ p
ϕ
_
+ V (r)
= −
¯h
2
2 m
_
1
r
2
∂
∂r
_
r
2
∂
∂r
_
+
1
r
2
sin θ
∂
∂θ
_
sin θ
∂
∂θ
_
+
1
r
2
sin
2
θ
∂
2
∂ϕ
2
_
+ V (r)
(472)
3.5.5 Momentum Representation
The momentum representation is the representation in which the momentum
operator is diagonal, and the wave function is given as a function of p, Φ(p).
The momentum and position operators are given by
ˆ p = p
ˆr = + i ¯h ∇
p
− ∇
p
Λ(p) (473)
where the gradients are derivatives w.r.t. p . This representation of the opera
tors satisﬁes the required commutation relations between the components of ˆ r
116
and ˆ p . In complete analogy to the realspace representation, the momentum
distribution function is given by
P(p) d
3
p = [ Φ(p) [
2
d
3
p (474)
and is normalized to unity
_
P(p) d
3
p = 1 (475)
The transform between the real space and momentum representation is given
by the integral Fourier Transform,
Ψ(r) =
_
1
2 π ¯h
_3
2
_
d
3
p exp
_
+ i
p . r
¯h
_
Φ(p) (476)
and its inverse
Φ(p) =
_
1
2 π ¯h
_3
2
_
d
3
r exp
_
− i
p . r
¯h
_
Ψ(r) (477)
The components of momentum ˆ p and ˆr position operators in the coordinate
representation are deﬁned by their action on an arbitrary state Ψ(r), which
produces transformed states ψ
px
and ψ
x
ψ
px
(r) = − i ¯h ∇
x
Ψ(r)
ψ
x
(r) = r
x
Ψ(r) (478)
The corresponding operators in the momentum representation are found by
Fourier transforming these equations. On Fourier Transforming and integrating
the ﬁrst equation by parts, and with appropriate boundary conditions, one ﬁnds
the expression for the momentum operator in the momentum representation.
Likewise, on diﬀerentiating the integral Fourier transform with respect to p
x
,
one obtains a representation of the position operator ˆr
x
in momentum space.
The resulting equations are
φ
px
(p) = p
x
Φ(p)
φ
x
(p) = + i ¯h ∇
px
Φ(p) (479)
This conﬁrms the identiﬁcation of the operators in the momentum representa
tion.
——————————————————————————————————
Example
117
The momentum space representation provides a simple way for ﬁnding the
bound states of a particle moving in one dimension, in the presence of a partic
ular potential
V (x) → ∞ for x < 0
V (x) = −
e
2
2 x
for x > 0 (480)
Image potential for electrons near a metal surface
2
1.5
1
0.5
0
0.5
1
2 0 2 4 6 8 10
x / x
0
V
(
x
)
x
0
/
e
2
V(x) =  e
2
/ 2 x
Figure 21: The onedimensional image potential V (x) which conﬁnes a particle
close to an inpenetrable region for x < 0. The bound state energy is marked
by a horizontal line.
——————————————————————————————————
Solution
On multiplying by x, the energy eigenvalue equation becomes
_
ˆ x
ˆ p
2
2 m
−
e
2
2
_
φ
n
(p) = ˆ x E
n
φ
n
(p) (481)
A simpliﬁcation has occurred for our particular choice of potential V (x), since
the energy eigenvalue equation has been transformed so that it is now linear in
ˆ x. Therefore,
i ¯h
∂
∂p
_
p
2
2 m
− E
n
_
φ
n
(p) =
e
2
2
φ
n
(p) (482)
118
This is a ﬁrst order diﬀerential equation
_
i ¯h
p
m
−
e
2
2
_
φ
n
(p) = − i ¯h
_
p
2
2 m
− E
n
_ _
∂φ
n
∂p
_
(483)
The equation can be put in the form of an integral
_
p
0
dp
_
∂φn
∂p
_
φ
n
(p
)
= −
_
p
0
dp
_
p
m
+
i
¯ h
e
2
2
p
2
2 m
− E
n
_
(484)
which can be evaluated as
ln
φ
n
(p)
φ
n
(0)
= − ln
_
1 −
p
2
2 m E
n
_
−
i e
2
2 ¯h
_
2 m
− E
n
tan
−1
p
√
−2 m E
n
(485)
Hence, one ﬁnds
φ
n
(p) =
_
φ
n
(0)
1 −
p
2
2 m En
_
exp
_
−
i e
2
2 ¯h
_
2 m
− E
n
tan
−1
p
√
− 2 m E
n
_
(486)
Thus, φ
n
(p) vanishes as p → ± ∞ and is normalizable. This indicates that
ψ
n
(x) is also normalizable for E
n
< 0 and hence satisﬁes the boundary condi
tion at x → ∞.
The energy eigenvalues are found by insisting that the real space wave func
tion ψ
n
(x) satisfy the boundary condition
ψ
n
(0) = 0 (487)
at x = 0, since V (0) → ∞. The wave function in real space is given in terms
of the momentum space wave function through
ψ
n
(x) =
1
√
2 π ¯h
_
∞
−∞
dp φ
n
(p) exp
_
i
p x
¯h
_
(488)
so the boundary condition at x = 0 becomes
0 = ψ
n
(0) =
1
√
2 π ¯h
_
∞
−∞
dp φ
n
(p) (489)
The boundary condition has the explicit form
0 =
1
√
2 π ¯h
_
∞
−∞
dp
_
φ
n
(0)
1 −
p
2
2 m En
_
exp
_
−
i e
2
2 ¯h
_
2 m
− E
n
tan
−1
p
√
− 2 m E
n
_
(490)
119
The imaginary part of the integral is odd in p and, thus, vanishes identically.
Therefore, the boundary condition is satisﬁed, if one requires that the real part
vanishes
0 =
1
√
2 π ¯h
_
∞
−∞
dp
_
φ
n
(0)
1 −
p
2
2 m En
_
cos
_
e
2
2 ¯h
_
2 m
− E
n
tan
−1
p
√
− 2 m E
n
_
(491)
On integrating this, one ﬁnds the condition
sin
_
π e
2
4 ¯h
_
2 m
− E
n
_
= 0 (492)
Hence, the energy eigenvalues are determined by the boundary condition
π e
2
4 ¯h
_
2 m
− E
n
= n π (493)
and are given by
E
n
= −
2 m e
4
16 ¯h
2
n
2
(494)
which has the form of a Rydberg series.
——————————————————————————————————
Example: A Particle Conﬁned in a Uniform Force Field.
Another problem which can be solved in the momentum representation is
that of a particle of mass m moving in one dimension in the presence of a
potential
V (x) = − F x if x < 0
→ ∞ if x > 0 (495)
The potential is depicted in ﬁg(22). A potential of this type conﬁnes electrons
near the interface of semiconductors with diﬀerent levels of doping
9
. The inﬁnite
potential excludes the particle from the region x > 0 and introduces the
boundary condition at x = 0
φ(0) = 0 (496)
The energy eigenvalue equation becomes
−
¯h
2
2 m
∂
2
φ
∂x
2
− F x φ(x) = E φ(x) (497)
for x < 0. The classical turning point − a is given by
a =
E
F
(498)
9
T.S. Rahman, D.L. Mills and P.S. Riseborough, Phys. Rev. B 23, 4081, (1981).
120
Confining Potential
0
5
10
15
15 10 5 0 5
x/ξ ξξ ξ
V
(
x
)
[
u
n
i
t
s
o
f
(
h
2
F
2
/
2
m
)
1
/
3
]
E
n
 F x
E
0
E
1
Figure 22: The potential of the uniform force and the inﬁnite potential conﬁnes
the particle in the region x < 0. The energy eigenvalues E
n
are depicted by
the dashed lines.
On eliminating the energy in the eigenvalue equation in favor of the turning
point, one ﬁnds
−
¯h
2
2 m
∂
2
φ
∂x
2
− F ( x + a ) φ = 0 (499)
A characteristic length scale ξ is deﬁned by
ξ =
_
¯h
2
2 m F
_1
3
(500)
Hence, after introducing the dimensionless variable z =
x + a
ξ
, one ﬁnds that
the eigenvalue equation for z ξ < a has the form
∂
2
φ
∂z
2
+ z φ = 0 (501)
This equation is related to Airy’s equation and has solutions which are linear
combinations Ai(−z) and Bi(−z). The function Bi(z) diverges exponentially
as z → ∞. Hence, a solution containing Bi(−z) is not a physically acceptable
solution in the region x < 0. The function Bi(−z) is discarded, so the solution
is of the form
φ(x) = C Ai
_
−
x +a
ξ
_
(502)
121
for x < 0. The solution has the integral representation
Ai
_
−
x +a
ξ
_
=
ξ
π
_
∞
0
dk cos
_
1
3
k
3
ξ
3
− k ( x + a )
_
(503)
The asymptotic form of the wave function can be found by the method of
stationary phase and is given by
φ(x) ∼
C
√
π
_
x +a
ξ
_
−
1
4
sin
_
2
3
_
x +a
ξ
_3
2
+
π
4
_
(504)
within the classically accessible region (0 > x > − a), and decays like
φ(x) ∼
C
2
√
π
_
−
x +a
ξ
_
−
1
4
exp
_
−
2
3
_
−
x +a
ξ
_3
2
_
(505)
in the classically forbidden region (x < − a). However, to be an eigenfunction,
the wave function must also satisfy the boundary condition of eqn(496) at x = 0.
Hence, one requires
Ai
_
−
a
n
ξ
_
= 0 (506)
The boundary condition determines the allowed values of the turning point
a which are labeled by a
n
, or equivalently, by using eqn(498), the boundary
condition determines the energy eigenvalue E
n
. The asymptotic large n values
of the ratio is given by the formula
a
n
ξ
=
_
3 π
8
( 4 n − 1 )
_2
3
(507)
This approximate formula is quite accurate even for n = 1, as can be seen from
Table(1). For large n, the zeros vary sublinearly as a
n
∼ n
2
3
. Hence, the
asymptotic form of the energy eigenvalues is given by
E
n
=
_
¯h
2
F
2
2 m
_1
3
_
3 π
8
( 4 n − 1 )
_2
3
(508)
so the level spacing decreases with increasing n. The ﬁrst few wave functions
are shown in ﬁg(23).
——————————————————————————————————
3.5.6 Exercise 36
Find the momentum representation of the kinetic energy operator
ˆ
T =
ˆ p
2
2 m
starting from the known expression in the real space or position representation
ˆ
T = −
¯h
2
2 m
∇
2
(509)
122
Table 1: The ﬁrst few zeros of the Airy function.
n a
n
/ ξ a
n
/ ξ
(exact value) (asymptotic)
1 2.338 2.320
2 4.088 4.082
3 5.521 5.517
4 6.787 6.784
5 7.944 7.942
6 9.023 9.021
7 10.040 10.039
8 11.009 11.008
9 11.936 11.935
The lowest energy eigenfunctions
0.6
0.4
0.2
0
0.2
0.4
0.6
0.8
10 8 6 4 2 0
x/ξ
φ
n
(
x
)
φ
1
(x)
φ
2
(x)
φ
3
(x)
Figure 23: The x dependence of the ﬁrst few eigenfunctions. The wave functions
are nonzero in the region x < 0. The wave functions decay beyond the classical
turning points and are zero for x > 0.
——————————————————————————————————
123
3.5.7 Exercise 37
Starting from the real space representation of the pseudovector angular mo
mentum operator
ˆ
L = ˆr ∧ ˆ p, acting on a wave function, ﬁnd the momentum
representation of the operator through integration by parts.
——————————————————————————————————
3.5.8 Exercise 38
Find a momentum space representation for the Hamiltonian of a particle mov
ing in three dimensions, in the presence of an electrostatic potential φ(ˆ r). Also
write the explicit expression that occurs when the potential produces a uniform
electric ﬁeld E(r, t) = E
0
. Find the momentum space eigenfunctions for this
particular Hamiltonian.
Potential due to a Uniform Force Field
12
6
0
6
4 2 0 2 4 6 8 10 12
x
V
(
x
)
V(x) =  F x
E
Figure 24: The potential V (x) = − F x, which gives rise to a unform force
ﬁeld F. The energy E is denoted by a horizontal line.
——————————————————————————————————
124
Realspace energy eigenfunction
of a particle moving in a uniform field
2
1
0
1
2
4 2 0 2 4 6 8 10 12
x
Ψ
(
x
)
Figure 25: The real space wave function Ψ(x) of a particle of mass m and energy
E moving in a uniform force ﬁeld.
3.5.9 Solution 38
The Hamiltonian in the momentum representation has the form
ˆ
H =
p
2
2 m
− i ¯h F
∂
∂p
(510)
The energy eigenvalue equation is
_
p
2
2 m
− i ¯h F
∂
∂p
_
Φ(p) = E Φ(p) (511)
and has the solution
Φ(p) = C exp
_
−
i
¯h F
_
p
3
6 m
− p E
_ _
(512)
whence the real space wave function is found as
Ψ(x) =
2 C
√
2 π ¯h
_
∞
0
dp cos
_
p
3
6 m ¯h F
−
p ( F x + E )
¯h F
_
(513)
——————————————————————————————————
125
3.5.10 Exercise 39
Find the two lowest energy eigenvalues and eigenfunctions for a onedimensional
harmonic oscillator, in the momentum representation.
——————————————————————————————————
3.5.11 Solution 39
The normalized ground state wave function for the onedimensional Harmonic
oscillator is given by
ψ
0
(x) =
_
m ω
π ¯h
_1
4
exp
_
−
m ω x
2
2 ¯h
_
(514)
The momentum space wave function φ
0
(p) is given by the Fourier transform
φ
0
(p) =
_
1
√
2 π ¯h
_ _
∞
−∞
dx exp
_
− i
p x
¯h
_
ψ
0
(x) (515)
which is evaluated by completing the square and integrating
φ
0
(p) =
_
1
π ¯h m ω
_1
4
exp
_
−
p
2
2 ¯h m ω
_
(516)
The momentum space wave function is properly normalized, thus P(p) =
[ φ
0
(p) [
2
is the probability density for ﬁnding the particle with momentum
p. It is notable that the most probable value of the momentum is zero, as the
classical particle would be at rest.
The normalized ﬁrst excited state wave function is given by
ψ
1
(x) =
_
2
√
π
_1
2
_
m ω
¯h
_3
4
x exp
_
−
m ω x
2
2 ¯h
_
(517)
The momentum space wave function is evaluated as
φ
1
(p) =
_
2
√
π
_1
2
_
1
¯h m ω
_3
4
p exp
_
−
p
2
2 ¯h m ω
_
(518)
which is also properly normalized. It should be noted that the most probable
values of p is nonzero, as in the excited state the classical particle has ﬁnite
values of the momentum.
——————————————————————————————————
126
3.5.12 Exercise 40
Prove that the overlap matrix between two diﬀerent states Ψ(r) and ψ(r) in
position representation are related via
_
d
3
r Ψ
∗
(r) ψ(r) =
_
d
3
p Φ
∗
(p) φ(p) (519)
to the corresponding wave functions, Φ(p) and ψ(p), in the momentum space
representation.
——————————————————————————————————
All observable physical quantities can be expressed in terms of matrix ele
ments of operators.
——————————————————————————————————
3.5.13 Solution 40
On evaluating the integral
_
d
3
p Φ
∗
(p) φ(p) (520)
by using the transform
φ(p) =
_
1
2 π ¯h
_3
2
_
d
3
r exp
_
− i
p . r
¯h
_
ψ(r) (521)
and the complex conjugate
Φ
∗
(p) =
_
1
2 π ¯h
_3
2
_
d
3
r
exp
_
+ i
p . r
¯h
_
Ψ
∗
(r
) (522)
one has
_
1
2 π ¯h
_
3
_
d
3
r
_
d
3
r
_
d
3
p exp
_
i
( r
− r ) . p
¯h
_
Ψ
∗
(r
) ψ(r) (523)
Since the integral over all space leads to the threedimensional Dirac delta func
tion
_
1
2 π ¯h
_
3
_
d
3
p exp
_
i
( r
− r ) . p
¯h
_
= δ
3
( r
− r ) (524)
the overlap between the states is given by
_
d
3
p Φ
∗
(p) φ(p) =
_
d
3
r
_
d
3
r
Ψ
∗
(r
) δ( r
− r ) ψ(r)
=
_
d
3
r Ψ
∗
(r) ψ(r) (525)
127
as was to be shown.
——————————————————————————————————
3.5.14 Exercise 41
Consider the following matrix elements in the position representation
_
d
3
r Ψ
∗
(r)
_
− i ¯h
_
∇ ψ(r) (526)
and _
d
3
r Ψ
∗
(r) r ψ(r) (527)
Find the equivalent expressions in the momentum space representation.
——————————————————————————————————
3.5.15 Solution 41
Starting with the expression
_
d
3
r Ψ
∗
(r)
_
− i ¯h
_
∇ ψ(r) (528)
and substituting the expressions for the Fourier Transformed wave functions
− i ¯h
_
d
3
r
(2π¯h)
3
_
d
3
p
exp[ − i
p
. r
¯h
] Φ
∗
(p
) ∇
_
d
3
p exp[ + i
p . r
¯h
] φ(p)
=
_
d
3
r
(2π¯h)
3
_
d
3
p
exp[ − i
p
. r
¯h
] Φ
∗
(p
)
_
d
3
p p exp[ + i
p . r
¯h
] φ(p)
(529)
Then on interchanging the orders of integration and on recognizing the expres
sion for the Dirac delta function
δ
3
( p − p
) =
_
d
3
r
( 2 π ¯h )
3
exp
_
i
( p − p
) . r
¯h
_
(530)
one has
_
d
3
r Ψ
∗
(r)
_
− i ¯h
_
∇ ψ(r) =
_
d
3
p Φ
∗
(p) p φ(p) (531)
128
The procedure for evaluating the matrix elements of the position operator
is quite analogous. Starting with the expression
_
d
3
r Ψ
∗
(r) r ∇ ψ(r) (532)
and substituting the expressions for the Fourier Transformed wave functions
_
d
3
r
(2π¯h)
3
_
d
3
p
exp[ − i
p
. r
¯h
] Φ
∗
(p
) r
_
d
3
p exp[ + i
p . r
¯h
] φ(p)
= − i ¯h
_
d
3
r
(2π¯h)
3
_
d
3
p
exp[ − i
p
. r
¯h
] Φ
∗
(p
)
_
d
3
p φ(p) ∇
p
exp[ + i
p . r
¯h
]
(533)
Integrating by parts with respect to p, and as the boundary term is zero, we
ﬁnd
= + i ¯h
_
d
3
r
(2π¯h)
3
_
d
3
p
exp[ − i
p
. r
¯h
] Φ
∗
(p
)
_
d
3
p exp[ + i
p . r
¯h
] ∇
p
φ(p)
(534)
Then on interchanging the orders of integration and on recognizing the expres
sion for the Dirac delta function
δ
3
( p − p
) =
_
d
3
r
( 2 π ¯h )
3
exp
_
i
( p − p
) . r
¯h
_
(535)
one has _
d
3
r Ψ
∗
(r) r ψ(r) = + i ¯h
_
d
3
p Φ
∗
(p) ∇
p
φ(p) (536)
which completes the solution. We see that the matrix elements between the
wave functions and operators in the real space representation have identical val
ues to the equivalent expressions in the momentum representation.
——————————————————————————————————
3.5.16 Commuting Operators and Compatibility
If two operators
ˆ
A and
ˆ
B commute, [
ˆ
A ,
ˆ
B ] = 0, these operators are com
patible in the sense that it is possible to ﬁnd functions that are simultaneously
eigenfunctions of
ˆ
A and
ˆ
B.
The proof is simple if the eigenfunctions of the operator
ˆ
Aare nondegenerate.
In this case, the eigenfunctions of
ˆ
A satisfy
ˆ
A φ
a
(r) = a φ
a
(r) (537)
129
Taking the matrix elements of the commutator of
ˆ
A and
ˆ
B, one has
_
d
3
r φ
∗
a
(r) [
ˆ
A ,
ˆ
B ] φ
a
(r) = 0 (538)
which is evaluated as
( a
− a )
_
d
3
r φ
∗
a
(r)
ˆ
B φ
a
(r) = 0 (539)
Thus, the operator
ˆ
B only has nonzero matrix elements between states of the
same eigenvalue a = a
. Since by assumption the eigenfunctions of
ˆ
A are non
degenerate and form a complete set, the eigenfunctions of
ˆ
A are simultaneously
eigenfunctions of
ˆ
B.
The converse is that, if there are simultaneous eigenfunctions of the two
operators
ˆ
A and
ˆ
B, then the operators commute. By deﬁnition one has,
ˆ
A φ
n
(r) = a
n
φ
n
(r)
ˆ
B φ
n
(r) = b
n
φ
n
(r) (540)
Then, the action of the commutator on the wave function is zero as
ˆ
A
ˆ
B φ
n
(r) =
ˆ
A b
n
φ
n
(r)
= a
n
b
n
φ
n
(r)
=
ˆ
B a
n
φ
n
(r)
=
ˆ
B
ˆ
A φ
n
(r) (541)
and since an arbitrary wave function Ψ(r) can be expanded in terms of φ
n
(r)
the commutator is identically zero.
Clearly an example of two commuting operators is given by any operator
ˆ
A
and any function f(
ˆ
A) with a Taylor expansion,
[
ˆ
A , f(
ˆ
A) ] = 0 (542)
The operators
ˆ
A and f(
ˆ
A) do not form an independent set, as one can be
expressed in terms of the other members of the set. Alternatively if
ˆ
A and
ˆ
B
commute then
[ g(
ˆ
A) , f(
ˆ
B) ] = 0 (543)
An example of an independent set of commuting operators is given by any of
the Hermitean operators ˆ p
z
, ˆ p
y
or ˆ p
x
, or alternatively ˆr
z
, ˆr
y
or ˆr
x
. The degen
eracy of simultaneous eigenvalues of a set of operators is equal to the number
of eigenfunctions corresponding to the set of eigenvalues.
A complete set of commuting operators is deﬁned to be a maximal set of
independent commuting Hermitean operators. Any state can be uniquely ex
panded in terms of the eigenfunctions of a complete set of commuting Hermitean
130
operators. What exactly constitutes a complete set of operators depends upon
the physical space, i.e. whether it is onedimensional, twodimensional or three
dimensional, and whether there is an intrinsic space associated with the particle
such as spin. If the set is not complete then one can add another independent op
erator to the set until the set becomes complete. A state which corresponds to an
eigenfunction of a complete set of commuting operators is uniquely determined
and is completely deﬁned without any remaining arbitrariness. By successively
adding operators to a set of independent commuting operators, one has reduced
the degeneracy until the simultaneous eigenvalues are nondegenerate and the
set of operators is complete.
3.5.17 NonCommuting Operators
It is impossible to ﬁnd a set of simultaneous eigenfunctions of noncommuting
operators. Thus, if
[
ˆ
A ,
ˆ
B ] =
ˆ
C (544)
and if φ(r) is a simultaneous eigenfunction then
[
ˆ
A ,
ˆ
B ] φ(r) =
ˆ
C φ(r) = 0 (545)
This would require that φ(r) is also an simultaneous eigenfunction of
ˆ
C with
eigenvalue zero, which is very restrictive and very unlikely. Thus, it is impossible
to know the values of A and B at the same time if they are noncommuting. An
example of this is given by the momentum and position operators corresponding
to the same coordinate, ˆ p
x
and ˆ r
x
.
——————————————————————————————————
3.5.18 Exercise 42
Show that if
ˆ
A and
ˆ
B are Hermitean operators and
[
ˆ
A ,
ˆ
B ] = i
ˆ
C (546)
then
ˆ
C is Hermitean.
——————————————————————————————————
3.5.19 Solution 42
Consider the matrix elements of the commutator
_
d
3
r Φ
∗
(r) [
ˆ
A ,
ˆ
B ] Ψ(r) =
_
d
3
r Φ
∗
(r)
ˆ
A
ˆ
B Ψ(r) −
_
d
3
r Φ
∗
(r)
ˆ
B
ˆ
A Ψ(r)
(547)
131
On using the deﬁnition of the Hermitean conjugate of the products, we ﬁnd
=
_ _
d
3
r Ψ
∗
(r)
ˆ
B
†
ˆ
A
†
Φ(r)
_
∗
−
_ _
d
3
r Φ
∗
(r)
ˆ
A
†
ˆ
B
†
Ψ(r)
_
∗
(548)
and as
ˆ
A and
ˆ
B are Hermitean, one has
= −
_ _
d
3
r Ψ
∗
(r) [
ˆ
A ,
ˆ
B ] Φ(r)
_
∗
(549)
Hence, the Hermitean conjugate of the commutator is
[
ˆ
A ,
ˆ
B ]
†
= − [
ˆ
A ,
ˆ
B ] (550)
so
_
i
ˆ
C
_
†
= −
_
i
ˆ
C
_
(551)
and as the Hermitean conjugate of i is − i , we have
− i
ˆ
C
†
= − i
ˆ
C (552)
Thus, we recognize
ˆ
C as being Hermitean.
——————————————————————————————————
3.5.20 The Uncertainty Principle
The Heisenberg uncertainty relation provides a quantiﬁcation of the degree to
which one can determine the values of two noncommuting Hermitean opera
tors,
ˆ
A and
ˆ
B in a speciﬁc state Ψ(r).
Consider the deviations ∆
ˆ
A and ∆
ˆ
B and form the positive deﬁnite quantity
n
¸
¸
¸
¸
_
d
3
r Ψ
∗
(r)
_
∆
ˆ
A + i µ ∆
ˆ
B
_
φ
n
(r)
¸
¸
¸
¸
2
≥ 0 (553)
where µ is a real variable, and φ
n
(r) form a complete set of eigenfunctions. On
using the completeness relation, one ﬁnds
=
_
d
3
r Ψ
∗
(r)
_
∆
ˆ
A + i µ ∆
ˆ
B
_ _
∆
ˆ
A − i µ ∆
ˆ
B
_
Ψ(r)
=
_
d
3
r Ψ
∗
(r)
_
∆
ˆ
A
2
+ i µ [ ∆
ˆ
B , ∆
ˆ
A ] + µ
2
∆
ˆ
B
2
_
Ψ(r) (554)
and since this has no zeros as a function of µ, the discriminant of this quadratic
equation in µ must be greater than zero. Hence,
4
_
d
3
r Ψ
∗
(r) ∆
ˆ
A
2
Ψ(r)
_
d
3
r
Ψ
∗
(r
) ∆
ˆ
B
2
Ψ(r
)
≥
_ _
d
3
r Ψ
∗
(r) i [ ∆
ˆ
A , ∆
ˆ
B ] Ψ(r)
_
2
(555)
132
Thus, we have the Heisenberg uncertainty relation
2 ∆A
rms
∆B
rms
≥
¸
¸
¸
¸
_
d
3
r Ψ
∗
(r) i [
ˆ
A ,
ˆ
B ] Ψ(r)
¸
¸
¸
¸
(556)
The equality only holds if the eﬀects of the operators on the state Ψ(r) are
proportional to each other. This can be seen by examining eqn(553) with the
equality sign holding. This implies that, if the equality holds, the sums of the
squares of the matrix elements
_
d
3
r φ
∗
n
(r)
_
∆
ˆ
A − i µ ∆
ˆ
B
_
Ψ(r) (557)
must be zero for all n. If we expand the transformed state
_
∆
ˆ
A − i µ ∆
ˆ
B
_
Ψ
in terms of φ
n
_
∆
ˆ
A − i µ ∆
ˆ
B
_
Ψ(r) =
n
C
n
φ
n
(r) (558)
then we recognize that we just proved that if the equality is to hold C
n
= 0
for all n. The completeness condition then implies that we have the expansion
of the zero state, so
_
∆
ˆ
A − i µ ∆
ˆ
B
_
Ψ(r) = 0 (559)
when the equality holds. The value of the constant, µ, can be obtained from
the inequality by noting that if the equality holds, then as ∆B
2
rms
> 0 the
value of µ must be a repeated root. On solving the quadratic equation for the
repeated root, we ﬁnd
µ = i
_
d
3
r Ψ
∗
(r) [
ˆ
A ,
ˆ
B ] Ψ(r)
2 ∆B
2
rms
(560)
Hence, on substituting the value of µ back we have the equation
∆
ˆ
A Ψ(r) =
__
d
3
r Ψ
∗
(r) [
ˆ
A ,
ˆ
B ] Ψ(r)
2 ∆B
2
rms
_
∆
ˆ
B Ψ(r) (561)
This equation is satisﬁed for the state Ψ(r) which produces the minimum un
certainty in ∆A and ∆B.
Applying the uncertainty relation to the canonically conjugate coordinates
and momenta, we have the inequality
∆p
i rms
∆r
j rms
≥
¯h
2
δ
i,j
(562)
133
in which the right hand side is independent of the state of the system. The
minimum uncertainty equation takes the form
_
− i ¯h
∂
∂x
− p
x
_
Ψ(x) =
i ¯h
2 ∆x
2
rms
_
x − x
_
Ψ(x) (563)
which has the solution
Ψ(x) =
_
2 π ∆x
2
rms
_
−
1
4
exp
_
−
_
x − x
_
2
4 ∆x
2
rms
+ i
p
x
x
¯h
_
(564)
——————————————————————————————————
3.5.21 Exercise 43
Consider a particle moving in one dimension in the presence of a potential V (x).
Show that the uncertainty in the energy and position are related via
∆E
rms
∆x
rms
=
¯h
2 m
p (565)
——————————————————————————————————
3.5.22 Solution 43
The Hamiltonian is given by
ˆ
H =
ˆ p
2
2 m
+ V (ˆ x) (566)
The commutator of
ˆ
H and ˆ x is found as
[
ˆ
H , ˆ x ] = − i
¯h
m
ˆ p (567)
Then on using the generalized uncertainty principle, one has
∆E
rms
∆x
rms
=
¯h
2 m
p (568)
as was to be proved.
——————————————————————————————————
134
3.5.23 Exercise 44
Derive uncertainty relations for the various components of the orbital angular
momenta. For what states is it possible to measure
ˆ
L
x
and
ˆ
L
y
simultaneously
with minimum uncertainty?
——————————————————————————————————
3.5.24 Solution 44
From the commutation relation
[
ˆ
L
x
,
ˆ
L
y
] = i ¯h
ˆ
L
z
(569)
one has the uncertainty relation
( ∆L
x
)
rms
( ∆L
y
)
rms
≥
¯h
2
L
z
(570)
Thus, it is possible to measure
ˆ
L
x
and
ˆ
L
y
with minimum uncertainty in
states Ψ(r) where the average value of
ˆ
L
z
is zero
L
z
=
_
d
3
r Ψ
∗
(r)
ˆ
L
z
Ψ(r) = 0 (571)
In particular, the state with total angular momentum zero is a simultaneous
eigenstate of
ˆ
L
x
,
ˆ
L
y
and
ˆ
L
z
, with all three eigenvalues being zero.
——————————————————————————————————
3.5.25 Exercise 45
If the Hermitean operators
ˆ
A ,
ˆ
B and
ˆ
C satisfy the commutation relations
[
ˆ
B ,
ˆ
C ] = i
ˆ
A
[
ˆ
A ,
ˆ
C ] = i
ˆ
B (572)
then show that the uncertainty relation
∆( A B )
rms
∆C
rms
≥
1
2
_
A
2
+ B
2
_
(573)
is satisﬁed.
——————————————————————————————————
135
3.5.26 Solution 45
This exercise is a simple example of the uncertainty principle. The commutator
of the composite operator
ˆ
A
ˆ
B with
ˆ
C is evaluated as
[
ˆ
A
ˆ
B ,
ˆ
C ] =
ˆ
A [
ˆ
B ,
ˆ
C ] + [
ˆ
A ,
ˆ
C ]
ˆ
B
= i
_
ˆ
A
2
+
ˆ
B
2
_
(574)
Hence, on substituting into the general statement of the uncertainty principle,
one obtains the result
∆( A B )
rms
∆C
rms
≥
1
2
_
A
2
+ B
2
_
(575)
which was to be proved.
——————————————————————————————————
3.5.27 Exercise 46
Show that the z component of the angular momentum
ˆ
L
z
and the azimuthal
angle ϕ satisfy the commutation relations
[
ˆ
L
z
, cos ϕ ] = + i ¯h sin ϕ
[
ˆ
L
z
, sin ϕ ] = − i ¯h cos ϕ (576)
Hence, derive the uncertainty relations
∆(cos ϕ) ∆L
z
≥
¯h
2
sin ϕ
∆(sin ϕ) ∆L
z
≥
¯h
2
cos ϕ (577)
——————————————————————————————————
3.5.28 Solution 46
The uncertainty relations applied to the azimuthal angle are problematic, since
it is not clear whether the angle ϕ is really only well deﬁned modulo 2π. An angle
ϕ cannot be distinguished by a single physical measurement from ϕ + m 2 π
where m is an integer. If, on the other hand, ϕ is considered to be deﬁned only
on the restricted interval (0, 2π) then the uncertainty principle for ϕ and
ˆ
L
z
would read
(∆ϕ)
rms
(∆L
z
)
rms
>
¯h
2
(578)
136
2
1
0
1
2
2 1 0 1 2
x
y
sin φ φφ φ
cos φ φφ φ
φ φφ φ
Figure 26: The azimuthal angle ϕ of a point on a unit circle.
which would imply that either there are no eigenstates of
ˆ
L
z
, which is false, or
that the uncertainty of ϕ can be inﬁnite, which is contrary to our assumption.
The only way out of this quandry is to assert that an angle is not measurable,
but that only the coordinates sin ϕ or cos ϕ are measurable. These functions
uniquely deﬁne ϕ modulo 2 π. We need to restrict our attention to functions
and operators which are periodic in ϕ since
ˆ
L
z
is only Hermitean on the space
of functions which are periodic in ϕ.
The commutation relations for the coordinates and angular momentum are
evaluated as
[
ˆ
L
z
, cos ϕ ] = i ¯h sin ϕ
[
ˆ
L
z
, sin ϕ ] = − i ¯h cos ϕ (579)
Simple substitution into the uncertainty relation leads to the equations
( ∆L
z
)
2
( ∆cos ϕ )
2
≥
¯h
2
4
_
sin ϕ
_
2
( ∆L
z
)
2
( ∆sin ϕ )
2
≥
¯h
2
4
_
cos ϕ
_
2
(580)
137
The above equation does not produce any contradiction with the fact that
Φ
m
(ϕ) =
1
√
2 π
exp
_
i m ϕ
_
(581)
are eigenstates of
ˆ
L
z
since the expectation value of the trigonometric functions
cos ϕ and sin ϕ are both zero. In this case, one ﬁnds that the uncertainty rela
tions reduce to the equality 0 = 0.
——————————————————————————————————
138
3.6 The Philosophy of Measurement
In Quantum Mechanics the measurement process disturbs the system and is,
therefore, represented by an operator. The measurement of A produces instan
taneous changes from one state, say Ψ(r) of the system to another. The state
of the system immediately after the measurement is that which corresponds to
an eigenstate of the operator
ˆ
A which has the eigenvalue that corresponds to
the result of the measurement a. Prior to the measurement, and the discovery
of the result a, it is impossible to predict which eigenstate the system will take.
All that can be predicted is the probability that the measurement will result
in a particular eigenvalue a. This probability is proportional to the squared
modulus of the expansion coeﬃcient C
a
Ψ(r) =
a
C
a
φ
a
(r) (582)
Thus, one can view quantum mechanical measurement as a sort of ﬁlter, which
instantaneously ﬁlters out the state φ
a
(r) from the initial state of the system
Ψ(r). Since this resulting state after the measurement is represented as a pure
eigenfunction of
ˆ
A, it has only one expansion coeﬃcient. Therefore, there is a
probability of one for ﬁnding the result a in a further measurement of
ˆ
A, as long
as this measurement is made very soon after the ﬁrst measurement was made.
——————————————————————————————————
Example
The Hermitean operators
ˆ
A and
ˆ
B do not commute. The operator
ˆ
A has
two nondegenerate eigenstates and eigenvalues given by
ˆ
A Φ
i
(r) = a
i
Φ
i
(r) (583)
for i = 1 , 2. The operator
ˆ
B also has two nondegenerate eigenstates
ˆ
B Θ
i
(r) = b
i
Θ
i
(r) (584)
for i = 1 , 2. The state Φ
1
(r) can be expressed as a linear superposition of
the eigenstates Θ
i
(r), as
Φ
1
(r) = C
1
Θ
1
(r) + C
2
Θ
2
(r) (585)
where C
1
and C
2
are known complex constants.
(i) Find an expression for Φ
2
(r) in terms of the Θ
i
(r), and determine the
expansion coeﬃcients in terms of the known quantities C
i
.
A quantum mechanical particle is in a state Ψ(r) given by
Ψ(r) =
_
1
6
Φ
1
(r) +
_
5
6
Φ
2
(r) (586)
139
(ii) Determine the probabilities of ﬁnding the results a
1
and a
2
in a mea
surement of
ˆ
A. The quantity
ˆ
B is then measured immediately after
ˆ
A has been
measured. What is the probability that the measurement of
ˆ
B yields the result
b
1
?
(iii) If the measurement of
ˆ
A had not been performed, what is the probabil
ity that the measurement of
ˆ
B will result in the measured value b
1
?
——————————————————————————————————
Solution
Since
ˆ
B is Hermitean the eigenstates of
ˆ
A can be expanded in terms of the
eigenstates of
ˆ
B. The eigenstate Φ
1
(r) is expanded as
Φ
1
(r) = C
1
Θ
1
(r) + C
2
Θ
2
(r) (587)
and Φ
2
(r) can be expanded in terms of the complete set of Θ
i
(r) as
Φ
2
(r) = D
1
Θ
1
(r) + D
2
Θ
2
(r) (588)
where D
1
and D
2
are to be determined. As Φ
2
(r) must be orthogonal to Φ
1
(r),
then
0 =
_
d
3
r Φ
∗
1
(r) Φ
2
(r)
= C
∗
1
D
1
_
d
3
r Θ
∗
1
(r) Θ
1
(r) + C
∗
1
D
2
_
d
3
r Θ
∗
1
(r) Θ
2
(r)
+ C
∗
2
D
1
_
d
3
r Θ
∗
2
(r) Θ
1
(r) + C
∗
2
D
2
_
d
3
r Θ
∗
2
(r) Θ
2
(r)
(589)
Since Θ
1
(r) and Θ
2
(r) form an orthonormal set, one has
0 = C
∗
1
D
1
+ C
∗
2
D
2
(590)
Also, as the states are normalized to unity, one has
[ C
1
[
2
+ [ C
2
[
2
= [ D
1
[
2
+ [ D
2
[
2
= 1 (591)
and so the unknown constants D
i
are found as
D
1
= − C
∗
2
D
2
= C
∗
1
(592)
up to an arbitrary common phase. Hence, we have
Φ
2
(r) = − C
∗
2
Θ
1
(r) + C
∗
1
Θ
2
(r) (593)
140
A measurement of
ˆ
A on the state
Ψ(r) =
_
1
6
Φ
1
(r) +
_
5
6
Φ
2
(r) (594)
yields the result a
1
with probability P(a
1
) =
1
6
and the result a
2
occurs with
probability P(a
2
) =
5
6
.
If the measurement
ˆ
A has been performed and the result a
1
has been found,
the system then is in the state Φ
1
(r). The conditional probability that a subse
quent measurement of
ˆ
B yields the result b
1
is given by
P(a
1
[b
1
) = [ C
1
[
2
(595)
and the conditional probability that the measurement of
ˆ
B yields the result b
2
is given by
P(a
1
[b
2
) = [ C
2
[
2
(596)
However, if on the other hand the result of the ﬁrst measurement is a
2
,
the system is in state Φ
2
(r) just after the ﬁrst measurement. The conditional
probability that a subsequent measurement of
ˆ
B yields the result b
1
is given by
P(a
2
[b
1
) = [ C
2
[
2
(597)
and the conditional probability that the measurement of
ˆ
B yields the result b
2
is given by
P(a
2
[b
2
) = [ C
1
[
2
(598)
The total probability that the second measurement of
ˆ
B will result in the
value b
1
, no matter what value of
ˆ
A is measured, is given by
P(A[b
1
) =
1
6
[ C
1
[
2
+
5
6
[ C
2
[
2
(599)
If the measurement of
ˆ
B is performed directly on the state Ψ, then as
Ψ(r) =
_
_
1
6
C
1
−
_
5
6
C
∗
2
_
Θ
1
(r) +
_
_
5
6
C
2
+
_
1
6
C
∗
1
_
Θ
2
(r) (600)
the result b
1
occurs with probability
P(b
1
) =
¸
¸
¸
¸
_
1
6
C
1
−
_
5
6
C
∗
2
¸
¸
¸
¸
2
(601)
141
The probability P(b
1
) is not the same as P(A[b
1
) as the measurement of
ˆ
A
disturbs the system.
——————————————————————————————————
The time evolution of a system between two successive instants of time is
governed by the Schr¨odinger equation, as long as no measurements are made
on the system in the time interval between the two times. In order to solve
the Schr¨odinger equation, which is a ﬁrst order diﬀerential equation in the time
variable, it is necessary to have one initial condition for the wave function. This
is usually given by the state of the system at the initial time t
0
, Ψ(r, t
0
). Once
the initial condition is known, the Schr¨odinger equation will predict how the
state evolves with time until a measurement (say a measurement of
ˆ
A) is per
formed on the system. Let us assume that the measurement occurs at time t
1
.
The measurement at t
1
disrupts the evolution process, and sends the system
into an eigenstate of the measurement operator with a deﬁnite eigenvalue. The
value of the eigenvalue is the result of the measurement. The probability of
getting the result a, depends on the expansion coeﬃcient of the state Ψ(r, t
1
).
After the measurement, the system has an new initial state at t
1
which is φ
a
(r).
This new initial state should be used in the Schr¨odinger equation to predict
the subsequent evolution of the system from t
1
to later times t
2
, as long as
no other measurements occur in this time interval. If there is a second mea
surement (such as a measurement represented by
ˆ
B), the process repeats. The
system evolves forward from the time of the second measurement according to
the Schr¨odinger equation, and the result of the second measurement provides
the new initial condition at the time of the latest measurement.
——————————————————————————————————
3.6.1 Exercise 47
A particle moving in three dimensions is in a quantum mechanical state de
scribed by a wave function
Ψ(r) = C exp
_
− α r
2
_
(602)
in the presence of a spherically symmetric potential. The Hamiltonian is given
by the operator
ˆ
H = −
¯h
2
2 m
∇
2
+
m ω
2
2
r
2
(603)
The energy of the state is measured. Find the probability that the system is in
the ground state E
0
=
3
2
¯h ω, where the ground state wave function φ
0
(r) is
given by
φ
0
(r) =
_
m ω
¯h π
_3
4
exp
_
−
m ω r
2
2 ¯h
_
(604)
142
Determine the probability that the system is found to be in an excited state.
What is the probability that the above system is found to be in a state φ
1
(r)
corresponding to E
1
=
5
2
¯h ω, where
φ
1
(r) = ( 2 π )
1
2
_
m ω
¯h π
_5
4
r cos θ exp
_
−
m ω r
2
2 ¯h
_
(605)
which is also an eigenstate of angular momentum l = 1.
——————————————————————————————————
3.6.2 Solution 47
The normalization constant for Ψ(r) is found from the equation
1 =
_
d
3
r [ Ψ(r) [
2
= [ C [
2
_
d
3
r exp
_
−2 α r
2
_
= [ C [
2
_
2 π
0
dϕ
_
π
0
dθ sin θ
_
∞
0
dr r
2
exp
_
−2 α r
2
_
= [ C [
2
4 π
_
∞
0
dr r
2
exp
_
− 2 α r
2
_
(606)
Hence,
[ C [ =
_
2 α
π
_3
4
(607)
The wave function Ψ(r) can be expanded in terms of the eigenfunctions of
ˆ
H,
which are the φ
n
(r). Since the wave functions are normalized, the probability
that a measurement of
ˆ
H will result in the value E
0
is given by the modulus
square of the expansion coeﬃcient. The expansion coeﬃcient for the state φ
0
(r)
is found from the overlap
_
d
3
r φ
∗
0
(r) Ψ(r) = 4 π [ C [
2
_
m ω
¯h π
_3
2
_
∞
0
dr r
2
exp
_
− ( α +
m ω
2 ¯h
) r
2
_
=
_
4 α
m ω
2 ¯ h
( α +
m ω
2 ¯ h
)
2
_3
4
(608)
The probability that the system is found in the ground state is given by
P
0
=
_
4 α
m ω
2 ¯ h
( α +
m ω
2 ¯ h
)
2
_3
2
(609)
143
and the probability that the system ends up in an excited state is given by
P
exc
= 1 − P
0
= 1 −
_
4 α
m ω
2 ¯ h
( α +
m ω
2 ¯ h
)
2
_3
2
(610)
Note that if α has the value
α =
m ω
2 ¯h
(611)
then the probability that the system will undergo a transition to a diﬀerent
eigenstate when
ˆ
H is measured is zero. That is, the system is already in an
eigenstate of
ˆ
H with eigenvalue E
0
and any subsequent measurements of
ˆ
H
(but only if inﬁnitesimally small times have elapsed since Ψ(r) was created) will
yield the same result E
0
.
The probability that the system ends up in the excited state φ
1
(r) is zero,
since on evaluating the expansion coeﬃcient one ﬁnds
_
d
3
r φ
∗
0
(r) Ψ(r)
= ( 2 π )
3
2
[ C [
_
m ω
π ¯h
_5
4
_
π
0
dθ sin θ cos θ
_
∞
0
dr r
3
exp
_
− ( α +
m ω
2 ¯h
) r
2
_
= 0 (612)
since the integral over θ vanishes identically. The vanishing of this matrix ele
ment is a natural consequence of the conservation of angular momentum for a
spherically symmetric potential. The initial state is an eigenstate of the square
of the angular momentum,
´
L
2
, with eigenvalue zero, and is also an eigenstate
of the z component of the angular momentum operator with eigenvalue zero.
The state φ
1
(r) is an eigenstate of the square of the angular momentum
´
L
2
with eigenvalue 2 ¯h
2
and is an eigenstate of the z component of the angular
momentum with angular momentum zero. Thus, these states correspond to
eigenstates of
´
L
2
with diﬀerent eigenvalues. The overlap is zero because states
corresponding to diﬀerent eigenvalues of Hermitean operators are orthogonal.
——————————————————————————————————
3.6.3 Exercise 48
The initial state of a system is represented by the wave function
Ψ(r) =
_
m ω
¯h π
_3
4
exp
_
−
m ω ( r − a )
2
2 ¯h
_
(613)
where a = ˆ e
z
a. What is the probability that after an energy measurement
the system will be found in the energy eigenstates φ
0
(r) and φ
1
(r) given below?
144
The state φ
0
(r) is given by
φ
0
(r) =
_
m ω
¯h π
_3
4
exp
_
−
m ω r
2
2 ¯h
_
(614)
which is a simultaneous eigenstate of energy E
0
= 3/2 ¯h ω and of angular
momentum with l = 0. The state φ
1
(r) is given by
φ
1
(r) = ( 2 π )
1
2
_
m ω
¯h π
_5
4
r cos θ exp
_
−
m ω r
2
2 ¯h
_
(615)
which is an eigenstate of energy E
1
= 5/2 ¯hω and is an eigenstate of angular
momentum with l = 1 and m = 0.
——————————————————————————————————
3.6.4 Solution 48
The probability that the system initially in the state Ψ(r) is found in an eigen
state with energy E
n
is found from the eigenstate expansion
Ψ(r) =
n
C
n
φ
n
(r) (616)
as
P(E
n
) = [ C
n
[
2
(617)
where
C
n
=
_
d
3
r φ
∗
n
(r) Ψ(r) (618)
The expansion coeﬃcient C
0
is found as
C
0
=
_
d
3
r
_
m ω
π ¯h
_3
2
exp
_
−
m ω
2 ¯h
(r −
a
2
)
2
_
exp
_
−
m ω
2 ¯h
(r +
a
2
)
2
_
= exp
_
−
m ω
4 ¯h
a
2
_
(619)
Thus, we ﬁnd that the probability of ﬁnding the result E
0
if the energy of state
Ψ(r) is measured is given by
P(E
0
)
l=0
= exp
_
−
m ω
2 ¯h
a
2
_
(620)
which decreases exponentially with increasing a.
145
The expansion coeﬃcient C
1
is determined from
C
1
= ( 2 π )
1
2
_
d
3
r
_
m ω
π ¯h
_
2
( z +
a
z
2
) exp
_
−
m ω
¯h
( r
2
+
a
2
4
)
_
=
_
m ω a
2
z
2 ¯h
_1
2
exp
_
−
m ω
4 ¯h
a
2
_
(621)
where a
z
is the z component of the vector displacement a. Hence, one has
the probability of ﬁnding a simultaneous eigenstate of energy E
1
and angular
momentum l = 1 and m = 0 is given by
P(E
1
)
l=1,m=0
=
_
m ω a
2
z
2 ¯h
_
exp
_
−
m ω
2 ¯h
a
2
_
(622)
——————————————————————————————————
3.6.5 Exercise 49
A particle is conﬁned to move in a onedimensional interval between x = 0
and x = L. The initial state is given by
Ψ(x) =
_
30
L
5
x ( x − L ) (623)
for L > x > 0, and 0 otherwise. Find the probability that, after a measurement
of the energy, the system will be found in the eigenstate
φ
n
(x) =
_
2
L
sin
n π x
L
(624)
corresponding to energy E
n
=
¯ h
2
π
2
n
2
2 m L
2
If the energy is measured and found to be equal 9
¯ h
2
π
2
2 m L
2
, what is the prob
ability density that in a second measurement the particle will then be found in
an interval of width δx around x =
L
2
?
If the measurement of E
n
had not taken place, what would the probability
density for ﬁnding the particle at x =
L
2
have been?
——————————————————————————————————
146
3.6.6 Solution 49
First we shall evaluate the indeﬁnite integrals
_
x
dx
x
sin α x
= −
∂
∂α
_
x
dx
cos α x
=
sin α x − α x cos α x
α
2
(625)
and
_
x
dx
x
2
sin α x
= −
∂
2
∂α
2
_
x
dx
sin α x
=
( 2 − α
2
x
2
) cos α x + 2 α x sin α x
α
3
(626)
Then the coeﬃcients C
n
in the expansion of Ψ(x) in terms of the eigenfunctions
φ
n
(x) are given by
C
n
=
_
L
0
dx
φ
∗
n
(x) Ψ(x)
=
√
60
L
3
_
L
0
dx
x ( x − L ) sin
n π x
L
=
√
60
n
3
π
3
2 ( cos n π − 1 ) (627)
Hence, only terms with odd values of n appear in the expansion. The probability
of observing the eigenvalue E
n
is only ﬁnite for odd n and is given by
P(n) = [ C
2
n
[
P(n) =
480
n
6
π
6
( 1 − cos n π ) (628)
Since the energy measurement picks out the nondegenerate eigenfunction
corresponding to n = 3, the probability density for ﬁnding the particle at
x =
L
2
is given by
P(L/2) =
2
L
(629)
whereas if the measurement had not occurred then we would have anticipated
that the probability density would be
P(L/2) =
15
8 L
(630)
Thus, the measurement of the energy has changed the probabilities of the mea
surement of the particle’s position made at an instant later.
——————————————————————————————————
147
3.7 Time Evolution
The evolution equation of a physical quantity B(p, q, t) in Classical Mechanics
is given in terms of the Poisson Brackets as,
dB
dt
= [ B , H ]
PB
+
∂B
∂t
(631)
where H is the Hamiltonian, which is a function of the canonically conjugate
momenta p, coordinates q and possibly t. We regard this as an equation of
motion for the expectation value. To obtain the quantum mechanical equation
of motion from the classical equation, we replace the classical quantity B(p, q, t)
by the operator
ˆ
B = B(ˆ p, ˆ q, t), and the classical Hamiltonian H(p, q, t) by the
Hamiltonian operator
ˆ
H = H(ˆ p, ˆ q, t). In the nonrelativistic limit, the classical
Hamiltonian for a particle, of charge q, in an electromagnetic ﬁeld is given by
H =
1
2 m
_
p −
q
c
A(r, t)
_
2
+ q φ(r, t) (632)
where we are now representing the position vector as r. The Hamiltonian oper
ator is
ˆ
H =
1
2 m
_
ˆ p −
q
c
A(ˆ r, t)
_
2
+ q φ(ˆ r, t) (633)
which in the coordinate representation becomes
ˆ
H(r, t) =
1
2 m
_
− i ¯h ∇ −
q
c
A(r, t)
_
2
+ q φ(r, t) (634)
On substituting operators for the classical variables in the classical equation of
motion, replacing the Poisson Bracket with the commutator divided by the i ¯h,
and taking the expectation value in a state Ψ(r, t), one has
i ¯h
d
dt
_
d
3
r Ψ
∗
(r, t)
ˆ
B(r, t) Ψ(r, t) =
_
d
3
r Ψ
∗
(r, t) [
ˆ
B(r, t) ,
ˆ
H(r, t) ] Ψ(r, t)
+ i ¯h
_
d
3
r Ψ
∗
(r, t)
∂
∂t
ˆ
B(r, t) Ψ(r, t)
(635)
This should be regarded as an equation which governs the time dependence of
the expectation value of B(t)
B(t) =
_
d
3
r Ψ
∗
(r, t)
ˆ
B(r, t) Ψ(r, t) (636)
The time dependence of the expectation value B(t) has a formal solution given
by
B(t) =
_
d
3
r Ψ
∗
(r, 0)
ˆ
U
†
(t, 0)
ˆ
B(r, t)
ˆ
U(t, 0) Ψ(r, 0) (637)
148
where
ˆ
U(t, t
) is the time evolution operator which describes the implicit time
dependence of the system and satisﬁes the ﬁrst order equation
i ¯h
d
dt
ˆ
U(t, t
) =
ˆ
H(r, t)
ˆ
U(t, t
) (638)
with the boundary condition
ˆ
U(t
, t
) = 1 and
ˆ
U
†
(t, t
) is its Hermitean conju
gate.
From the solution given in eqn(637) one can derive a number of “pictures”
of quantum mechanics. The two most popular are :
(i) The Schr¨odinger picture.
(ii) The Heisenberg picture.
3.7.1 The Schr¨odinger Picture.
In this picture, the operators are independent of time (the only exception is
if there is some externally imposed time dependence, like a timedependent
electromagnetic ﬁeld etc.). That is, the operators only change through their
explicit time dependence. The implicit time dependence of the system is carried
in the wave function. Thus, in the Schr¨odinger picture
Ψ(r, t) =
ˆ
U(t, t
) Ψ(r, t
)
ˆ
B(r, t) =
ˆ
B(r, t
) (639)
The time evolution is usually referenced with respect to an initial time t
which
is usually chosen as t
= 0. If the time evolution operator
ˆ
U(t, t
) is unitary,
the wave function will retain its initial normalization. From this, one ﬁnds that
the implicit time dependence is contained in the wave function and, is governed
by the ﬁrst order diﬀerential equation
i ¯h
d
dt
Ψ(r, t) =
ˆ
H(r, t) Ψ(r, t) (640)
with one initial condition. In the momentum space representation, the Schr¨odinger
equation has the form
i ¯h
d
dt
Φ(p, t) =
_
p
2
2 m
+ q φ( i ¯h ∇
p
, t)
_
Φ(p, t) (641)
——————————————————————————————————
149
3.7.2 Exercise 50
Derive the momentum space form the Schr¨odinger equation from the real space
form.
——————————————————————————————————
3.7.3 Solution 50
The timedependent Schr¨odinger equation is
i ¯h
∂Ψ(r, t)
∂t
= −
¯h
2
2 m
∇
2
Ψ(r, t) + q φ(r, t) Ψ(r, t) (642)
in position representation, where Ψ(r, t) is the timedependent wave function.
The timedependent momentum space wave function Φ(p, t) is related to Ψ(r, t)
via the generalized Fourier transform
Ψ(r, t) =
_
1
2 π ¯h
_3
2
_
d
3
p
Φ(p
, t) exp
_
+ i
p
. r
¯h
_
(643)
On substituting this relation in the ﬁrst term on the right hand side, one obtains
the contribution
−
¯h
2
2 m
∇
2
Ψ(r, t) =
¯h
2
2 m
_
1
2 π ¯h
_3
2
_
d
3
p
Φ(p
, t)
p
2
¯h
2
exp
_
+ i
p
. r
¯h
_
=
_
1
2 π ¯h
_3
2
_
d
3
p
Φ(p
, t)
p
2
2 m
exp
_
+ i
p
. r
¯h
_
(644)
On performing the inverse Fourier Transform
Φ(p, t) =
_
1
2 π ¯h
_3
2
_
d
3
r Ψ(r, t) exp
_
− i
p . r
¯h
_
(645)
on the timedependent Schr¨odinger equation, one has
i ¯h
∂Φ(p, t)
∂t
=
_
1
2 π ¯h
_
3
_
d
3
r
_
d
3
p
exp
_
i
( p
− p ) . r
¯h
_
p
2
2 m
Φ(p
, t)
+ q
_
1
2 π ¯h
_3
2
_
d
3
r Ψ(r, t) φ(r, t) exp
_
− i
p . r
¯h
_
(646)
where we have switched the order of the wave function and the scalar potential
in the last term. On recognizing the integral over r as being proportional to the
150
integral representation of the delta function δ
3
(p − p
), and then performing
the integration over p, one obtains
i ¯h
∂Φ(p, t)
∂t
=
p
2
2 m
Φ(p, t)
+ q
_
1
2 π ¯h
_3
2
_
d
3
r Ψ(r, t) φ(r, t) exp
_
− i
p . r
¯h
_
(647)
The last term can be manipulated as
i ¯h
∂Φ(p, t)
∂t
=
p
2
2 m
Φ(p, t)
+ q
_
1
2 π ¯h
_3
2
_
d
3
r Ψ(r, t) φ(i ¯h ∇
p
, t) exp
_
− i
p . r
¯h
_
=
p
2
2 m
Φ(p, t)
+ q φ(i ¯h ∇
p
, t)
_
1
2 π ¯h
_3
2
_
d
3
r Ψ(r, t) exp
_
− i
p . r
¯h
_
=
p
2
2 m
Φ(p, t) + q φ(i ¯h ∇
p
, t) Φ(p, t) (648)
In the last line we have used the deﬁnition of the inverse Fourier transform.
Thus, we have derived the equation that governs the time dependence of the
momentum space wave function
i ¯h
∂Φ(p, t)
∂t
=
_
p
2
2 m
+ q φ(i ¯h ∇
p
, t)
_
Φ(p, t) (649)
analogous to the Schr¨odinger equation in the position representation.
——————————————————————————————————
3.7.4 The Heisenberg Picture.
In the Heisenberg picture, the wave function is chosen to be independent of
time and the operators carry the implicit time dependence which represents the
dynamics of the system. Thus, in this picture we have
Ψ(r, t) = Ψ(r, t
) = Ψ(r, 0)
ˆ
B(r(t), t) =
ˆ
U
†
(t, t
)
ˆ
B(r, t)
ˆ
U(t, t
) (650)
Hence, the equation of motion for the implicit time dependence comes from the
equation of motions for the operators and is given by
i ¯h
d
dt
ˆ
B(r(t), t) = [
ˆ
B(r(t), t) ,
ˆ
H(r(t), t) ] + i ¯h
∂
∂t
ˆ
B(r(t), t) (651)
151
——————————————————————————————————
3.7.5 Exercise 51
Find the equation of motion for the position operator ˆ r(t) in the Heisenberg
picture for a system with the Hamiltonian given by
ˆ
H(t) =
ˆ p(t)
2
2 m
+ V (ˆ r(t)) (652)
——————————————————————————————————
3.7.6 Solution 51
We shall examine the Heisenberg equation of motion
i ¯h
dˆ r
dt
= [ ˆ r(t) ,
ˆ
H(t) ] + i ¯h
∂ˆ r
∂t
(653)
at the instant of time, say t = 0. Then in the position representation with
ˆ r(0) = r and ˆ p(0) = − i ¯h ∇ one has no explicit time dependence for ˆ r and
the implicit dependence is governed by
i ¯h
dr
dt
= [ r ,
ˆ
H ]
= [ r ,
ˆ p
2
2 m
] + [ r , V (r) ]
= 2 i ¯h
ˆ p
2 m
Thus, we ﬁnd the operator equation
dˆ r
dt
=
ˆ p
m
(654)
This operator equation has the same form as the momentum velocity relation
in classical mechanics.
——————————————————————————————————
152
3.7.7 Exercise 52
Find the Heisenberg picture equation of motion for the momentum operator
ˆ p(t) for a system with the Hamiltonian given by
ˆ
H =
ˆ p
2
2 m
+ V (ˆ r) (655)
——————————————————————————————————
3.7.8 Solution 52
We shall examine the Heisenberg equation of motion
i ¯h
dˆ p
dt
= [ ˆ p(t) ,
ˆ
H(t) ] + i ¯h
∂ˆ p
∂t
(656)
at the instant of time, say t = 0. Then in the position representation with
ˆ r(0) = r and ˆ p(0) = − i ¯h ∇, one has no explicit time dependence for ˆ p and
the implicit dependence is governed by
i ¯h
dˆ p
dt
= [ ˆ p ,
ˆ
H ]
= [ ˆ p ,
ˆ p
2
2 m
] + [ ˆ p , V (r) ]
= − i ¯h ∇ V (r) (657)
Thus, we ﬁnd the operator equation
dˆ p
dt
= − ∇ V (r) (658)
This equation has the same form as Newton’s laws, except the classical quanti
ties are replaced by operators.
——————————————————————————————————
The rate of change with respect to time of the operators found in Exercises
51 and 52 should look exactly like Hamilton’s equations of motion in classical
mechanics.
——————————————————————————————————
153
3.7.9 Exercise 53
Prove that in the Heisenberg picture the rate of change of the angular momen
tum operator satisﬁes the equation
d
dt
ˆ
L(t) = − q r(t) ∧ ∇φ(r(t), t) (659)
which is similar to the corresponding equation involving the torque classical
mechanics.
If an operator
ˆ
B does not explicitly depend on time t, then the Heisenberg
equation of motion reduces to
i ¯h
d
dt
ˆ
B(r(t)) = [
ˆ
B(r(t)) ,
ˆ
H(r(t), t) ] (660)
and so we ﬁnd that the operator does not change with time if
ˆ
B commutes with
the Hamiltonian
ˆ
H. As the wave function is time independent in the Heisenberg
picture, the expectation values of the operator will also be time independent.
Thus, B will be a constant of motion, or a conserved quantity, if
[
ˆ
B ,
ˆ
H ] = 0 (661)
Since any operator commutes with itself, when one substitutes
ˆ
H for
ˆ
B, one
ﬁnds that the Hamiltonian commutes with itself. Thus, if the Hamiltonian has
no explicit dependence on time then the energy is a constant of motion.
——————————————————————————————————
3.7.10 Exercise 54
Find the time dependence of a Hermitean operator
ˆ
B which has no explicit time
dependence, if the commutator with the Hamiltonian is a complex constant C,
i.e.
[
ˆ
H ,
ˆ
B ] = C (662)
——————————————————————————————————
3.7.11 Solution 54
The time dependence of the operator
ˆ
B is governed by the Heisenberg equation
of motion
i ¯h
d
ˆ
B
dt
= [
ˆ
B ,
ˆ
H ] (663)
154
Hence, on using the commutation relation
i ¯h
d
ˆ
B
dt
= − C (664)
which leads to
ˆ
B(t) =
ˆ
B(0) + i
C
¯h
t (665)
This has an application for the rate of change of momentum ˆ p for a particle
in a uniform applied ﬁeld F,
ˆ
H =
ˆ p
2
2 m
− F . r (666)
which leads to the commutation relation
[ ˆ p ,
ˆ
H ] = + i ¯h F (667)
Thus, we have the time dependence of the momentum operator
ˆ p(t) = ˆ p(0) + F t (668)
which is analogous to the classical solution for the momentum of a particle in
an applied uniform ﬁeld.
——————————————————————————————————
3.7.12 Exercise 55
Consider a free particle moving in one dimension, calculate the r.m.s. position
∆x
rms
(t) as a function of time, by using the Heisenberg equations of motion
repeatedly. Do not assume any particular form for the wave packet. Show that
( ∆x
rms
(t) )
2
= ( ∆x
rms
(0) )
2
+
+
2
m
_
1
2
x ˆ p + ˆ p x (0) − x (0) ˆ p (0)
_
t +
+
( ∆p
rms
(0) )
2
m
2
t
2
( ∆p
rms
(t) )
2
= ( ∆p
rms
(0) )
2
(669)
The average value of the momentum and the r.m.s. momenta are time indepen
dent as a consequence of p being conserved.
——————————————————————————————————
155
3.7.13 Exercise 56
Consider a onedimensional harmonic oscillator with the Hamiltonian.
ˆ
H =
ˆ p
2
2 m
+
m ω
2
2
x
2
(670)
Derive the equations of motion for the expectation value of x. Solve this equation
to show that the mean position oscillates
x(t) = x(0) cos ω t +
p(0)
m ω
sin ω t (671)
and that the r.m.s. position is given by
∆x
2
(t) = ∆x
2
(0) cos
2
ω t +
∆p
2
(0)
m
2
ω
2
sin
2
ω t +
+
_
1
2
x ˆ p + ˆ p x (0) − x (0) ˆ p (0)
_
sin 2 ω t
m ω
(672)
Show that this result reduces to that of the previous exercise when ω → 0.
——————————————————————————————————
The Schr¨odinger and Heisenberg pictures are equivalent since the only phys
ically important quantities are measurable and, therefore, are in the form of an
expectation value, as displayed in eqn(637). We shall mainly be concerned with
the Schr¨odinger picture, in the position space representation.
3.7.14 The Schr¨odinger Equation
In the Schr¨odinger picture, the operators are time independent and the wave
functions evolve with time according to
Ψ(r, t) =
ˆ
U(t, t
0
) Ψ(r, t
0
) (673)
The timedependent wave functions satisfy the Schr¨odinger equation,
i ¯h
∂
∂t
Ψ(r, t) =
ˆ
H(r, t) Ψ(r, t)
i ¯h
∂
∂t
Ψ(r, t) =
_
1
2 m
_
− i ¯h ∇ −
q
c
A(r, t)
_
2
+ q φ(r, t)
_
Ψ(r, t)
(674)
This linear partial diﬀerential equation is ﬁrst order in time and, therefore,
requires one initial condition. At the initial time t
0
= 0 the initial condition is
given by knowledge of Ψ(r, 0). For the case where the Hamiltonian contains a
156
timeindependent scalar electrostatic potential φ(r), the Schr¨odinger equation
has the form
i ¯h
∂
∂t
Ψ(r, t) =
_
−
¯h
2
2 m
∇
2
+ q φ(r)
_
Ψ(r, t) (675)
In this case, where the Hamiltonian
ˆ
H is time independent, one has a formal
solution
Ψ(r, t) =
ˆ
U(t, 0) Ψ(r, 0)
= exp
_
− i
ˆ
H t
¯h
_
Ψ(r, 0) (676)
which contains the wave function at the initial time. It should be noted that,
since the time evolution operator
ˆ
U(t, 0) satisﬁes the equation
ˆ
U
†
(t, 0)
ˆ
U(t, 0) =
ˆ
I (677)
it is a unitary operator. The unitarity condition ensures that the normalization
of the wave function Ψ(r, t) =
ˆ
U(t, 0) Ψ(r, 0) is independent of time.
Let us now consider a Hamiltonian which contains a timedependent external
ﬁeld, due to some classical source. For example,
ˆ
H(t) =
ˆ p
2
2 m
+ V (ˆr) − ( F . ˆ r ) sin ω t (678)
We should be aware that the Hamiltonian at diﬀerent times does not commute
[
ˆ
H(t
1
) ,
ˆ
H(t
2
) ] = − i ¯h ( F . ˆ p )
_
sin ω t
1
− sin ω t
2
_
(679)
When the Hamiltonian has an explicit time dependence,
ˆ
H(t), due to an
external ﬁeld then the solution of the Schr¨odinger equation can be expressed as
Ψ(r, t) =
ˆ
U(t, 0) Ψ(r, 0) (680)
where the time dependence of the evolution operator is governed by the equation
i ¯h
∂
∂t
ˆ
U(t, 0) =
ˆ
H(t)
ˆ
U(t, 0) (681)
On integrating the time evolution equation, one obtains
ˆ
U(t, 0) = 1 −
i
¯h
_
t
0
dt
1
ˆ
H(t
1
)
ˆ
U(t
1
, 0) (682)
157
This involves the time evolution operator
ˆ
U on both sides of the equation. We
shall iterate this equation, that is, substitute the expression for
ˆ
U(t, 0) with the
two terms on the right hand side as an expression for
ˆ
U(t
1
, 0) in the right hand
side. After the substitution, the equation now possesses two completely known
terms, one of order zero in
ˆ
H and the second linear in
ˆ
H and the unknown term
involving
ˆ
U appears in a third term and has a coeﬃcient which is proportional to
ˆ
H
2
. On further iterating this equation an inﬁnite number of times, one obtains
an inﬁnite series in the operator
ˆ
H,
ˆ
U(t, 0) = 1 −
i
¯h
_
t
0
dt
1
ˆ
H(t
1
) −
1
¯h
2
_
t
0
dt
1
_
t
0
dt
2
ˆ
H(t
1
)
ˆ
H(t
2
) + . . . (683)
where one recognizes that the Hamiltonian at earlier times always appears to
the right of Hamiltonian at later times. The general higher order term in this
inﬁnite series is given by
+
_
−
i
¯h
_
n
_
t
0
dt
1
_
t1
0
dt
2
. . .
_
tn−1
0
dt
n
ˆ
H(t
1
)
ˆ
H(t
2
) . . .
ˆ
H(t
n
) (684)
which we again note has a time ordered structure, in that the time t
m+1
is
always earlier than the time t
m
, and
ˆ
H(t
m+1
) is on the right of
ˆ
H(t
m
). In the
general term in this expansion, the intermediate times in the integration are
always ordered and the Hamiltonian operators are also time ordered.
We could permute the dummy variables t
1
to t
n
in many ways, in fact there
are n! such permutations. Each permutation would result in a diﬀerent time
ordering of the labels, and each permutation gives the same result as long as
the Hamiltonians are ordered such that the Hamiltonians at consecutive times
are adjacent to each other with the earlier time to the right. This procedure is
called time ordering and was ﬁrst introduced by the GianCarlo Wick. We shall
deﬁne an operator
ˆ
W which time orders a string of Hamiltonians according to
the time label. We note that each of the n! permutations involve integrations
over diﬀerent sectors of the “space” deﬁned by the set of times (t
1
, t
2
, . . .
, t
n
) where t > t
m
> 0, and that the n! sectors completely run over the
entire “volume”, t
n
, of this space. Hence, we can rewrite the general term as
an integration over the entire volume, as long as we keep the Hamiltonian in the
correct time ordered places, and this is done by following the instruction
ˆ
W,
+
1
n!
_
−
i
¯h
_
n
_
t
0
dt
1
_
t
0
dt
2
. . .
_
t
0
dt
n
ˆ
W
ˆ
H(t
1
)
ˆ
H(t
2
) . . .
ˆ
H(t
n
)
(685)
On summing the series, we ﬁnd
ˆ
U(t, 0) =
ˆ
W exp
_
−
i
¯h
_
t
0
dt
ˆ
H(t
)
_
(686)
This is the best we can do for an arbitrary timedependent Hamiltonian. How
ever, if
ˆ
H has no explicit time dependence, then the eﬀect of
ˆ
W can be neglected
158
since all the
ˆ
H(t
m
) are the same. In this case we recover our previous result,
namely
ˆ
U(t, 0) = exp
_
−
i
¯h
_
t
0
dt
ˆ
H
_
= exp
_
− i
ˆ
H t
¯h
_
(687)
——————————————————————————————————
3.7.15 Exercise 57
Find the time dependence of a state representing a particle in a ﬁeld free envi
ronment, with the initial condition that at t = 0 the particle is in momentum
eigenstate given by
Ψ(r, 0) =
_
1
2 π ¯h
_3
2
exp
_
+ i
p
0
. r
¯h
_
(688)
——————————————————————————————————
3.7.16 Solution 57
The time dependence of the wave function is given by the Schr¨odinger equation
i ¯h
d
dt
Ψ(r, t) =
ˆ
H Ψ(r, t) (689)
The solution can found ﬁrst by integrating
Ψ(r, t) = Ψ(r, 0) −
i
¯h
_
t
0
dt
ˆ
H Ψ(r, t
) (690)
and then by iterating
Ψ(r, t) = Ψ(r, 0) −
i
¯h
_
t
0
dt
ˆ
H Ψ(r, 0) −
1
¯h
2
_
t
0
dt
_
t
0
dt”
ˆ
H
2
Ψ(r, t”)
(691)
The equation simpliﬁes, since the initial wave function Ψ(r, 0) is also an eigen
state of the freeparticle Hamiltonian
ˆ
H
ˆ
H =
ˆ p
2
2 m
(692)
159
so that
ˆ
H Ψ(r, 0) = E(p
0
) Ψ(r, 0) (693)
where
E(p
0
) =
p
2
0
2 m
(694)
is the energy eigenvalue. On substituting the eigenvalue for
ˆ
H in eqn(691) and
iterating an inﬁnite number of times, one ﬁnds that
Ψ(r, t) = exp
_
− i
E(p
0
) t
¯h
_
Ψ(r, 0)
=
_
1
2 π ¯h
_3
2
exp
_
+ i
_
p
0
. r − E(p
0
) t
¯h
_ _
(695)
——————————————————————————————————
3.7.17 Time Development of a Wave Packet
A wave packet Ψ(r, t) representing a free particle evolves according to
i ¯h
∂
∂t
Ψ(r, t) = −
¯h
2
2 m
∇
2
Ψ(r, t) (696)
since the potential is a constant q φ(r, t) = V
0
which can be absorbed into the
reference energy, and can be set to zero.
The evolution equation can be solved by Fourier decomposition, since for free
particles the momentum eigenfunctions are also eigenfunctions of the Hamilto
nian. By Fourier decomposition of the initial wave function Ψ(r, 0), one ﬁnds
Φ(p, 0) as the coeﬃcient of the momentum eigenfunction, φ
p
(r). Then
φ
p
(r) ∝ exp
_
i
p . r
¯h
_
(697)
the wave function in momentum representation evolves with time according to
Φ(p, t) = exp
_
− i
E t
¯h
_
Φ(p, 0) (698)
where E =
p
2
2 m
. Thus, as the initial value of the wave function in momentum
representation is given by
Φ(p, 0) =
_
1
2 π ¯h
_3
2
_
d
3
r
Ψ(r
, 0) exp
_
− i
p . r
¯h
_
(699)
160
we ﬁnd that the time development of the wave function in momentum represen
tation is governed by
Φ(p, t) =
_
1
2 π ¯h
_3
2
_
d
3
r
Ψ(r
, 0) exp
_
− i
_
p . r
+ E t
_
¯h
_
(700)
On performing the inverse Fourier transform of Φ(p, t), we obtain the wave
function in the position representation at time t as, Ψ(r, t) where
Ψ(r, t) =
_
1
2 π ¯h
_3
2
_
d
3
p Φ(p, 0) exp
_
+ i
_
p . r −
p
2
2 m
t
_
/ ¯h
_
(701)
Thus, all one needs to do is to evaluate the Fourier transform Φ(p, 0) of the ini
tial condition, eqn(699), and the inverse transform, given in eqn(701), to obtain
the time dependence of the free particle wave function.
——————————————————————————————————
3.7.18 Exercise 58
Given the initial wave function
Ψ(r, 0) =
_
1
2 π δx
2
_3
4
exp
_
−
( r − r
0
)
2
4 δx
2
_
exp
_
+ i
p
0
. r
¯h
_
(702)
ﬁnd the time evolution of the wave function for a free particle, the time de
pendence of the average position, r(t), and the mean squared deviation of the
particle’s position, ∆r(t)
2
.
——————————————————————————————————
3.7.19 Solution 58
The momentum space wave function, at time t = 0 is found from the initial
wave function in real space via the Fourier transform
Φ(p, 0) =
_
1
2 π ¯h
_3
2
_
d
3
r Ψ(r, 0) exp
_
− i
p . r
¯h
_
=
_
2 δx
2
π ¯h
2
_3
4
exp
_
−
( p − p
0
)
2
δx
2
¯h
2
_
exp
_
− i
r
0
. ( p − p
0
)
¯h
_
(703)
161
Dispersion of a Gaussian wave packet
0
0.5
1
1.5
1.5 1 0.5 0 0.5 1 1.5
x
l
Ψ
(
x
,
t
)
l
2
t = 0
t = 2t
0
t = 4t
0
t = t
0
t = 3t
0
Figure 27: The time dependence of the probability density for an initial Gaussian
wavepacket, Ψ(x, t). The wavepacket moves with velocity
p
m
and disperses with
increasing t.
Then, the momentum space wave function at time t is given by
Φ(p, t) =
_
2 δx
2
π ¯h
2
_3
4
exp
_
−
( p − p
0
)
2
δx
2
¯h
2
_
exp
_
− i
r
0
. ( p − p
0
)
¯h
_
exp
_
− i
p
2
t
2 m ¯h
_
(704)
The time dependence only enters via the phase. Since the momentum probabil
ity distribution involves the modulus squared wave function [ Φ(p, t) [
2
, we ﬁnd
that the momentum distribution is time independent. Furthermore the average
momentum is p
0
and the distribution has a r.m.s. width, in each of the three
orthogonal directions, which is equal to
¯ h
2 δx
, independent of time. The wave
packet does not spread in momentum space.
The real space wave function at time t is given by the inverse Fourier trans
form of Φ(p, t)
Ψ(r, t) =
_
1
2 π ¯h
_3
2
_
d
3
p Φ(p, t) exp
_
+ i
p . r
¯h
_
(705)
162
This has the explicit form
Ψ(r, t) =
_
1
2 π ¯h
_3
2
_
d
3
p
_
2 δx
2
π ¯h
2
_3
4
exp
_
−
( p − p
0
)
2
δx
2
¯h
2
_
exp
_
− i
r
0
. ( p − p
0
)
¯h
_
exp
_
− i
p
2
t
2 m ¯h
_
exp
_
+ i
p . r
¯h
_
(706)
Combining the exponential factors and completing the square by changing vari
able from p to z where
z = p − p
0
−
i
2
( r − r
0
− t
p
0
m
)
( δx
2
+ i t
¯ h
2 m
)
(707)
one ﬁnds that
Ψ(r, t) =
_
1
2 π ( δx
2
+ i t
¯ h
2 m
)
_3
4
exp
_
−
( r − r
0
−
1
m
p
0
t )
2
4 ( δx
2
+i t
¯ h
2 m
)
_
exp
_
+ i
( p
0
. r −
p
2
2 m
t )
¯h
_
(708)
From this we see that the wave packet corresponds to a real space probability
distribution function in which the maximum moves along the classical trajectory,
r = r
0
+
p
0
t
m
(709)
The width of the distribution function, however, increases with increasing t,
corresponding to a spreading of the wave packet. The root mean squared width
is given by
∆x
2
(t)
rms
=
¸
δx
4
+ t
2
¯h
2
4 m
2
(710)
which increases linearly with t for suﬃciently large t. This corresponds to the
spread in the positions of a set of classical particles which have a momentum
distribution of width
¯ h
2 δx
.
——————————————————————————————————
3.7.20 Time Evolution and Energy Eigenfunctions
The analysis of the time development of a wave packet for a free particle can be
extended to motion in an arbitrary potential, with the knowledge of the energy
eigenfunctions of the timeindependent Hamiltonian operator.
ˆ
H φ
n
(r) = E
n
φ
n
(r) (711)
163
The energy eigenstates evolve according to the Schr¨odinger equation
i ¯h
∂
∂t
φ
n
(r, t) =
ˆ
H φ
n
(r, t)
= E
n
φ
n
(r, t) (712)
since they are eigenstates. The solution of the Schr¨odinger equation yields the
time dependence of the energy eigenstates as
φ
n
(r, t) = exp
_
− i
E
n
t
¯h
_
φ
n
(r) (713)
The energy eigenstates are often called stationary states, as the only time de
pendence occurs through a phase factor, which is generally unobservable.
Given that the eigenstates of the Hamiltonian form a complete set, we can
expand the initial wave function in terms of the energy eigenstates
Ψ(r, 0) =
n
C
n
φ
n
(r) (714)
where the expansion coeﬃcients are given by
C
n
=
_
d
3
r
φ
∗
n
(r
) Ψ(r
, 0) (715)
Hence, we have the formal solution
Ψ(r, t) =
n
C
n
φ
n
(r) exp
_
− i
E
n
t
¯h
_
Ψ(r, t) =
n
_
d
3
r
φ
n
(r, 0) φ
∗
n
(r
) exp
_
− i
E
n
t
¯h
_
Ψ(r
, 0)
(716)
This expression for the timedependent wave function involves an inﬁnite sum
of energy eigenfunctions, and satisﬁes the timedependent Schr¨odinger equation
as can be seen by direct substitution. We are implicitly assuming that the
summation converges for all times, including t = 0 where the sum reduces to
the Dirac delta function
δ( r
− r ) (717)
due to the completeness relation. Thus, at t = 0, the integration over r
yields
the initial wave function Ψ(r, 0).
——————————————————————————————————
164
3.7.21 Exercise 59
A twolevel system has energy eigenfunctions φ
1
and φ
2
with energy eigenvalues
E
1
and E
2
respectively. The operator
ˆ
A does not commute with the Hamiltonian
and has eigenfunctions θ
1
and θ
2
corresponding to the eigenvalues a
1
and a
2
. If
the system is in the eigenstate θ
1
at time t = 0 (i.e. Ψ(r, 0) = θ
1
(r)), show
that it is possible for the expectation value of
ˆ
A to obey the equation
a(t) =
_
a
1
+ a
2
2
_
+
_
a
1
− a
2
2
_
cos
( E
1
− E
2
) t
¯h
(718)
where the expectation value is deﬁned by
a(t) =
_
d
3
r Ψ
∗
(r, t)
ˆ
A Ψ(r, t) (719)
Also ﬁnd the probabilities that a measurement of
ˆ
A at time t will give the result
a
1
or a
2
, respectively.
——————————————————————————————————
3.7.22 Solution 59
The principle of linear superposition, together with the Schr¨odinger equation
for the timeindependent Hamiltonian yields, the wave function of the system
as
Ψ(r, t) = C
1
φ
1
(r) exp
_
− i
E
1
t
¯h
_
+ C
2
φ
2
(r) exp
_
− i
E
2
t
¯h
_
(720)
At t = 0 the system is in an eigenstate of
ˆ
A with eigenvalue a
1
. Thus,
θ
1
(r) = C
1
φ
1
(r) + C
2
φ
2
(r) (721)
By orthogonality of the eigenstates of
ˆ
A we have
θ
2
(r) = C
∗
2
φ
1
(r) − C
∗
1
φ
2
(r) (722)
Hence, on solving for the energy eigenstates in terms of the eigenstates of
ˆ
A, we
ﬁnd that the state of the system is given by
Ψ(r, t) =
_
[ C
1
[
2
exp
_
− i
E
1
t
¯h
_
+ [ C
2
[
2
exp
_
− i
E
2
t
¯h
_ _
θ
1
(r)
+ C
1
C
2
_
exp
_
− i
E
1
t
¯h
_
−exp
_
− i
E
2
t
¯h
_ _
θ
2
(r)
(723)
165
The expectation value of
ˆ
A in this state is given by
a(t) =
_
d
3
r Ψ
∗
(r, t)
ˆ
A Ψ(r, t)
= a
1
_
[ C
1
[
4
+ [ C
2
[
4
+ 2 [ C
1
[
2
[ C
2
[
2
cos
( E
1
− E
2
) t
¯h
_
+ a
2
2 [ C
1
[
2
[ C
2
[
2
_
1 − cos
( E
1
− E
2
) t
¯h
_
(724)
This yields the required result if
[ C
1
[
4
+ [ C
2
[
4
=
1
2
(725)
and
2 [ C
1
[
2
[ C
2
[
2
=
1
2
(726)
On using the normalization condition in the last equation, one ﬁnds a quadratic
equation. The solution of the quadratic equation leads to
[ C
1
[
2
= [ C
2
[
2
=
1
2
(727)
The probability of ﬁnding the result a
1
is given by
P(a
1
) =
_
[ C
1
[
4
+ [ C
2
[
4
+ 2 [ C
1
[
2
[ C
2
[
2
cos
( E
1
− E
2
) t
¯h
_
(728)
and the probability of ﬁnding the result a
2
is
P(a
2
) = 2 [ C
1
[
2
[ C
2
[
2
_
1 − cos
( E
1
− E
2
) t
¯h
_
(729)
Note that, due to the normalization, the sum of the probabilities is unity
P(a
1
) + P(a
2
) =
_
[ C
1
[
2
+ [ C
2
[
2
_
2
= 1 (730)
and independent of t.
——————————————————————————————————
166
3.7.23 The Correspondence Principle
The correspondence principle, as previously stated, implies that quantum me
chanics should reduce to classical mechanics in the limit ¯ h →0. We shall show
how quantum mechanics reproduces the HamiltonJacobi equations of classical
mechanics, in this limit.
Starting from the Schr¨odinger equation in the case where the vector potential
is absent
i ¯h
∂
∂t
Ψ(r, t) =
_
−
¯h
2
2 m
∇
2
+ q φ(r, t)
_
Ψ(r, t) (731)
one can write the complex wave function in terms of two real functions A(r, t)
and S(r, t) representing the amplitude and phase
Ψ(r, t) = A(r, t) exp
_
+
i S(r, t)
¯h
_
(732)
Then, on substituting this form in the Schr¨odinger equation and taking the real
parts and the imaginary parts, one has two equations. The ﬁrst represents the
real part of the Schr¨odinger equation
−
_
∂S
∂t
_
=
1
2 m
_
∇ S(r, t)
_
2
+ q φ(r, t) −
¯h
2
2 m
∇
2
A
A
(733)
and the second represents the imaginary part
i ¯h
∂A
∂t
= − i
¯h
2 m
A ∇
2
S −
¯h
m
_
∇ A
_
.
_
∇ S
_
(734)
On taking the limit ¯ h →0, one ﬁnds that the equation for the phase S satisﬁes
the Hamilton  Jacobi equation of classical mechanics,
−
_
∂S
∂t
_
=
1
2 m
_
∇ S(r, t)
_
2
+ q φ(r, t) (735)
In the Hamilton  Jacobi formulation of classical mechanics one identiﬁes the
classical momentum with the gradient of S
p = ∇ S (736)
The equation for the amplitude A can be reduced to
_
∂A
2
∂t
_
= − ∇ .
_
A
2
∇ S
m
_
(737)
by multiplying by an integrating factor of A(r, t). This last equation is iden
tiﬁed as a continuity equation which relates the probability density ρ(r, t) =
167
[ Ψ(r, t) [
2
= A(r, t)
2
, to the probability current density j(r, t) deﬁned by
j(r, t) =
∇ S
m
ρ. The continuity equation is
∂
∂t
ρ(r, t) + ∇ . j(r, t) = 0 (738)
Thus, to lowest order in ¯ h, the phase of the wave function satisﬁes the Hamilton
 Jacobi equation and the amplitude satisﬁes a continuity equation.
Applying this analysis to a wave packet, one ﬁnds that the wave packet
follows a trajectory which is governed by the classical action S that appears
in the exponent. The phase factor has the slowest variation along the classical
trajectory. The continuity condition shows that the probability density ρ will
vanish outside the region that moves along the classical trajectory. Furthermore,
the value of any physical quantity can be approximated by the classical value
if the wave function is dominated by the exponential factor. In this case one
can consider the unitary transformation, which when applied to the momentum
operator results in
exp
_
−
i S
¯h
_
ˆ p exp
_
+
i S
¯h
_
= ˆ p + ∇ S (739)
This leads to the operator being represented by the classical value of the momen
tum and a quantum correction. Thus, for an arbitrary operator
ˆ
B = B(r, ˆ p)
one has
exp
_
−
i S
¯h
_
B(r, ˆ p) exp
_
+
i S
¯h
_
= B(r, ˆ p +∇S) (740)
If the amplitude A(r, t) has a suﬃciently slow variation, then the expectation
value of
ˆ
B can be replaced by its classical value, since
_
d
3
r Ψ
∗
(r)
ˆ
B Ψ(r) =
_
d
3
r A exp
_
−
i S
¯h
_
B(r, ˆ p) exp
_
+
i S
¯h
_
A
=
_
d
3
r A B(r, ˆ p +∇S) A
≈ B(r, ∇S) (741)
where the real function B is evaluated on the classical trajectory on which A is
nonvanishing.
Let us examine the conservation of probability density that is inherent in
the exact quantum mechanical Schr¨odinger equation.
3.7.24 The Continuity Equation and Particle Conservation
An exact continuity equation can be derived from the Schr¨odinger equation,
which ensures that the number of particles (i.e. the probability of ﬁnding the
168
particle anywhere), is conserved. The form of the equation is
∂
∂t
ρ(r, t) + ∇ . j(r, t) = 0 (742)
where ρ(r, t) = Ψ
∗
(r, t) Ψ(r, t) is the probability density and (in the absence
of a vector potential) the probability current density j(r, t) is given by
j(r, t) =
¯h
2 m i
_
Ψ
∗
(r, t) ∇ Ψ(r, t) − Ψ(r, t) ∇ Ψ
∗
(r, t)
_
(743)
The expression for the probability current density, j(r, t), corresponds to the real
function given by the velocity operator sandwiched between the wave functions
j(r, t) = Real
_
Ψ
∗
(r)
ˆ p
m
Ψ(r)
_
(744)
The current density is real, and the real part is found by adding the expression
and its complex conjugate, and then dividing by two.
The proof that j(r, t) and ρ(r, t) satisfy the continuity equation starts from
the Schr¨odinger equation
i ¯h
∂
∂t
Ψ(r, t) =
_
−
¯h
2
2 m
∇
2
+ q φ(r, t)
_
Ψ(r, t) (745)
and its complex conjugate
− i ¯h
∂
∂t
Ψ
∗
(r, t) =
_
−
¯h
2
2 m
∇
2
+ q φ(r, t)
_
Ψ
∗
(r, t) (746)
Multiplying the ﬁrst equation by Ψ
∗
(r, t) and the complex conjugate equation
by Ψ(r, t) and then subtracting it, one obtains
i ¯h
∂
∂t
Ψ
∗
(r, t) Ψ(r, t) = −
¯h
2
2 m
_
Ψ
∗
(r, t) ∇
2
Ψ(r, t) − Ψ(r, t) ∇
2
Ψ
∗
(r, t)
_
= −
¯h
2
2 m
∇ .
_
Ψ
∗
(r, t) ∇ Ψ(r, t) − Ψ(r, t) ∇ Ψ
∗
(r, t)
_
(747)
which was to be proved.
Thus, the total probability of ﬁnding the particle is unity, and remains unity
for all times. This can be seen by integrating the continuity equation over a
large ﬁxed volume of space
_
d
3
r
∂
∂t
ρ(r, t) +
_
d
3
r
_
∇ . j(r, t)
_
= 0 (748)
169
On using Green’s theorem to express the integral over the divergence of the
current as an integral over the surface of the volume S, one has
_
d
3
r
∂
∂t
ρ(r, t) +
_
d
2
S . j(r, t) = 0 (749)
If the current falls to zero at the boundary of the surface, one is left with
_
d
3
r
∂
∂t
ρ(r, t) = 0 (750)
which, as the volume of integration is ﬁxed, becomes
d
dt
_
d
3
r ρ(r, t) = 0 (751)
Thus, one ﬁnds that the wave function that satisﬁes the Schr¨odinger equation
remains normalized
_
d
3
r Ψ
∗
(r, t) Ψ(r, t) = 1 (752)
for all times.
——————————————————————————————————
Example: The Probability Current Density of a Spherical Wave.
Spherical Waves have wave functions of the form
Ψ(r) =
exp
_
± i k r
_
r
(753)
where k is a constant. This wave function is not normalizable and is independent
of time. It should be interpreted as representing a steady state of a large number
of beams of particles which are either diverging from or converging on the origin.
The probability current density j(r) is calculated from
j(r) =
¯h
2 m i
_
Ψ
∗
(r) ∇ Ψ(r) − Ψ(r) ∇ Ψ
∗
(r)
_
(754)
which involves the gradient of the spherical wave. The gradient is evaluated as
∇Ψ(r) = ˆ e
r
_
± i k −
1
r
_ exp
_
± i k r
_
r
(755)
which is purely radial. Hence, the current density is purely radial
j = ±
¯h k
m
1
r
2
ˆ e
r
(756)
170
and falls oﬀ as r
−2
, with increasing r. The exponential phase factor in the wave
functions cancel in the expression for the probability current density. The r
−2
dependence of the probability current density is a consequence of continuity
in the steady state, since it shows that the same number of particles, per unit
time, pass through any spherical shell surrounding the origin, irrespective of the
radius r of the shell. This is seen as follows: The number of particles passing
through an inﬁnitesimal area d
2
S per unit time is given by the product
j . d
2
S = ±
¯h k
m
ˆ e
r
R
2
. d
2
S (757)
where R is the radial distance of the surface element from the origin. On
integrating this over the surface of a sphere of radius R, for which d
2
S is also
radially directed, one ﬁnds
−
dN
dt
=
_
d
2
S . j = ± 4 π
¯h k
m
(758)
since, the surface area of the sphere is given by 4 π R
2
. Therefore, the number
of particles passing through the spherical surface is independent of R.
Spherical Waves
Figure 28: Outgoing Spherical Waves.
The continuity condition is not satisﬁed at the origin and, depending on the
sign of the probability current, the origin either acts as a source or sink where
171
particles are created or annihilated.
——————————————————————————————————
172
4 Applications of Quantum Mechanics
4.1 Exact Solutions in One Dimension
Onedimensional problems are instructive, as they are often exactly soluble, and
are relatively easy to solve. They also provide good illustrations of the princi
ples of quantum mechanics. However, some phenomena found in one dimension
may lead to conclusions that do not hold in higher dimensions. For example,
an attractive potential in one dimension always leads to the formation of a
bound state, but this does not remain true in higher dimensions. Nevertheless,
we shall now examine some exactly soluble onedimensional eigenstate problems.
4.1.1 Particle Conﬁned in a Deep Potential Well
Let us consider the problem of a quantum mechanical particle, moving in one
dimension. The particle is conﬁned by a potential to move in a region of space
where 0 < x < L, because the potential satisﬁes
0 if L > x > 0
V (x) =
∞ otherwise (759)
A classical particle with energy E < ∞is forbidden to exist in the region of
space outside the interval of length L. The particle’s motion consists of an orbit
which moves back and forth with momentum p = ±
√
2 m E . The average
position of the particle is given by x =
L
2
and the root mean squared deviation
of the particle’s position is given by
L
√
12
. The average value of the momentum
is zero because it spends half the time moving forward with momentum + p and
half the time moving backward with momentum − p. However, the root mean
squared value of the particle’s momentum is exactly equal to p.
Inside the interval L > x > 0, the energy eigenvalue equation takes the
form
−
¯h
2
2 m
∂
2
∂x
2
Ψ
E
(x) = E Ψ
E
(x) (760)
which corresponds to the motion of a free particle. This equation is satisﬁed by
the form
Ψ
E
(x) = A exp
_
+ i k x
_
+ B exp
_
− i k x
_
(761)
with arbitrary A and B, and p = ¯ h k =
√
2 m E . Within the region deﬁned
by L > x > 0, the form of the solution appears to correspond to a linear
superposition of momentum eigenstates, with momentum ± p.
173
Infinite Potential Well
20
0
20
40
60
80
100
120
1 0.5 0 0.5 1 1.5 2
x / L
V
(
x
)
V
0
V
0
>> E > 0 E
Figure 29: The potential of a deep potential well of depth V
0
, where V
0
→ ∞.
The zero of energy is chosen to be the bottom of the potential well.
Outside the interval, the energy eigenvalue equation has the form
_
−
¯h
2
2 m
∂
2
∂x
2
+ V
0
_
Ψ
E
(x) = E Ψ
E
(x) (762)
where the limit V
0
→ ∞ should be taken. In this range only the form
Ψ
E
(x) = 0 satisﬁes this equation. This corresponds to the classical expec
tation that the particle should only be found within the interval of length L.
The solution must be continuous for all values of x, even at the boundaries
x = 0 and x = L. Thus, we require Ψ
E
(x) to satisfy the boundary conditions
Ψ
E
(0) = Ψ
E
(L) = 0 (763)
That is, the wave function inside the interval should match smoothly onto the
solution outside the interval. This yields the two conditions
A + B = 0 (764)
at x = 0 and
A exp
_
+ i k L
_
+ B exp
_
− i k L
_
= 0 (765)
174
at x = L. The ﬁrst condition yields A = − B and so inside the potential
well the wave function is just
Ψ
E
(x) = A
_
exp
_
+ i k x
_
− exp
_
− i k x
_ _
= 2 i A sin k x (766)
for L > x > 0. The continuity condition at x = L then becomes
Ψ
E
(L) = 2 i A sin k L
= 0 (767)
Since we require A ,= 0, this places a condition on the allowed values of k which
must satisfy k L = n π for integer values of n. The negative integer values
of n give the same solution as the positive integers, and thus are not needed.
The value n = 0 gives a trivial solution which doesn’t describe a particle at
all. The solution n = 0 is not normalizable, and there is no probability for
ﬁnding a particle in an interval ∆x even if L > x > 0. Thus, the allowed
values of k are given by k
n
= n
π
L
where n is a positive integer greater than
zero. Therefore, the allowed values of the energy eigenvalue are also given by
the discrete values
E
n
=
¯h
2
k
2
n
2 m
=
¯h
2
n
2
π
2
2 m L
2
(768)
The energy eigenvalues are discrete as the particle is trapped in a region of ﬁnite
spatial extent. The corresponding energy eigenfunctions are given by
Ψ
n
(x) = C sin
n π x
L
(769)
where C is an arbitrary complex number. The normalization condition
_
+ ∞
− ∞
dx [ Ψ
n
(x) [
2
= 1 (770)
reduces to
_
L
0
dx [ Ψ
n
(x) [
2
= 1 (771)
since Ψ
n
(x) vanishes outside the region of integration. Using the form of Ψ
n
(x)
one ﬁnds that [ C [ is given by
1 = [ C [
2
_
L
0
dx sin
2
n π x
L
= [ C [
2
_
L
0
dx
1
2
_
1 − cos
2 n π x
L
_
175
= [ C [
2
1
2
_
x −
L
2 n π
sin
2 n π x
L
_ ¸
¸
¸
¸
x = L
x = 0
= [ C [
2
L
2
(772)
Thus, the properly normalized wave functions are,
Ψ
n
(x) =
_
2
L
sin
n π x
L
_
Θ(x) − Θ(x −L)
_
(773)
where Θ(x) is the Heaviside step function deﬁned by
Θ(x) = 1 if x > 0
Θ(x) = 0 if x < 0 (774)
Eigenfunctions of the infinite potential well
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1
x / L
Ψ ΨΨ Ψ
n
(
x
)
Ψ ΨΨ Ψ
1
(x)
Ψ ΨΨ Ψ
2
(x)
Ψ ΨΨ Ψ
5
(x)
Ψ ΨΨ Ψ
3
(x)
Ψ ΨΨ Ψ
4
(x)
0
0
0
0
0
Figure 30: The energy eigenfunctions Ψ
n
(x) of a particle in a deep potential
well.
These wave functions are the eigenfunctions of a Hermitean operator
ˆ
H. We
see that the eigenvalues are real
E
n
=
n
2
π
2
¯h
2
2 m L
2
(775)
176
and are nondegenerate. The eigenfunctions are orthogonal, as can be seen by
directly evaluating the integral
_
+ ∞
− ∞
dx Ψ
∗
m
(x) Ψ
n
(x) =
2
L
_
L
0
dx sin
m π x
L
sin
n π x
L
=
1
L
_
L
0
dx
_
cos
(m − n ) π x
L
− cos
(m + n ) π x
L
_
=
1
π
_
sin( m − n ) π
m − n
−
sin( m + n ) π
m + n
_
= δ
m − n
(776)
The overlap integral is zero for m ,= n and for m = n the wave functions
are normalized to unity, as can be seen via invoking l’Hˆopital’s rule. Also one
recognizes that functions in the ﬁnite interval L > x > 0 can, by the theory
of ﬁnite Fourier series, be expanded in terms of the set of eigenfunctions. The
choice of interval for the function which is to be expanded in a Fourier series,
usually extends from − L to + L, and the series contains terms of cos
n π x
L
in
addition to the terms sin
n π x
L
. However, if we insist that our wave functions
Ψ(x) over the enlarged interval are odd, i.e. Ψ( − x ) = − Ψ( x ) then only
the sin terms remain in the Fourier series expansion. That is, the eigenfunctions
form a complete set, only in the interval L > x > 0 .
The average values of the position of the particle in these energy eigenstates
is given by
x =
_
L
0
dx Ψ
∗
n
(x) x Ψ
n
(x)
=
2
L
_
L
0
dx x sin
2
n π x
L
=
1
L
_
L
0
dx x
_
1 − cos
2 n π x
L
_
(777)
However, the integral can be evaluated via
_
dx x cos α x =
∂
∂α
_
dx sin α x
= −
∂
∂α
_
cos α x
α
_
=
_
cos α x + x α sin α x
α
2
_
(778)
Thus, we ﬁnd that the average position is given by
x =
L
2
(779)
177
Probability Density
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1
x / L
l
Ψ
Ψ
Ψ
Ψ
n
(
x
)
l
2
n = 5
n = 1
n = 2
n = 3
n = 4
0
0
0
0
0
Figure 31: The quantum mechanical probability density P(x) = [ Ψ
n
(x) [
2
for
a particle in an energy eigenstate with energy eigenvalue E is compared with
the classically calculated probability density for a particle with energy E. The
classical probability density is calculated by averaging over the initial conditions
for classical trajectories with energy E. In accordance with the correspondence
principle, the probability densities should agree in the limit ¯ h → 0.
which is exactly the same as the classical average.
The mean squared deviation in the particle’s position is given by
∆x
2
=
_
L
0
dx Ψ
∗
n
(x)
_
x −
L
2
_
2
Ψ
n
(x)
=
2
L
_
L
0
dx
_
x
2
−
L
2
4
_
sin
2
n π x
L
=
1
L
_
L
0
dx
_
x
2
−
L
2
4
_ _
1 − cos
2 n π x
L
_
=
1
L
_
L
0
dx
_
x
2
−
L
2
4
_ _
1 − cos
2 n π x
L
_
(780)
This integral is evaluated with the aid of the equality
_
dx x
2
cos α x = −
∂
2
∂α
2
_
dx cos α x
178
= −
∂
2
∂α
2
_
sin α x
α
_
=
_
− 2 sin α x + 2 α x cos α x + α
2
x
2
sin α x
α
3
_
(781)
Thus, the mean squared deviation becomes
∆x
2
=
L
2
12
−
L
2
2 n
2
π
2
(782)
which for large enough n becomes identical to the classical value. This is another
manifestation of the correspondence principle at work. These results correspond
to a particle which has an average position half way along the allowed interval,
and ﬂuctuates back and forth with excursions proportional to the root mean
squared deviation.
The average value of the momentum is given by
p = − i ¯h
_
∞
−∞
dx Ψ
∗
n
(x)
d
dx
Ψ
n
(x)
= − i
2 ¯h
L
_
L
0
dx sin
n π x
L
d
dx
sin
n π x
L
− i
2 ¯h
L
_
L
0
dx sin
2
n π x
L
d
dx
_
Θ(x) − Θ(x −L)
_
= − i
2 π n ¯h
L
2
_
L
0
dx sin
n π x
L
cos
n π x
L
− i
2 ¯h
L
_
L
0
dx sin
2
n π x
L
_
δ(x) − δ(x −L)
_
= − i
π n ¯h
L
2
_
L
0
dx sin
2 n π x
L
= i
π n ¯h
L
_
cos 2 n π − 1
_
2 n π
= 0 (783)
The average value of the momentum of the quantum mechanical particle is zero,
like the classical average of p. The root mean squared momentum is just given
by
p
2
= − ¯h
2
_
∞
−∞
dx Ψ
∗
n
(x)
d
2
dx
2
Ψ
n
(x)
= −
2 ¯h
2
L
_
L
0
dx sin
n π x
L
d
2
dx
2
sin
n π x
L
179
− 2
2 ¯h
2
L
_
L
0
dx sin
n π x
L
_
d
dx
sin
n π x
L
_
d
dx
_
Θ(x) − Θ(x −L)
_
−
2 ¯h
2
L
_
L
0
dx sin
2
n π x
L
d
2
dx
2
_
Θ(x) − Θ(x −L)
_
= −
2 ¯h
2
L
_
L
0
dx sin
n π x
L
d
2
dx
2
sin
n π x
L
− 2
2 ¯h
2
L
_
L
0
dx sin
n π x
L
_
d
dx
sin
n π x
L
_ _
δ(x) − δ(x −L)
_
−
2 ¯h
2
L
_
L
0
dx sin
2
n π x
L
d
dx
_
δ(x) − δ(x −L)
_
= +
2 π
2
n
2
¯h
2
L
3
_
L
0
dx sin
n π x
L
sin
n π x
L
=
π
2
n
2
¯h
2
L
2
(784)
In these calculations, the contributions from the discontinuities in the ﬁrst and
second derivatives of the Heaviside step functions vanish identically. Thus, the
average momentum is zero just like for the classical particle, and the root mean
squared deviation of the momentum is equal to p =
¯ h n π
L
. This is similar to
the classical particle, except that the r.m.s. momentum is quantized, that is, it
only has discrete values.
The momentum space wave function Φ
n
(p) is given by
Φ
n
(p) =
1
√
2 π ¯h
_
L
0
dx
_
2
L
sin
n π x
L
exp
_
− i
p x
¯h
_
(785)
which yields
Φ
n
(p) =
2 i L
√
π ¯h L
n π sin
_
p L
2 ¯ h
+
n π
2
_
_
n π
_
2
−
_
p L
¯ h
_
2
exp
_
−
i
2
_
p L
¯h
+ n π
_ _
(786)
Hence, the momentum distribution function P(p) is given by
P(p) = [ Φ
n
(p) [
2
=
4 L
π ¯h
_
n π
_
2
sin
2
_
p L
2 ¯ h
+
n π
2
_
_
_
n π
_
2
−
_
p L
¯ h
_
2
_
2
(787)
which is peaked at p = ±
n π ¯ h
L
.
180
Momentum distribution function
0
0.02
0.04
0.06
0.08
0.1
40 30 20 10 0 10 20 30 40
p L / h
P
n
(p)
n = 4
Figure 32: The momentum distribution function P
n
(p) = [ Φ
n
(p) [
2
of a
particle in a deep potential well, with n = 4.
The uncertainty in the momentum is given by ∆p
rms
=
¯ h n π
L
and the
uncertainty in the position is
∆x
rms
= L
¸
_
1
12
−
1
2 n
2
π
2
_
(788)
The uncertainties satisfy the uncertainty principle,
∆x
rms
∆p
rms
≥
¯h
2
(789)
4.1.2 Time Dependence of a Particle in a Deep Potential Well
Consider a particle in an initial state given by an arbitrary wave function Ψ(x; 0),
which satisﬁes the boundary conditions Ψ(0) = Ψ(L) = 0. Then on decom
posing this into energy eigenstates via the expansion
Ψ(x; 0) =
n
C
n
_
2
L
sin
n π x
L
(790)
181
one ﬁnds that the expansion coeﬃcients are given by
C
n
=
_
2
L
_
L
0
dx sin
n π x
L
Ψ(x; 0) (791)
Then, the solution of the Schr¨odinger equation at time t is given by the expres
sion
Ψ(x; t) =
n
C
n
exp
_
− i
¯h π
2
n
2
2 m L
2
t
_
_
2
L
sin
n π x
L
(792)
in which each term has a diﬀerent time dependence.
4.1.3 Exercise 60
Find the time development of the initial wave function Ψ(x; 0) = δ( x − x
0
), of
a particle in a box. Plot the time dependence of the probability density P(x; t)
for ﬁnding the particle at position x at various times. Find the time dependence
of the average value of the particle’s position x(t).
4.1.4 Particle Bound in a Shallow Potential Well
Let us consider the problem of a quantum mechanical particle moving in one
dimension, in the presence of a potential given by
− V
0
if L > x > 0
V (x) =
0 otherwise (793)
The energy of our particle is E < 0.
Classically, the particle would conﬁned by the potential to move in a region
of space where 0 < x < L and the energy of the particle would be restricted
by 0 > E > − V
0
. Hence, the classical particle would be conﬁned to the
region near the origin.
Inside the interval L > x > 0, the energy eigenvalue equation takes the
form
−
¯h
2
2 m
∂
2
∂x
2
Ψ
E
(x) = ( E + V
0
) Ψ
E
(x) (794)
which corresponds to the motion of a free particle. This equation is satisﬁed by
the form
Ψ
E
(x) = A exp
_
+ i k x
_
+ B exp
_
− i k x
_
(795)
182
Shallow Potential Well
1.5
1
0.5
0
0.5
1 0.5 0 0.5 1 1.5 2
x / L
V
(
x
)
/
V
0
 V
0
 V
0
< E < 0
E
Figure 33: A potential well V (x) of width L and depth − V
0
. The bound state
energy E is indicated by a horizontal line.
with arbitrary A and B, and p = ¯ h k =
_
2 m ( E + V
0
) . Within this
region, the form of the solution appears to correspond to a linear superposition
of momentum eigenstates, with momentum ± p.
Outside the interval L > x > 0, the particle should satisfy the equation,
−
¯h
2
2 m
∂
2
∂x
2
Ψ
E
(x) = E Ψ
E
(x) (796)
which corresponds to the motion of a free particle but with negative energy. The
kinetic energy instead of being positive must be negative, so this implies that
we should consider imaginary values for the momentum. That is, we should try
looking for solutions in which the momentum is given by p = i ¯h κ. In fact
the energy eigenvalue equation is satisﬁed by the general form
Ψ
E
(x) = C
α
exp
_
+ κ x
_
+ D
α
exp
_
− κ x
_
(797)
where ¯ h κ =
_
2 m [ E [ . The coeﬃcients C
α
and D
α
are arbitrary and
have to be separately determined in each region. The form of the solution cor
responds to a linear superposition of momentum eigenstates, with imaginary
value of the momentum ± i ¯h κ.
183
In the region where x > L the solution must be of the form of a decreasing
exponential
Ψ
E
(x) = D
>
exp
_
− κ x
_
for x > L (798)
The term proportional to the coeﬃcient C
>
has been discarded as the wave func
tion must be square integrable, and since the term proportional to C
>
would
diverge when x → ∞. The above wave function falls to zero at the boundary,
x → ∞.
In the region where x < 0, the solution must be of the form
Ψ
E
(x) = C
<
exp
_
+ κ x
_
for x < 0 (799)
as this tends to zero as x → − ∞. The term proportional to the coeﬃcient
D
<
has been discarded as the wave function must be square integrable.
The above forms of the solution involve four (as yet) unknown constants A,
B, C and D. These constant must be determined by the boundary conditions at
x = 0 and x = L, and the normalization condition. As we shall presently see,
the wave function and its derivative must be continuous at each of these points.
Thus, there appears to be ﬁve conditions and only four unknowns. However,
if we also regarded the energy E as a variable, then the above conditions may
restrict the energy to discrete allowed values
10
.
The wave function should be continuous and also the ﬁrst derivative should
be continuous at both the points x = 0 and x = L. The need for the derivative
of the wave function be continuous at these points can be seen by writing the
potential as
V (x) = + V
0
_
Θ( x − L ) − Θ( x )
_
(800)
and integrating the energy eigenvalue equation over a small interval of width
2 around either x = L or x = 0. Then
−
¯h
2
2 m
∂
∂x
Ψ
E
(x)
¸
¸
¸
¸
L +
L −
+
_
L +
L −
dx V (x
) Ψ
E
(x
) = E
_
L +
L −
dx Ψ
E
(x
)
(801)
Since the wave function is continuous, the term proportional to the energy has
a magnitude of 2 E Ψ
E
(L) . Also, as we are considering potentials V (x) which
only have ﬁnite discontinuities and the wave function is continuous, the term
10
More precisely, the boundary conditions at  x  → ∞ are responsible for quantizing
the energy. This can be shown by solving the eigenvalue equation for Ψ
E
(x) (up to the
normalization) for an arbitrary energy. If one enforces one boundary condition (say at x →
− ∞) and integrates the equation, then the solution will diverge at the other boundary
(x → + ∞) unless E is restricted to have certain discrete values.
184
Energydependence of trial energyeigenfunctions
of the attractive square well potential
0.5
0
0.5
1
1.5
2
1 0.5 0 0.5 1 1.5 2
x/L
Ψ
E
(
x
)
E > E
0
E < E
0
E = E
0
Figure 34: The energydependence of trial energy eigenfunctions Ψ
E
(x) for a
shallow potential well. The solution is chosen to satisfy the boundary condition
at x →− ∞and is normalized to unity at x = 0. It is seen that the solution does
not satisfy the boundary condition at x →∞unless E = E
0
. This suggests that
the discreteness of the bound state energy is caused by the boundary conditions
at inﬁnity.
involving the integral of the potential has a magnitude of − V
0
Ψ
E
(L). In the
limit → 0, one ﬁnds
∂
∂x
Ψ
E
(x)
¸
¸
¸
¸
x = L +
=
∂
∂x
Ψ
E
(x)
¸
¸
¸
¸
x = L −
(802)
Thus, the ﬁrst derivative of the wave function must be continuous at the bound
ary.
The continuity of the wave function at x = L yields the condition
Ψ
E
(L) = A exp
_
+ i k L
_
+ B exp
_
− i k L
_
= D exp
_
− κ L
_
(803)
and the continuity of the ﬁrst derivative yields
∂
∂x
Ψ
E
(L) = i k
_
A exp
_
+ i k L
_
− B exp
_
− i k L
_ _
185
= − κ D exp
_
− κ L
_
(804)
The continuity of the wave function at x = 0 results in the equation
Ψ
E
(0) = A + B = C (805)
and the continuity of the ﬁrst derivative yields
∂
∂x
Ψ
E
(0) = i k
_
A − B
_
= + κ C (806)
Solving for A and B in terms of C, we ﬁnd
A =
i k + κ
2 i k
C
B =
i k − κ
2 i k
C (807)
The two continuity conditions at x = L can be used to eliminate D and
yields another equation, involving A and B
− κ
_
A exp
_
+ i k L
_
+ B exp
_
− i k L
_ _
= i k
_
A exp
_
+ i k L
_
− B exp
_
− i k L
_ _
(808)
However, since A and B have already been determined in terms of C, and since
C can be factored out (the magnitude of C is determined by the normalization
condition), the above condition restricts the possible values of the energy E.
Hence, we obtain the secular equation which determines the eigenvalues
exp
_
+ 2 i k L
_
=
_
( i k − κ )
2
( i k + κ )
2
_
(809)
On taking the square root, we can rewrite this as
exp
_
i k L
_
= ±
( i k − κ )
2
( k
2
+ κ
2
)
(810)
which can be rewritten as an equation for the ratio of the imaginary and real
parts, in which case the ± sign drops out
tan k L =
2 k κ
k
2
− κ
2
(811)
186
which we shall refer to later on. What we really need to do is to take the fourth
root of the equation (809), which yields the two equations
exp
_
i k L / 2
_
= ± i
( i k − κ )
_
( k
2
+ κ
2
)
(812)
and
exp
_
i k L / 2
_
= ±
( i k − κ )
_
( k
2
+ κ
2
)
(813)
which correspond to the four fourth roots of unity. On taking the ratio of
the imaginary to the real parts, these two equations can be rewritten as two
conditions
k tan
k L
2
= + κ
k cot
k L
2
= − κ (814)
The above two conditions determine the bound state energies E as the wave
vector k and the value κ are related to the energy through
κ
2
= −
2 m E
¯h
2
k
2
=
2 m ( E + V
0
)
¯h
2
(815)
The conditions on k can be solved graphically for the bound states, by squaring
the equation.
For the ﬁrst condition, as both k and κ are positive, squaring introduces
spurious solutions, corresponding to regions where k tan
k L
2
is negative. We
then plot
κ
2
=
2 m V
0
¯h
2
− k
2
(816)
as a function of k, on the same graph as the function
k
2
tan
2
k L
2
(817)
For positive V
0
we have a parabola that intersects the k axis at k =
_
2 m V0
¯ h
2
.
The function k
2
tan
2 k L
2
is never negative, but falls to zero at k =
2 n π
L
for
integer n and diverges to inﬁnity at k =
( 2 n + 1 ) π
L
. Thus, for k in the range
0 < k <
_
2 m V0
¯ h
2
, one has roots near k =
( 2 n + 1 ) π
L
. Since tan
k L
2
is negative in each alternate segment
2 n π
L
> k >
( 2 n − 1 ) π
L
where the
slope of our function is negative, the solution in these regions are spurious. The
solutions of our condition corresponds to the intersections of our function with
187
Self Consistency Equation
0
50
100
150
200
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
k L
k
2
cot
2
kL/2
2mV
0
/h
2
 k
2
k
2
tan
2
kL/2
Figure 35: Graphical solution of the equations determining the bound state
energies of the shallow potential well. The k values where the inverted parabola
intersects the curves k
2
tan
2 kL
2
or k
2
cot
2 kL
2
represents possible allowed wave
vectors k. As explained in the text, there is a maximum of one allowed solution
for k in each interval of
π
L
, as the second solution is spurious.
the parabola, but only in the intervals
( 2 n + 1 ) π
L
> k >
2 n π
L
where our
function has a positive slope.
The energy eigenstates satisfying the second condition in eqn(814) can be
found by a similar procedure. However, we should note that in this case k is
real and − κ is negative. Thus, the roots of the second condition should lie
in the intervals where tan
k L
2
is negative, and the intersections in the regions
( 2 n + 1 ) π
L
> k >
2 n π
L
are spurious and should be discarded. Thus, the
regions of k which contain bound states are interchanged for the two conditions.
Let us note that for large enough V
0
the bound states correspond to the set
of k values given by
k ≈
n π
L
(818)
if the values of k are suﬃciently small and are limited by
¯h
2
k
2
2 m
¸ V
0
(819)
188
In this case, the eigenvalues are related to the eigenvalues of the inﬁnite poten
tial well.
Since the values of k are found to be discrete, the energy eigenvalues are also
discrete. The allowed values of E are found to be in the range 0 ≥ E ≥ − V
0
.
The only remaining undetermined constant is the value of C which can be found
by normalizing the wave function.
Bound state wave functions for a
shallow potential well
1.5
1
0.5
0
0.5
1
1.5
1 0.5 0 0.5 1 1.5 2
x / L
Ψ ΨΨ Ψ
n
(
x
)
Ψ ΨΨ Ψ
2
(x)
Ψ ΨΨ Ψ
1
(x)
Ψ ΨΨ Ψ
0
(x)
Figure 36: Bound state wave functions Ψ
n
(x) for a shallow potential well.
——————————————————————————————————
4.1.5 Exercise 61
A particle of mass m is conﬁned to move in a onedimensional potential V (x)
where
V (x) → ∞ x < 0
V (x) = − V
0
0 < x < a
V (x) = 0 a < x (820)
Derive the equation for the bound state energy.
Find the minimum value of V
0
which will produce a bound state.
189
An asymmetric potential well
1.5
1
0.5
0
0.5
1 0.5 0 0.5 1 1.5 2
x / L
V
(
x
)
/
V
0
 V
0
 V
0
< E < 0
E
Figure 37: A onedimensional potential V (x), which excludes the particle from
the region x < 0. The minimum value of the potential is − V
0
. The potential
V
0
has to exceed a minimum value if the particle is to be bound.
——————————————————————————————————
4.1.6 Solution 61
The bound state wave function is given by
Ψ(x) = 0 for x < 0
where V (x) → ∞. In the region of positive x, the energy eigenvalue equation
is given by
−
¯h
2
2 m
∂
2
Ψ
∂x
2
+ V
0
Ψ(x) = E Ψ(x) (821)
inside the potential well where a > x > 0, and
−
¯h
2
2 m
∂
2
Ψ
∂x
2
= E Ψ(x) (822)
outside the potential well where x > a. This has the solution
Ψ(x) = A exp
_
+ i k x
_
+ B exp
_
− i k x
_
(823)
190
Bound state wave function with minimal energy
0
0.05
0.1
0.15
1 0 1 2
x / L
Ψ ΨΨ Ψ
0
(
x
)
Ψ ΨΨ Ψ
0
(x)
Figure 38: The form of the bound state wave function, for a value of the potential
V
0
which is just suﬃcently strong enough to create one bound state.
where the energy eigenvalue is given by
E = − V
0
+
¯h
2
2 m
k
2
(824)
Since the wave function has to be continuous at x = 0, one has
A + B = 0 (825)
Thus, the solution inside the well is of the form
Ψ(x) = 2 i A sin k x (826)
Outside the potential well, the eigenvalue equation has the solution of the form
Ψ(x) = C exp
_
− κ x
_
+ D exp
_
+ κ x
_
(827)
However, as the wave function must vanish as x → ∞ then one has D = 0.
Thus, the wave function for x > a is simply given by
Ψ(x) = C exp
_
− κ x
_
(828)
191
and the energy eigenvalue is given by
E = −
¯h
2
2 m
κ
2
(829)
Continuity at x = a yields
2 i A sin k a = C exp
_
− κ a
_
(830)
and continuity of the derivative yields
2 i k A cos k a = − κ C exp
_
− κ a
_
(831)
Hence on dividing the above equations, one has
k cot k a = − κ (832)
On squaring this equation, one has
k
2
cot
2
k a =
2 m V
0
¯h
2
− k
2
(833)
or
k
2
=
2 m V
0
¯h
2
sin
2
k a (834)
Thus,
2 m ( V
0
+ E )
¯h
2
=
2 m V
0
¯h
2
sin
2
k a (835)
If a bound state is just formed, it has the maximum bound state energy
which is zero, E = 0. Hence, in this case, the above equation simpliﬁes to
1 = sin
2
k a (836)
Thus, the minimum value of k is found as
k =
π
2 a
(837)
and since E = 0, one has
0 = − V
0
+
¯h
2
2 m
π
2
4 a
2
(838)
Hence, the minimum value of V
0
needed to produce a bound state is given by
V
0
=
¯h
2
π
2
8 m a
2
(839)
192
Alternatively, the result can be derived from the condition that the kinetic
energy inside the well and outside the well must be minimized. The wave func
tion inside the well is oscillatory, but must have the minimum number of oscil
lations. The wave function outside the well must decay slowly, therefore, the
decay constant for the wave function for x > a is given by κ = 0. Thus, the
matching condition for the derivative of the wave function shows that the slope
must be zero at the edge of the potential well x = a and, since E = 0. Since
the wave function has a maximum at x = a, one has
k cos k a = 0 (840)
from which one has k =
π
2 a
. Hence, as
E = −
¯h
2
2 m
κ
2
= − V
0
+
¯h
2
2 m
k
2
(841)
the minimum value of the potential needed to produce a bound state is given
by
V
0
=
¯h
2
π
2
8 m a
2
(842)
——————————————————————————————————
4.1.7 Scattering from a Shallow Potential Well
The shallow potential well is described by
V (x) = − V
0
for 0 < x < L
V (x) = 0 otherwise (843)
Classically, the energy E = 0 separates the bound states, which have E < 0,
and the scattering states, which have E > 0. We shall now consider states
where the energy E is greater than zero so that the particle may travel to
inﬁnity.
The allowable forms for the wave function in the three regions are
Ψ(x) = A exp
_
+ i k x
_
+ B exp
_
− i k x
_
0 > x
Ψ(x) = C exp
_
+ i k
x
_
+ D exp
_
− i k
x
_
L > x > 0
Ψ(x) = F exp
_
+ i k x
_
+ G exp
_
− i k x
_
x > L
(844)
193
Scattering from a Potential Well
1.5
1
0.5
0
0.5
1 0.5 0 0.5 1 1.5 2
x / L
V
(
x
)
/
V
0
 V
0
E > 0
Figure 39: Scattering from a shallow potential well V (x) of depth − V
0
. The
energy of the scattering states E is > 0, so classically the particle is free to
move to inﬁnity.
where the energy eigenvalue is given by E =
¯ h
2
k
2
2 m
and E + V
0
=
¯ h
2
k
2
2 m
However, as we only have four matching conditions, the six coeﬃcients are not
determined, and k is a continuous real variable. We can choose one coeﬃcient to
set the normalization of the wave function. The other coeﬃcient can be chosen
as desired. We shall choose the coeﬃcient G to be zero. This represents a beam
of particles being produced at x → − ∞ with momentum p falling incident on
the potential at x = 0. Some fraction of the beam is reﬂected back towards
x → − ∞, with momentum − p and a certain fraction being transmitted to
x → + ∞ with momentum p. The vanishing of G corresponds to the absence
of a source of particles, with momentum − p, at x → ∞.
The matching conditions at x = 0 yield
A + B = C + D
k ( A − B ) = k
( C − D ) (845)
The matching conditions at x = L are given by
C exp
_
+ i k
L
_
+ D exp
_
− i k
L
_
= F exp
_
+ i k L
_
194
k
_
C exp
_
+ i k
L
_
− D exp
_
− i k
L
_ _
= k F exp
_
+ i k L
_
(846)
This pair of equations can be solved for C and D in terms of the amplitude
of the transmitted beam F,
C exp
_
+ i k
L
_
=
_
k
+ k
2 k
_
F exp
_
i k L
_
D exp
_
− i k
L
_
=
_
k
− k
2 k
_
F exp
_
i k L
_
(847)
whereas the amplitudes of the incident beam A and reﬂected beam B are given
by
A =
_
k + k
2 k
_
C +
_
k − k
2 k
_
D
B =
_
k − k
2 k
_
C +
_
k + k
2 k
_
D (848)
Thus, we ﬁnd
A exp
_
− i k L
_
=
_
2 k k
cos k
L − i ( k
2
+ k
2
) sin k
L
2 k k
_
F
B exp
_
− i k L
_
=
_
( k
2
− k
2
) i sin k
L
2 k k
_
F (849)
The amplitude of the incident beam is assumed to be known, as it can be
controlled by the particle accelerator. Thus, we shall express the amplitudes
of the transmitted and reﬂected beams as ratios with respect to the incident
beam. The ratio of the transmitted beam to the incident beam is given by
F
A
=
_ 2 k k
exp
_
− i k L
_
2 k k
cos k
L − i ( k
2
+ k
2
) sin k
L
_
(850)
The ratio of the amplitudes of the reﬂected beam to the incident beam is
given by
B
A
=
_
( k
2
− k
2
) i sin k
L
2 k k
cos k
L − i ( k
2
+ k
2
) sin k
L
_
(851)
The amplitude of the reﬂected beam is proportional to k
2
− k
2
and thus, is
proportional to V
0
, and the denominator varies as E for large E. The denom
inator is nonzero when both k and k
are real. This is because the magnitude
195
of the denominator is given by the sum of two squares
4 k
2
k
2
cos
2
k
L + ( k
2
+ k
2
)
2
sin
2
k
L (852)
and when the sine factor is zero, the cosine factor is positive. Thus, there are
no simultaneous zeros.
In the above expressions k and k
are continuous variables and so the energy
eigenvalues have a continuous spectrum in the range E ≥ 0.
The intensities of the reﬂected and transmitted beams add to equal the
intensity of the incident beam,
[ A [
2
= [ B [
2
+ [ F [
2
(853)
This is a necessary condition for the probability to be conserved. As the proba
bility does not build up with time at any point in space, but is in a steady state,
the probability currents entering any region of space must be equal to those
leaving. As the magnitude of the velocities outside the potential well are simply
given by
¯ h k
m
, the equality of incoming ﬂux with the outgoing ﬂux reduces to
the above statement about the intensities of the beams.
The reﬂection coeﬃcient is deﬁned as the ratio
R =
[ B [
2
[ A [
2
(854)
which takes into account that the magnitude of the velocity of the incident
beam is always the same as that of the reﬂected beam, as they are moving in
the same region of space, and thus experience the same potential. The reﬂection
coeﬃcient is given by
R(k) =
_
( k
2
− k
2
)
2
sin
2
k
L
4 k
2
k
2
cos
2
k
L + ( k
2
+ k
2
)
2
sin
2
k
L
_
(855)
We see that the reﬂection coeﬃcient has a numerator proportional to V
2
0
, and
the denominator grows like E
2
for suﬃciently large E. It should be noted that,
in this case, quantum mechanics produces results which are completely diﬀerent
from classical mechanics as, in one dimension, a classical particle is not reﬂected
by an attractive potential well.
The transmission coeﬃcient is deﬁned as the ratio
T =
k
t
[ F [
2
k
i
[ A [
2
(856)
in which k
t
is the magnitude of the wave vector of the transmitted beam
F exp[ i k
t
x ] and k
i
is the magnitude of the wave vector for the incident
196
Reflection Coefficient for a beam of particles
incident on a shallow potential well
0
0.2
0.4
0.6
0.8
1
0 2 4 6 8 10 12
k L
R
(
k
)
Figure 40: The reﬂection coeﬃcient R(k) for a beam of particles of momentum
¯h k incident on a shallow potential well of depth − V
0
and width L. Note that,
due to the Ramsauer eﬀect, the reﬂection coeﬃcient falls to zero periodically.
beam A exp[ i k
i
x ]. In our examples k
i
and k
t
have the same value and,
therefore, cancel. In the more general case, the velocities have to be included,
and then the reﬂection and transmission coeﬃcients will satisfy the equation,
R + T = 1 (857)
In the above example, the transmission coeﬃcient is evaluated as
T(k) =
_
4 k
2
k
2
4 k
2
k
2
cos
2
k
L + ( k
2
+ k
2
)
2
sin
2
k
L
_
(858)
It is seen that the beam is totally transmitted whenever sin k
L = 0. The
transmission coeﬃcient shows oscillations with increasing k
. The minimum in
the reﬂection coeﬃcient and the corresponding maximum in the transmission
coeﬃcient is known as the Ramsauer eﬀect
11
. It is seen in the scattering of
lowenergy electrons from inert gas atoms.
——————————————————————————————————
11
C. Ramsauer, Ann. Phys. (Leipzig) 64, 546 (1921).
197
4.1.8 Exercise 62
Consider a particle of mass m moving in one dimension in a potential given by
0 if x < 0
V (x) =
− V
0
if x > 0 (859)
Consider the energy eigenstate which corresponds to a beam of particles of mo
mentum − p incident on the potential step from x → ∞, ﬁnd the amplitude
of the reﬂected and transmitted waves, for E > 0. Also ﬁnd the reﬂection and
transmission coeﬃcients and show that they add up to unity.
——————————————————————————————————
4.1.9 Solution 62
The incident beam is in the region x > 0 and is represented by the wave
travelling along the negative x direction
A exp
_
− i k
x
_
(860)
In addition, for positive x, one expects a reﬂected wave of amplitude B that
travels along the positive x direction. The form of the solution for x > 0 is
given by
Ψ(x) = A exp
_
− i k
x
_
+ B exp
_
+ i k
x
_
(861)
On substituting the trial form of the solution in the energy eigenvalue equation
for x > 0
−
¯h
2
2 m
∂
2
∂x
2
Ψ(x) − V
0
Ψ(x) = E Ψ(x) (862)
where we have used V (x) = − V
0
for x > 0, one obtains a relation between
the energy eigenvalue and k
,
¯h
2
2 m
k
2
− V
0
= E (863)
The solution for x < 0 corresponds to the transmitted beam
Ψ(x) = C exp
_
− i k x
_
(864)
198
which on substituting into the energy eigenvalue equation
−
¯h
2
2 m
∂
2
∂x
2
Ψ(x) = E Ψ(x) (865)
leads to
¯h
2
2 m
k
2
= E (866)
The matching conditions at x = 0 yield
C = A + B
k C = k
( A − B ) (867)
These can be solved to yield the amplitude of the reﬂected and transmitted
waves
B
A
=
_
k
− k
k
+ k
_
C
A
=
_
2 k
k
+ k
_
(868)
as ratios to the amplitude of the incident wave. The transmission coeﬃcient, T,
is given by
T =
k
k
¸
¸
¸
¸
C
A
¸
¸
¸
¸
2
=
4 k k
( k + k
)
2
(869)
where the factor k / k
represents the change in the ﬂux of particles due to
the diﬀerence in the velocities of the transmitted incident beam. The reﬂection
coeﬃcient R is given by
R =
¸
¸
¸
¸
B
A
¸
¸
¸
¸
2
=
( k
− k )
2
( k + k
)
2
(870)
Hence, we ﬁnd that reﬂection and transmission coeﬃcients add
R + T =
( k
− k )
2
( k + k
)
2
+
4 k k
( k + k
)
2
=
( k + k
)
2
( k + k
)
2
= 1 (871)
199
to yield unity.
——————————————————————————————————
4.1.10 Exercise 63
By considering the solution of the Schr¨odinger equation with the initial state
described by the energy eigenstate found in the previous example, show that
the system is in a steady state. Find the probability current density in the two
regions, and show that it satisﬁes the continuity condition, when E > 0. Also,
show that the continuity condition is satisﬁed in the two regions when E < 0.
——————————————————————————————————
4.1.11 Solution 63
The probability density ρ(x, t) for ﬁnding a particle in the region x > 0 is
given by
ρ(x, t) =
¸
¸
¸
¸
Ψ(x, t)
¸
¸
¸
¸
2
=
¸
¸
¸
¸
A exp
_
− i k
x
_
+ B exp
_
+ i k
x
_ ¸
¸
¸
¸
2
¸
¸
¸
¸
exp
_
−
i
¯h
E t
_ ¸
¸
¸
¸
2
= [ A [
2
+ [ B [
2
+ A B
∗
exp
_
− 2 i k
x
_
+ A
∗
B exp
_
+ 2 i k
x
_
= [ A [
2
_
2
_
k
2
+ k
2
( k + k
)
2
_
+ 2
_
k
− k
k
+ k
_
cos 2 k
x
_
(872)
which is time independent, but exhibits oscillations due to the interference be
tween the incident and reﬂected wave. The probability density ρ(x, t) for ﬁnding
a particle in the region x < 0 is given by
ρ(x, t) =
¸
¸
¸
¸
Ψ(x, t)
¸
¸
¸
¸
2
=
¸
¸
¸
¸
C exp
_
− i k
x
_
exp
_
−
i
¯h
E t
_ ¸
¸
¸
¸
2
= [ C [
2
= [ A [
2
4 k
2
( k + k
)
2
(873)
which is spatially uniform and time independent.
200
The probability current density j
x
(x, t) is given by
j
x
(x, t) = Real
_
Ψ
∗
(x, t)
_
−
i ¯h
m
∂
∂x
_
Ψ(x, t)
_
(874)
For x > 0, one ﬁnds the
j
x
(x, t) = Real
_
−
¯h k
m
( [ A [
2
− [ B [
2
)
_
+ Real
_
−
¯h k
m
( A B
∗
exp
_
− 2 i k
x
_
− B A
∗
exp
_
+ 2 i k
x
_
)
_
= Real
_
−
¯h k
m
( [ A [
2
− [ B [
2
)
_
(875)
as the last term is purely imaginary. This represents the net ﬂux along the
positive direction, which is the diﬀerence between the transmitted ﬂux and the
incident ﬂux. Note that the ratio of these two ﬂuxes is (apart from a sign) just
the reﬂection coeﬃcient R. The total probability current density for x > 0 is
evaluated as
j
x
(x, t) = −
¯h
m
k
_
4 k k
( k + k
)
2
_
[ A [
2
(876)
For x < 0 one ﬁnds
j
x
(x, t) = −
¯h k
m
[ C [
2
(877)
On evaluating the probability current density for x < 0, one ﬁnds that the
current density is time independent and spatially uniform. The current density
has a value of
j
x
(x, t) = −
¯h
m
k
_
4 k
2
( k + k
)
2
_
[ A [
2
(878)
Note that this just represents the ﬂux corresponding to the transmitted beam.
The ratio of the transmitted ﬂux to the incident ﬂux is just the transmission
coeﬃcient T.
Since, the probability current density has the same value for x > 0 and
x < 0 it is independent of x. The probability density is also independent of t.
Thus, the continuity condition
∂ρ(x, t)
∂t
+
∂j
x
(x, t)
∂x
= 0 (879)
201
is trivially satisﬁed.
——————————————————————————————————
4.1.12 The Threshold Energy for a Bound State
We have examined the shallow potential well and found energy eigenstates in
the energy regions, E > 0, which corresponded to scattering states with con
tinuous energy, and the energy region 0 > E > − V
0
which had bound
states with discrete energy eigenvalues. This raises the question as to whether
there are any states with energy E less than − V
0
. Classically, it is impossible
to have states with an energy lower than the minimum of the potential energy
as the only other contribution to the total energy, apart from the potential,
is the kinetic energy which is positive deﬁnite. We shall now prove that it is
impossible to have quantum states with energy eigenvalues that are lower than
the minimum value of the potential.
If a bound state exists, then [ Ψ(x) [
2
must decay exponentially as [ x [ → ∞
in order that the wave function be normalized. This means that [ Ψ(x) [
2
must
have at least one maximum. This means that
∂
∂x
[ Ψ(x) [
2
= 0 (880)
and
∂
2
∂x
2
[ Ψ(x) [
2
< 0 (881)
at the value of x = x
0
where the maximum is located.
We shall start with the energy eigenvalue equation
−
¯h
2
2 m
∂
2
Ψ
∂x
2
+
_
V (x) − E
_
Ψ = 0 (882)
and premultiply by the complex conjugate wave function Ψ
∗
and add this to
the complex conjugate of the energy eigenvalue equation postmultiplied by Ψ.
The result is
−
¯h
2
2 m
_
Ψ
∗
∂
2
Ψ
∂x
2
+ Ψ
∂
2
Ψ
∗
∂x
2
_
+ 2
_
V (x) − E
_
[ Ψ [
2
= 0 (883)
We can rewrite the above equation as
−
¯h
2
2 m
_
∂
2
∂x
2
[ Ψ [
2
_
+ 2
_
V (x) − E
_
[ Ψ [
2
= −
¯h
2
m
¸
¸
¸
¸
∂Ψ
∂x
¸
¸
¸
¸
2
(884)
This must hold at all values of x, including x
0
. But at the maximum we have
∂
∂x
[ Ψ(x
0
) [ = 0 (885)
202
and
∂
2
∂x
2
[ Ψ(x
0
) [
2
< 0 (886)
Hence, we ﬁnd that the equality
−
¯h
2
2 m
_
∂
2
∂x
2
[ Ψ(x
0
) [
2
_
= 2
_
E − V (x
0
)
_
[ Ψ(x
0
) [
2
(887)
holds at x
0
. Since the ﬁrst term is positive, the second term must also be
positive. Furthermore, as [ Ψ(x
0
) [
2
≥ 0, we must have
E ≥ V (x
0
) (888)
By deﬁnition, V (x
0
) is greater than or equal to the minimum value of V (x).
Therefore, the bound state energy E must be greater than or equal to the min
imum value of the potential.
4.1.13 Transmission through a Potential Barrier
Let us now consider a particle with energy E > 0 moving in a potential which
now has the form
V (x) = + V
0
if L > x > 0
V (x) = 0 otherwise (889)
We shall consider states in the energy range where V
0
> E > 0. In this energy
range, a classical particle would be forbidden to exist in the region L > x > 0
but could be found in the other regions of space.
A speciﬁc form of the solution of the Schr¨odinger equation can be written as
Ψ(x) = A exp
_
+ i k x
_
+ B exp
_
− i k x
_
x < 0
Ψ(x) = C exp
_
+ κ x
_
+ D exp
_
− κ x
_
L > x > 0
Ψ(x) = F exp
_
+ i k x
_
x > L (890)
where k is related to the energy eigenvalue E via
k
2
= +
2 m E
¯h
2
κ
2
=
2 m ( V
0
− E )
¯h
2
(891)
This form is appropriate to the case where a beam of particles of momentum
p = ¯ h k is incident from x → − ∞ onto the potential barrier. A portion of
203
Potential Barrier
0.5
0
0.5
1
1.5
1 0.5 0 0.5 1 1.5 2
x / L
V
(
x
)
/
V
0
V
0
V
0
> E > 0
E
Figure 41: A potential V (x) with a barrier of height V
0
and width L.
the beam will be reﬂected back to x → − ∞and a portion will be transmitted
to x → ∞. The continuity condition at x = 0 can be solved to yield
A =
_
+ κ + i k
2 i k
_
C +
_
− κ + i k
2 i k
_
D
B =
_
− κ + i k
2 i k
_
C +
_
+ κ + i k
2 i k
_
D (892)
The continuity condition at x = L yields C and D in terms of F. This leads
to
C =
_
κ + i k
2 κ
_
F exp
_
i k L
_
exp
_
− κ L
_
D =
_
κ − i k
2 κ
_
F exp
_
i k L
_
exp
_
+ κ L
_
(893)
On substituting the expressions for C and D into the previous expressions for
A and B, one obtains
A =
exp
_
i k L
_
4 i k κ
_
4 i k κ cosh κ L + 2 ( k
2
− κ
2
) sinh κ L
_
F
204
B =
exp
_
i k L
_
4 i k κ
_
2 ( k
2
+ κ
2
) sinh κ L
_
F (894)
The ratio of the amplitude of the transmitted wave to the incident wave is F / A
which is found as
F
A
=
4 i k κ exp
_
− i k L
_
_
4 i k κ cosh κ L + 2 ( k
2
− κ
2
) sinh κ L
_ (895)
whereas the ratio of the amplitude of the reﬂected wave to the incident wave is
B / A where
B
A
=
_
2 ( k
2
+ κ
2
) sinh κ L
_
_
4 i k κ cosh κ L + 2 ( k
2
− κ
2
) sinh κ L
_ (896)
These expressions are obviously related to the amplitudes for reﬂection from
and transmission through a shallow potential well, via the analytic continuation
k
→ i κ (897)
The transmission coeﬃcient T(k) is evaluated as
T(k) =
¸
¸
¸
¸
F
A
¸
¸
¸
¸
2
=
4 k
2
κ
2
_
4 k
2
κ
2
cosh
2
κ L + ( k
2
− κ
2
)
2
sinh
2
κ L
_ (898)
For large κ L, we have cosh κ L ·
1
2
exp
_
+ κ L
¸
and sinh κ L ·
1
2
exp
_
+ κ L
¸
. Thus, we ﬁnd that transmission coeﬃcient decreases exponen
tially with increasing L. The amplitude of the transmitted wave is exponentially
suppressed, and the leading exponential term is
F
A
≈
4 i k κ
( k + i κ )
2
exp
_
−κ L
_
exp
_
− i k L
_
(899)
The phenomenon in which particles are transmitted through a potential barrier
(known as quantum tunnelling) is due to the exponentially small probability of
ﬁnding the particles in the region of space where they are classically forbidden to
exist due to energetic reasons. In the classically forbidden regions, the classical
205
Transmission through a potential barrier
2 1 0 1 2 3 4
x/a
R
e
a
l
[
Φ
k
(
x
)
]
R T
Figure 42: Transmission Through a Potential Barrier. The real part of the wave
function Φ
k
(x) is plotted as a function of x. A beam of particles is emitted from
a source located at x → − ∞ and falls incident on the potential barrier. The
barrier extends from x = 0 up to x = a, and its extremities are marked by
the red vertical lines. The height of the barrier V
0
is greater than the kinetic
energy E of the incident particles, and hence is impenetrable to a beam of
classical particles of energy E. Most of the incident beam is reﬂected from the
potential barrier. The remaining part of the beam tunnels through the potential
barrier and is transmitted to inﬁnity. Therefore, some of the particles quantum
mechanically tunnel through the classically forbidden region.
kinetic energy would have to be negative. In the limit of large κ L, within the
approximation of leading exponential terms, the reﬂected wave has a relative
amplitude of unity
B
A
≈
( k
2
+ κ
2
)
( k + i κ )
2
(900)
as is needed if the probability current is to satisfy the continuity equation.
——————————————————————————————————
4.1.14 Exercise 64
Construct the probability current density in the three regions and show that
the continuity equations is satisﬁed in each region, including the region where
206
Transmission Coefficient for a Potential Barrier
0
0.2
0.4
0.6
0.8
1
1.2
0 2 4 6 8 10 12
k L
T
(
k
)
Figure 43: The transmission coeﬃcient T(k) of a beam of particles, of wave
vector k, incident on a potential barrier of height V
0
. For energies in the range
V
0
> E > 0, where a beam of classical particles would be totally reﬂected, the
quantum mechanical particles have an exponentially small probability of being
transmitted.
tunnelling occurs.
——————————————————————————————————
4.1.15 Solution 64
Since the states are energy eigenstates, the probability density is time indepen
dent. For x < 0, the probability density
ρ(x, t) = [ A [
2
+ [ B [
2
+
_
A B
∗
exp
_
i 2 k x
_
+ B A
∗
exp
_
− i 2 k x
_ _
(901)
is oscillatory. For L > x > 0, the probability density is also nonuniform
ρ(x, t) = [ C [
2
exp
_
+ 2 κ x
_
+ [ D [
2
exp
_
− 2 κ x
_
+
_
C D
∗
+ D C
∗
_
(902)
207
For x > L, the probability density is spatially uniform
ρ(x, t) = [ F [
2
(903)
The probability current density j
x
(x, t) in the region x < 0 is given by
j
x
(x, t) =
¯h k
m
_
[ A [
2
− [ B [
2
_
(904)
In the barrier region, the probability current density is given by
j
x
(x, t) = − i
¯h κ
m
_
C D
∗
− C
∗
D
_
(905)
for L > x > 0. This quantity is only ﬁnite if the coeﬃcients C and D
are complex. Since the coeﬃcients are determined via the matching conditions,
the probability current density is only ﬁnite if the wave function shows periodic
oscillations in some regions of space. In the last region, the probability current
density is also spatially uniform
j
x
(x, t) =
¯h k
m
[ F [
2
(906)
for x > L.
On evaluating the probability current density, it is found to be given by
j
x
(x, t) =
¯h k
m
4 k
2
κ
2
4 k
2
κ
2
cosh
2
κ L + ( k
2
− κ
2
)
2
sinh
2
κ L
[ A [
2
(907)
and is uniform throughout space. Since the probability current density is con
stant and the probability density is time independent, the continuity equation
∂ρ
∂t
+
∂j
x
∂x
= 0 (908)
is trivially satisﬁed.
——————————————————————————————————
4.1.16 The Double Well Potential
Consider a particle of mass m moving in one dimension in the presence of a
double well potential
V (x) = ∞ for [ x [ > ( a + b )
V (x) = 0 for ( a + b ) > [ x [ > ( b − a )
V (x) = V
0
otherwise (909)
208
The double well potential
x
V
(
x
)
(ba) (b+a) (b+a) (ba)
E
n
E
n
V
0
Figure 44: The double well potential.
The potential V (x) is a symmetric function of x. The parity operator
ˆ
P is
deﬁned as the operator which, when acting on an arbitrary function ψ(x), has
the eﬀect
ˆ
P ψ(x) = ψ(−x) (910)
On applying the parity operator twice, it is seen that it satisﬁes the relation
ˆ
P
2
=
ˆ
I (911)
The eigenfunctions φ
p
(x) of the parity operator satisfy the equations
ˆ
P φ
p
(x) = p φ
p
(x) (912)
where p is the parity eigenvalue. Because of the relation expressed by eqn(911),
the eigenvalues of the parity operator are restricted to have values ± 1. Since
the potential is an even function of x, the Hamiltonian commutes with the parity
operator
[
ˆ
P ,
ˆ
H ] = 0 (913)
so that the parity is a conserved quantity. In other words, parity is a constant of
motion. Since the Hamiltonian commutes with the parity operator, one can ﬁnd
simultaneous eigenstates of
ˆ
H and
ˆ
P. We shall seek such solutions for which
E < V
0
. In this case, classical particles are excluded from traversing the region
containing the potential barrier.
209
The even parity eigenfunctions can be expressed in the form
φ(x) = A sin k ( x − a − b ) for ( a + b ) > x > ( b − a )
φ(x) = B cosh κ x for ( b − a ) > [ x [ (914)
where the energy eigenvalue is related to k and κ via
E =
¯h
2
k
2
2 m
= V
0
−
¯h
2
κ
2
2 m
(915)
Since φ(x) is an even parity eigenfunction φ(−x) = φ(x), the form of the
solution for − ( b − a ) > x > − ( b + a ) is given by
φ(x) = − A sin k ( x + a + b ) for − ( b − a ) > x > − ( b + a )
(916)
The above form of the solution φ(x) identically satisﬁes the boundary conditions
at the hard walls x = ± ( b + a ). The remaining matching conditions at
x = ± ( b − a ) lead to the selfconsistency equation
k cot 2 k a = − κ tanh κ ( b − a ) (917)
This equation together with the relation
k
2
+ κ
2
=
2 m V
0
¯h
2
(918)
can be solved graphically. The solutions determine the quantized values of k.
The odd parity eigenfunctions can be expressed as
φ(x) = A sin k ( x − a − b ) for ( a + b ) > x > ( b − a )
φ(x) = B sinh κ x for ( b − a ) > [ x [ (919)
The form of the solution for negative values of x can be obtained from those
of positive values of x by noting that they have odd parity φ(−x) = − φ(x).
If the above forms of φ(x) are to satisfy the diﬀerential equation, the energy
eigenvalue must be related to k and κ via eqn(915). The above form of the
solution φ(x) automatically satisﬁes the boundary conditions at the hard walls
x = ± ( b + a ). The matching conditions for the odd parity eigenfunctions
at x = ± ( b − a ) lead to the equation
k cot 2 k a = − κ coth κ ( b − a ) (920)
The quantized values of k are given by the solutions of the above selfconsistency
equation.
210
Consistency conditions
10
5
0
5
0 0.5 1 1.5 2
2ka /π
k cot 2ka
−κ coth κ(ba)
−κ tanh κ(ba)
2(2mV
0
a
2
/h
2
π
2
)
1/2
Figure 45: The graphical solution of the self consistency conditions for the
double potential well. The right hand side for odd parity solutions is shown by
the dashed line, the right hand side for even parity solutions is shown by the
solid line.
Graphical solution of the even and odd parity self consistency equations
shows that, for large barrier heights or large barrier widths such that
tanh κ( b − a ) ∼ 1 (921)
the eigenvalues occur in pairs which are almost degenerate. The pairs of energies
have magnitudes which are close to the bound state energies of the isolated wells,
so
k cot 2 k a ∼ − κ (922)
The splitting ∆E between the lowest pairs of eigenvalues is exponentially small,
and is approximated by
∆E ∼
¯h
2
π
2
2 m a
2
2
κ a
exp
_
− 2 κ ( b −a )
_
(923)
The tunnel splitting between the pairs of energy levels increases for the higher
energy levels.
211
Energy eigenfunctions of the double well potential
x
Ψ
n
(
x
)
(b+a) (b+a) (ba) (ba)
Ψ
0
(x)
Ψ
1
(x)
Figure 46: The lowest pair of energy eigenfunctions for the double well potential.
4.1.17 The delta function Potential
Let us consider a beam of particles of mass m and momentum ¯h k scattering
from an attractive potential V (x) localized at the origin
V (x) = − V
0
a δ(x) (924)
where V
0
a is a measure of the strength of the potential. In the strength, V
0
has
units of potential and a has units of length.
The energy eigenvalue equation becomes
_
−
¯h
2
2 m
∂
2
∂x
2
− V
0
a δ(x)
_
φ
k
(x) = E φ
k
(x) (925)
We shall look for a solution which is of the form
φ
k
(x) = A exp
_
+ i k x
_
+ B exp
_
− i k x
_
(926)
in the region 0 > x and has the form
φ
k
(x) = F exp
_
+ i k x
_
(927)
212
Delta function potential
14
12
10
8
6
4
2
0
2
2 1 0 1 2
x / a
V
(
x
)
V(x) =  V
0
a δ(x)
E
0
Figure 47: The attractive delta function potential. The bound state energy is
shown by a horizontal dashed line.
for x > 0. These forms satisfy the energy eigenvalue equation in these two
regions if
E =
¯h
2
k
2
2 m
(928)
since, the potential vanishes identically in these two separate regions. Again, the
form is appropriate for discussion of the scattering of a beam of particles with
energy E > 0 and momentum ¯h k incident on the potential from x → − ∞.
The matching conditions at x = 0 are aﬀected by the presence of the
nonzero potential. The continuity of the wave function yields
A + B = F (929)
The discontinuity in the ﬁrst derivative is produced by the inﬁnite potential at
the origin. Let us integrate the energy eigenvalue equation from x = − to
x = + and let → 0. Then, as E and φ
k
(0) are ﬁnite, in the limit → 0
one has
_
+
−
dx
_
−
¯h
2
2 m
∂
2
∂x
2
− V
0
a δ(x)
_
φ
k
(x) = E
_
+
−
dx φ
k
(x)
−
¯h
2
2 m
∂
∂x
φ
k
(x)
¸
¸
¸
¸
+
−
− V
0
a φ
k
(0) = E 2 φ
k
(0) (930)
213
which reduces to
−
¯h
2
2 m
∂
∂x
φ
k
(x)
¸
¸
¸
¸
+
−
= V
0
a φ
k
(0) (931)
This yields the second condition
−
¯h
2
2 m
_
i k F
_
+
¯h
2
2 m
_
i k A − i k B
_
= V
0
a F (932)
These two equations can be solved to yield B and F in terms of A,
B
A
=
− 1
1 +
i k ¯ h
2
m a V0
F
A
=
i k ¯ h
2
m a V0
1 +
i k ¯ h
2
m a V0
(933)
Thus, we again have
[ B [
2
[ A [
2
+
[ F [
2
[ A [
2
= 1
T + R = 1 (934)
and E is a continuous variable, in the range E > 0. We note that for large E,
R → 0 and T → 1, as the potential becomes ineﬀective in scattering particles
with suﬃciently high energies.
4.1.18 Bound States of a delta function Potential
We shall now consider the bound states of a delta function potential which must
have E < 0 and as a result
E = −
¯h
2
κ
2
2 m
(935)
where κ is a positive real number. Accordingly, the wave function in the two
regions must have the forms given by
φ
κ
(x) = A exp
_
− κ x
_
+ B exp
_
+ κ x
_
(936)
when 0 > x and
φ
κ
(x) = F exp
_
− κ x
_
(937)
when x > 0, corresponding to the analytic continuation k → i κ. In order
for the wave function to be normalizable at x → − ∞, one must have A = 0.
The matching conditions then yield
B = F (938)
214
and
−
¯h
2
2 m
_
− κ F
_
+
¯h
2
2 m
_
+ κ B
_
= V
0
a F (939)
which yields the energy eigenvalue condition
¯h
2
m
κ = V
0
a (940)
Thus, the energy eigenvalue is given by
E = −
( V
0
)
2
_
2 ¯ h
2
m a
2
_ (941)
which has the dimensions of energy.
This result could have been obtained directly by noting that the reﬂection
and transmission coeﬃcients have poles at
¯h
2
m
i k = − V
0
a (942)
which is satisﬁed for imaginary values of k. Furthermore, since A can be ne
glected in comparison with B and F for this imaginary value of k, and since
k = i κ, the wave function decays away from the origin
φ
κ
(x) = B exp
_
+ κ x
_
(943)
in the region 0 > x and
φ
κ
(x) = B exp
_
− κ x
_
(944)
for x > 0. The amplitudes of the decaying wave functions are equal (B = F),
as can be seen from eqn(933) by noting that at the pole
i k ¯ h
2
m a V0
= − 1. Thus,
we have recovered the bound state energy and the form of the wave function by
analytic continuation to negative energies.
The normalization of the wave function yields the amplitude, up to an arbi
trary phase, as
B =
√
κ (945)
Solution in the Momentum Representation
215
Bound state wave function
0
0.5
1
1.5
2 1 0 1 2
x / a
Ψ
0
(
x
)
Figure 48: The bound state wave function of an attractive delta function poten
tial. Note that the wave function has a discontinuous ﬁrst derivative at x = 0.
The bound states of the attractive onedimensional delta function potential
can be found by transforming to the momentum representation. The energy
eigenvalue equation is
_
−
¯h
2
2 m
∂
2
∂x
2
− V
0
a δ(x)
_
ψ
0
(x) = E
0
ψ
0
(x) (946)
which after performing the Fourier Transform
φ
0
(k) =
_
1
2 π
_1
2
_
∞
−∞
dx ψ
0
(x) exp
_
− i k x
_
(947)
becomes
¯h
2
k
2
2 m
φ
0
(k) −
V
0
a
√
2 π
ψ
0
(0) = E
0
φ
0
(k) (948)
On expressing the energy eigenvalue E
0
in terms of κ
E
0
= −
¯h
2
κ
2
2 m
(949)
the equation is solved for φ
0
(k) as
φ
0
(k) =
1
√
2 π
_
2 m V
0
a
¯h
2
_
ψ
0
(0)
( k
2
+ κ
2
)
(950)
216
The real space wave function ψ
0
(x) is given by the inverse Fourier Transform of
φ
0
(k)
ψ
0
(x) =
_
1
2 π
_1
2
_
∞
−∞
dk φ
0
(k) exp
_
+ i k x
_
(951)
On performing the integral via Cauchy’s method, in which the contour is com
pleted with a semicircle in either the upper or lower half of the complex plane
depending on the sign of x, one ﬁnds that the real space wave function is given
by
ψ
0
(x) =
_
m V
0
a
¯h
2
κ
_
ψ
0
(0) exp
_
− κ [ x [
_
(952)
If the form of the solution for ψ
0
(x) is consistent with the value of ψ
0
(0) at
x = 0, the value of κ must satisfy the equation
κ =
m V
0
a
¯h
2
(953)
This condition determines the allowed value of the bound state energy.
——————————————————————————————————
Example: The Bound States of a Triple delta function Potential.
We shall examine the bound states of a particle of mass m moving in one
dimension, in the presence of a potential V (x) given by
V (x) = − V
0
a
_
δ(x −a) + δ(x) +δ(x +a)
_
(954)
where V
0
is a positive constant with units of potential and a is a length scale.
The potential is an even function of x. The parity operator
ˆ
P is deﬁned as the
operator which, when acting on an arbitrary function ψ(x), has the eﬀect
ˆ
P ψ(x) = ψ(−x) (955)
Since the potential is an even function of x, the Hamiltonian commutes with
the parity operator
[
ˆ
P ,
ˆ
H ] = 0 (956)
so that the parity is a conserved quantity. In other words, parity is a constant
of motion.
We shall search for bound states that are simultaneous eigenstates of the
parity operator and the Hamiltonian. We shall look for eigenfunctions which
are of the form
φ
n
(x) = A exp
_
− κ x
_
(957)
217
Triple delta function potential
20
15
10
5
0
5
2 1 0 1 2
x/a
V
(
x
)
/
V
0
a
Figure 49: The potential V (x) for three equally spaced attractive delta func
tions.
in the region x > a and which are of the form
φ
n
(x) = B exp
_
− κ x
_
+ C exp
_
+ κ x
_
(958)
in the region a > x > 0. The forms of the solution for x < 0 are found from
the above forms by requiring that the eigenfunctions either have even or odd
parities. The above forms satisfy the energy eigenvalue equation in the regions
where the potential is zero, as long as the energy eigenvalue of the bound state
E
n
is expressed in terms of κ via
E
n
= −
¯h
2
κ
2
2 m
(959)
The above form of the eigenfunction is a solution of the diﬀerential equation
as long as it satisﬁes the diﬀerential equation at the boundary points x = 0 and
x = ± a. The boundary conditions at x = a are the condition of continuity of
the wave function and the condition that the discontinuity of its ﬁrst derivative
is related to the integral of the potential. These boundary conditions can be
expressed as
A = B + C exp
_
2 κ a
_
(960)
218
and
A
_
1 −
2 m V
0
a
¯h
2
κ
_
= B − C exp
_
2 κ a
_
(961)
The above two equations can be combined to yield
A
_
1 −
m V
0
a
¯h
2
κ
_
= B (962)
and
m V
0
a
¯h
2
κ
A = C exp
_
2 κ a
_
(963)
The eigenfunctions also have to satisfy boundary conditions at x = 0. The
explicit forms of the boundary conditions at x = 0 depend on the parity of the
eigenfunctions, therefore, we shall discuss the two cases separately.
Odd Parity
For odd parity solutions, φ
n
(−x) = − φ
n
(x), so the boundary condition at
x = 0 reduces to
φ
n
(0) = 0 (964)
or
B = − C (965)
Hence, one ﬁnds that B and C are completely determined by A, and A is deter
mined, up to the phase, by the normalization condition. The above conditions
imply that for odd parity solutions, κ must satisfy the equation
_
m V
0
a
2
¯h
2
− κ a
_
=
m V
0
a
2
¯h
2
exp
_
− 2 κ a
_
(966)
This equation can be solved graphically by plotting the left hand side and the
right hand side as a function of κ a on the same graph, as seen in ﬁg(50). The
solutions for κ correspond to the points where the two curves cross. Both curves
start at the same value
m V
0
a
2
¯h
2
(967)
when κ a = 0, and are both decreasing functions of κ a. The left hand side
decreases linearly with increasing κ and becomes negative at
κ a =
m V
0
a
2
¯h
2
(968)
and the right hand side approaches the value of 0 exponentially as κ a → ∞.
By considering the initial slopes of both curves, one ﬁnds that if
2
m V
0
a
2
¯h
2
> 1 (969)
219
Odd Parity Consistency Equation
1
0
1
2
0 1 2 3
κ a
(mV
0
a
2
/h
2
) exp [ 2κa ]
(mV
0
a
2
/h
2
κa)
Figure 50: The graphical solution for the odd parity bound states, shown for
two diﬀerent strengths of the potential V
0
. The left hand side of eqn(966) is
shown by a red line, and the right hand side by a blue line. For large values of
the potential or the separation, the equation (represented by the pair of solid
lines) has one solution at a nonzero value of κ. For small values of V
0
, the left
hand and right hand sides of the equation are depicted by the dashed lines. The
dashed curves only intersect at κ = 0.
then the two curves also cross at a ﬁnite value of κ a. The value of κ a at the
crossing yields a bound state solution with odd parity. The solution at κ a = 0
represents an odd parity zero energy resonance.
Even Parity
For even parity solutions, φ
n
(−x) = φ
n
(x). Therefore, the matching condi
tion at the x = 0 boundary leads to
_
B − C
_
=
m V
0
a
¯h
2
κ
_
B + C
_
(970)
or
B
_
1 −
m V
0
a
¯h
2
κ
_
= C
_
1 +
m V
0
a
¯h
2
κ
_
(971)
On combining these conditions with the boundary conditions at x = a, one
ﬁnds that κ a must satisfy the equation
_
κ a −
m V
0
a
2
¯h
2
_
2
=
m V
0
a
2
¯h
2
_
κ a +
m V
0
a
2
¯h
2
_
exp
_
− 2 κ a
_
(972)
220
This equation determines the energy eigenvalues and energy eigenfunctions with
even parity. The above transcendental equation can be solved graphically, as
seen in ﬁg(51). The left hand side and right hand side take on the same value
Even Parity Consistency Equations
0
1
2
3
4
0 1 2 3
κ a
(mV
0
a
2
/h
2
)(κa+mV
0
a
2
/h
2
) exp [ 2κa ]
(κamV
0
a
2
/h
2
)
2
Figure 51: The graphical solution of eqn(972) for the even parity bound states,
shown for two diﬀerent strengths of the potential. The left hand side of the
equation is shown by a red line, and the right hand side by a blue line. For
large values of
V0 ma
2
¯ h
2
, the equation (represented by the solid lines) has two
solutions at nonzero values of κ. For small values of V
0
, the equation only has
one solution at a nonzero value of κ, located at the intersection of the dashed
lines.
at κ a = 0. The left hand side is always positive but touches zero at
κ a =
m V
0
a
2
¯h
2
(973)
and varies quadratically as κ a → ∞. The right hand side is monotonically
decreasing and approaches zero as κ a → ∞. From consideration of the initial
slope, it is found that there are three solutions of this equation if
2
m V
0
a
2
¯h
2
> 3 (974)
and, otherwise, only has two solutions. The solution at κ a = 0 corresponds
to a zero energy bound state or resonance. The solutions at ﬁnite values of κ a
have ﬁnite binding energies.
221
Bound State Energies
3
2
1
0
0 0.5 1 1.5 2
mV
0
a
2
/h
2
E
n
m
a
2
/
h
2
n=1
n=2
n=3
Figure 52: The bound state energy eigenvalues E
n
, for the triple delta function
potential.
Bound state wave functions
2 1 0 1 2
x/a
ψ
n
(
x
)
n=3
n=2
n=1
mV
0
a
2
/h
2
= 1.8
0
0
0
Figure 53: The bound state wave functions φ
n
(x), for the triple delta function
potential.
222
The three bound state energies E
n
are plotted as a function of κ a in ﬁg(52).
It is seen that the number of bound states increases as the value of V
0
increases.
As the separation between the wells is increased, all the bound state energies
approach the asymptotic expression
E
n
→ −
m V
2
0
a
2
2 ¯h
2
(975)
expected for three isolated delta function potentials. The three bound state
wave functions φ
n
(x) are shown in ﬁg(53). It is seen that the number of nodes
increases with increasing energy.
——————————————————————————————————
4.1.19 Exercise 65
Find the reﬂection and transmission coeﬃcients for a potential
V (x) = V
0
Θ(x) − V
0
a δ(x) (976)
where Θ(x) is the Heaviside step function,
1 for x > 0
Θ(x) =
0 for x < 0 (977)
The potential is shown in ﬁg(54). Show that the reﬂection and transmission
coeﬃcients add up to unity.
——————————————————————————————————
4.1.20 Solution 65
The energy eigenfunction corresponding to a scattering experiment where the
incident beam is travelling towards the right is given by
φ
k
(x) = A exp
_
i k x
_
+ B exp
_
− i k x
_
x < 0
φ
k
(x) = C exp
_
i k
x
_
x > 0 (978)
where E =
¯ h
2
k
2
2 m
and E = V
0
+
¯ h
2
k
2
2 m
The continuity condition leads to
C = A + B (979)
223
4
3
2
1
0
1
2
1 0.5 0 0.5 1
x/a
V
(
x
)
V(x) = V
0
a δ δδ δ(x) + V
0
Θ ΘΘ Θ(x)
Figure 54: The potential V (x) used in Exercise 65.
whereas the discontinuity in the ﬁrst derivative satisﬁes the equation
_
i k
+
2 m V
0
a
¯h
2
_
C = i k ( A − B ) (980)
Therefore
A
C
=
_
k + k
− i
2 m V0 a
¯ h
2
2 k
_
(981)
and
B
C
=
_
k − k
+ i
2 m V0 a
¯ h
2
2 k
_
(982)
Thus, we have the transmission coeﬃcient
T =
k
k
[ C [
2
[ A [
2
T =
4 k k
( k + k
)
2
+ (
2 m V0 a
¯ h
2
)
2
(983)
and the reﬂection coeﬃcient is given by
R =
[ B [
2
[ A [
2
R =
( k − k
)
2
+ (
2 m V0 a
¯ h
2
)
2
( k + k
)
2
+ (
2 m V0 a
¯ h
2
)
2
(984)
224
0
0.2
0.4
0.6
0.8
1
1 1.5 2 2.5 3
k/k
0
T
(
k
)
T(k)
R(k)
Figure 55: The transmission coeﬃcient T(k) and the reﬂection coeﬃcient R(k)
calculated in Exercise 65.
——————————————————————————————————
4.1.21 Exercise 66
Find the reﬂection and transmission coeﬃcients for a beam of particles incident
on the potential V (x) given by
V (x) = − V
0
a
_
δ( x − a ) + δ( x + a )
_
(985)
Also, ﬁnd the bound states.
——————————————————————————————————
4.1.22 Solution 66
The energy eigenfunctions corresponding to the scattering states of energy
E =
¯h
2
k
2
2 m
(986)
225
8
6
4
2
0
2
4
3 2 1 0 1 2 3
x / a
V
(
x
)
V(x) =  V
0
a δ δδ δ(xa)  V
0
a δ δδ δ(x+a)
E
0
E
1
Figure 56: The potential for two attractive delta function potentials.
can be expressed in terms of a steady state in which a particle beam of momen
tum ¯h k is incident from x → − ∞ or where a particle beam is incident from
x → + ∞. We shall consider the solution corresponding to a beam incident
from the left travelling to the right. The energy eigenfunction can be expressed
as
φ
k
(x) = A exp
_
i k x
_
+ B exp
_
− i k x
_
x < − a
φ
k
(x) = C exp
_
i k x
_
+ D exp
_
− i k x
_
− a < x < a
φ
k
(x) = F exp
_
i k x
_
a < x (987)
where A is the amplitude of the incident beam and B and F are the amplitudes
of the reﬂected and transmitted beams, respectively.
The continuity conditions at x = − a is given by
A exp
_
− i k a
_
+ B exp
_
+ i k a
_
= C exp
_
− i k a
_
+ D exp
_
+ i k a
_
(988)
226
whereas, from integrating the energy eigenvalue equation, one ﬁnds the discon
tinuity in the ﬁrst derivative satisﬁes
_
A exp
_
− i k a
_
− B exp
_
+ i k a
_ _
=
_
C exp
_
− i k a
_
− D exp
_
+ i k a
_ _
+
2 m V
0
a
i k ¯h
2
_
C exp
_
− i k a
_
+ D exp
_
+ i k a
_ _
(989)
This pair of equations can be solved for A and B in terms of C and D.
A = C
_
1 +
m V
0
a
i k ¯h
2
_
+ D exp
_
+ 2 i k a
_ _
m V
0
a
i k ¯h
2
_
B = D
_
1 −
m V
0
a
i k ¯h
2
_
− C exp
_
− 2 i k a
_ _
m V
0
a
i k ¯h
2
_
(990)
The boundary conditions at x = a are similar, the continuity equation is
C exp
_
+ i k a
_
+ D exp
_
− i k a
_
= F exp
_
+ i k a
_
(991)
whereas, from integrating the energy eigenvalue equation, one ﬁnds the discon
tinuity in the ﬁrst derivative satisﬁes
_
C exp
_
+ i k a
_
− D exp
_
− i k a
_ _
= F exp
_
+ i k a
_ _
1 +
2 m V
0
a
i k ¯h
2
_
(992)
This pair of equations can be solved to yield
C = F
_
1 +
m V
0
a
i k ¯h
2
_
D = −
_
m V
0
a
i k ¯h
2
_
F exp
_
+ 2 i k a
_
(993)
The expressions for C and D can be substituted in the expressions for A and
B, yielding the amplitudes of the reﬂected and transmitted beam
A
F
=
_
1 +
m V
0
a
i k ¯h
2
_
2
−
_
m V
0
a
i k ¯h
2
_
2
exp
_
+ 4 i k a
_
227
B
F
= −
_
m V
0
a
i k ¯h
2
_ _
exp
_
+ 2 i k a
_
+ exp
_
− 2 i k a
_ _
(994)
The transmission coeﬃcient is given by the inverse of the squared modulus of
the ﬁrst equation and the reﬂection coeﬃcient is found by dividing the one equa
tion by the other and then multiplying be its complex conjugate.
Self Consistency Equation
0
0.2
0.4
0.6
0.8
1
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 2
κ a
( m V
0
a /h
2
)
2
exp[  4 κ a]
( m V
0
a /h
2
 κ
)
2
Figure 57: A graphical solution for the bound state energies.
The bound states are given by the analytic continuation k → i κ and the
values of κ are determined from the poles of the transmission and reﬂection
coeﬃcients, i.e. A = 0. Hence, we ﬁnd
_
κ −
m V
0
a
¯h
2
_
2
=
_
m V
0
a
¯h
2
_
2
exp
_
− 4 κ a
_
(995)
For large κ a the solution reduces to the solution for two independent delta
function potentials, but these are subject to the exponentially small bonding
and antibonding splitting
κ ≈
_
m V
0
a
¯h
2
_ _
1 ∓ exp
_
− 2
m V
0
a
2
¯h
2
_ _
(996)
For small κ a the splitting becomes larger and one obtains the values of κ as
κ ≈ 2
_
m V
0
a
¯h
2
_
228
Bound state wave functions
1
0.5
0
0.5
1
4 3 2 1 0 1 2 3 4
x / a
Ψ
n
(
x
)
Ψ
0
(x)
Ψ
1
(x)
Figure 58: The bound state wave functions for the double delta function poten
tial.
κ ≈ 0 (997)
This potential may serve as a onedimensional model for a molecule, in which
the levels are doubly degenerate. If the atoms are far apart, the energies just
correspond to the energies of the individual atoms. However, when the atoms
are brought closer together, there is an energy gain for doubly occupying the
lowest energy state. This gain occurs through the bonding  antibonding split
ting and results in the molecule being stabilized.
Alternate Derivation of the Bound State Solutions.
We shall ﬁnd the bound states of particles moving in one dimension, in the
presence of the potential V (x) given by
V (x) = − V
0
a
_
δ( x − a ) + δ( x + a )
_
(998)
The energy eigenvalue equation
_
−
¯h
2
2 m
∂
2
∂x
2
− V (x)
_
ψ
α
(x) = E
α
ψ
α
(x) (999)
229
will be solved in the momentum space representation. On Fourier Transforming
φ
α
(k) =
_
1
2 π
_1
2
_
∞
−∞
dx ψ
α
(x) exp
_
− i k x
_
(1000)
the energy eigenvalue equation, one obtains
¯h
2
k
2
2 m
φ
α
(k) −
V
0
a
√
2 π
_
ψ
α
(a) exp
_
−i k a
_
+ψ
α
(−a) exp
_
+i k a
_ _
= E
α
φ
α
(k)
(1001)
On expressing the energy eigenvalue E
α
in terms of κ
E
α
= −
¯h
2
κ
2
2 m
(1002)
the momentum space form of the energy eigenvalue equation is solved for φ
α
(k),
yielding
φ
α
(k) =
1
√
2 π
_
2 m V
0
a
¯h
2
_
1
( k
2
+ κ
2
)
_
ψ
α
(a) exp
_
−i k a
_
+ψ
α
(−a) exp
_
+i k a
_ _
(1003)
The real space wave function ψ
α
(x) is given by the inverse Fourier Transform
of φ
α
(k)
ψ
α
(x) =
_
1
2 π
_1
2
_
∞
−∞
dk φ
α
(k) exp
_
+ i k x
_
(1004)
The integrals are performed using Cauchy’s method, in which the contours are
completed with semicircles at inﬁnity. One ﬁnds that the real space wave
function is given by
ψ
α
(x) =
_
m V
0
a
¯h
2
κ
_ _
ψ
α
(a) exp
_
−κ [ x −a [
_
+ψ
α
(−a) exp
_
−κ [ x +a [
_ _
(1005)
This solution must be consistent at the two points x = ± a. This yields the
two consistency conditions
ψ
α
(±a)
_
1 −
_
m V
0
a
¯h
2
κ
_ _
= ψ
α
(∓a)
_
m V
0
a
¯h
2
κ
_
exp
_
− 2 κ a
_
(1006)
These equations determine the allowed values of κ. On combining these equa
tions, one has
_
1 −
_
m V
0
a
¯h
2
κ
_ _
2
=
_
m V
0
a
¯h
2
κ
_
2
exp
_
− 4 κ a
_
(1007)
which has two nontrivial solutions if
2
_
m V
0
a
2
¯h
2
_
> 1 (1008)
230
Otherwise, the above equation only has one nontrivial solution, and the trivial
solution κ = 0.
——————————————————————————————————
4.1.23 Exercise 67
A particle of mass m moves in one dimension under the inﬂuence of an attrac
tive delta function potential centered at the origin, and of strength V
0
a. The
particle is in the bound state at t = 0 and then the strength of the attractive
potential is suddenly changed to V
0
a. What is the probability that the particle
will remain bound to the potential?
——————————————————————————————————
4.1.24 Solution 67
The energy eigenstate Ψ
0
(x) of the initial Hamiltonian
ˆ
H is governed by the
eigenvalue equation
−
¯h
2
2 m
∂
2
∂x
2
Ψ
0
(x) − V
0
a δ(x) Ψ
0
(x) = E
0
Ψ
0
(x) (1009)
For x ,= 0 the eigenvalue equation reduces to
−
¯h
2
2 m
∂
2
∂x
2
Ψ
0
(x) = E
0
Ψ
0
(x) (1010)
and has a solution of the form
Ψ
0
(x) = A exp
_
− κ x
_
x > 0
Ψ
0
(x) = B exp
_
+ κ x
_
x < 0 (1011)
where
E
0
= −
¯h
2
2 m
κ
2
(1012)
The matching condition at x = 0 yields
Ψ
0
( + ) = Ψ
0
( − ) (1013)
or
A = B (1014)
231
On integrating the diﬀerential equation over the inﬁnitesimal interval between
( − , + ), one obtains
_
+
−
dx
_
−
¯h
2
2 m
∂
2
∂x
2
Ψ
0
(x) − V
0
a δ(x) Ψ
0
(x)
_
= E
0
_
+
−
dx Ψ
0
(x)
−
¯h
2
2 m
∂
∂x
Ψ
0
(x)
¸
¸
¸
¸
+
−
− V
0
a Ψ
0
(0) = E
0
2 Ψ
0
(0)
(1015)
or in the limit → 0
+
¯h
2
m
κ A − V
0
a A = 0 (1016)
Hence,
κ =
m a V
0
¯h
2
(1017)
thus we have
E
0
= −
m a
2
V
0
2 ¯h
2
(1018)
and the bound state wave function is given by
Ψ
0
(x) = A exp
_
−
m a V
0
¯h
2
[ x [
_
(1019)
The magnitude of the constant A is given by the normalization condition
_
∞
−∞
dx [ Ψ
0
(x) [
2
= 1
[ A [
2
_
∞
−∞
dx exp
_
− 2
m a V
0
¯h
2
[ x [
_
= 1
2 [ A [
2
_
∞
0
dx exp
_
− 2
m a V
0
¯h
2
x
_
= 1
[ A [
2
¯h
2
m a V
0
= 1 (1020)
Hence,
A =
_
m a V
0
¯h
2
(1021)
up to an arbitrary phase. The initial ground state wave function is given by
Ψ
0
(x) =
_
m a V
0
¯h
2
exp
_
−
m a V
0
¯h
2
[ x [
_
(1022)
232
The initial state wave function Ψ
0
(x) can be expressed as a linear superpo
sition of the eigenstates of the ﬁnal Hamiltonian,
ˆ
H
, φ
n
(x), via
Ψ
0
(x) =
n
C
n
φ
n
(x) (1023)
where the expansion coeﬃcients are given by
C
n
=
_
∞
−∞
dx φ
∗
n
(x) Ψ
0
(x) (1024)
The probability that a measurement of
ˆ
H
will result in a value for the energy
of E
n
is given by
P(n) = [ C
n
[
2
(1025)
The overlap between the initial bound state and the ﬁnal bound state of poten
tial V
0
, is given by
_
∞
−∞
dx φ
∗
0
(x) Ψ
0
(x) = 2
m a
_
V
0
V
0
¯h
2
_
∞
0
dx exp
_
−
m a ( V
0
+ V
0
)
¯h
2
x
_
=
2
_
V
0
V
0
V
0
+ V
0
(1026)
The probability that the particle remains in the bound state, P(0), is given by
P(0) =
¸
¸
¸
¸
_
∞
−∞
dx φ
∗
0
(x) Ψ
0
(x)
¸
¸
¸
¸
2
=
4 V
0
V
0
( V
0
+ V
0
)
2
(1027)
Thus, the probability that the particle ends up in an excited state is given by
P
exc
=
n=0
P(n)
= 1 − P(0)
=
( V
0
− V
0
)
2
( V
0
+ V
0
)
2
(1028)
since the probabilities are normalized to unity. Note that if V
0
= V
0
no tran
sitions take place.
——————————————————————————————————
4.1.25 Exercise 68
A particle moves in one dimension in a potential of the form
V (x) = ∞ for x < 0
V (x) = − V
0
a δ( x − a ) for x > 0 (1029)
233
15
10
5
0
5
10
15
1 0 1 2
x/a
V
(
x
)
V(x) =  V
0
a δ δδ δ(xa) + V
1
Θ ΘΘ Θ(x)
Figure 59: The potential V (x) used in Exercise 68. The limit V
1
→ ∞ should
be taken.
The potential is shown in ﬁg(59). Find the condition that determines the bound
states. What is the minimum value of V
0
for which a bound state appears?
——————————————————————————————————
4.1.26 Solution 68
We need to consider the bound state solutions of the energy eigenvalue equation
_
−
¯h
2
2 m
∂
2
∂x
2
+ V (x)
_
φ
0
(x) = E
0
φ
0
(x) (1030)
In the region when x > a the bound state solution must have the form of
a decaying exponential
φ
0
(x) = C exp
_
− κ x
_
(1031)
where the bound state energy is
E = −
¯h
2
κ
2
2 m
(1032)
234
Whereas in the region where 0 < x < a the wave function must have the
form
φ
0
(x) = A exp
_
− κ x
_
+ B exp
_
+ κ x
_
(1033)
and vanish for x < 0.
To satisfy the boundary condition at x = 0 one must have A = − B.
The continuity condition at x = a yields
A
_
exp
_
− κ a
_
− exp
_
+ κ a
_ _
= C exp
_
− κ a
_
(1034)
and on integrating the energy eigenvalue equation in an inﬁnitesimal region
about x = a to obtain the discontinuity of the ﬁrst derivative in terms of the
strength of the delta function potential,
− κ C exp
_
− κ a
_
− κ A
_
exp
_
− κ a
_
+ exp
_
+ κ a
_ _
= −
2 m V
0
a
¯h
2
C exp
_
− κ a
_
(1035)
These two equations can be solved to yield
coth κ a = −
_
1 −
2 m V
0
a
¯h
2
κ
_
(1036)
The bound state only just exists if κ → 0 in which case the above equation
can be expanded in powers of κ. The solution at κ → 0 only exists if
2 m V
0
a
2
¯h
2
= 1 (1037)
——————————————————————————————————
235
4.2 The OneDimensional Harmonic Oscillator
We shall ﬁnd all the energy eigenfunctions of the onedimensional Harmonic os
cillator in a systematic way. The Hamiltonian of the onedimensional harmonic
oscillator can be written as
ˆ
H =
_
−
¯h
2
2 m
∂
2
∂x
2
+
m ω
2
x
2
2
_
(1038)
The Harmonic Oscillator Potential
1
0
1
2
3
4
5
3 2 1 0 1 2 3
x
V
(
x
)
V(x) = 1/2 m ω
2
x
2
E > 0 E
0
E
1
E
2
E
3
Figure 60: The Harmonic Oscillator Potential V (x) =
m ω
2
2
x
2
.
The Hamiltonian can be rewritten in terms of the dimensionless variable
ξ =
_
m ω
¯h
x (1039)
Then, the Hamiltonian has the form
ˆ
H =
¯h ω
2
_
−
∂
2
∂ξ
2
+ ξ
2
_
(1040)
which shows that ¯ h ω provides the natural energy scale for the quantum system.
The Hamiltonian operator can be expressed in terms of its classical factorization
and a constant either as
ˆ
H =
¯h ω
2
_ _
−
∂
∂ξ
+ ξ
_ _
+
∂
∂ξ
+ ξ
_
+ 1
_
(1041)
236
or as
ˆ
H =
¯h ω
2
_ _
+
∂
∂ξ
+ ξ
_ _
−
∂
∂ξ
+ ξ
_
− 1
_
(1042)
since the factors do not commute. In fact, the commutator of the factors is
given by
_ _
+
∂
∂ξ
+ ξ
_
,
_
−
∂
∂ξ
+ ξ
_ _
= 2 (1043)
4.2.1 The Raising and Lowering Operators
Let us denote the factors by the operators ˆ a
†
and ˆ a since these factors are Her
mitean conjugates. We shall also introduce a factor of
√
2 into their deﬁnition
ˆ a =
1
√
2
_
+
∂
∂ξ
+ ξ
_
ˆ a
†
=
1
√
2
_
−
∂
∂ξ
+ ξ
_
(1044)
to simplify the commutation relations. Thus, these operators have the commu
tation relations
[ ˆ a , ˆ a
†
] = + 1 (1045)
4.2.2 The Eﬀect of the Lowering Operator
Let us consider the energy eigenvalue equation
ˆ
H Ψ
n
(x) = E
n
Ψ
n
(x) (1046)
with wave function Ψ
n
(x) and energy eigenvalue E
n
. The Hamiltonian when
expressed in terms of the new operators is just
ˆ
H =
¯hω
2
_
2 ˆ a
†
ˆ a + 1
_
ˆ
H =
¯hω
2
_
2 ˆ a ˆ a
†
− 1
_
(1047)
The eﬀect of the operators ˆ a on the eigenvalue equation can be found as
ˆ a
ˆ
H Ψ
n
(x) = E
n
ˆ a Ψ
n
(x) (1048)
but since the commutator of ˆ a with the Hamiltonian is
ˆ a
ˆ
H = ˆ a
¯h ω
2
_
2 ˆ a
†
ˆ a + 1
_
=
¯h ω
2
_
2 ˆ a
†
ˆ a + 3
_
ˆ a
=
_
ˆ
H + ¯h ω
_
ˆ a (1049)
237
one ﬁnds eqn(1048) can be rewritten as
_
ˆ
H + ¯h ω
_
ˆ a Ψ
n
(x) = E
n
ˆ a Ψ
n
(x) (1050)
Thus, on rewriting this we ﬁnd
ˆ
H ˆ a Ψ
n
(x) =
_
E
n
− ¯h ω
_
ˆ a Ψ
n
(x) (1051)
Hence, the wave function
ˆ a Ψ
n
(x) (1052)
is an eigenfunction of the Hamiltonian with an eigenvalue of E
n
− ¯h ω. Thus,
the operator ˆ a when acting on an energy eigenfunction produces another energy
eigenfunction with a lower energy eigenvalue. In other words,
ˆ a Ψ
n
(x) = C
n
Ψ
n−1
(x) (1053)
where C
n
is a constant of proportionality. This property of ˆ a justiﬁes naming
it as the lowering operator.
4.2.3 The Ground State
The lowest energy state has eigenvalue E
0
and, therefore, as there is no lower
energy eigenfunction, one must have
ˆ a Ψ
0
(x) = 0 (1054)
This leads to the equation for the ground state wave function
_
+
∂
∂ξ
+ ξ
_
Ψ
0
(x) = 0 (1055)
This has the solution
Ψ
0
(x) = C exp
_
−
ξ
2
2
_
(1056)
where C is the normalization constant that still has to be determined. In terms
of the original variables, the ground state wave function is found as
Ψ
0
(x) = C exp
_
−
m ω x
2
2 ¯h
_
(1057)
The normalization condition yields
[ C [ =
_
m ω
¯h π
_1
4
(1058)
238
Since the lowest energy state satisﬁes eqn(1054) and due to the ﬁrst form of the
Hamiltonian given in eqn(1047), we deduce that the lowest energy eigenvalue is
¯ h ω
2
. The method implies that there exists higherenergy eigenstates that have
energy eigenvalues which are larger by multiples of ¯h ω, that is
E
n
= ¯ h ω
_
n +
1
2
_
(1059)
4.2.4 The Eﬀect of The Raising Operator
The eﬀect of the Hermitean conjugate of ˆ a can be found by considering its eﬀect
on the energy eigenvalue equation
ˆ a
†
ˆ
H Ψ
n
(x) = ˆ a
†
E
n
Ψ
n
(x) (1060)
On using the commutation relations, one ﬁnds
ˆ a
†
ˆ
H = ˆ a
†
¯h ω
2
_
2 ˆ a
†
ˆ a + 1
_
=
¯h ω
2
_
2 ˆ a
†
ˆ a − 1
_
ˆ a
†
=
_
ˆ
H − ¯h ω
_
ˆ a
†
(1061)
so one ﬁnds that eqn(1060) becomes
_
ˆ
H − ¯h ω
_
ˆ a
†
Ψ
n
(x) = E
n
ˆ a
†
Ψ
n
(x) (1062)
Thus, on rewriting the above equation, we ﬁnd
ˆ
H ˆ a
†
Ψ
n
(x) =
_
E
n
+ ¯h ω
_
ˆ a
†
Ψ
n
(x) (1063)
Hence, the wave function
ˆ a
†
Ψ
n
(x) (1064)
is an eigenfunction of the Hamiltonian with an eigenvalue of E
n
+ ¯ h ω, i.e.
E
n+1
. Thus, the operator ˆ a
†
when acting on an energy eigenfunction produces
another energy eigenfunction with a higherenergy eigenvalue.
ˆ a
†
Ψ
n
(x) = C
∗
n+1
Ψ
n+1
(x) (1065)
where C
∗
n+1
is a constant of proportionality related to that in eqn(1053). This
property of ˆ a
†
justiﬁes naming it as the raising operator.
239
4.2.5 The Normalization
The constant of proportionality for the raising operator is related to the constant
of proportionality for the lowering operator as can be found by considering the
deﬁnition of the Hermitean conjugate of an operator
_
+ ∞
− ∞
dx Ψ
∗
n−1
(x) ˆ a Ψ
n
(x) =
_ _
+ ∞
− ∞
dx Ψ
∗
n
(x) ˆ a
†
Ψ
n−1
(x)
_
∗
(1066)
This implies that, with properly normalized eigenfunctions and on using the
deﬁnition in eqn(1063) and its consequence eqn(1065), the coeﬃcients of pro
portionality satisfy
C
n
=
_
C
∗
n
_
∗
(1067)
as expected. The constant of proportionality can be found, up to an arbitrary
phase, from the energy eigenvalue equation
¯h ω
2
_
2 ˆ a
†
ˆ a + 1
_
Ψ
n
(x) = ¯ h ω
_
n +
1
2
_
Ψ
n
(x) (1068)
Thus, on using the equations for the raising and lowering operators together
with the constants of proportionality, one ﬁnds
[ C
n
[
2
= n (1069)
Hence, on choosing a real phase for the C
n
, we have the equations
ˆ a Ψ
n
(x) =
√
n Ψ
n−1
(x)
ˆ a
†
Ψ
n
(x) =
√
n + 1 Ψ
n+1
(x) (1070)
4.2.6 The Excited States
All the energy eigenfunctions can be obtained from the ground state wave func
tion by successive action of the raising operator, Hence, we have
Ψ
1
(x) = ˆ a
†
Ψ
0
(x)
Ψ
1
(x) =
1
√
2
_
−
_
¯h
m ω
∂
∂x
+
_
m ω
¯h
x
_
Ψ
0
(x)
Ψ
1
(x) =
_
m ω
4 ¯h π
_1
4
_
−
_
¯h
m ω
∂
∂x
+
_
m ω
¯h
x
_
exp
_
−
m ω x
2
2 ¯h
_
(1071)
240
The higherenergy eigenfunctions are given by iteration
Ψ
n+1
(x) =
ˆ a
†
_
( n + 1 )
Ψ
n
(x)
Ψ
n+1
(x) =
1
_
2 ( n + 1 )
_
−
_
¯h
m ω
∂
∂x
+
_
m ω
¯h
x
_
Ψ
n
(x)
(1072)
Then the nth excited state wave function is given in terms of the ground state
wave function Ψ
0
(x) by acting on it by the raising operator n times
Ψ
n
(x) =
( ˆ a
†
)
n
√
n!
Ψ
0
(x)
=
( ˆ a
†
)
n
√
n!
_
m ω
¯h π
_1
4
exp
_
−
m ω x
2
2 ¯h
_
=
1
√
2
n
n!
_
−
_
¯h
m ω
∂
∂x
+
_
m ω
¯h
x
_
n
_
m ω
¯h π
_1
4
exp
_
−
m ω x
2
2 ¯h
_
(1073)
Furthermore, using the operator identity
_
−
_
¯h
m ω
∂
∂x
+
_
m ω
¯h
x
_
≡
≡ ( − 1 ) exp
_
+
m ω x
2
2 ¯h
_
_
¯h
m ω
∂
∂x
exp
_
−
m ω x
2
2 ¯h
_
(1074)
one ﬁnds the eigenstates are given by the expression
Ψ
n
(x) =
( − 1 )
n
√
2
n
n!
exp
_
+
m ω x
2
2 ¯h
_ _
_
¯h
m ω
∂
∂x
_
n
exp
_
−
m ω x
2
2 ¯h
_
_
m ω
¯h π
_1
4
exp
_
−
m ω x
2
2 ¯h
_
(1075)
The solution is recognized as involving the nth order Hermite polynomial H
n
(x)
given by
H
n
__
m ω
¯h
x
_
= ( −1 )
n
exp
_
+
m ω x
2
¯h
_ _
_
¯h
m ω
∂
∂x
_
n
exp
_
−
m ω x
2
¯h
_
(1076)
Thus, we have found the expression for the general energy eigenfunction for the
onedimensional harmonic oscillator as
Ψ
n
(x) =
1
√
2
n
n!
_
m ω
¯h π
_1
4
exp
_
−
m ω x
2
2 ¯h
_
H
n
__
m ω
¯h
x
_
(1077)
241
These states are all properly normalized to unity, as the ground state wave func
tion was properly normalized.
Harmonic Oscillator wave functions
4 3 2 1 0 1 2 3 4
x
Ψ ΨΨ Ψ
n
(
x
)
Ψ ΨΨ Ψ
7
(x)
Ψ ΨΨ Ψ
1
(x)
Ψ ΨΨ Ψ
2
(x)
Ψ ΨΨ Ψ
3
(x)
Ψ ΨΨ Ψ
4
(x)
Ψ ΨΨ Ψ
5
(x)
Ψ ΨΨ Ψ
6
(x)
Figure 61: The ground state Ψ
0
(x) and excited state wave functions Ψ
n
(x) of
the onedimensional harmonic oscillator.
The quantum probability density for ﬁnding a particle with energy E at
position x should be compared with the classical probability density if the ini
tial position is unknown. Unlike the classical probability density, the quantum
probability density shows spatial oscillations. If the spatial oscillations are aver
aged over, then it is seen that as the energy increases, the quantum probability
density approaches the classical density.
——————————————————————————————————
4.2.7 Exercise 69
Find an expression for the expectation value of x
4
, in the nth excited state of
the harmonic oscillator.
——————————————————————————————————
242
0
0.2
0.4
0.6
0.8
4.5 3.5 2.5 1.5 0.5 0.5 1.5 2.5 3.5 4.5
x
P
n
(
x
)
=
l
Ψ ΨΨ Ψ
n
(
x
)
l
2
n = 4
Figure 62: Comparison of the quantum mechanical probability densities for
ﬁnding a particle at position x, P(x) = [ Ψ
n
(x) [
2
with the classical probability
densities for n = 4.
4.2.8 Solution 69
The average value of x
4
in the nth energy eigenstate of the harmonic oscillator
can be found be expressing x in terms of the raising and lowering operators
x =
_
¯h
2 m ω
( a
†
+ a ) (1078)
Hence
x
4
=
_
+∞
−∞
dx φ
∗
n
(x) x
4
φ
n
(x)
=
_
¯h
2 m ω
_
2
_
+∞
−∞
dx φ
∗
n
(x) ( a
†
+ a )
4
φ
n
(x)
(1079)
The only nonzero terms are those involving the same number of raising and
lowering operators as terms where these numbers are diﬀerent can be related to
the matrix elements of energy states with diﬀerent values of n which, because of
the orthogonality of nondegenerate energy eigenstates, are zero. The nonzero
243
0
0.2
0.4
0.6
0.8
4.5 3.5 2.5 1.5 0.5 0.5 1.5 2.5 3.5 4.5
x
P
n
(
x
)
=
l
Ψ ΨΨ Ψ
n
(
x
)
l
2
n = 8
Figure 63: Comparison of the quantum mechanical probability densities for
ﬁnding a particle at position x, P(x) = [ Ψ
n
(x) [
2
with the classical probability
densities for n = 8.
terms are
x
4
=
_
¯h
2 m ω
_
2
_
+∞
−∞
dx φ
∗
n
(x)
_
a
†
a
†
a a + a
†
a a
†
a
+ a
†
a a a
†
+ H.c.
_
φ
n
(x)
=
_
¯h
2 m ω
_
2
_
n ( n − 1 ) + n n + n ( n + 1 )
+ ( n + 1 ) n + ( n + 1 ) ( n + 1 ) + ( n + 2 ) ( n + 1 )
_
x
4
=
_
¯h
2 m ω
_
2
3 ( 2 n
2
+ 2 n + 1 ) (1080)
——————————————————————————————————
244
4.2.9 Exercise 70
Show that for a harmonic oscillator in the nth energy eigenstates, the uncer
tainty in the position and momentum satisfy the equation
∆x
rms
∆p
rms
= ¯ h
2 n + 1
2
(1081)
——————————————————————————————————
4.2.10 Solution 70
The expectation value of the ∆x
2
is equal to the expectation value of x
2
∆x
2
=
¯h
2 m ω
_
dx φ
∗
n
(x) ( a
†
+ a )
2
φ
n
(x)
=
¯h
2 m ω
( 2 n + 1 )
In the ﬁrst line we have used the fact that the term
_
dx φ
∗
n
(x) ( a
†
)
2
φ
n
(x) (1082)
and the Hermitean conjugate term both vanish identically. In the second line, we
have used the fact that the state φ
n
(x) is an eigenstate of the number operator
ˆ a
†
ˆ a = ˆ n with eigenvalue n. Likewise
∆ˆ p
2
= − ¯h
2
m ω
2 ¯h
_
dx φ
∗
n
(x) ( a
†
− a )
2
φ
n
(x)
=
¯h m ω
2
( 2 n + 1 )
Combining these, we ﬁnd the equality
∆p
rms
∆x
rms
=
¯h
2
( 2 n + 1 ) (1083)
——————————————————————————————————
4.2.11 Exercise 71
A particle is moving in one dimension in a potential V (x) which is given by
V (x) =
m ω
2
2
x
2
x > 0
V (x) → ∞ x < 0 (1084)
Find the energy eigenfunctions and eigenvalues.
245
4.2.12 Time Development of the Harmonic Oscillator
Given an initial condition Ψ(x, 0), one can expand this initial wave function in
terms of the energy eigenstates φ
n
(x) of the harmonic oscillator via
Ψ(x; 0) =
n
C
n
φ
n
(x) (1085)
where the expansion coeﬃcients may be found from
C
n
=
_
+ ∞
− ∞
dx φ
∗
n
(x) Ψ(x; 0) (1086)
The wave function at future times t can be found from the solution of the
Schr¨odinger equation, and as the Hamiltonian is time independent the solution
can be expressed as
Ψ(x; t) = exp
_
− i
ˆ
H t
¯h
_
Ψ(x; 0) (1087)
which gives rise to the expression for the timedependent wave function as
Ψ(x; t) =
n
C
n
exp
_
− i
ˆ
H t
¯h
_
φ
n
(x)
Ψ(x; t) =
n
C
n
exp
_
− i
E
n
t
¯h
_
φ
n
(x) (1088)
since φ
n
(x) satisfy the energy eigenvalue equation
ˆ
H φ
n
(x) = E
n
φ
n
(x) (1089)
The motion of the particle can be viewed through examination of the average
position x(t) or momentum p(t).
The average position is given by the expectation value
x(t) =
_
+ ∞
− ∞
dx Ψ
∗
(x; t) x Ψ(x; t) (1090)
which, on using the expression in eqn(1088), leads to
x(t) =
n,m
C
∗
m
C
n
exp
_
+ i
( E
m
− E
n
) t
¯h
_ _
+ ∞
− ∞
dx φ
∗
m
(x) x φ
n
(x)
(1091)
246
The matrix elements of x between the two energy eigenfunctions can be evalu
ated by expressing the x in terms of the raising and lowering operators,
x =
_
¯h
m ω
1
2
_
ξ +
∂
∂ξ
+ ξ −
∂
∂ξ
_
=
_
¯h
2 m ω
_
a + a
†
_
(1092)
Then the matrix elements can be found to be
_
+ ∞
−∞
dx φ
∗
m
(x) x φ
n
(x) =
_
¯h
2 m ω
_
√
n + 1 δ
m,n+1
+
√
n δ
m,n−1
_
(1093)
On substituting this expression back into eqn(1091) and performing the double
summation and then using E
n+1
− E
n
= ¯ h ω, one ﬁnds
x(t) =
_
+ ∞
−∞
dx Ψ
∗
(x; t) x Ψ(x; t)
=
_
¯h
2 m ω
n
_
√
n + 1 C
∗
n+1
C
n
exp
_
+ i ω t
_
+
+
√
n C
∗
n−1
C
n
exp
_
− i ω t
_ _
=
_
¯h
2 m ω
n
√
n + 1
_
C
∗
n+1
C
n
exp
_
+ i ω t
_
+
+ C
∗
n
C
n+1
exp
_
− i ω t
_ _
(1094)
where we have shifted the summation index by one in the second term. Since the
ﬁrst term is equal to the complex conjugate of the second term, the expectation
value is real. This is as it must be, because x is a Hermitean operator. Let us
denote the expansion coeﬃcients in terms of an amplitude and phase
C
n
= [ C
n
[ exp
_
i ϕ
n
_
(1095)
then we have
x(t) =
_
2 ¯h
m ω
n
√
n + 1 [ C
n+1
[ [ C
n
[ cos
_
ω t + ϕ
n
− ϕ
n+1
_
(1096)
Hence, the position oscillates with frequency ω, just like the classical value.
However, if the phase diﬀerences ϕ
n+1
− ϕ
n
are randomly distributed, destruc
tive interference may mask the oscillations.
247
One can evaluate the expectation value of the momentum via a similar pro
cedure. The expectation value is given by
p(t) = − i ¯h
_
+ ∞
− ∞
dx Ψ
∗
(x; t)
∂
∂x
Ψ(x; t) (1097)
which yields
p(t) = −i ¯h
n,m
C
∗
m
C
n
exp
_
+i
( E
m
− E
n
) t
¯h
_ _
+ ∞
− ∞
dx φ
∗
m
(x)
∂
∂x
φ
n
(x)
(1098)
The matrix elements can be evaluated by expressing the derivative in terms of
the raising and lowering operators
∂
∂x
=
_
m ω
¯h
1
2
_
ξ +
∂
∂ξ
− ξ +
∂
∂ξ
_
=
_
m ω
2 ¯h
_
a − a
†
_
(1099)
Hence, we have the matrix elements
_
+ ∞
− ∞
dx φ
∗
m
(x)
∂
∂x
φ
n
(x) =
_
m ω
2¯ h
_
√
n δ
m,n−1
−
√
n + 1 δ
m,n+1
_
(1100)
On substituting the above matrix elements into the expectation value of the
momentum, one ﬁnds
p(t) = − ¯h
_
2 m ω
¯h
n
[ C
n+1
[ [ C
n
[
√
n + 1 sin ( ω t + ϕ
n
− ϕ
n+1
)
(1101)
Thus, we see that the average momentum oscillates out of phase with the average
position, and
p(t) = m
∂
∂t
x(t) (1102)
which is just the same as the classical mechanical expression.
——————————————————————————————————
4.2.13 Exercise 72
Consider a harmonic oscillator in a state given by
Ψ(x) =
1
√
2 s
n=N+s
n=N−s
exp
_
− i n ϕ
_
φ
n
(x) (1103)
248
where φ
n
(x) is the nth excited state of the harmonic oscillator and N ¸ s ¸
1. Find the time dependence of x(t) and p(t). Compare these expectation values
with the classical expressions.
——————————————————————————————————
4.2.14 Solution 72
This type of state is a coherent state as it is a superposition of a very large
number of energy eigenstates, where the exists a deﬁnite phase relation between
the component states. The time dependence of the coherent states is given by
Ψ(x, t) =
1
√
2 s
n=N+s
n=N−s
exp
_
− i n ϕ
_
exp
_
− i n ω t
_
φ
n
(x) (1104)
As a result, the component states always have a simple phase relationship be
tween them.
The expectation value of ˆ x is given by
x(t) =
1
2 s
n,n
exp
_
i ( n
− n ) ( ϕ + ω t )
_ _
∞
−∞
dx φ
∗
n
(x) x φ
n
(x) (1105)
However, the operator ˆ x can be expressed in terms of the creation and annihi
lation operators via
ˆ x =
_
¯h
2 m ω
( a
†
+ a ) (1106)
Then, the matrix elements of ˆ x between the energy eigenstates φ
n
(x) and φ
∗
n
(x)
can be evaluated as
_
∞
−∞
dx φ
∗
n
(x) x φ
n
(x) =
_
¯h
2 m ω
_
δ
n
,n+1
√
n + 1 + δ
n
,n−1
√
n
_
(1107)
Thus, the expectation value is calculated as
x(t) =
1
2 s
_
¯h
2 m ω
n,n
_
√
n + 1 exp
_
i ( ϕ + ω t )
_
δ
n
,n+1
+
√
n exp
_
− i ( ϕ + ω t )
_
δ
n
,n−1
_
(1108)
If one only retains the terms of leading order in
1
N
and
1
s
, one ﬁnds that the
expectation value of the position is given by
x(t) =
_
¯h N
2 m ω
cos( ω t +ϕ ) (1109)
249
Likewise, for the expectation values of the momentum, one can show that
p(t) = −
_
m ω N
2 ¯h
sin( ω t + ϕ ) (1110)
The expectation value of the momentum is related to the expectation value of
the position via the classical relation
ˆ p(t) = m
∂x(t)
∂t
(1111)
Schr¨odinger
12
determined that the coherent state
Ψ
λ
(x) = exp
_
−
1
2
λ
2
_
∞
n=0
λ
n
exp
_
− i n ϕ
_
√
n!
φ
n
(x) (1112)
is an exact eigenstate of the lowering operator. This can be seen as
a Ψ
λ
(x) = λ exp
_
− i ϕ
_
Ψ
λ
(x) (1113)
Coherent states play an important role in laser optics as they approximate clas
sical states, containing many quanta, that have deﬁnite phases.
——————————————————————————————————
4.2.15 Hermite Polynomials
The Hermite Polynomials H
n
(z) can be deﬁned as
H
n
(z) =
_
− 1
_
n
exp
_
+ z
2
_
∂
n
∂z
n
exp
_
− z
2
_
(1114)
From this deﬁnition, we can see that they satisfy the diﬀerential equation
∂
2
∂z
2
H
n
− 2 z
∂
∂z
H
n
+ 2 n H
n
(z) = 0 (1115)
This is proved by evaluating the ﬁrst and second derivatives of H
n
(z). The ﬁrst
derivative is given by
∂
∂z
H
n
= 2 z
_
− 1
_
n
exp
_
+ z
2
_
∂
n
∂z
n
exp
_
− z
2
_
−
_
− 1
_
n
exp
_
+ z
2
_
∂
n
∂z
n
2 z exp
_
− z
2
_
(1116)
12
E. Schr¨odinger, Naturwissenschaften, 14, 664 (1926).
250
and the second derivative is given by
∂
2
∂z
2
H
n
= ( 4 z
2
+ 2 )
_
− 1
_
n
exp
_
+ z
2
_
∂
n
∂z
n
exp
_
− z
2
_
− 8 z
_
− 1
_
n
exp
_
+ z
2
_
∂
n
∂z
n
z exp
_
− z
2
_
+
_
− 1
_
n
exp
_
+ z
2
_
∂
n
∂z
n
( 4 z
2
− 2 ) exp
_
− z
2
_
(1117)
The terms + 2 and − 2 in the round brackets cancel. On forming the combina
tion
∂
2
∂z
2
H
n
− 2 z
∂
∂z
H
n
(1118)
we have
∂
2
∂z
2
H
n
− 2 z
∂
∂z
H
n
= − 4 z
_
− 1
_
n
exp
_
+ z
2
_
∂
n
∂z
n
z exp
_
− z
2
_
+
_
− 1
_
n
exp
_
+ z
2
_
∂
n
∂z
n
4 z
2
exp
_
− z
2
_
(1119)
The righthand side can be simpliﬁed as
= + 2 z
_
− 1
_
n
exp
_
+ z
2
_
∂
n+1
∂z
n+1
exp
_
− z
2
_
−
_
− 1
_
n
exp
_
+ z
2
_
∂
n
∂z
n
2 z
∂
∂z
exp
_
− z
2
_
(1120)
which after commuting the z in the last term to the front, we have
= − 2 n
_
− 1
_
n
exp
_
+ z
2
_
∂
n
∂z
n
exp
_
− z
2
_
= − 2 n H
n
(z) (1121)
Thus, we have found that the Hermite polynomials satisfy the equation
∂
2
∂z
2
H
n
− 2 z
∂
∂z
H
n
+ 2 n H
n
(z) = 0 (1122)
as was to be proved.
This diﬀerential equation also has an integral representation of its solution.
The integral representation of the solution is given by
H
n
(z) =
2
n
√
π
_
+ ∞
− ∞
du exp
_
− u
2
_ _
z + i u
_
n
(1123)
251
This can be shown by ﬁrst evaluating the terms
∂
2
∂z
2
H
n
(z) = n ( n − 1 )
2
n
√
π
_
+ ∞
− ∞
du exp
_
− u
2
_ _
z + i u
_
n−2
∂
∂z
H
n
(z) = n
2
n
√
π
_
+ ∞
− ∞
du exp
_
− u
2
_ _
z + i u
_
n−1
(1124)
and then by forming the expression
2 n H
n
(z) − 2 z
∂
∂z
H
n
(z)
= i n
2
n
√
π
_
+ ∞
− ∞
du 2 u exp
_
− u
2
_ _
z + i u
_
n−1
= − i n
2
n
√
π
_
+ ∞
− ∞
du
_
∂
∂u
exp
_
− u
2
_ _ _
z + i u
_
n−1
(1125)
On integrating by parts, one ﬁnds this simpliﬁes to
= i n
2
n
√
π
_
+ ∞
− ∞
du exp
_
− u
2
_
∂
∂u
_
z + i u
_
n−1
= − n ( n − 1 )
2
n
√
π
_
+ ∞
− ∞
du exp
_
− u
2
_ _
z + i u
_
n−2
= −
∂
2
∂z
2
H
n
(z) (1126)
Thus, the integral expression of eqn(1123) satisﬁes the diﬀerential equation
∂
2
∂z
2
H
n
− 2 z
∂
∂z
H
n
+ 2 n H
n
(z) = 0 (1127)
and, therefore, is a representation of the Hermite polynomials. The integral
representation can be used to yield the explicit forms of loworder Hermite
polynomials. Expressions for ﬁrst few lowest order Hermite polynomials H
n
(z)
are given in Table(2).
We can show that
∂
∂z
H
n
(z) = 2 n H
n−1
(z) (1128)
This is seen by examining the ﬁrst derivative
∂
∂z
H
n
= 2 z
_
− 1
_
n
exp
_
+ z
2
_
∂
n
∂z
n
exp
_
− z
2
_
−
_
− 1
_
n
exp
_
+ z
2
_
∂
n
∂z
n
2 z exp
_
− z
2
_
(1129)
252
Table 2: The Lowest Order Hermite Polynomials H
n
(z).
n H
n
(z)
0 H
0
(z) 1
1 H
1
(z) 2 z
2 H
2
(z) 4 z
2
− 2
3 H
3
(z) 8 z
3
− 12 z
4 H
4
(z) 16 z
4
− 48 z
2
+ 12
5 H
5
(z) 32 z
5
− 160 z
3
+ 120 z
On commuting the term proportional to z in the second term to the front, we
have
∂
∂z
H
n
= − 2 n
_
− 1
_
n
exp
_
+ z
2
_
∂
n−1
∂z
n−1
exp
_
− z
2
_
= 2 n H
n−1
(z) (1130)
Thus, the derivative of the nth order Hermite polynomial is related to the Her
mite polynomial of (n −1)th order.
From this relationship, we can derive the generating function for the Hermite
polynomials
exp
_
− t
2
+ 2 t z
_
=
∞
n = 0
H
n
(z)
n!
t
n
(1131)
The proof starts with examining F(z, t), which is deﬁned via
F(z, t) =
∞
n = 0
H
n
(z)
n!
t
n
(1132)
On taking the derivative with respect to z, one has
∂
∂z
F(z, t) =
∞
n = 0
∂
∂z
H
n
(z)
n!
t
n
=
∞
n = 0
2 n
H
n−1
(z)
n!
t
n
= 2
∞
n = 0
H
n−1
(z)
(n −1)!
t
n
= 2 t F(z, t) (1133)
253
The equation
∂
∂z
F(z, t) = 2 t F(z, t) (1134)
can be integrated to yield
ln
F(z, t)
F(0, t)
= 2 t z (1135)
Thus, we have
F(z, t) = F(0, t) exp
_
2 z t
_
(1136)
We can evaluate F(0, t) from H
n
(0) as
F(0, t) =
∞
n = 0
H
n
(0)
n!
t
n
(1137)
We shall rewrite the expression for H
n
(z) in terms of a power series and then
set z = 0,
H
n
(z) =
_
− 1
_
n
exp
_
+ z
2
_
∂
n
∂z
n
m
_
− 1
_
m ( z
2
)
m
m!
(1138)
The only term that remains on setting z = 0 is the term with n = 2 m.
Hence, only the even order Hermite polynomials remain ﬁnite at z = 0. We
ﬁnd that these are given by
H
2m
(0) =
_
− 1
_
m ( 2 m )!
m!
(1139)
Thus, we have
F(0, t) =
∞
n = 0
H
n
(0)
n!
t
n
=
∞
m = 0
_
− 1
_
m
m!
t
2m
= exp
_
− t
2
_
(1140)
Hence, we obtain
F(z, t) = exp
_
+ 2 z t − t
2
_
=
∞
n = 0
H
n
(z)
n!
t
n
(1141)
which is the generating function expansion for the Hermite polynomials.
——————————————————————————————————
254
4.2.16 Exercise 73
The initial wave function of a particle of mass m in a harmonic potential of
frequency ω is given by
Ψ(x, 0) =
_
m ω
π ¯h
_1
4
exp
_
−
m ω
2 ¯h
( x − a )
2
_
(1142)
Find the probability that a measurement of the energy will give the result
E
n
= ¯ h ω ( n +
1
2
) (1143)
——————————————————————————————————
4.2.17 Solution 73
Using the generating function expansion, we can decompose the initial wave
function as
Ψ(x, 0) =
_
m ω
π ¯h
_1
4
exp
_
−
m ω
2 ¯h
( x − a )
2
_
=
_
m ω
π ¯h
_1
4
exp
_
−
m ω
2 ¯h
x
2
_
exp
_
−
m ω
2 ¯h
a
2
+
m ω
¯h
x a
_
=
_
m ω
π ¯h
_1
4
exp
_
−
m ω
2 ¯h
x
2
_
exp
_
−
m ω
4 ¯h
a
2
_
exp
_
−
m ω
4 ¯h
a
2
+ 2
m ω
¯h
x
a
2
_
=
_
m ω
π ¯h
_1
4
exp
_
−
m ω
4 ¯h
a
2
_
n
exp
_
−
m ω
2 ¯h
x
2
_
H
n
(
_
m ω
¯ h
x )
n!
_
m ω a
2
4 ¯h
_n
2
= exp
_
−
m ω
4 ¯h
a
2
_
n
φ
n
(x)
√
n!
_
m ω a
2
2 ¯h
_n
2
(1144)
where φ
n
(x) is the nth energy eigenfunction given by
φ
n
(x) =
_
m ω
π ¯h
_1
4
exp
_
−
m ω
2 ¯ h
x
2
_
2
n
2
( n! )
1
2
H
n
(
_
m ω
¯h
x) (1145)
255
Thus, as the probability P(n) is given by the square of the expansion coeﬃcient,
we have
P(n) =
_
m ω a
2
2 ¯ h
_
n
n!
exp
_
−
m ω
2 ¯h
a
2
_
(1146)
——————————————————————————————————
4.2.18 Exercise 74
Find the time dependence of the state which has the initial wave function
Ψ(x, 0) =
_
m ω
π ¯h
_1
4
exp
_
−
m ω
2 ¯h
( x − a )
2
_
(1147)
and, hence, ﬁnd the time dependence of the probability density P(x, t) of ﬁnd
ing the particle at position x.
——————————————————————————————————
4.2.19 Solution 74
From the previous example, we have the expansion of the initial wave function
in terms of energy eigenstates,
Ψ(x, 0) =
_
m ω
π ¯h
_1
4
exp
_
−
m ω
2 ¯h
( x − a )
2
_
= exp
_
−
m ω
4 ¯h
a
2
_
n
φ
n
(x)
√
n!
_
m ω a
2
2 ¯h
_n
2
(1148)
The time dependence of the wave function is then found from the time depen
dence of the energy eigenstates
Ψ(x, t) = exp
_
− i
ˆ
H t
¯h
_
Ψ(x, 0)
= exp
_
− i
ω t
2
_
exp
_
−
m ω
4 ¯h
a
2
_
n
exp
_
− i n ω t
_
φ
n
(x)
√
n!
_
m ω a
2
2 ¯h
_n
2
(1149)
which can be resummed to yield
Ψ(x, t) =
_
m ω
π ¯h
_1
4
exp
_
− i
ω t
2
_
exp
_
−
m ω
2 ¯h
x
2
_
256
exp
_
−
m ω
4 ¯h
a
2
( 1 + e
− 2 i ω t
) +
m ω
¯h
x a e
− i ω t
_
(1150)
Hence, we ﬁnd the probability density P(x, t) as
P(x, t) = [ Ψ(x, t) [
2
=
_
m ω
π ¯h
_1
2
exp
_
−
m ω
¯h
( x − a cos ω t )
2
_
(1151)
Hence we see that the state, which was initially displaced from the equilibrium
state by a distance a, performs oscillations of amplitude a and frequency ω just
like a classical particle in the same potential.
——————————————————————————————————
4.2.20 The Completeness Condition
As the Hamiltonian operator for the harmonic oscillator is a Hermitean operator,
the energy eigenfunctions form a complete set. The completeness condition for
the harmonic oscillator energy eigenfunctions can be proved by using the integral
representation and the generating function. We take the generating function
F(x, t) = exp
_
+ 2 x t − t
2
_
=
∞
n = 0
H
n
(x)
n!
t
n
(1152)
then let t = y + i u, so
exp
_
+ 2 x y − y
2
_
exp
_
2 i ( x − y ) u + u
2
_
=
∞
n = 0
H
n
(x)
n!
( y + i u )
n
(1153)
On multiplying this equation by exp
_
− u
2
_
and then integrating over u from
− ∞ to + ∞, we ﬁnd
_
+ ∞
− ∞
du exp
_
+ 2 x y − y
2
_
exp
_
2 i ( x − y ) u
_
=
∞
n = 0
H
n
(x)
n!
_
+ ∞
− ∞
du exp
_
− u
2
_
( y + i u )
n
(1154)
257
so we have
π exp
_
+ 2 x y − y
2
_
δ( x − y ) =
√
π
2
n
∞
n = 0
H
n
(x)
n!
H
n
(y) (1155)
The above equation can be rearranged to yield
δ( x − y ) =
∞
n = 0
1
2
n
n!
√
π
exp
_
−
x
2
2
_
H
n
(x) exp
_
−
y
2
2
_
H
n
(y)
(1156)
On identifying the normalized energy eigenfunctions φ
n
(x) with the product
of the exponential and the Hermite polynomials, one ﬁnds the completeness
relation for the energy eigenfunctions of the Hermitean Hamilton operator
δ( x − y ) =
n
φ
∗
n
(x) φ
n
(y) (1157)
The completeness condition allows an arbitrary function to be expanded in terms
of the energy eigenstates.
258
4.3 Dualsymmetry
Let us assume that we know the ground state solution of the energy eigenvalue
equation for a particle moving in one dimension in the presence of a speciﬁc
potential V (x). Let the ground state energy be denoted by E
0
and the ground
state wave function be denoted by φ
0
(x). Using these deﬁnitions, the energy
eigenvalue equation has the form
ˆ
H φ
0
(x) = E
0
φ
0
(x)
_
−
¯h
2
2m
∂
2
∂x
2
+ V (x)
_
φ
0
(x) = E
0
φ
0
(x) (1158)
Alternatively, we can identify
ˆ
H − E
0
with an operator
ˆ
H − E
0
=
¯h
2
2m
_
−
∂
2
∂x
2
+
_
φ
0
(x)
φ
0
(x)
_ _
(1159)
This (energyshifted) Hamiltonian of eqn(1159) can be factorized as the product
of a pair of Hermitean conjugate operators. The ﬁrst operator is deﬁned by
ˆ
A =
¯h
√
2 m
_
∂
∂x
−
_
φ
0
(x)
φ
0
(x)
_ _
(1160)
and its Hermitean conjugate is then found to be
ˆ
A
†
=
¯h
√
2 m
_
−
∂
∂x
−
_
φ
0
(x)
φ
0
(x)
_ _
(1161)
The Hamiltonian (up to the deﬁnition of the ground state energy) is given by
the product
ˆ
H − E
0
=
ˆ
A
†
ˆ
A (1162)
The pair of Hermitean conjugate operators have a commutation relation given
by
[
ˆ
A ,
ˆ
A
†
] = 2
_
¯h
2
2 m
_ _ _
φ
0
(x)
φ
0
(x)
_
2
−
_
φ
0
(x)
φ
0
(x)
_ _
(1163)
For the case of the Harmonic Oscillator,
ˆ
A and
ˆ
A
†
respectively are proportional
to the lowering and raising operators, and their commutator is merely the con
stant ¯h ω.
The dual partner
ˆ
H
d
of the Hamiltonian
ˆ
H is given by the product of the
pair of operators taken in the reverse order
ˆ
H
d
=
ˆ
A
ˆ
A
†
(1164)
The dual potential V
d
(x) is deﬁned in terms of the dual Hamiltonian. The dual
potential is found to be
V
d
(x) = V (x) − E
0
+ [
ˆ
A ,
ˆ
A
†
]
= V (x) − E
0
−
¯h
2
m
∂
∂x
_
φ
0
(x)
φ
0
(x)
_
(1165)
259
The pair of potentials V (x) and V
d
(x) are dual partner potentials. For the Har
monic Oscillator, the potential and the dual potential are the same except for
a constant shift of the energy.
In general, V
d
(x) and V (x) have the same energy level spectrum, E
n
− E
0
=
E
d
n
. The exceptional case is the zero energy eigenvalue for the ground state of
V (x), and this exception occurs since the operator
ˆ
A annihilates the ground
state. The equality between the shifted eigenvalues is proved by noting that, if
ˆ
H φ
n
= (E
n
−E
0
) φ
n
(1166)
then
ˆ
H
d
_
ˆ
A φ
n
_
=
ˆ
A
ˆ
A
†
_
ˆ
A φ
n
_
=
ˆ
A
_
ˆ
H φ
n
_
= (E
n
−E
0
)
_
ˆ
A φ
n
_
(1167)
Hence, E
d
n
= (E
n
− E
0
), unless
ˆ
A φ
n
= 0. Likewise, one can establish the
inverse relationship between the eigenstates of
ˆ
H
d
with the eigenstates of
ˆ
H.
That is, if φ
d
n
(x) is an eigenstate of
ˆ
H
s
with eigenvalue E
d
n
, then
ˆ
A
†
φ
d
n
(x) is an
eigenstate of
ˆ
H with eigenvalue E
d
n
. Thus,
ˆ
A and
ˆ
A
†
connect states of diﬀerent
Hamiltonians that have the same energies.
Duality and the Inﬁnite Square Well
The inﬁnite square well has an inﬁnite number of bound states with energy
eigenvalues given by
E
n
=
¯h
2
2m
_
π n
L
_
2
(1168)
and energy eigenfunctions are given by
φ
n
(x) =
_
2
L
sin
_
n π x
L
_
(1169)
where n is a positive integer, excluding zero. Since the logarithmic derivative
of the ground state wave function is given by
_
φ
1
(x)
φ
1
(x)
_
=
_
π
L
_
cot
_
π x
L
_
(1170)
the dual partner potential is found to be
V
d
(x) =
¯h
2
2m
_
π
L
_
2
_
csc
2
_
πx
L
_
− 1
_
(1171)
260
Eigenfunctions of the Infinite Square Well
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1
x/L
φ
n
(
x
)
n=3
n=2
n=1
0
0
0
Figure 64: The ﬁrst three eigenfunctions φ
n
(x) for the inﬁnite square well po
tential.
The dual energy eigenstates are given, up to an arbitrary multiplicative con
stant, by
φ
d
n
(x) ∝
ˆ
A φ
n
(x)
∝
_
∂
∂x
−
_
π
L
_
cot
_
π x
L
_ _
sin
_
n π x
L
_
∝ n cos
_
n π x
L
_
− cos
_
π x
L
_
_
sin
_
n π x
L
_
_
π x
L
_
_
(1172)
where φ
d
1
(x) and E
d
1
are absent.
261
Dual Potential
0
2
4
6
8
10
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1
x/L
V
d
(
x
)
[
2
m
/
h
2
(
L
/
π
)
2
]
E
d
2
E
d
3
Figure 65: The potential V
d
(x) dual to the inﬁnite square well potential. The
energy eigenvalues are marked by the dashed horizonatl lines.
4.4 Bargmann Potentials
Bargmann potentials are an interesting class of onedimensional potentials.
Bargmann potentials have the very unusual property that they are reﬂectionless
potentials, which means that a plane wave incident on the potential does not
produce a reﬂected wave. The potential produces bound states and does have
an eﬀect on the states with E > 0 in that the transmitted wave experiences a
phase shift relative to the incident wave.
We shall consider solutions of the family of energy eigenvalue equations gov
erned by the integer parameter n. The eigenvalue equation is given by
−
¯h
2
2 m
∂
2
∂x
2
Ψ
α,n
(x) − V
0
n ( n + 1 ) sech
2
_
x
ξ
_
Ψ
α,n
(x) = E
α
Ψ
α,n
(x)
(1173)
where the length scale ξ is given by
ξ
2
=
¯h
2
2 m V
0
(1174)
262
Dual wave functions
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1
x/L
φ
n
(
x
)
n=3
n=2
0
0
Figure 66: The lowest two energy eigenstates φ
d
n
(x) of the dual potential.
For n = 0, the Bargmann energy eigenvalue equation reduces to the free
particle problem. The general solution of the free particle problem is simply
Ψ
α,0
(x) = A exp
_
+ i k x
_
+ B exp
_
− i k x
_
(1175)
where the energy eigenvalue is given by
E
α,0
=
¯h
2
k
2
2 m
(1176)
We can relate the general scattering solution for arbitrary n to the general
solution for the free particle problem (where n = 0) by an iterative method.
This relation involves dualsymmetry. We shall show that
Ψ
α,n
(x) =
_
ξ
∂
∂x
− n tanh
_
x
ξ
_ _
Ψ
α,n−1
(x) (1177)
First let us change variable from x to the dimensionless variable z =
x
ξ
. Then
the Bargmann equation takes the form
∂
2
∂z
2
Φ
α,n
(z) + n ( n + 1 ) sech
2
z Φ
α,n
(z) = −
2 m E
α
ξ
2
¯h
2
Φ
α,n
(z)
(1178)
263
Bargmann Potentials
15
10
5
0
5
2 1.5 1 0.5 0 0.5 1 1.5 2
x
V
(
x
)
/
V
0
V(x) =  n ( n + 1 ) V
0
sech
2
x
n = 1
n = 3
n = 2
Figure 67: Bargmann potentials, V
n
(x) for various values of n.
Let us assume that Φ
α,n−1
(z) satisﬁes the Bargmann equation of order n − 1.
Then on premultiplying the eigenvalue equation by
ˆ
M
n
=
_
∂
∂z
− n tanh z
_
(1179)
we have
_
∂
∂z
− n tanh z
_ _
∂
2
∂z
2
Φ
α,n−1
(z) + n ( n − 1 ) sech
2
z Φ
α,n−1
(z)
_
= −
2 m E
α
ξ
2
¯h
2
_
∂
∂z
− n tanh z
_
Φ
α,n−1
(z)
(1180)
The Hamiltonian
ˆ
H
n
depends on n via
ˆ
H
n
= −
¯h
2
2 m ξ
2
_
∂
2
∂z
2
+ n ( n + 1 ) sech
2
z
_
(1181)
On commuting
ˆ
M
n
with
ˆ
H
n−1
, we obtain
ˆ
M
n
ˆ
H
n−1
=
ˆ
H
n−1
ˆ
M
n
− n
¯h
2
m ξ
2
sech
2
z
_
∂
∂z
− n tanh z
_
=
ˆ
H
n
ˆ
M
n
(1182)
264
Thus, we ﬁnd that
ˆ
H
n
ˆ
M
n
Φ
α,n−1
= E
α
ˆ
M
n
Φ
α,n−1
(1183)
This shows that the wave function
Φ
α,n
(z) =
ˆ
M
n
Φ
α,n−1
(z)
=
_
∂
∂z
− n tanh z
_
Φ
α,n−1
(z) (1184)
is an eigenfunction of
ˆ
H
n
with the same eigenvalue E
α
.
——————————————————————————————————
4.4.1 Exercise 75
Show that the raising operator
ˆ
M
n
satisﬁes the relation
ˆ
M
n
ˆ
H
n−1
=
ˆ
H
n
ˆ
M
n
(1185)
——————————————————————————————————
4.4.2 Solution 75
In dimensionless units, the raising operator is given by
ˆ
M
n
=
∂
∂z
− n tanh z (1186)
and the Hamiltonian
ˆ
H
n
containing the nth order Bargmann potential can be
put into the form
ˆ
H
n
= −
_
¯h
2
2 m ξ
2
_ _
∂
2
∂z
2
+ n ( n + 1 ) sech
2
z
_
(1187)
The identity can be proved by starting with the product
ˆ
M
n
ˆ
H
n−1
and
rewriting it as
ˆ
M
n
ˆ
H
n−1
=
ˆ
H
n−1
ˆ
M
n
+ [
ˆ
M
n
,
ˆ
H
n−1
] (1188)
The commutator can be evaluated as
[
ˆ
M
n
,
ˆ
H
n−1
] = −
_
¯h
2
2 m ξ
2
_
[
∂
∂z
, n ( n − 1 ) sech
2
z ] +
_
¯h
2
2 m ξ
2
_
n [ tanh z ,
∂
2
∂z
2
]
265
= 2 n ( n − 1 )
_
¯h
2
2 m ξ
2
_
sech
2
z tanh z − n
_
¯h
2
2 m ξ
2
_
[
∂
2
∂z
2
, tanh z ]
=
_
¯h
2
2 m ξ
2
_
2 n ( n − 1 ) sech
2
z tanh z
− n
_
¯h
2
2 m ξ
2
_
∂
∂z
[
∂
∂z
, tanh z ] − n
_
¯h
2
2 m ξ
2
_
[
∂
∂z
, tanh z ]
∂
∂z
= 2 n ( n − 1 )
_
¯h
2
2 m ξ
2
_
sech
2
z tanh z
− n
_
¯h
2
2 m ξ
2
_
∂
∂z
sech
2
z − n
_
¯h
2
2 m ξ
2
_
sech
2
z
∂
∂z
= 2 n
2
_
¯h
2
2 m ξ
2
_
sech
2
z tanh z − 2 n
_
¯h
2
2 m ξ
2
_
sech
2
z
∂
∂z
= − 2 n
_
¯h
2
2 m ξ
2
_
sech
2
z
_
∂
∂z
− n tanh z
_
= − 2 n
_
¯h
2
2 m ξ
2
_
sech
2
z
ˆ
M
n
(1189)
Inserting this in the expression (1188), one ﬁnds
ˆ
M
n
ˆ
H
n−1
=
ˆ
H
n−1
ˆ
M
n
− 2 n
_
¯h
2
2 m ξ
2
_
sech
2
z
ˆ
M
n
=
ˆ
H
n
ˆ
M
n
(1190)
which proves the identity.
——————————————————————————————————
Starting from n = 0, one can generate all the scattering states by iteration,
Φ
k,n
(z) =
ˆ
M
n
ˆ
M
n−1
. . .
ˆ
M
2
ˆ
M
1
Φ
k,0
(z) (1191)
Let us note that at z → + ∞ the solution takes the asymptotic form
Φ
k,n
(z) = A exp
_
+ i k z
_
m=n
m=1
_
+ i k − m
_
+ B exp
_
− i k z
_
m=n
m=1
_
− i k − m
_
(1192)
whereas at z → − ∞ the solution takes the form
Φ
k,n
(z) = A exp
_
+ i k z
_
m=n
m=1
_
+ i k + m
_
+ B exp
_
− i k z
_
m=n
m=1
_
− i k + m
_
(1193)
266
On setting B = 0, a case which corresponds to an incident beam with momen
tum p = ¯ h k, we see that there is no reﬂected beam and the transmitted beam
has a phase which is diﬀerent from that of the incident beam. The change of
phase 2 δ(k) is calculated from
δ(k) =
m=n
m=1
tan
−1
_
k
m
_
(1194)
The phase shift δ(k) varies as k is varied. The total variation of the pase shift
Phase shift for the n=4 Bargmann potential
0
0.5
1
1.5
2
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
k a / π ππ π
δ
(
δ
(
δ
(
δ
(
k
)
/
π
)
/
π
)
/
π
)
/
π
n=4
Figure 68: The k dependence of the phase shift δ(k) for the scattering states of
the n = 4 Bargmann potential.
is deﬁned as
δ(∞) − δ(0) (1195)
and is equal to n
π
2
. The total change in the phase shift is related to the number
of bound states of the equation through Levinson’s theorem
13
.
On increasing n by unity, the number of bound states of the Bargmann
increases by unity. Thus, the Bargmann equation of order n has n bound states.
The lowest energy bound state is given by the unnormalized wave function
Φ
n,n
(z) = sech
n
z (1196)
13
N. Levinson, Kgl. Danske Videnskab. Selskab, Mat.fys. Medd., 25, 1 (1949).
267
Raising Operators for the Bargmann Potentials
5
4
3
2
1
0
1
2
E
/
V
0
E =0
E
1
E
2
E
3
n = 0 n = 1 n = 2 n = 3
M
3
M
1 M
2
M
3
M
3
E
k
> 0
M
2
Figure 69: A graphical description of the raising operators for the Bargmann
equations. The raising operators M
n
transform the solutions of the (n − 1)th
Bargmann potential to solutions of the nth potential, but with the same energy
eigenvalue.
and has a bound state energy given by
E
n
= −
¯h
2
2 m ξ
2
n
2
(1197)
Then the higher energy bound states Φ
m,n
(z) can be created from the corre
sponding bound states Φ
m,m
(z) which have energies E
m
= −
¯ h
2
2 m ξ
2
m
2
. The
higherenergy bound states are found by operating on Φ
m,m
(z) with the sequen
tially ordered product of operators
ˆ
M
n
ˆ
M
n−1
. . .
ˆ
M
n
. . .
ˆ
M
m+2
ˆ
M
m+1
(where
n ≥ n
≥ m+ 1). Thus, for example, the second lowest energy (unnormalized)
eigenfunction of the nth order Bargmann equation is
Φ
n−1,n
(z) =
ˆ
M
n
Φ
n−1,n−1
(z)
=
_
∂
∂z
− n tanh z
_
sech
n−1
z
= − ( 2 n − 1 ) sech
n−1
z tanh z (1198)
which has the energy eigenvalue
E
n−1
= −
¯h
2
2 m ξ
2
( n − 1 )
2
(1199)
268
——————————————————————————————————
4.4.3 Exercise 76
Find the eigenfunctions and eigenvalues of the Bargmann equation with index
n = 2. Also show that the bound states are orthogonal to the scattering states.
The n=2 Bargmann Potential
8
6
4
2
0
2
4
3 2 1 0 1 2 3
x
V
(
x
)
/
V
0
E
0
E
1
n = 2
Figure 70: The Bargmann potential for n = 2. There are two bound states
and the bound state energies are denoted by horizontal lines.
——————————————————————————————————
4.4.4 Solution 76
In terms of the dimensionless variable z, lowest energy bound state of the nth
Bargmann potential has the wave function
φ
n,n
(z) = C sech
n
z (1200)
and the dimensionless energy eigenvalue is E
n
= − n
2
. The higher energy
bound state is found by using the raising operator
ˆ
M
n
acting on the bound
269
states of the (n −1)th Bargmann potential, i.e.,
φ
m,n
(z) =
ˆ
M
n
φ
m,n−1
(z) (1201)
The resulting bound state φ
m,n
(z) has energy E
m
. In this manner, we ﬁnd that
φ
n−1,n
(z) =
ˆ
M
n
φ
n−1,n−1
(z)
=
_
∂
∂z
− n tanh z
_
sech
n−1
z
= − ( 2 n − 1 ) sech
n−1
z tanh z (1202)
The eigenfunction φ
n−1,n
(z) corresponds to the energy eigenvalue E
n−1
=
− ( n − 1 )
2
. Thus, for n = 2, the two bound states are given by
φ
2
(z) = sech
2
z
φ
1
(z) = sech z tanh z (1203)
The bound state wave functions are shown in ﬁg(71).
Bound state wave functions for the n = 2 potential
1
0.5
0
0.5
1
4 3 2 1 0 1 2 3 4
x
Ψ
n
(
x
)
n = 2
Ψ
0
(x)
Ψ
1
(x)
Figure 71: The bound states of Bargmann potential for n = 2. For n = 2
there are two bound states, the two bound state wave functions are denoted by
Ψ
0
(x) and Ψ
1
(x).
270
The scattering states are given by φ
k
(z) which can be determined from the
scattering states of the n = 0 potential, by using the raising operator twice.
The scattering states for n = 2 are given by
φ
k
(z) =
ˆ
M
2
ˆ
M
1
_
A exp
_
+ i k z
_
+ B exp
_
− i k z
_ _
=
_
∂
∂z
− 2 tanh z
_ _
∂
∂z
−tanh z
_ _
A exp
_
+ i k z
_
+ B exp
_
− i k z
_ _
=
_
2 − k
2
− 3 i k tanh z − 3 sech
2
z
_
A exp
_
+ i k z
_
+
_
2 − k
2
+ 3 i k tanh z − 3 sech
2
z
_
B exp
_
− i k z
_
(1204)
Note that on analytically continuing from k to i κ, one ﬁnds that the asymptotic
exponentially growing term, for both positive and negative z, has a vanishing
coeﬃcient in the asymptotic limit if κ is equal to either 2 or 1. The solutions for
these special values of κ correspond to the bound states that we have already
found.
It remains to show that the bound states are orthogonal to the scattering
states. That is, we have to show that
_
+∞
−∞
dz φ
m
(z) φ
k
(z) = 0 (1205)
For the lowest bound state where m = 2, this requires that coeﬃcients of A
and B vanish separately. These both vanish if the integral
_
∞
0
dz cos k z
_
2 −k
2
−3 sech
2
z
_
sech
2
z −3 i k
_
∞
0
dz sin k z tanh z sech
2
z
(1206)
also vanishes. On integrating the second term by parts, we establish that the
two terms can be combined as
=
_
∞
0
dz cos k z
_
2 +
1
2
k
2
− 3 sech
2
z
_
sech
2
z (1207)
As the integrals are evaluated as
_
∞
0
dz cos k z sech
2
z =
π k
2
sinh
π k
2
(1208)
and
_
∞
0
dz cos k z sech
4
z =
1
3!
π k
2
sinh
π k
2
_
4 + k
2
_
(1209)
271
The overlap matrix element vanishes. The orthogonality of the scattering states
and the m = 1 bound state is treated similarly.
——————————————————————————————————
4.4.5 Exercise 77
Find the normalization for the two lowest energy bound states of the Bargmann
potential for arbitrary n.
——————————————————————————————————
4.4.6 Solution 77
The lowest energy solution of the nth order Bargmann eigenvalue equation
−
¯h
2
2 m
_
∂
2
∂x
2
+
n ( n + 1 )
ξ
2
sech
2
_
x
ξ
_ _
φ
m
(x) = E
m
φ
m
(x) (1210)
is seen to be
φ
n
(x) = A sech
n
_
x
ξ
_
(1211)
This can be most easily seen by changing to the scaled variable
z =
x
ξ
(1212)
so the eigenvalue equation becomes
_
∂
2
∂z
2
+ n ( n + 1 )
_
φ
n
(z ξ) = −
2 m ξ
2
¯h
2
E φ
n
(z ξ) (1213)
The function φ
n
(zξ) is an eigenfunction, as can be seen by direct substitution
of
φ
n
(z ξ) = A sech
n
z (1214)
into the eigenvalue equation and then by noting that
∂
2
∂z
2
sech
n
z = n ( n + 1 ) sech
n
z tanh
2
z − n sech
n
z
= n
2
sech
n
z − n ( n + 1 ) sech
(n+2)
z
(1215)
Thus, sech
n
z is a bound state with the bound state energy given by
E
n
= −
¯h
2
2 m ξ
2
n
2
(1216)
272
Hence, the second bound state φ
n−1
can be found by applying
ˆ
M
n
on sech
n−1
z.
φ
n−1
(z) ∝
_
∂
∂z
− n tanh z
_
sech
n−1
z (1217)
which leads to the identiﬁcation of
φ
n−1
= B sech
n−1
z tanh z (1218)
as the bound state with energy eigenvalue
E
n−1
= −
¯h
2
2 m ξ
2
( n − 1 )
2
(1219)
The magnitude of the normalization constant A can be determined from
1 = [ A [
2
_
∞
−∞
dx sech
2n
z
= [ A [
2
ξ
_
∞
−∞
dz sech
2n
z (1220)
The integration can be evaluated by integration by parts
_
∞
−∞
dz sech
2n
dz =
_
∞
−∞
dz sech
2n−2
z
∂
∂z
tanh z
= sech
2(n−1)
z tanh z
¸
¸
¸
¸
∞
−∞
−
_
∞
−∞
dz tanh z
∂
∂z
sech
2(n−1)
z
(1221)
The boundary term is zero for n ≥ 2 and for n = 1 the boundary term is
just 2. Since,
∂
∂z
sech
2(n−1)
z = − 2 ( n − 1 ) sech
2(n−1)
z tanh z (1222)
and
tanh
2
z = 1 − sech
2
z (1223)
one has the recursion relation
_
∞
−∞
dz sech
2n
dz =
2 ( n − 1 )
( 2 n − 1 )
_
∞
−∞
dz sech
2(n−1)
z
=
2
n
( n − 1 )!
( 2 n − 1 )!!
(1224)
for n ≥ 1. Thus, the normalized wave function for the lowest energy bound
state is given by
φ
n
(x) =
¸
( 2 n − 1 )!!
ξ 2
n
( n − 1 )!
sech
n
_
x
ξ
_
(1225)
273
The normalization of the next lowestenergy bound state is found from
1 = [ B [
2
ξ
_
∞
−∞
dz sech
2(n−1)
z tanh
2
z
= [ B [
2
ξ
_ _
∞
−∞
dz sech
2(n−1)
z −
_
∞
−∞
dz sech
2n
z
_
= [ B [
2
ξ
_
2
(n−1)
( n − 2 )!
( 2 n − 3 )!!
−
2
n
( n − 1 )!
( 2 n − 1 )!!
_
= [ B [
2
ξ
_
2
(n−1)
( n − 2 )!
( 2 n − 1 )!!
_
(1226)
Thus, the normalized bound state wave function is given by
φ
n−1
(x) =
¸
( 2 n − 1 )!!
ξ 2
n−1
( n − 2 )!
sech
n
_
x
ξ
_
tanh
_
x
ξ
_
(1227)
——————————————————————————————————
274
4.5 Orbital Angular Momentum
In three dimensions, the orbital angular momentum operator is a pseudovector
and is deﬁned by the vector product
ˆ
L = ˆ r ∧ ˆ p (1228)
therefore, it can be decomposed in terms of Cartesian unit vectors via
ˆ
L = ˆ e
x
ˆ
L
x
+ ˆ e
y
ˆ
L
y
+ ˆ e
z
ˆ
L
z
(1229)
where the components are given by the expressions
ˆ
L
x
= ˆ y ˆ p
z
− ˆ z ˆ p
y
ˆ
L
y
= ˆ z ˆ p
x
− ˆ x ˆ p
z
ˆ
L
z
= ˆ x ˆ p
y
− ˆ y ˆ p
x
(1230)
From the commutation relations between position and momentum operators,
one ﬁnds that the components of the angular momentum operator satisfy the
following type of commutation relations with the components of the position
and momentum
[
ˆ
L
x
, ˆ y ] = i ¯h ˆ z
[
ˆ
L
x
, ˆ p
y
] = i ¯h ˆ p
z
[
ˆ
L
x
, ˆ x ] = 0
[
ˆ
L
x
, ˆ p
x
] = 0 (1231)
The above expressions can be used together with the rules for the commutators
of sums and products of operators, to prove that
[
ˆ
L
x
,
ˆ
L
y
] = i ¯h
ˆ
L
z
[
ˆ
L
y
,
ˆ
L
z
] = i ¯h
ˆ
L
x
[
ˆ
L
z
,
ˆ
L
x
] = i ¯h
ˆ
L
y
(1232)
Since the components of the orbital angular momentum operators do not com
mute, the uncertainty principle asserts that, in general, it is not possible to ﬁnd
an a simultaneous eigenstate of more than one component. Since the angular
momentum operators satisfy the above commutation relations, they provide an
example of a Lie algebra
14
.
14
The operators of a Lie algebra satisfy commutation relations of the form
[
ˆ
A
i
,
ˆ
A
j
] =
k
C
k
i,j
ˆ
A
k
The set of operators
ˆ
A
i
which form a Lie algebra are linearly related to the inﬁnitesimal
generators of transformation groups, known as Lie Groups. In the case of orbital angular
momentum, the Lie group is the group of threedimensional rotations. It is also noteworthy
275
The commutation relations between the various components of the angular
momentum can be evaluated through
[
ˆ
L
x
,
ˆ
L
y
] = [
ˆ
L
x
, z ˆ p
x
] − [
ˆ
L
x
, x ˆ p
z
]
= [
ˆ
L
x
, z ] ˆ p
x
+ z [
ˆ
L
x
, ˆ p
x
] − [
ˆ
L
x
, x ] ˆ p
z
− x [
ˆ
L
x
, ˆ p
z
]
= − i ¯h y ˆ p
x
+ i ¯h x ˆ p
y
= i ¯h
ˆ
L
z
(1233)
The others can be obtained by cyclic permutations, corresponding to the diﬀer
ent choices of Cartesian coordinate axes.
The operator expressing the squared magnitude of the angular momentum
vector follows from the operators representing the Cartesian components and
the Pythagorean theorem
´
L
2
=
ˆ
L
2
x
+
ˆ
L
2
y
+
ˆ
L
2
z
(1234)
That is, the squared magnitude of the angular momentum is merely the sum
of the squares of the operator components. The magnitude of L
2
is a scalar
quantity. It can be proved that
[
ˆ
L
x
,
´
L
2
] = 0
[
ˆ
L
y
,
´
L
2
] = 0
[
ˆ
L
z
,
´
L
2
] = 0 (1235)
Thus, it is possible to ﬁnd simultaneous eigenfunctions of any one component
of the angular momentum and the magnitude squared.
The commutation relation between the z component of the angular momen
tum
ˆ
L
z
and the magnitude of the angular momentum
ˆ
L
2
is proved by considering
[
ˆ
L
z
,
´
L
2
] = [
ˆ
L
z
,
ˆ
L
2
x
] + [
ˆ
L
z
,
ˆ
L
2
y
] + [
ˆ
L
z
,
ˆ
L
2
z
] (1236)
that the set of commutation relations between the angular momentum operators and any
vector quantity with components ˆ v
i
satisfy commutation relations of the form
[
ˆ
L
i
, ˆ v
j
] = i ¯h
k
i,j,k
ˆ v
k
where
i,j,k
is the LeviCivita symbol. The LeviCivita symbol is deﬁned as
i,j,k
=
_
1 if i, j, k is a cyclic permutation of 1, 2, 3
−1 if i, j, k is not a cyclic permutation of 1, 2, 3
0 otherwise
The above commutation relations imply that all vectors transform in the same way under the
set of rotation operations.
276
which becomes
[
ˆ
L
z
,
´
L
2
] = [
ˆ
L
z
,
ˆ
L
2
x
] + [
ˆ
L
z
,
ˆ
L
2
y
]
= [
ˆ
L
z
,
ˆ
L
x
]
ˆ
L
x
+ [
ˆ
L
z
,
ˆ
L
x
]
ˆ
L
x
+ [
ˆ
L
z
,
ˆ
L
y
]
ˆ
L
y
+
ˆ
L
y
[
ˆ
L
z
,
ˆ
L
y
]
= i ¯h
_
ˆ
L
y
ˆ
L
x
+
ˆ
L
x
ˆ
L
y
_
− i ¯h
_
ˆ
L
x
ˆ
L
y
+
ˆ
L
y
ˆ
L
x
_
= 0 (1237)
Thus,
ˆ
L
z
and
´
L
2
commute. By invariance under the permutation of the coor
dinate axes, the commutators of
´
L
2
with the other components of
ˆ
L are also
found to be zero.
——————————————————————————————————
4.5.1 Exercise 78
Find the expression for the operator L
2
in terms of the Cartesian components
of the position and derivatives w.r.t position. Express your ﬁnal result entirely
in terms of invariant quantities, such as scalar products.
——————————————————————————————————
4.5.2 Solution 78
The components of the angular momentum can be written in terms of the Levi
Civita symbol
i,j,k
as
L
k
= − i ¯h
i,j
i,j,k
x
i
∂
∂x
j
(1238)
where
i,j,k
= 1 (1239)
if i, j, k are an even permutation of the indices 1, 2, and 3, and
i,j,k
= − 1 (1240)
if i, j, k are an odd permutation of the indices 1, 2, and 3, and
i,j,k
= 0 (1241)
if any index is repeated.
277
The magnitude of the angular momentum is given by
´
L
2
=
k
ˆ
L
2
k
= − ¯h
2
k
i,j
i,j,k
x
i
∂
∂x
j
l,m
l,m,k
x
l
∂
∂x
m
(1242)
But on using the identity
k
i,j,k
l,m,k
= δ
i,l
δ
j,m
− δ
i,m
δ
j,l
(1243)
one obtains
´
L
2
= − ¯h
2
i,j
_
x
i
∂
∂x
j
x
i
∂
∂x
j
− x
i
∂
∂x
j
x
j
∂
∂x
i
_
= − ¯h
2
i,j
_
x
i
x
i
∂
∂x
j
∂
∂x
j
+ x
i
∂x
i
∂x
j
∂
∂x
j
− x
i
x
j
∂
∂x
j
∂
∂x
i
− x
i
∂x
j
∂x
j
∂
∂x
i
_
= − ¯h
2
i,j
_
x
2
i
∂
2
∂x
2
j
+ x
i
δ
i,j
∂
∂x
j
− x
i
x
j
∂
∂x
j
∂
∂x
i
− x
i
∂
∂x
i
_
(1244)
Thus, we have
´
L
2
= − ¯h
2
_
i
x
2
i
j
∂
2
∂x
2
j
+
i
x
i
∂
∂x
i
−
i,j
x
i
x
j
∂
∂x
j
∂
∂x
i
− 3
i
x
i
∂
∂x
i
_
(1245)
Hence, the magnitude of the angular momentum can be written as
´
L
2
= − ¯h
2
_
i
x
2
i
j
∂
2
∂x
2
j
+
i
x
i
∂
∂x
i
−
i,j
x
i
x
j
∂
∂x
j
∂
∂x
i
− 3
i
x
i
∂
∂x
i
_
= − ¯h
2
_
i
x
2
i
j
∂
2
∂x
2
j
−
i,j
x
i
x
j
∂
∂x
j
∂
∂x
i
− 2
i
x
i
∂
∂x
i
_
(1246)
278
which can be expressed as
´
L
2
= − ¯h
2
_
i
x
2
i
j
∂
2
∂x
2
j
−
i,j
x
j
∂
∂x
j
x
i
∂
∂x
i
− 1
i
x
i
∂
∂x
i
_
(1247)
When put in vector notation, the magnitude of the angular momentum becomes
´
L
2
= − ¯h
2
_
r
2
∇
2
− ( r . ∇ )
2
− ( r . ∇ )
_
(1248)
which is seen to be a scalar operator.
——————————————————————————————————
4.5.3 Exercise 79
Show that the following functions are eigenfunctions of
ˆ
L
z
and
´
L
2
and ﬁnd the
corresponding eigenvalues.
Ψ
0
(r) = g
0
(r)
Ψ
1
(r) = z g
1
(r)
Ψ
2
(r) = ( x + i y ) g
2
(r)
Ψ
3
(r) = ( x − i y ) g
3
(r)
Ψ
4
(r) = ( 3 z
2
− r
2
) g
4
(r)
Ψ
5
(r) = ( x + i y )
2
g
5
(r)
Ψ
6
(r) = ( x − i y )
2
g
6
(r)
Ψ
7
(r) = z ( x + i y ) g
7
(r)
Ψ
8
(r) = z ( x − i y ) g
8
(r) (1249)
where the functions g
n
(r) are arbitrary functions of the radial distance.
——————————————————————————————————
The Cartesian components of the angular momentum operators can be ex
pressed in terms of spherical polar coordinates. The Cartesian components are
found to be given by the expressions
ˆ
L
x
= − i ¯h
_
− sin ϕ
∂
∂θ
− cos ϕ cot θ
∂
∂ϕ
_
ˆ
L
y
= − i ¯h
_
+ cos ϕ
∂
∂θ
− sin ϕ cot θ
∂
∂ϕ
_
ˆ
L
z
= − i ¯h
∂
∂ϕ
(1250)
279
and these components can be shown to satisfy the same commutation relations
that were derived from a purely Cartesian formulation.
We shall commence the derivation of eqns(1250) by expressing the angular
momentum in terms of the unit vectors of the polar coordinate system. The
orbital angular momentum operator is expressed as
ˆ
L = r ∧ ˆ p
= − i ¯h r ∧ ∇ (1251)
and on using the representation
∇ = ˆ e
r
∂
∂r
+ ˆ e
θ
1
r
∂
∂θ
+ ˆ e
ϕ
1
r sin θ
∂
∂ϕ
(1252)
one ﬁnds
ˆ
L = − i ¯h r
_
ˆ e
r
∧ ˆ e
θ
1
r
∂
∂θ
+ ˆ e
r
∧ ˆ e
ϕ
1
r sin θ
∂
∂ϕ
_
= − i ¯h
_
ˆ e
ϕ
∂
∂θ
− ˆ e
θ
1
sin θ
∂
∂ϕ
_
(1253)
In the last line we have used the fact that the unit vectors ˆ e
r
, ˆ e
θ
and ˆ e
ϕ
form
an orthogonal coordinate system. Furthermore, as
ˆr = ˆ e
r
r
= r cos θ ˆ e
z
+ r sin θ
_
sin ϕ ˆ e
y
+ cos ϕ ˆ e
x
_
(1254)
one can express the spherical polar coordinate unit vectors in terms of the
Cartesian unit vectors by using the deﬁnition of the unit vectors
ˆ e
r
=
∂
∂r
r
= cos θ ˆ e
z
+ sin θ
_
sin ϕ ˆ e
y
+ cos ϕ ˆ e
x
_
ˆ e
θ
=
1
r
∂
∂θ
r
= − sin θ ˆ e
z
+ cos θ
_
sin ϕ ˆ e
y
+ cos ϕ ˆ e
x
_
ˆ e
ϕ
=
1
r sin θ
∂
∂ϕ
r
=
_
cos ϕ ˆ e
y
− sin ϕ ˆ e
x
_
(1255)
On substituting the above expressions for the unit vectors into the equation for
the angular momentum vector
ˆ
L in eqn(1253), the angular momentum is found
280
in the form
ˆ
L = − i ¯h
_
− ˆ e
x
sin ϕ
∂
∂θ
+ ˆ e
y
cos ϕ
∂
∂θ
− ˆ e
x
cot θ cos ϕ
∂
∂ϕ
− ˆ e
y
cot θ sin ϕ
∂
∂ϕ
+ ˆ e
z
∂
∂ϕ
_
(1256)
which has three components given by the expressions of eqn(1250).
The square of the angular momentum
´
L
2
is given by
´
L
2
= − ¯h
2
_
1
sin
2
θ
∂
2
∂ϕ
2
+
1
sin θ
∂
∂θ
_
sin θ
∂
∂θ
_ _
(1257)
4.5.4 Simultaneous Eigenfunctions.
In spherical polar coordinates, the angular momentum operators act on the
wave functions Ψ(r, θ, ϕ), but since r does not appear in the operators, it is
redundant. The simultaneous eigenfunctions of the pair of operators
ˆ
L
z
and
´
L
2
are functions of θ and ϕ alone, and are written as Y
l
m
(θ, ϕ). These eigenfunctions
satisfy the pair of eigenvalue equations,
´
L
2
Y
l
m
(θ, ϕ) = − ¯h
2
_
1
sin
2
θ
∂
2
∂ϕ
2
+
1
sin θ
∂
∂θ
_
sin θ
∂
∂θ
_ _
Y
l
m
(θ, ϕ)
= λ
l
Y
l
m
(θ, ϕ) (1258)
ˆ
L
z
Y
l
m
(θ, ϕ) = − i ¯h
∂
∂ϕ
Y
l
m
(θ, ϕ)
= µ Y
l
m
(θ, ϕ) (1259)
where λ
l
is the eigenvalue of
´
L
2
and µ is the eigenvalue of
ˆ
L
z
. The eigenfunctions
Y
l
m
(θ, ϕ) are usually factorized according to
Y
l
m
(θ, ϕ) = Θ
l
m
(θ) Φ
m
(ϕ) (1260)
From the form of the
ˆ
L
z
operator as a derivative w.r.t. ϕ, one can easily ﬁnd
that the ϕ dependence of Y
l
m
(θ, ϕ) must be given by
Y
l
m
(θ, ϕ) = Θ
l
m
(θ)
_
1
2 π
_1
2
exp
_
i
µ ϕ
¯h
_
(1261)
The modulus of the wave function is single valued, as it must represent a unique
probability density for each point in space. Therefore, we expect that the wave
281
function at the point (r,θ,ϕ) must have the same values at (r,θ,ϕ + 2π) since
this represents the same point. In this case, we have
exp
_
i
µ ϕ
¯h
_
= exp
_
i
µ ( ϕ + 2 π )
¯h
_
(1262)
which is satisﬁed if µ = ¯ h m for any positive or negative integer m.
Classically, the magnitude of a component of the angular momentum should
be smaller than the magnitude of the pseudovector L. From this observation,
one expects that an inequality should exist between the eigenvalues of λ
l
and
m ¯h. The maximum value of m will be denoted by l. Later, we shall show that
the eigenvalue λ
l
is related to l via λ
l
= ¯ h
2
l ( l + 1 ).
This suggests a picture of the orbital angular momentum eigenstates as be
ing states where
ˆ
L has a deﬁnite magnitude
√
λ
l
and a deﬁnite z component
m ¯h. The picture is that in which the vector L has a deﬁnite z component and
magnitude, but has an uncertain direction due to precession around the z axis.
3
2
1
0
1
2
3
m
[ l ( l + 1 ) ]
1/2
Figure 72: A semiclassical picture of a state with angular momentum l and
z component m. The picture of the angular momentum is a vector of length
¯h
_
l ( l + 1 ) which has a projection ¯ h m along the z axis. The angular
momentum vector can be thought of as precessing around the z axis, so that
the x and y components are indeterminate.
282
4.5.5 The Raising and Lowering Operators
Two useful operators are given by the raising and lowering operators,
ˆ
L
+
and
ˆ
L
−
deﬁned by
ˆ
L
+
=
ˆ
L
x
+ i
ˆ
L
y
ˆ
L
−
=
ˆ
L
x
− i
ˆ
L
y
(1263)
The operators
ˆ
L
+
and
ˆ
L
−
are Hermitean conjugates. These operators also
commute with
´
L
2
.
[
´
L
2
,
ˆ
L
+
] = [
´
L
2
,
ˆ
L
−
] = 0 (1264)
as both
ˆ
L
x
and
ˆ
L
y
commute with
´
L
2
.
In spherical polar coordinates, the raising and lowering operators are given
by
ˆ
L
+
= + ¯ h exp
_
+ i ϕ
_ _
∂
∂θ
+ i cot θ
∂
∂ϕ
_
ˆ
L
−
= − ¯h exp
_
− i ϕ
_ _
∂
∂θ
− i cot θ
∂
∂ϕ
_
(1265)
The raising and lowering operators satisfy the commutation relations
[
ˆ
L
z
,
ˆ
L
+
] = + ¯ h
ˆ
L
+
[
ˆ
L
z
,
ˆ
L
−
] = − ¯h
ˆ
L
−
[
ˆ
L
+
,
ˆ
L
−
] = 2 ¯ h
ˆ
L
z
(1266)
On operating with the commutators [
´
L
2
,
ˆ
L
±
] on the eigenfunctions of
´
L
2
,
one ﬁnds
´
L
2
ˆ
L
±
Y
l
m
(θ, ϕ) =
ˆ
L
±
´
L
2
Y
l
m
(θ, ϕ)
= λ
l
ˆ
L
±
Y
l
m
(θ, ϕ) (1267)
and recognizes that
ˆ
L
±
Y
l
m
(θ, ϕ) is also an eigenfunction of
´
L
2
with the same
eigenvalue λ
l
as found for Y
l
m
(θ, ϕ). Thus,
ˆ
L
±
acting on an eigenfunction of the
magnitude of the orbital angular momentum does not change the eigenvalue λ
l
.
On operating with the commutator [
ˆ
L
z
,
ˆ
L
±
] = ± ¯h
ˆ
L
±
on the eigen
functions Y
l
m
(θ, ϕ), one ﬁnds
ˆ
L
z
ˆ
L
±
Y
l
m
(θ, ϕ) =
_
ˆ
L
±
ˆ
L
z
± ¯h
ˆ
L
±
_
Y
l
m
(θ, ϕ)
=
_
m ¯h ± ¯h
_
ˆ
L
±
Y
l
m
(θ, ϕ) (1268)
283
Thus, the raising and lowering operators when acting on a simultaneous eigen
function of
´
L
2
and
ˆ
L
z
produce other simultaneous eigenfunctions with
ˆ
L
z
eigen
values that are either raised or lowered by ¯ h. The action of
ˆ
L
±
on the eigen
function Y
l
m
(θ, ϕ) is to produce a function proportional to Y
l
m±1
(θ, ϕ). Thus,
we have
ˆ
L
±
Y
l
m
(θ, ϕ) = C
±
(l, m) Y
l
m±1
(θ, ϕ) (1269)
The constants of proportionality, C
±
(l, m), have yet to be determined.
4.5.6 The Eigenvalues and Degeneracy
First we shall note the two equalities,
ˆ
L
−
ˆ
L
+
=
´
L
2
−
ˆ
L
2
z
− ¯h
ˆ
L
z
ˆ
L
+
ˆ
L
−
=
´
L
2
−
ˆ
L
2
z
+ ¯h
ˆ
L
z
(1270)
We shall ﬁrst consider the eﬀect of the raising operator. On operating
ˆ
L
−
ˆ
L
+
on the eigenfunction Y
l
m
(θ, ϕ), on using the ﬁrst equality of eqn(1270), one ﬁnds
ˆ
L
−
ˆ
L
+
Y
l
m
(θ, ϕ) =
_
´
L
2
−
ˆ
L
2
z
− ¯h
ˆ
L
z
_
Y
l
m
(θ, ϕ)
=
_
λ
l
− ¯h
2
m
2
− ¯h
2
m
_
Y
l
m
(θ, ϕ) (1271)
If the value of m is the maximum value l, then we have
ˆ
L
+
Y
l
l
(θ, ϕ) = 0 (1272)
and so, on substituting m = l in the previous equation, we ﬁnd
λ
l
= ¯ h
2
l
_
l + 1
_
(1273)
Thus, we have found the eigenvalue of the square of the angular momentum in
terms of the maximum eigenvalue of the z component of the angular momentum
operator.
Now we shall determine explicit expressions for the products of the coeﬃ
cients C
±
(l, m). On using the properties of the raising and lowering operators
given by eqn(1269), one ﬁnds
ˆ
L
−
ˆ
L
+
Y
l
m
(θ, ϕ) = C
−
(l, m+ 1) C
+
(l, m) Y
l
m
(θ, ϕ) (1274)
but we also have
ˆ
L
−
ˆ
L
+
Y
l
m
(θ, ϕ) =
_
λ
l
− ¯h
2
m
2
− ¯h
2
m
_
Y
l
m
(θ, ϕ) (1275)
284
Therefore, we can determine the products of the coeﬃcient C
±
(l, m) by equating
the above two expressions and then by substituting the expression for λ
l
. Thus,
we ﬁnd
C
−
(l, m+ 1) C
+
(l, m) = λ
l
− ¯h
2
_
m
2
+ m
_
= ¯ h
2
_
l ( l + 1 ) − m
2
− m
_
(1276)
The eﬀect of the lowering operator is found by considering the other equality,
and considering the minimum value of l. On operating
ˆ
L
+
ˆ
L
−
on the eigenfunc
tion Y
l
m
(θ, ϕ) and on using the second equality of eqn(1270), one ﬁnds
ˆ
L
+
ˆ
L
−
Y
l
m
(θ, ϕ) =
_
´
L
2
−
ˆ
L
2
z
+ ¯h
ˆ
L
z
_
Y
l
m
(θ, ϕ)
= ¯ h
2
_
l ( l + 1 ) − m
2
+ m
_
Y
l
m
(θ, ϕ) (1277)
If m is the minimum value l
, then we have
ˆ
L
−
Y
l
l
(θ, ϕ) = 0 (1278)
therefore
¯h
2
_
l ( l + 1 ) − l
2
+ l
_
= 0 (1279)
so we ﬁnd that the minimum value of m is given by l
= − l. Thus, the
possible values of m run through the set of numbers − l , − ( l − 1 ) , − ( l −
2 ) , . . . , ( l − 2 ) , ( l − 1 ) , l , which includes 0. There are ( 2 l + 1 )
diﬀerent eigenfunctions of m for ﬁxed l. Thus, the eigenvalues of
´
L
2
correspond
ing to the value l have a degeneracy of ( 2 l + 1 ). Since we have proved that
the eigenvalues m for the z component of the orbital angular momentum are
integer, we note that l must also be an integer.
4.5.7 The Eﬀect of the Raising Operators.
The coeﬃcients C
±
(l, m) are found by noting that as
ˆ
L
+
and
ˆ
L
−
are Hermitean
conjugates
_
π
0
dθ sin θ
_
2 π
0
dϕ Y
l
m+1
(θ, ϕ)
∗
ˆ
L
+
Y
l
m
(θ, ϕ)
= C
+
(l, m)
=
__
π
0
dθ sin θ
_
2 π
0
dϕ Y
l
m
(θ, ϕ)
∗
ˆ
L
−
Y
l
m+1
(θ, ϕ)
_
∗
= C
∗
−
(l, m+ 1) (1280)
285
Thus, we have
[ C
+
(l, m) [
2
= ¯ h
2
_
l ( l + 1 ) − m ( m + 1 )
_
= ¯ h
2
( l − m ) ( l + m + 1 ) (1281)
and, by considering the lowering operator, one ﬁnds the analogous equation
[ C
−
(l, m) [
2
= ¯ h
2
_
l ( l + 1 ) − m ( m − 1 )
_
= ¯ h
2
( l + m ) ( l − m + 1 ) (1282)
Thus, the eﬀect of the raising and lowering operators are given by
ˆ
L
+
Y
l
m
(θ, ϕ) = ¯ h
_
( l − m ) ( l + m + 1 ) Y
l
m+1
(θ, ϕ)
ˆ
L
−
Y
l
m
(θ, ϕ) = ¯ h
_
( l + m ) ( l − m + 1 ) Y
l
m−1
(θ, ϕ) (1283)
where we have chosen the phase of the constants to be zero.
4.5.8 Explicit Expressions for the Eigenfunctions
Explicit expressions for the simultaneous eigenfunctions Y
l
m
(θ, ϕ) can be found
starting from the eﬀect of the raising operator on the state with maximum m,
i.e. m = l. This results in the equation
ˆ
L
+
Y
l
l
(θ, ϕ) = 0 (1284)
which has the explicit form
¯h exp
_
+ i ϕ
_ _
∂
∂θ
+ i cot θ
∂
∂ϕ
_
Y
l
l
(θ, ϕ) = 0 (1285)
As the eigenfunction has a ϕ dependence of exp[ i l ϕ ], and as the eigenfunction
is factorized as
Y
l
m
(θ, ϕ) = Θ
l
m
(θ)
_
1
2 π
_1
2
exp
_
i m ϕ
_
(1286)
one ﬁnds
∂
∂θ
Θ
l
l
(θ) = l cot θ Θ
l
l
(θ) (1287)
This equation can be integrated to yield
Θ
l
l
(θ) = B
l
l
sin
l
θ (1288)
where B
l
l
is a constant of proportionality. The magnitude of B
l
l
is determined
by the normalization condition
[ B
l
l
[
2
_
π
0
dθ sin θ sin
2l
θ = 1 (1289)
286
Thus, the magnitude of the normalization is found as
[ B
l
l
[ =
_
( 2 l + 1 )!
2
2l+1
( l! )
2
_1
2
(1290)
The normalized eigenfunction Y
l
l
(θ, ϕ) is found as
Y
l
l
(θ, ϕ) =
_
1
4 π
( 2 l + 1 )!
2
2l
( l! )
2
_1
2
sin
l
θ exp
_
i l ϕ
_
(1291)
up to an arbitrary constant phase.
The lowering operator acting on the state with minimum m, i.e. m = − l,
results in the equation
ˆ
L
−
Y
l
−l
(θ, ϕ) = 0 (1292)
which has the explicit form
¯h exp
_
− i ϕ
_ _
−
∂
∂θ
+ i cot θ
∂
∂ϕ
_
Y
l
l
(θ, ϕ) = 0 (1293)
As the eigenfunction has a ϕ dependence of exp[ − i l ϕ ], and as the eigenfunc
tion is factorized as
Y
l
m
(θ, ϕ) = Θ
l
m
(θ)
_
1
2 π
_1
2
exp
_
i m ϕ
_
(1294)
one ﬁnds
∂
∂θ
Θ
l
−l
(θ) = l cot θ Θ
l
−l
(θ) (1295)
which can be integrated to yield
Θ
l
−l
(θ) = B
l
−l
sin
l
θ (1296)
where B
l
−l
is a constant of proportionality. The magnitude of B
l
−l
is determined
by the normalization condition
[ B
l
−l
[
2
_
π
0
dθ sin θ sin
2l
θ = 1 (1297)
Thus, the magnitude of the normalization is found as
[ B
l
−l
[ =
_
( 2 l + 1 )!
2
2l+1
( l! )
2
_1
2
(1298)
The normalized eigenfunction Y
l
−l
(θ, ϕ) is found as
Y
l
−l
(θ, ϕ) =
_
1
4 π
( 2 l + 1 )!
2
2l
( l! )
2
_1
2
sin
l
θ exp
_
− i l ϕ
_
(1299)
287
up to an arbitrary constant phase.
The eigenfunctions corresponding to larger values of m can be found by
successive operation with the raising operators,
exp
_
+ i ϕ
_ _
∂
∂θ
+ i
∂
∂ϕ
cot θ
_
Y
l
m
(θ, ϕ)
=
_
( l − m ) ( l + m + 1 ) Y
l
m+1
(θ, ϕ) (1300)
Thus, on factorizing the eigenfunctions, we have
_
+
∂
∂θ
− m cot θ
_
Θ
l
m
(θ) =
_
( l − m ) ( l + m + 1 ) Θ
l
m+1
(θ)
sin
m
θ
_
∂
∂θ
_
1
sin
m
θ
Θ
l
m
(θ) =
_
( l − m ) ( l + m + 1 ) Θ
l
m+1
(θ)
sin
m+1
θ
_
∂
∂ cos θ
_
1
sin
m
θ
Θ
l
m
(θ) =
_
( l − m ) ( l + m + 1 ) Θ
l
m+1
(θ)
(1301)
Starting with m = − l, after l +m iterations, one ﬁnds
Θ
l
m
(θ) =
( − 1 )
l+m
2
l
l!
_
( 2 l + 1 ) ( l − m )!
2 ( l + m )!
_1
2
sin
m
θ
_
∂
∂ cos θ
_
l+m
sin
2l
θ
(1302)
Thus, the spherical harmonics are given by
Y
l
m
(θ) =
( − 1 )
l+m
2
l
l!
_
( 2 l + 1 ) ( l − m )!
4 π ( l + m )!
_1
2
sin
m
θ
_
∂
∂ cos θ
_
l+m
sin
2l
θ exp
_
i m ϕ
_
(1303)
These eigenfunctions are normalized via
_
2 π
0
dϕ
_
π
0
dθ sin θ [ Y
l
m
(θ, ϕ) [
2
= 1 (1304)
The eigenfunction for positive m and negative m are related via
Y
l
−m
(θ, ϕ) = ( − 1 )
m
Y
l
m
(θ, ϕ)
∗
(1305)
The spherical harmonics also satisfy eigenvalue equation for
´
L
2
. This can
be seen explicitly from the representation in spherical polar coordinates
− ¯h
2
_
1
sin
2
θ
∂
2
∂ϕ
2
+
1
sin θ
∂
∂θ
_
sin θ
∂
∂θ
_ _
Y
l
m
(θ, ϕ) = ¯ h
2
l ( l + 1 ) Y
l
m
(θ, ϕ)
(1306)
288
which on factorizing the eigenfunctions into polar and azimuthal parts, yields
_
+
m
2
sin
2
θ
−
1
sin θ
∂
∂θ
_
sin θ
∂
∂θ
_ _
Θ
l
m
(θ) = l ( l + 1 ) Θ
l
m
(θ) (1307)
which identiﬁes Θ
l
m
(θ) with the associated Legendre Polynomials P
l
m
(cos θ).
This identiﬁcation proceeds through changing variables x = cos θ, so one ﬁnds
∂
∂x
_
( 1 − x
2
)
∂Θ
∂x
_
−
m
2
1 − x
2
Θ = − l ( l + 1 ) Θ (1308)
which can then be put into the standard form
( 1 − x
2
)
∂
2
Θ
∂x
2
− 2 x
∂Θ
∂x
−
m
2
1 − x
2
Θ = − l ( l + 1 ) Θ (1309)
The spherical harmonics are given in terms of the associated Legendre Polyno
mials via
Y
l
m
(θ, ϕ) =
¸
2 l + 1
4 π
( l − m )!
( l + m )!
( − 1 )
m
P
l
m
( cos θ ) exp
_
i m ϕ
_
(1310)
4.5.9 Legendre Polynomials
The generating function F(z, t) for the Legendre polynomials has an expansion
given by
F(z, t) =
1
√
1 + t
2
− 2 z t
=
∞
l = 0
t
l
P
l
(z) (1311)
for t < 1.
The Legendre polynomials satisfy recurrence relations, which can be derived
from the generating function expansion. The ﬁrst is obtained by diﬀerentiating
the generating function with respect to t
_
∂F(z, t)
∂t
_
=
( z − t )
( 1 + t
2
− 2 z t )
3
2
=
l=∞
l=0
l t
l−1
P
l
(z) (1312)
After multiplying the above equation with a factor of ( 1 + t
2
− 2 z t ) and
then substituting the generating function expansion, one obtains the relation
( 1 + t
2
− 2 z t )
l=∞
l=0
l t
l−1
P
l
(z) = ( z − t )
l=∞
l=0
t
l
P
l
(z) (1313)
289
1
0.5
0
0.5
1
1 0.5 0 0.5 1
z
Y
l
m
(θ,φ)
2
θ
Figure 73: Since the spherical harmonics Y
l
m
(θ, ϕ) only depend on ϕ through
a phase factor, their θ dependence can be conveniently represented by a polar
plot. In a polar plot, points on a curve are represented by the radial and angular
coordinates
_
[Y
l
m
(θ, ϕ)[
2
, θ
_
.
On equating like powers of t, one has
( l + 1 ) P
l+1
(z) − ( 2 l + 1 ) z P
l
(z) + l P
l−1
(z) = 0 (1314)
A second recurrence relation can be found by diﬀerentiating the generating
function expansion with respect to z
_
∂F(z, t)
∂z
_
=
t
( 1 + t
2
− 2 z t )
3
2
=
l=∞
l=0
t
l
P
l
(z) (1315)
On multiplying by ( 1 + t
2
− 2 z t ) and then substituting the generating
function expansion, one obtains
t
l
t
l
P
l
(z) = ( 1 + t
2
− 2 z t )
l
t
l
P
l
(z) (1316)
which yields the relation
P
l+1
(z) + P
l−1
(z) = 2 z P
l
(z) + P
l
(z) (1317)
290
involving the derivatives of the polynomials.
Numerous other relations can be obtained from the above recurrence rela
tions. If we take the derivative of the ﬁrst recurrence relation, eqn(1314), then
we have
( l + 1 ) P
l+1
(z) − ( 2 l + 1 ) z P
l
(z) + l P
l−1
(z) = ( 2 l + 1 ) P
l
(z) (1318)
The term proportional to z P
l
(z) can be eliminated from the above equation.
This is achieved by multiplying eqn(1318) by two and then subtracting ( 2 l + 1 )
times eqn(1317), which leads to
P
l−1
(z) − P
l+1
(z) = − ( 2 l + 1 ) P
l
(z) (1319)
A more useful set of equations can be obtained by relating the Legendre poly
nomials of one order to the next. For example, adding eqn(1317) and eqn(1319)
one eliminates P
l+1
(z)
P
l−1
(z) = z P
l
(z) − l P
l
(z) (1320)
On subtracting the same pair of the equations, one has
P
l+1
(z) = ( l + 1 ) P
l
(z) + z P
l
(z) (1321)
Another pair of equations can be obtained from eqn(1320) and eqn(1321) by
shifting the index of eqn(1320) from l − 1 to l and then eliminating the term
proportional to P
l+1
(z), leading to the equation
( 1 − z
2
) P
l
(z) = ( l + 1 )
_
z P
l
(z) − P
l+1
(z)
_
(1322)
Another recurrence relation can be derived from the above equation by using
eqn(1314) to eliminate the term proportional to ( l + 1 ) P
l+1
(z). This process
results in
( 1 − z
2
) P
l
(z) = l P
l−1
(z) − l z P
l
(z) (1323)
From these relations we can ﬁnd the diﬀerential equation for the Legendre
polynomials P
l
(z). By diﬀerentiating eqn(1323), one obtains an equation in
volving P
l−1
(z) which can be eliminated using eqn(1320). This procedure leads
to Legendre’s equation
( 1 − z
2
) P
l
(z) − 2 z P
l
(z) = − l ( l + 1 ) P
l
(z) (1324)
291
On setting z = cos θ, the diﬀerential equation takes the form
1
sin θ
∂
∂θ
_
sin θ
∂
∂θ
P
l
( cos θ )
_
+ l ( l + 1 ) P
l
( cos θ ) = 0 (1325)
This is recognized as the eigenvalue equation for the total angular momentum,
in the case where there is a simultaneous zero eigenvalue for the z component of
the angular momentum, m = 0. In the general case, where m ,= 0, the simul
taneous eigenfunctions were denoted by Θ
l
m
(θ). For ﬁnite m, the θ dependence
of the angular momentum eigenvalues is expressed in terms of the associated
Legendre polynomials.
4.5.10 Associated Legendre Functions
The Associated Legendre functions, P
l
m
(z) for positive m, are deﬁned as
P
l
m
(z) = ( 1 − z
2
)
m
2
∂
m
∂z
m
P
l
(z) (1326)
Clearly, the associated Legendre function with m = 0 is identical with the
Legendre polynomial. Furthermore, since P
l
(z) is a polynomial of order l, the
associated Legendre functions vanish for m > l.
The associated Legendre functions satisfy a diﬀerential equation obtained
by diﬀerentiating Legendre’s equation m times. This leads to
( 1 − z
2
) v
− 2 z ( m + 1 ) v
+ ( l − m ) ( l + m + 1 ) v = 0 (1327)
where
v =
∂
m
∂z
m
P
l
(z) (1328)
The associated Legendre function P
l
m
(z) and v are related via
v =
1
( 1 − z
2
)
m
2
P
l
m
(z) (1329)
The ﬁrst and second derivatives of v are evaluated as
v
= m
z
1 − z
2
v +
1
( 1 − z
2
)
m
2
∂
∂z
P
l
m
(z) (1330)
and
v
= m
_
( m + 2 )
z
2
( 1 − z
2
)
2
v +
1
1 − z
2
v
_
+
2 m z
1 − z
2
1
( 1 − z
2
)
m
2
∂
∂z
P
l
m
(z) +
1
( 1 − z
2
)
m
2
∂
2
∂z
2
P
l
m
(z)
(1331)
292
Substitution of the expressions for v, v
and v
into eqn(1327) leads to
( 1 − z
2
)
∂
2
∂z
2
P
l
m
(z) − 2 z
∂
∂z
P
l
m
(z) +
_
l ( l + 1 ) −
m
2
1 − z
2
_
P
l
m
(z) = 0
(1332)
which is the diﬀerential equation satisﬁed by the associated Legendre functions.
On changing variables from z to cos θ, one ﬁnds that the associated Legendre
polynomials satisfy
1
sin θ
∂
∂θ
_
sin θ
∂
∂θ
P
l
m
( cos θ )
_
+
_
l ( l + 1 ) −
m
2
sin
2
θ
_
P
l
m
( cos θ ) = 0
(1333)
The above equation occurs as part of eigenvalue equation for the magnitude of
the orbital angular momentum, when the ϕ dependence has been separated out
by the introduction of the quantum number mcorresponding to the z component
of the orbital angular momentum. The normalized part of the wave function
which depends on the polar angle θ is given by
Θ
l
m
(θ) =
¸
( 2 l + 1 )
2
( l − m )!
( l + m )!
P
l
m
(cos θ) (1334)
which involves the associated Legendre function in the variable cos θ.
4.5.11 Spherical Harmonics
Explicit expressions for the ﬁrst few spherical harmonics Y
l
m
(θ, ϕ) are given in
Tables(34). The spherical harmonics are normalized so that
_
2 π
0
dϕ
_
π
0
dθ Y
l
m
(θ, ϕ)
∗
Y
l
m
(θ, ϕ) = δ
l,l
δ
m,m
(1335)
293
Table 3: The Lowest Order Spherical Harmonics Y
l
m
(θ, ϕ).
l m Y
l
m
(θ, ϕ)
l = 0 m = 0 Y
0
0
(θ, ϕ)
1
√
4 π
l = 1 m = 0 Y
1
0
(θ, ϕ)
_
3
4 π
cos θ
m = ±1 Y
1
±1
(θ, ϕ) ∓
_
3
8 π
e
± i ϕ
sin θ
l = 2 m = 0 Y
2
0
(θ, ϕ)
_
5
16 π
_
3 cos
2
θ − 1
_
m = ±1 Y
2
±1
(θ, ϕ) ∓
_
15
8 π
e
± i ϕ
cos θ sin θ
m = ±2 Y
2
±2
(θ, ϕ)
_
15
32 π
e
± i 2 ϕ
sin
2
θ
Table 4: The Spherical Harmonics with l = 3, Y
3
m
(θ, ϕ).
l m Y
l
m
(θ, ϕ)
l = 3 m = 0 Y
3
0
(θ, ϕ)
_
7
16 π
_
5 cos
3
θ − 3 cos θ
_
m = ±1 Y
3
±1
(θ, ϕ) ∓
_
21
64 π
e
± i ϕ
( 5 cos
2
θ − 1 ) sin θ
m = ±2 Y
3
±2
(θ, ϕ)
_
105
32 π
e
± i 2 ϕ
cos θ sin
2
θ
m = ±3 Y
3
±3
(θ, ϕ) ∓
_
35
64 π
e
± i 3 ϕ
sin
3
θ
294
Figure 74: The angular dependence of the squared modulus of the spherical
harmonic [ Y
0
0
(θ, ϕ) [
2
. Since the spherical harmonic does not depend on (θ, ϕ)
via the exponential term exp[ i m ϕ ], the angular distribution is spherically
symmetric. The θ dependence for l = 0 is shown as a polar plot.
l = 0
m = 0
l Θ ΘΘ Θ
0
0
(θ θθ θ) l
2
295
Figure 75: The angular dependence of the squared modulus of the spherical
harmonics [ Y
l
m
(θ, ϕ) [
2
. Since the spherical harmonics only depend on ϕ via
the exponential term exp[ i m ϕ ], the probability density is independent of
ϕ. The angular dependence is solely determined by the associated Legendre
functions Θ
l
m
(θ). The θ dependence for l = 1, m = ± 1 , 0 are shown as
polar plots.
l = 1
m = 0
l Θ ΘΘ Θ
1
0
(θ θθ θ) l
2
l = 1
m = 1
l Θ ΘΘ Θ
1
1
(θ θθ θ) l
2
296
Under inversion r → − r, then as ϕ → ϕ + π and θ → π − θ, one
ﬁnds that the spherical harmonics transform as
Y
l
m
(θ, ϕ) → Y
l
m
(π −θ, π +ϕ)
→ ( − 1 )
l
Y
l
m
(θ, ϕ) (1336)
Thus, all orbital angular momentum wave functions with the same value of l
must have the same parity.
The spherical harmonics are simultaneous eigenstates of two Hermitean op
erators, therefore, they form a complete set. The completeness relation in the
space of (θ,ϕ) can be expressed as
∞
l=0
l
m=−l
Y
l
m
(θ
, ϕ
)
∗
Y
l
m
(θ, ϕ) = δ( ˆ r
− ˆ r ) (1337)
where the delta function expresses the condition that the directions ˆ r and ˆ r
must be the same.
——————————————————————————————————
4.5.12 Exercise 80
Calculate the vector probability current density j(r, θ, ϕ) for a wave function of
the form
Ψ(r, θ, ϕ) = f(r) Y
l
m
(θ, ϕ) (1338)
which has an orbital angular momentum of l = 1, for the various eigenvalues
of the z component of the angular momentum, m, if f(r) is a real function.
——————————————————————————————————
4.5.13 Solution 80
The velocity is expressed as
v =
ˆ p
m
e
= − i
¯h
m
e
∇ (1339)
The gradient is written as
∇ = ˆ e
r
∂
∂r
+ ˆ e
θ
1
r
∂
∂θ
+ ˆ e
ϕ
1
r sin θ
∂
∂ϕ
(1340)
297
l = 2
m = 0
l Θ ΘΘ Θ
2
0
(θ θθ θ) l
2
Figure 76: The angular dependence of the squared modulus of the spherical
harmonics [ Y
l
m
(θ, ϕ) [
2
. Since the spherical harmonics only depend on ϕ via
the exponential term exp[ i m ϕ ], the probability density is independent of
ϕ. The angular dependence is solely determined by the associated Legendre
functions Θ
l
m
(θ). The θ dependence for l = 2 , m = ± 2 , ± 1 , 0 are shown
as polar plots.
l = 2
m = 1
l Θ ΘΘ Θ
2
1
(θ θθ θ) l
2
l = 2
m = 2
l Θ ΘΘ Θ
2
2
(θ θθ θ) l
2
298
l = 3
m = 0
l Θ ΘΘ Θ
3
0
(θ θθ θ) l
2
Figure 77: The angular dependence of the squared modulus of the spherical
harmonics [ Y
l
m
(θ, ϕ) [
2
. Since the spherical harmonics only depend on ϕ via
the exponential term exp[ i m ϕ ], the probability density is independent of
ϕ. The angular dependence is solely determined by the associated Legendre
functions Θ
l
m
(θ). The θ dependence for l = 3 , m = ± 3 , ± 2 , ± 1 , 0
are shown as polar plots. The probability density is peaked up in the equatorial
plane θ =
π
2
for m = ± l.
l = 3
m = 1
l Θ ΘΘ Θ
3
1
(θ θθ θ) l
2
l = 3
m = 2
l Θ ΘΘ Θ
3
2
(θ θθ θ) l
2
l = 3
m = 3
l Θ ΘΘ Θ
3
3
(θ θθ θ) l
2
299
Inversion
θ
ϕ
x
y
z
r
 r
π−θ
π+ϕ
r
r
Figure 78: In spherical polar coordinates, the inversion or parity operator pro
duces the transformation ϕ → ϕ + π and θ → π − θ.
The probability current density is expressed in terms of the wave function Ψ(r, t)
as the imaginary part of a vector quantity
j(r, t) =
¯h
m
e
·m
_
Ψ
∗
(r, t) ∇ Ψ(r, t)
_
(1341)
which in the case of a pure energy eigenvalue is time independent. In spherical
polar coordinates, the probability current is expressed as
j(r, t) = ˆ e
r
¯h
2 m
e
i
_
Ψ
∗
(r)
∂
∂r
Ψ(r) − Ψ(r)
∂
∂r
Ψ
∗
(r)
_
+ ˆ e
θ
¯h
2 m
e
i r
_
Ψ
∗
(r)
∂
∂θ
Ψ(r) − Ψ(r)
∂
∂θ
Ψ
∗
(r)
_
+ ˆ e
ϕ
¯h
2 m
e
i r sin θ
_
Ψ
∗
(r)
∂
∂ϕ
Ψ(r) − Ψ(r)
∂
∂ϕ
Ψ
∗
(r)
_
(1342)
On expressing the wave function as
Ψ(r) = g(r) Θ
l
m
(θ) exp
_
i m ϕ
_
(1343)
300
where both g(r) and the associated Legendre functions Θ
l
m
(θ) are real, one
obtains
j(r, t) = ˆ e
ϕ
¯h m
m
e
r sin θ
_
g(r) Θ
l
m
(θ)
_
2
= ˆ e
ϕ
¯h m
m
e
r sin θ
¸
¸
¸
¸
Ψ(r)
¸
¸
¸
¸
2
(1344)
where m is the azimuthal or magnetic quantum number. Hence, if the state
is an eigenstate of the z component of the angular momentum, the probability
current orbits around the atom in orbits parallel to the x  y plane.
——————————————————————————————————
4.5.14 Exercise 81
In the dipole approximation, the average power radiated when the hydrogen
atom decays from the n, l th excited state to the n
, l
th excited state is given
by
P
n,l;n
,l
=
4
3
ω
4
n,l;n
,l
e
2
c
3
¸
¸
¸
¸
_
d
3
r φ
∗
n
,l
,m
(r) r φ
n,l,m
(r)
¸
¸
¸
¸
2
(1345)
By considering the angular integration, show that the only nonzero matrix
elements occur when the angular momentum quantum numbers l and m for the
two states are related via
∆l = l
− l = ± 1
∆m = m
− m = 0 , ± 1 (1346)
These are the selection rules for dipole radiation. From conservation of angular
momentum, and since ∆l = ± 1, one sees that the photon must have spin
one. The photon has a spin which is an integer multiple of ¯h and, therefore,
it is a boson. This contrasts with particles which have spins that are halfodd
integer multiples of ¯ h, such as the electron which has
1
2
¯h, that are fermions
15
.
Transitions which do not satisfy the dipole selection rules are forbidden. Gen
erally, forbidden transitions still can occur, but require going beyond the dipole
approximation and have intensities which are lower by factors of the order of
magnitude
a
2
0
λ
2
where a
0
is the Bohr radius and λ is the wave length of light.
——————————————————————————————————
15
The relationship between spin and statistics was ﬁrst discussed by W. Pauli in the article,
Physical Review, 58, 716 (1940).
301
Energy levels of Hydrogen
1.2
1
0.8
0.6
0.4
0.2
0
0.2
E
n
[
R
y
d
b
e
r
g
s
]
n=1
n=2
n=3
n=4
l=0 l=1 l=2 l=3 l=4
Balmer
Lyman
Figure 79: The energy levels for Hydrogen (with 4 ≥ l). The energies are
plotted in units of Rydbergs. Some of the transitions allowed by the electric
dipole selection rule are shown.
4.5.15 Solution 81
The vector r is expressed in terms of the Cartesian unit vectors through
r = r
_
cos θ ˆ e
z
+ sin θ ( sin ϕ ˆ e
y
+ cos ϕ ˆ e
x
)
_
(1347)
and substituted into the matrix elements. To evaluate the angular integrations,
we start by ﬁnding the two recurrence relations
( 2 l + 1 ) cos θ P
l
m
(cos θ) = ( l + m ) P
l−1
m
(cos θ) + ( l − m + 1 ) P
l+1
m
(cos θ)
( 2 l + 1 ) sin θ P
l
m
(cos θ) = P
l−1
m+1
(cos θ) + P
l+1
m+1
(cos θ) (1348)
and then show that
cos θ Y
l
m
(θ, ϕ) =
=
_
(l −m+ 1) (l +m+ 1)
(2l + 1) (2l + 3)
_1
2
Y
l+1
m
+
_
(l −m) (l +m)
(2l −1) (2l + 1)
_1
2
Y
l−1
m
(1349)
exp
_
+ i ϕ
_
sin θ Y
l
m
(θ, ϕ) =
302
=
_
(l +m+ 1) (l +m+ 2)
(2l + 1) (2l + 3)
_1
2
Y
l+1
m+1
+
_
(l −m) (l −m−1)
(2l −1) (2l + 1)
_1
2
Y
l−1
m+1
(1350)
exp
_
− i ϕ
_
sin θ Y
l
m
(θ, ϕ) =
=
_
(l −m+ 1) (l −m+ 2)
(2l + 1) (2l + 3)
_1
2
Y
l+1
m−1
+
_
(l +m) (l +m−1)
(2l −1) (2l + 1)
_1
2
Y
l−1
m−1
(1351)
The expected result then follows immediately from the orthogonality of the
spherical harmonics.
——————————————————————————————————
4.5.16 Exercise 82
Consider the commutation relations
[
ˆ
L
z
, x ] = + i ¯h y
[
ˆ
L
z
, y ] = − i ¯h x
[
ˆ
L
z
, z ] = 0 (1352)
Take the matrix elements of the commutator involving z between states with
angular momentum (l
, m
) and (l, m) and use the eigenvalue equation to show
that
( m − m
)
_
2π
0
dϕ
_
π
0
dθ sin θ Y
l
m
(θ, ϕ)
∗
cos θ Y
l
m
(θ, ϕ) = 0 (1353)
Likewise, by considering the commutation rules involving x and y, show that
they can be combined to yield
( m − m
)
2
_
2π
0
dϕ
_
π
0
dθ sin θ Y
l
m
(θ, ϕ)
∗
sin θ cos ϕ Y
l
m
(θ, ϕ)
=
_
2π
0
dϕ
_
π
0
dθ sin θ Y
l
m
(θ, ϕ)
∗
sin θ cos ϕ Y
l
m
(θ, ϕ) (1354)
Hence, deduce the selection rule that the matrix element
_
d
3
r φ
∗
n
,l
,m
(r) r φ
n,l,m
(r) = 0 (1355)
vanishes unless m
− m = ± 1 or m
− m = 0.
303
Following a similar procedure with the double commutator
16
[
ˆ
L
2
, [
ˆ
L
2
, r ] ] = 2 ¯h
2
_
r
ˆ
L
2
+
ˆ
L
2
r
_
(1357)
deduce that the matrix elements
_
d
3
r φ
∗
n
,l
,m
(r) r φ
n,l,m
(r) (1358)
are only nonzero if l and l
satisfy the equation
_
( l
+ l + 1 )
2
− 1
_ _
( l
− l )
2
− 1
_
= 0 (1359)
Since the ﬁrst factor is always positive (unless l
= l = 0), the electric dipole
selection rule becomes l
− l = ± 1.
——————————————————————————————————
4.5.17 Solution 82
The selection rules for the zcomponent of the electron’s orbital angular mo
mentum can be proved by considering the commutation relations
[
ˆ
L
z
, x ] = i ¯h y
[
ˆ
L
z
, y ] = − i ¯h x
[
ˆ
L
z
, z ] = 0 (1360)
On taking the matrix elements between states with deﬁnite zcomponents of the
angular momenta, one ﬁnds
< n
l
m
[ [
ˆ
L
z
, x ] [ nlm > = i ¯h < n
l
m
[ y [ nlm >
< n
l
m
[ [
ˆ
L
z
, y ] [ mlm > = − i ¯h < n
l
m
[ x [ nlm >
< n
l
m
[ [
ˆ
L
z
, z ] [ nlm > = 0 (1361)
which reduce to
( m
− m ) < n
l
m
[ x [ nlm > = i < n
l
m
[ y [ nlm >
( m
− m ) < n
l
m
[ y [ mlm > = − i < n
l
m
[ x [ nlm >
( m
− m ) < n
l
m
[ z [ nlm > = 0 (1362)
16
As was shown by Dirac (P. A. M. Dirac, Proc. Roy. Soc. A111, 251 (1926).), this double
commutation relation is a speciﬁc example of the more general relation
[
ˆ
J
2
, [
ˆ
J
2
, A ] ] = 2 ¯ h
2
_
A
ˆ
J
2
+
ˆ
J
2
A
_
− 4 ¯h
2
( A .
ˆ
J )
ˆ
J (1356)
valid for any arbitrary vector operator A.
304
From the last equation, it follows that either m
= m or that
< n
l
m
[ z [ nlm > = 0 (1363)
On combining the ﬁrst two equations, one ﬁnds that
( m
− m )
2
< n
l
m
[ x [ nlm > = i ( m
− m ) < n
l
m
[ y [ nlm >
= < n
l
m
[ x [ nlm > (1364)
This equation is solved by requiring that either
( m
− m )
2
= 1 (1365)
or
< n
l
m
[ x [ nlm > = 0 (1366)
Hence, we have derived the selection rules ∆m = ± 1, 0.
The selection rules for the magnitude of the electrons orbital angular mo
mentum are found by considering the double commutator
[
ˆ
L
2
, [
ˆ
L
2
, r ] ] = 2 ¯h
2
_
r
ˆ
L
2
+
ˆ
L
2
r
_
(1367)
On taking the matrix elements of this equation between eigenstates of the mag
nitude of the orbital angular momentum, one ﬁnds
¯h
4
_
l
( l
+ 1 ) −l ( l + 1 )
_
2
< n
l
m
[ r [ nlm >=
_
l
( l
+ 1 ) +l ( l + 1 )
_
< n
l
m
[ r [ nlm >
(1368)
Hence, either
< n
l
m
[ [ nlm > = 0 (1369)
or
_
( l
+ l + 1 )
2
− 1
_ _
( l
− l )
2
− 1
_
= 0 (1370)
Since the ﬁrst factor is always positive for nonzero l and l
, the electric dipole
selection rule becomes ∆l = ± 1.
——————————————————————————————————
4.5.18 The Addition Theorem
The addition theorem for spherical harmonics states that
P
l
( cos γ ) =
4 π
2 l + 1
m = l
m = − l
Y
l
m
(θ
1
, ϕ
1
) Y
l
m
(θ
2
, ϕ
2
)
∗
(1371)
305
where γ is the angle between the directions (θ
1
, ϕ
1
) and (θ
2
, ϕ
2
), i.e.,
cos γ = cos θ
1
cos θ
2
+ sin θ
1
sin θ
2
cos ( ϕ
1
− ϕ
2
) (1372)
We shall assume that we can expand P
l
( cos γ ) as a Laplace series
P
l
( cos γ ) =
m1
a
l
m1
Y
l
m1
(θ
1
, ϕ
1
) (1373)
where
a
l
m1
=
_
dΩ
1
P
l
( cos γ ) Y
l
m1
(θ
1
, ϕ
1
) (1374)
But, on noting that the associated Legendre polynomials are the same as the
Legendre polynomials when m = 0 and on using eqn(1310), one obtains
P
l
( cos γ ) =
_
4 π
2 l + 1
_1
2
Y
l
0
(γ, 0) (1375)
The choice of the azimuthal angle as 0 is irrelevant, as m = 0. Hence, we have
a
l
m1
=
_
4 π
2 l + 1
_1
2
_
dΩ
1
Y
l
0
(γ, 0) Y
l
m1
(θ
1
, ϕ
1
)
∗
(1376)
The choice of the orientation of the axes is irrelevant, as the integration over dΩ
1
runs over all 4π solid angle. We shall choose the direction (θ
2
, ϕ
2
) as our polar
axis. In this case, we need to reexpress the spherical harmonic Y
l
m1
(θ
1
, ϕ
1
) in
terms of our new variable of integration
Y
l
m1
(θ
1
, ϕ
1
)
∗
=
m2
b
l
m2
∗
Y
l
m2
(γ, 0)
∗
(1377)
where, as we are dealing with an eigenfunction of the scalar magnitude of the
angular momentum with eigenvalue governed by l, the eigenvalue l is completely
unaltered by a diﬀerent choice of Cartesian coordinates. Thus,
a
l
m1
=
_
4 π
2 l + 1
_1
2
m2
_
dΩ
γ
Y
l
0
(γ, 0) b
l
m2
∗
Y
l
m2
(γ, 0)
∗
=
_
4 π
2 l + 1
_1
2
m2
b
l
m2
∗
δ
m2,0
=
_
4 π
2 l + 1
_1
2
b
l
0
∗
(1378)
where we have used the orthogonality property of the spherical harmonics.
Therefore, we see that the coeﬃcients a
l
m
which appear in the Laplace ex
pansion are related to only one nonzero coeﬃcient b
l
0
in their expansion given
306
by eqn(1377). The coeﬃcient b
l
0
can be obtained directly when γ = 0 as the
expansion only contains the one term
Y
l
m1
(θ
1
, ϕ
1
)
∗
= b
l
0
∗
Y
l
0
(0, 0)
∗
= b
l
0
∗
_
2 l + 1
4 π
_1
2
(1379)
since the spherical harmonics with m ,= 0 vanish when γ = 0. In the above equa
tion the variables (θ
1
, ϕ
1
) take on the ﬁxed numerical values (θ
2
, ϕ
2
), because
γ ≡ 0. Hence,
b
l
0
∗
=
_
4 π
2 l + 1
_1
2
Y
l
m1
(θ
2
, ϕ
2
)
∗
(1380)
Inserting this into eqn(1378), we have
a
l
m1
=
_
4 π
2 l + 1
_
Y
l
m1
(θ
2
, ϕ
2
)
∗
(1381)
On substituting the coeﬃcient a
l
m1
back into the Laplace series expansion, one
has
P
l
( cos γ ) =
4 π
2 l + 1
m1=l
m1=−l
Y
l
m1
(θ
1
, ϕ
1
) Y
l
m1
(θ
2
, ϕ
2
)
∗
(1382)
This concludes the proof of the Addition Theorem for Spherical Harmonics.
4.5.19 FiniteDimensional Representations
One can ﬁnd a representation of the angular momentum operators
ˆ
L
i
within
the manifold of eigenstates of
´
L
2
with the eigenvalue λ
l
. The states are to
be represented by column vectors. Since the eigenvalues are ( 2 l + 1 ) fold
degenerate, the space is spanned by unit column vectors with ( 2 l + 1 ) rows.
Any arbitrary column vector can be expressed as a linear superposition of the
( 2 l + 1 ) basis column vectors. The angular momentum operators act on the
states, and transform the states into other states. The rules of transformation
correspond to the laws of matrix multiplication, in which the operators are
( 2 l + 1 ) ( 2 l + 1 ) dimensional square matrices. For convenience, the
basis states may be taken to be the ( 2 l + 1 ) eigenstates of
ˆ
L
z
. For deﬁniteness,
we shall restrict our discussion to l = 1. The three basis eigenstates may be
represented by the unit column vectors;
Y
1
1
=
_
1
0
0
_
(1383)
with eigenvalue + ¯h,
Y
1
0
=
_
0
1
0
_
(1384)
307
with eigenvalue 0, and
Y
1
−1
=
_
0
0
1
_
(1385)
with eigenvalue − ¯h. Any arbitrary state Ψ with eigenvalue λ
l
can be expressed
as the linear superposition of the basis states via
Ψ =
m=1
m=−1
Ψ
m
Y
l
m
(1386)
in which Ψ
m
are the expansion coeﬃcients. This equation can be expressed
more concretely as
_
Ψ
1
Ψ
0
Ψ
−1
_
= Ψ
1
_
1
0
0
_
+ Ψ
0
_
0
1
0
_
+ Ψ
−1
_
0
0
1
_
(1387)
The inner product of two states Ψ and Φ is deﬁned to be a complex number,
obtained via
Φ
†
Ψ =
m=1
m=−1
Φ
∗
m
Ψ
m
(1388)
The inner product is a generalization of the scalar product to arbitrary dimen
sional (in this case ( 2 l + 1 ) dimensional) column matrices with complex
components. It involves a row vector Φ
†
which is the complex conjugate and
transpose of the column vector Φ. In general, it is convenient to label the com
ponents of the basis vectors by an abstract index i, instead of the quantum
number m which corresponds to the z component of angular momentum. We
shall use this more general labelling below. The inner product is just the result
of the matrix multiplication of the row matrix Φ
†
with the column matrix Ψ,
i.e.,
Φ
†
Ψ =
_
Φ
∗
1
Φ
∗
2
Φ
∗
3
_
_
Ψ
1
Ψ
2
Ψ
3
_
(1389)
where we are labelling the three components of our states Φ and Ψ by the index
i. We shall assume that our states Ψ are normalized to unity, that is, we require
Ψ
†
Ψ =
3
i=1
Ψ
∗
i
Ψ
i
= 1 (1390)
This just corresponds to the condition that the sum over all possibilities yields
a probability of unity.
The eﬀect of an operator
ˆ
A on a state Ψ transforms it into another state Φ,
according to the laws of matrix multiplication
Φ =
ˆ
A Ψ (1391)
308
where
ˆ
A is a three by three matrix. More concretely, the action of the operator
is given by
_
Φ
1
Φ
2
Φ
3
_
=
_
A
1,1
A
1,2
A
1,3
A
2,1
A
2,2
A
2,3
A
3,1
A
3,2
A
3,3
_ _
Ψ
1
Ψ
2
Ψ
3
_
(1392)
which results in the state Φ having the components
Φ
i
=
j=3
j=1
A
i,j
Ψ
j
(1393)
The operator
ˆ
A is speciﬁed by specifying the matrix elements A
i,j
. Operators
represented by matrices can be compounded by the laws of matrix addition
and multiplication. Matrix multiplication is generally noncommutative, and is
suitable for representing noncommuting operators.
The Hermitean conjugate of the operator is deﬁned by the equation
_
Φ
†
ˆ
A Ψ
_
∗
= Ψ
†
ˆ
A
†
Φ (1394)
which must be true for any arbitrary states Φ and Ψ. From this, one can see
that the Hermitean conjugate of a matrix is just the complex conjugate of the
transposed matrix. Thus, if the matrix
ˆ
A has matrix elements A
i,j
, then the
Hermitean conjugate
ˆ
A
†
has matrix elements given by A
∗
j,i
. A Hermitean ma
trix is deﬁned to be a matrix for which
ˆ
A =
ˆ
A
†
.
Since the basis states are eigenfunctions of the operator
ˆ
L
z
, one has
ˆ
L
z
Y
1
m
= m ¯h Y
1
m
(1395)
The three linear equations can be trivially interpreted as a matrix equation, in
which the operator
ˆ
L
z
is diagonal in the chosen basis. Thus, one can represent
the operator
ˆ
L
z
by the diagonal three by three matrix
ˆ
L
z
= ¯ h
_
1 0 0
0 0 0
0 0 − 1
_
(1396)
where the diagonal matrix elements are just the eigenvalues of
ˆ
L
z
. The eﬀect
of the raising operator
ˆ
L
+
on the basis states is to raise the angular momentum
according to the law
ˆ
L
+
Y
l
m
= ¯ h
_
( l − m ) ( l + m + 1 ) Y
l
m+1
(1397)
Since the eﬀect of
ˆ
L
+
on the state with maximal m, m = + 1, is to produce
zero, one has one trivial and two nontrivial algebraic equations, which can be
309
used to represent the raising operator as
ˆ
L
+
= ¯ h
_
0
√
2 0
0 0
√
2
0 0 0
_
(1398)
Likewise, from considering the equation
ˆ
L
−
Y
l
m
= ¯ h
_
( l + m ) ( l − m + 1 ) Y
l
m−1
(1399)
one can construct a representation of the lowering operator as
ˆ
L
−
= ¯ h
_
0 0 0
√
2 0 0
0
√
2 0
_
(1400)
The x and y components of the angular momentum are found from the deﬁni
tions
ˆ
L
±
=
ˆ
L
x
± i
ˆ
L
y
(1401)
as
ˆ
L
x
=
1
2
(
ˆ
L
+
+
ˆ
L
−
) (1402)
and
ˆ
L
y
=
1
2 i
(
ˆ
L
+
−
ˆ
L
−
) (1403)
From which, one has
ˆ
L
x
=
¯h
√
2
_
0 1 0
1 0 1
0 1 0
_
(1404)
and
ˆ
L
y
=
¯h
√
2
_
0 − i 0
i 0 − i
0 i 0
_
(1405)
It can be shown that these matrices, when compounded according to the laws
of matrix multiplication and addition, satisfy the commutation relations
[
ˆ
L
i
,
ˆ
L
j
] = i ¯h
k
i,j,k
ˆ
L
k
(1406)
where
i,j,k
is the antisymmetric LeviCivita symbol. The antisymmetric Levi
Civita symbol is deﬁned so that
i,j,k
= 1 if i, j, k correspond to an even number
of permutations of x, y, z, or is − 1, if i, j, k corresponds to an odd permutation
of x, y, z. Otherwise,
i,j,k
= 0, when one or more index is repeated. Fur
thermore, since the Hermitean conjugate of the operator just corresponds to
the complex conjugate of the transposed matrix, we see that the components
ˆ
L
k
not only satisfy the angular momentum commutation relations, but are also
310
Hermitean operators.
It can then be easily shown that the operator
´
L
2
=
ˆ
L
2
x
+
ˆ
L
2
y
+
ˆ
L
2
z
(1407)
is a diagonal matrix, with nonzero matrix elements λ
l
= 1 ( 1 +1 ) ¯ h
2
. This
is as expected, since the basis states are all eigenstates of the magnitude of the
angular momentum. Hence, we have
´
L
2
= 2 ¯h
2
_
1 0 0
0 1 0
0 0 1
_
(1408)
Since the operator corresponding to the magnitude of the angular momentum is
proportional to the unit operator, it commutes with all the components of the
angular momentum
ˆ
L
i
. The operator
´
L
2
is sometimes referred to as a Casimir
operator.
——————————————————————————————————
4.5.20 Exercise 83
Evaluate the commutators of the three by three matrices representing the com
ponents of the angular momentum, and show that they satisfy the commutation
relations, such as,
[
ˆ
L
x
,
ˆ
L
y
] = i ¯h
ˆ
L
z
(1409)
Also evaluate the matrix corresponding to the square of the angular momentum
´
L
2
and show that it commutes with the various components of
ˆ
L, and ﬁnd the
eigenvalues of
´
L
2
.
——————————————————————————————————
4.5.21 Exercise 84
Find the eigenvalues and eigenvectors of the component of the angular momen
tum along the unit vector ˆ η, where
ˆ η = sin θ cos ϕ ˆ e
x
+ sin θ sin ϕ ˆ e
y
+ cos θ ˆ e
z
(1410)
Work in the space of l = 1 with the basis in which
ˆ
L
z
is diagonal.
Hence, ﬁnd the unitary matrix
ˆ
U
ˆ e
(θ) which produces a rotation of the states
through an angle θ, about the axis
ˆ e = − sin ϕ ˆ e
x
+ cos ϕ ˆ e
y
(1411)
311
The operator
ˆ
U
ˆ e
(θ) should bring the eigenstates of
ˆ
L
z
into coincidence with the
eigenstates of
ˆ
L
ˆ η
. It is also required that
ˆ
U
ˆ e
(θ) does not transform the eigen
states of
ˆ
L
ˆ e
.
——————————————————————————————————
4.5.22 Solution 84
We seek the eigenvalues and eigenfunctions of the operator
η .
ˆ
L = sin θ cos ϕ
ˆ
L
x
+ sin θ sin ϕ
ˆ
L
y
+ cos θ
ˆ
L
z
(1412)
which has the matrix representation
η .
ˆ
L = ¯ h
_
_
_
cos θ
1
√
2
sin θ exp[ − i ϕ ] 0
1
√
2
sin θ exp[ + i ϕ ] 0
1
√
2
sin θ exp[ − i ϕ ]
0
1
√
2
sin θ exp[ + i ϕ ] − cos θ
_
_
_
(1413)
in the basis where
ˆ
L
z
is diagonal. The eigenvalues µ ¯h are determined from the
secular equation
0 =
¸
¸
¸
¸
¸
cos θ − µ
1
√
2
sin θ exp[ − i ϕ ] 0
1
√
2
sin θ exp[ + i ϕ ] − µ
1
√
2
sin θ exp[ − i ϕ ]
0
1
√
2
sin θ exp[ + i ϕ ] − cos θ − µ
¸
¸
¸
¸
¸
(1414)
and, thus, are found to be µ = 0 , ± ¯h. The eigenfunction Y
η
µ
corresponding
to the eigenvalue µ, are denoted by
Y
η
µ
=
_
_
α
η
µ
β
η
µ
γ
η
µ
_
_
(1415)
The components of the µ = 0 eigenfunction are found from the eigenvalue
equation
_
_
0
0
0
_
_
=
_
_
√
2 cos θ sin θ exp[ − i ϕ ] 0
sin θ exp[ + i ϕ ] 0 sin θ exp[ − i ϕ ]
0 sin θ exp[ + i ϕ ] −
√
2 cos θ
_
_
_
_
α
η
0
β
η
0
γ
η
0
_
_
(1416)
Thus, the normalized eigenfunction of the operator in eqn(1412) corresponding
to the zero eigenvalue is found as
Y
η
0
=
1
√
2
_
_
− sin θ exp[ − i ϕ ]
√
2 cos θ
sin θ exp[ + i ϕ ]
_
_
(1417)
312
Likewise, one ﬁnds the eigenfunction corresponding to µ = + 1 is given by
Y
η
1
=
1
2
_
_
( 1 + cos θ ) exp[ − i ϕ ]
√
2 sin θ
( 1 − cos θ ) exp[ + i ϕ ]
_
_
(1418)
and the eigenfunction corresponding to µ = − 1 is found as
Y
η
−1
=
1
2
_
_
( 1 − cos θ ) exp[ − i ϕ ]
−
√
2 sin θ
( 1 + cos θ ) exp[ + i ϕ ]
_
_
(1419)
The phases of the eigenfunctions are completely arbitrary.
The required rotation is about an axis in the plane perpendicular to the unit
vectors ˆ e
z
and ˆ e
η
. Since the rotation is speciﬁed by three parameters (the axis
of the rotation and the angle of rotation), the transformation matrix contains
three parameters that have to be determined. The rotation matrix
ˆ
U
ˆ e
(θ) is
partly determined from its action on the eigenstates of
ˆ
L
z
Y
η
µ
=
ˆ
U
ˆ e
(θ) Y
z
µ
(1420)
There is also the subsidiary requirement that the component of the spins along
the rotation axis are unaﬀected, which means that the eigenstates of
ˆ
L
e
should
be mapped onto themselves. Thus, we have
_
_
α
η
µ
β
η
µ
γ
η
µ
_
_
=
1
2
_
_
( 1 + cos θ ) exp[ − i ϕ ] −
√
2 sin θ exp[ − i ϕ ] ( 1 − cos θ ) exp[ − i ϕ ]
√
2 sin θ 2 cos θ −
√
2 sin θ
( 1 − cos θ ) exp[ + i ϕ ]
√
2 sin θ exp[ + i ϕ ] ( 1 + cos θ ) exp[ + i ϕ ]
_
_
_
_
α
z
µ
β
z
µ
γ
z
µ
_
_
(1421)
The columns of the transformation matrix
ˆ
U
e
(ϕ) are the eigenvectors that we
have just found. The phases of the columns can be altered to ﬁt our require
ment that a state with angular momentum directed along the axis of rotation ˆ e
remains unchanged (apart from an over all phase factor). The phase factors of
the Y
η
µ
are chosen as exp[ i µ ϕ ] so that the diagonal elements of the unitary
transformation are real
17
. This choice of phase factors produces the desired
rotation since the eigenstates of
ˆ
L
e
are unchanged by it. More precisely, under
17
The change of phase can be understood as being the result of a rotation through ϕ about
the ˆ η axis
313
this transformation, the eigenstates of
ˆ
L
e
only change by a θ dependent phase
factor. Also, with the above choice of phase, the eigenstates Y
z
µ
are completely
unaﬀected by the transformation, if the angle of rotation θ is set to zero.
The above result can be rewritten as follows. On recognizing that the
component of the angular momentum operator parallel to the axis of rotation
is given by
_
ˆ e .
ˆ
L
_
=
¯h
√
2
_
_
0 − i exp[ − i ϕ ] 0
i exp[ + i ϕ ] 0 − i exp[ − i ϕ ]
0 i exp[ + i ϕ ] 0
_
_
(1422)
and that the square is given by
_
ˆ e .
ˆ
L
_
2
=
¯h
2
2
_
_
1 0 − exp[ − 2 i ϕ ]
0 2 0
− exp[ + 2 i ϕ ] 0 1
_
_
(1423)
we ﬁnd that the rotation operator may be written in the form
ˆ
U
ˆ e
(θ) =
ˆ
1 +
_
cos θ − 1
_ _
ˆ e .
ˆ
L
¯h
_
2
− i sin θ
_
ˆ e .
ˆ
L
¯h
_
(1424)
This is an example of Cayley’s theorem, as the rotation about the axis ˆ e can be
written as the exponential of a matrix
ˆ
U
ˆ e
(θ) = exp
_
−
i
¯h
θ ( ˆ e .
ˆ
L )
_
(1425)
——————————————————————————————————
The angular momentum operator corresponding to larger l values can also
be constructed by the same method, but with a larger number of basis states.
In particular, one requires ( 2 l + 1 ) basis states to span the space with total
angular momentum l. In fact, almost any operator can be represented by a
N N square matrix acting on a Ndimensional column vector, however, this
is only useful for bases where the dimension N is ﬁnite.
4.5.23 The Laplacian Operator
The magnitude of the angular momentum can be expressed in terms of the
Laplacian by using the vector identity
_
A ∧ B
_
.
_
C ∧ D
_
=
_
A . C
_ _
B . D
_
−
_
A . D
_ _
B . C
_
(1426)
314
which, for our operators, can be adapted as
´
L
2
= ( r ∧ ˆ p ) . ( r ∧ ˆ p )
= − ( r ∧ ˆ p ) . ( ˆ p ∧ ˆ r )
= − r .
_
ˆ p ( ˆ p . r ) − ˆ p
2
r
_
(1427)
In manipulating the expression for the square of the angular momentum, one
has to carefully respect the ordering of ˆr and ˆ p. In the second line we have used
the identity
r ∧ ˆ p = − ˆ p ∧ r (1428)
which is valid because the diﬀerent components of the position and angular
momentum commute. The last term in eqn(1427) can be written in terms of
r
2
ˆ p
2
by using the commutator
[ r , ˆ p
2
] = 2 i ¯h ˆ p (1429)
Also the ﬁrst term in eqn(1427) can be rewritten by using the commutator
ˆ p . r − r . ˆ p = − 3 i ¯h (1430)
in the last factor. Hence, we obtain
´
L
2
= r
2
ˆ p
2
+ i ¯h r . ˆ p − ( r . ˆ p ) ( r . ˆ p ) (1431)
The term r . ˆ p is evaluated as
r . ˆ p = − i ¯h r
∂
∂r
(1432)
Putting these together, we ﬁnd that the square of the angular momentum is
given by
´
L
2
= r
2
ˆ p
2
+ ¯h
2
∂
∂r
_
r
2
∂
∂r
_
(1433)
Thus, we ﬁnd that the Laplacian operator is expressed in terms of the angular
momentum by
ˆ p
2
=
´
L
2
r
2
−
¯h
2
r
2
∂
∂r
_
r
2
∂
∂r
_
(1434)
This results in the usual expression for the kinetic energy in spherical polar
coordinates
ˆ
T =
ˆ p
2
2 m
=
´
L
2
2 m
−
¯h
2
2 m r
2
∂
∂r
_
r
2
∂
∂r
_
(1435)
315
4.5.24 An Excursion into dDimensional Space
As angular momentum is associated with a rotation in a twodimensional plane
and since in d dimensions there is no unique normal to a twodimensional plane,
the angular momentum is not a vector. The angular momentum is a twoform
and has d(d − 1)/2 components that are labelled by two indices denoting the
plane of rotation
18
. In a Cartesian coordinate system, the components of
ˆ
L
j,k
are deﬁned via
ˆ
L
j,k
= − i ¯h
_
x
j
∂
∂x
k
− x
k
∂
∂x
j
_
(1436)
The quantity
ˆ
L
j,k
is antisymmetric in the indices j and k. The square of the
angular momentum no longer has a simple geometric signiﬁcance, but is still
deﬁned as the operator
´
L
2
=
d
j>k
ˆ
L
2
j,k
= − ¯h
2
d
j>k
_
x
j
∂
∂x
k
− x
k
∂
∂x
j
_
2
(1437)
The above form can be expanded as
´
L
2
= − ¯h
2
d
j,k
_
x
2
j
∂
2
∂x
2
k
− x
j
x
k
∂
∂x
j
∂
∂x
k
_
+ ( d − 1 ) ¯h
2
d
j=1
x
j
∂
∂x
j
= r
2
ˆ p
2
+ ¯h
2
d
j,k
x
j
x
k
∂
∂x
j
∂
∂x
k
+ ( d − 1 ) ¯ h
2
d
j=1
x
j
∂
∂x
j
(1438)
where the radius is deﬁned by the ddimensional version of the Pythagorean
theorem
r
2
=
d
j=1
x
2
j
(1439)
A point in a ddimensional space can be described by hyperspherical polar co
ordinates involving the hyperradius r and (d−1) angle variables (θ
1
, . . . , θ
d−1
).
The hyperspherical polar coordinates are related to the Cartesian coordinates
via the set of equations
x
d
= r cos θ
d−1
x
d−1
= r sin θ
d−1
cos θ
d−2
x
d−2
= r sin θ
d−1
sin θ
d−2
cos θ
d−3
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
x
2
= r sin θ
d−1
sin θ
d−2
. . . sin θ
2
cos θ
1
x
1
= r sin θ
d−1
sin θ
d−2
. . . sin θ
2
sin θ
1
(1440)
18
In three dimensions, the angular momentum is an antisymmetric second rank tensor that
is only masquerading as a vector.
316
The set of equations can be written symbolically as
x
j
= r f
j
(¦θ
i
¦) (1441)
Hence, we can evaluated the partial derivative w.r.t. r as
_
∂
∂r
_
{θi}
=
j
_
∂x
j
∂r
_
{θi}
∂
∂x
j
=
j
_
f
j
(¦θ
i
¦)
_
∂
∂x
j
=
j
_
x
j
r
_
∂
∂x
j
(1442)
and the second derivative is evaluated as
_
∂
2
∂r
2
_
{θi}
=
j,k
_
∂x
j
∂r
_
{θi}
∂
∂x
j
_
∂x
k
∂r
_
{θi}
∂
∂x
k
=
j,k
_
f
j
(¦θ
i
¦)
_ _
f
k
(¦θ
i
¦)
_
∂
∂x
j
∂
∂x
k
=
j,k
x
j
x
k
r
2
∂
∂x
j
∂
∂x
k
(1443)
Hence, we ﬁnd that the magnitude of the angular momentum is related to the
magnitude the momentum and some radial derivatives
´
L
2
= r
2
ˆ p
2
+ ¯h
2
r
2
∂
2
∂r
2
+ ( d − 1 ) ¯ h
2
r
∂
∂r
(1444)
or
ˆ p
2
= − ¯h
2
1
r
d−1
∂
∂r
_
r
d−1
∂
∂r
_
+
´
L
2
r
2
(1445)
This equation can be used to express the kinetic energy in terms of the angular
momentum in situations where there is spherical symmetry. The above identity
reduces to the usual expression found when d = 3.
The eigenvalues of the angular momentum are the hyperspherical harmon
ics. Harmonic functions h
λ
µ
are deﬁned as homogeneous polynomials of order λ
(homogeneous polynomials in the Cartesian coordinates) that satisfy Laplace’s
equation
∇
2
h
λ
µ
= 0 (1446)
The hyperspherical harmonics Y
λ
µ
with angular momentum λ can be expressed
in terms of the complete set of harmonic functions of order λ via
r
λ
Y
λ
µ
=
ν
C
µ,ν
h
λ
ν
(1447)
317
where the C
µ,ν
are expansion coeﬃcients
19
. The above equation implies that
the hyperspherical harmonics only depend on the direction of the vector x.
Operating with ˆ p
2
on r
λ
Y
λ
µ
yields
ˆ p
2
r
λ
Y
λ
µ
= 0 (1448)
since r
λ
Y
λ
µ
is a combination of harmonic functions. Furthermore, the above
equation together with eqn(1445) implies that
_
− ¯h
2
1
r
d−1
∂
∂r
_
r
d−1
∂
∂r
_
+
´
L
2
r
2
_
r
λ
Y
λ
µ
= 0 (1449)
Since the Y
λ
µ
only depend on the set of angles ¦θ
i
¦ and do not depend on r, we
ﬁnd that the above equation reduces to
´
L
2
Y
λ
µ
= ¯ h
2
λ ( λ + d −2 ) Y
λ
µ
(1450)
Thus, the hyperspherical harmonics Y
λ
µ
are eigenfunctions
´
L
2
and the eigen
values are ¯ h
2
λ ( λ + d −2 ). The eigenvalue equation reduces to the standard
eigenvalue equation in three dimensions.
——————————————————————————————————
4.5.25 Exercise 85
Show that the radial momentum p
r
, which in classical mechanics is deﬁned by
p
r
=
1
r
( r . p ) (1451)
must be represented by the symmetrized form
p
r
=
1
2
_
1
r
( r . p ) + ( p . r )
1
r
_
(1452)
in order to yield the Hermitean operator
ˆ p
r
= − i ¯h
_
∂
∂r
+
1
r
_
(1453)
Show that in d dimensions this leads to the expression
ˆ p
r
= − i ¯h
_
∂
∂r
+
d − 1
2 r
_
(1454)
which is a Hermitean operator.
——————————————————————————————————
19
The expansion coeﬃcients Cµ,ν are dependent on the choice of the set of basis functions
h
λ
µ
, the choice of the set of quantum numbers µ and an overall phase factor.
318
4.5.26 Solution 85
The quantum operator corresponding to the unsymmetrized form of the clas
sical radial momentum is found from
1
r
( r . ˆ p ) =
1
r
( r ˆ e
r
. ˆ p )
= − i ¯h
1
r
_
r ˆ e
r
. ∇
_
= − i ¯h
1
r
_
r
∂
∂r
_
= − i ¯h
∂
∂r
(1455)
where we have used the expression for ∇ in ddimensional spherical polar coor
dinates
∇ = ˆ e
r
∂
∂r
+ ˆ e
θ1
1
r
∂
∂θ
1
+ ˆ e
θ2
1
r sin θ
1
∂
∂θ
2
+ . . . + ˆ e
θ
d
1
r sin θ
1
. . . sin θ
d−2
∂
∂θ
d−1
= ˆ e
r
∂
∂r
+
d−1
i=1
1
r h
i
ˆ e
θi
∂
∂θ
i
(1456)
In this expression, we have introduced the unit vectors ˆ e
θi
in the orthogonal
directions deﬁned by
ˆ e
θi
=
1
h
i
∂
∂θ
i
ˆ e
r
(1457)
and the product h
i
of the dimensionless angular factors
h
i
=
i−1
j=1
_
sin θ
j
_
(1458)
This operator is not Hermitean, as can be seen by constructing the Her
mitean conjugate. The Hermitean conjugate is evaluated by considering the
eﬀect of the matrix elements with two diﬀerent arbitrary but normalizable ra
dial wave functions R
n
(r) and R
m
(r),
_
∞
0
dr r
d−1
R
∗
m
(r)
_
− i ¯h
∂
∂r
_
R
n
(r) (1459)
The factor r
d−1
represents the r dependence of the surface area of a ddimensional
sphere, and dr r
d−1
is proportional to the volume of an inﬁnitesimal shell of
thickness dr. By integration by parts, and using the fact that the wave functions
are normalizable to eliminate the boundary terms, one obtains the result
=
_
∞
0
dr R
n
(r)
_
+ i ¯h
∂
∂r
_
r
d−1
R
∗
m
(r)
319
=
_
∞
0
dr r
d−1
R
n
(r)
_
+ i ¯h
∂
∂r
+ i ¯h
d − 1
r
_
R
∗
m
(r)
(1460)
On using the deﬁnition of the Hermitean conjugate, one identiﬁes the Hermitean
conjugate operator as
_
1
r
( r ˆ e
r
. ˆ p )
_
†
= − i ¯h
_
∂
∂r
+
d − 1
r
_
(1461)
The symmetric partner
( p . r )
1
r
(1462)
is quantized as
_
ˆ p . r
_
1
r
= − i ¯h
_
∇ . r ˆ e
r
_
1
r
= − i ¯h
_
∇ . ˆ e
r
_
= − i ¯h
∂
∂r
− i ¯h
d−1
i=1
1
r h
i
ˆ e
θi
.
_
∂
∂θ
i
ˆ e
r
_
(1463)
The factor of r cancels with
1
r
in the second line, as the diﬀerential operator
acts on both factors. In the last line, we have utilized the identity
∂
∂r
ˆ e
r
= 0 (1464)
The derivative of the unit vector ˆ e
r
with respect to the angle θ
i
is evaluated as
∂ˆ e
r
∂θ
i
= h
i
ˆ e
θi
(1465)
As the unit vectors are orthogonal, one has
( ˆ p . r )
1
r
= − i ¯h
∂
∂r
− i ¯h
d−1
i=1
1
r h
i
ˆ e
θi
.
_
∂
∂θ
i
ˆ e
r
_
= − i ¯h
∂
∂r
− i ¯h
d−1
i=1
1
r h
i
ˆ e
θi
.
d−1
j=1
h
j
ˆ e
θj
= − i ¯h
∂
∂r
− i ¯h
d−1
i=1
1
r h
i
d−1
j=1
h
j
δ
i−j
= − i ¯h
∂
∂r
− i ¯h
d−1
i=1
1
r
= − i ¯h
∂
∂r
− i ¯h
d − 1
r
(1466)
320
Hence, the quantized symmetric partner is equal to the Hermitean conjugate.
The Hermitean operator corresponding to the radial component of the mo
mentum is given by the Hermitean part of the operator
ˆ p
r
=
1
2
_
1
r
( r . ˆ p ) +
_
1
r
( r . ˆ p )
_
†
_
=
1
2
_
1
r
( r . ˆ p ) + ( ˆ p . r )
1
r
_
= − i ¯h
_
∂
∂r
+
d − 1
2 r
_
(1467)
——————————————————————————————————
321
4.6 Spherically Symmetric Potentials
The Hamiltonian for a particle of mass m and charge q moving in a spherically
symmetric potential is given by
ˆ
H =
ˆ p
2
2 m
+ q φ(r) (1468)
where the potential φ(r) only depends on the radial coordinate r and is inde
pendent of (θ, ϕ). Since the Hamiltonian commutes with the orbital angular
momentum operator,
[
ˆ
H ,
ˆ
L ] = 0 (1469)
and, therefore, also commutes with the magnitude
[
ˆ
H ,
´
L
2
] = 0 (1470)
one may ﬁnd simultaneous eigenfunctions of
ˆ
H,
ˆ
L
z
and
´
L
2
. These eigenfunctions
must be of the separable form
Ψ
E,l,m
(r) = R
E,l
(r) Y
l
m
(θ, ϕ) (1471)
Thus, the energy eigenvalue equation becomes
_
−
¯h
2
2 m r
2
∂
∂r
_
r
2
∂
∂r
_
+
´
L
2
2 m r
2
+ q φ(r)
_
Ψ
E,l,m
(r) = E Ψ
E,l,m
(r)
(1472)
After substituting eqn(1471) in the above equation, and after using the fact that
Y
l
m
(θ, ϕ) is an eigenstate of L
2
, with eigenvalue ¯h
2
l ( l + 1 ), one ﬁnds that
the spherical harmonic is a common factor that can be cancelled. The radial
part of the wave function must satisfy the radial equation
_
−
¯h
2
2 m r
2
∂
∂r
_
r
2
∂
∂r
_
+
¯h
2
l ( l + 1 )
2 m r
2
+ q φ(r)
_
R
E,l
(r) = E R
E,l
(r)
(1473)
This is an ordinary diﬀerential equation, instead of a partial diﬀerential equa
tion, in which the centrifugal potential appears as an addition to the electrostatic
potential. The radial equation is independent of the azimuthal quantum num
ber m, and hence, so are the radial eigenfunctions and eigenvalues.
——————————————————————————————————
4.6.1 Exercise 86
A particle of mass m moves in a threedimensional spherically symmetric po
tential V (r) which vanishes at r → ∞. It has an eigenstate which is given
by
Φ(r) = C r
s
exp
_
− α r
_
sin
l
θ exp
_
i l ϕ
_
(1474)
322
Effective Radial Potential
0.4
0.2
0
0.2
0.4
0 5 10 15 20
r
V
e
f
f
(
r
)
l=0
l=1
l=2
V
eff
(r) = V(r) + ! !! !
2
l ( l + 1 ) / 2 m r
2
Centrifugal Barrier
Figure 80: The eﬀective radial potential V
eff
(r) is the sum of the potential V (r)
and the centrifugal potential.
What are the values of the angular momentum and energy quantum numbers
for this state? Find the potential V (r).
——————————————————————————————————
4.6.2 Solution 86
The state is an eigenstate of angular momentum with l = l and m = l. The
energy eigenvalue and the potential can be determined from
_
V (r) − E
_
Φ(r) =
¯h
2
2 m
∇
2
Φ(r) (1475)
where
∇
2
Φ(r) =
_
1
r
∂
2
∂r
2
r −
l ( l + 1 )
r
2
_
C r
s
exp
_
− α r
_
sin
l
θ exp
_
i l ϕ
_
=
_
α
2
− 2 α
( 1 + s )
r
+
s ( s + 1 ) − l ( l + 1 )
r
2
_
Φ(r)
(1476)
323
Thus, at r → ∞ where V (r) → 0, we ﬁnd
E = −
¯h
2
α
2
2 m
(1477)
and
V (r) =
¯h
2
2 m
_
( s − l ) ( s + l + 1 )
r
2
−
2 α ( 1 + s )
r
_
(1478)
——————————————————————————————————
4.6.3 The Free Particle
The free particle corresponds to the case of a vanishing electrostatic potential
φ(r) = 0. The timeindependent Schr¨odinger equation for the free particle
separates in spherical polar coordinates. The radial wave function is given by
the solution of
_
−
¯h
2
2 m r
2
∂
∂r
_
r
2
∂
∂r
_
+
¯h
2
l ( l + 1 )
2 m r
2
_
R
E,l
(r) = E R
E,l
(r)
(1479)
which, with ¯ h k =
√
2 m E, becomes
_
−
1
r
2
∂
∂r
_
r
2
∂
∂r
_
+
l ( l + 1 )
r
2
_
R
E,l
(r) = k
2
R
E,l
(r) (1480)
It is also useful to introduce a dimensionless variable ρ = k r to obtain the
scaled equation
_
−
1
ρ
2
∂
∂ρ
_
ρ
2
∂
∂ρ
_
+
l ( l + 1 )
ρ
2
_
R
E,l
(ρ/k) = R
E,l
(ρ/k) (1481)
This diﬀerential equation reduces to Bessel’s equation. This can be seen by
making the transformation
R
E,l
(r) =
y
l
(ρ)
√
ρ
(1482)
which leads to
d
2
y
l
d ρ
2
+
1
ρ
d y
l
dρ
+
_
1 −
( l +
1
2
)
2
ρ
2
_
y
l
= 0 (1483)
This is Bessel’s equation for halfinteger indices, and the solutions we seek are
proportional to the Bessel functions J
l+
1
2
(ρ). The Bessel functions are ﬁnite at
324
the origin ρ = 0. The solutions for R
E,l
are, therefore, known as the spherical
Bessel functions
R
E,l
(r) = j
l
(ρ) =
_
π
2
J
l+
1
2
(ρ)
√
ρ
(1484)
Equation (1481) actually has two independent solutions j
l
(z) and η
l
(z) which
are the spherical Bessel functions and the spherical Neumann functions. For
values of ρ close to the origin, the solutions have leading terms in the power
series expansion which vary as
R
l
(r) ∝ ρ
α
+ O(ρ
α+2
) (1485)
where α has to be determined. On substituting the leading term into the dif
ferential equation, and noting that the term of order unity can be neglected
compared with the centrifugal barrier near r = 0, one ﬁnds that the diﬀeren
tial equation reduces to
_
− α ( α + 1 ) + l ( l + 1 )
_
ρ
α−2
+ O(ρ
α
) = 0 (1486)
for small ρ. The values of α, for which this is satisﬁed, satisfy a quadratic
equation and are given by either of the solutions α = l or α = − ( l + 1 ).
The spherical Bessel functions j
l
(ρ) vary as ρ
l
close to the origin, which is a
consequence of the high centrifugal barrier that prevents classical particles with
ﬁxed l approaching the origin. The spherical Neumann functions η
l
(ρ) vary as
ρ
−(l+1)
as ρ → 0. The spherical Neumann functions are to be discarded as
r
2
[ R
E,l
(r) [
2
dr is proportional to the probability of ﬁnding a particle in the
interval dr at a radial distance r. The inclusion of the spherical Neumann func
tions would lead to the probability diverging like r
−2l
as r → 0. Therefore,
the spherical Neumann functions represent unphysical solutions near the origin.
Since the spherical Bessel functions and spherical Neumann functions play
an important role in the description of scattering by short ranged potentials, we
shall digress to examine the general properties of these functions in more detail.
The solution of equation(1481) with α = l, is the spherical Bessel function
j
l
(z), and can be written as
j
l
(z) = D z
l
_
+1
−1
ds exp[ i s z ] ( 1 − s
2
)
l
(1487)
where the usual normalization is given as
D
l
=
1
2
l+1
l!
(1488)
It can be shown that j
l
(z) satisﬁes the diﬀerential equation for R
l,E
by direct
substitution. We ﬁrst need to evaluate the various derivatives in the equation.
325
The ﬁrst derivative of j
l
(z) is given by
∂
∂z
j
l
(z) = D l z
l−1
_
+1
−1
ds exp[ i s z ] ( 1 − s
2
)
l
+ D i z
l
_
+1
−1
ds exp[ i s z ] s ( 1 − s
2
)
l
(1489)
and the second derivative is given by
∂
2
∂z
2
j
l
(z) = D l ( l − 1 ) z
l−2
_
+1
−1
ds exp[ i s z ] ( 1 − s
2
)
l
+ D 2 i l z
l−1
_
+1
−1
ds exp[ i s z ] s ( 1 − s
2
)
l
− D z
l
_
+1
−1
ds exp[ i s z ] s
2
( 1 − s
2
)
l
(1490)
On substituting in the diﬀerential equation number (1481) and collecting like
terms, after some cancellations, we ﬁnd
∂
2
∂z
2
j
l
(z) +
2
z
∂
∂z
j
l
(z) +
_
1 −
l ( l + 1 )
z
2
_
j
l
(z)
= D 2 i ( l + 1 ) z
l−1
_
+1
−1
ds exp[ i s z ] s ( 1 − s
2
)
l
+ D z
l
_
+1
−1
ds exp[ i s z ] ( 1 − s
2
)
l+1
= − D i z
l−1
_
+1
−1
ds exp[ i s z ]
d
ds
( 1 − s
2
)
l+1
+ D z
l
_
+1
−1
ds exp[ i s z ] ( 1 − s
2
)
l+1
(1491)
In the last expression, we have rewritten the integrand in the ﬁrst term as a dif
ferential with respect to s. On integrating by parts in the ﬁrst term, and noting
the boundary term is zero, we ﬁnd that the right hand side of the diﬀerential
equation is given by
= − D z
l
_
+1
−1
ds exp[ i s z ] ( 1 − s
2
)
l+1
+ D z
l
_
+1
−1
ds exp[ i s z ] ( 1 − s
2
)
l+1
= 0 (1492)
Thus, j
l
(z) satisﬁes the radial diﬀerential equation.
326
From the above integral representation expression for, j
l
and its derivative,
we can easily verify that the recursion relation
j
l+1
(z) =
l
z
j
l
(z) −
∂
∂z
j
l
(z) (1493)
holds true. A second useful recursion relation that can be derived is
( 2 l + 1 )
∂
∂z
j
l
(z) = l j
l−1
(z) − ( l + 1 ) j
l+1
(z) (1494)
A second solution η
l
(z) is given by the integral
η
l
(z) = C
1
z
l+1
_
+1
−1
ds exp[ i s z ]
1
( 1 − s
2
)
l+1
(1495)
since the diﬀerential equation is invariant under the transformation l → − ( l +
1 ).
From the integral expressions for j
l
(z) and η
l
(z), one can show that the
spherical Bessel functions are regular at the origin
lim
z → 0
j
l
(z) ∼
2
l
l!
( 2 l + 1 )!
z
l
(1496)
while the spherical Neumann functions are divergent at the origin,
lim
z → 0
η
l
(z) ∼ −
( 2 l )!
2
l
l!
z
−(l+1)
(1497)
The asymptotic large z variation of the spherical Bessel function is found
from the integral representation
j
l
(z) =
z
l
2
l+1
l!
_
+1
−1
ds exp[ i s z ] ( 1 − s
2
)
l
(1498)
by integrating by parts l times. Each integration by parts reduces the power of
the mononomial in z in front of the integral by unity, yielding
j
l
(z) =
i
l
2
l+1
l!
_
+1
−1
ds exp[ i s z ]
_
d
ds
_
l
( 1 − s
2
)
l
(1499)
since the boundary terms all vanish. The vanishing of the boundary terms occurs
as there are more factors of ( 1 − s
2
) than there are derivatives with respect to
s. However, on further integration by parts, the higher order derivatives remain
nonzero at the boundaries s = ± 1. Repeated integration by parts yields an
327
expansion where the nonzero terms are ordered in increasing powers of z
−1
.
The ﬁrst nonzero term in the asymptotic expansion is given by
j
l
(z) ∼ −
i
l+1
2
l+1
l! z
exp[ i s z ]
_
d
ds
_
l
( 1 − s
2
)
l
¸
¸
¸
¸
s=+1
s=−1
+ O(z
−2
) (1500)
Thus, the leading term in the asymptotic large z expansion is given by
lim
z → ∞
j
l
(z) ∼
cos[ z − ( l + 1 )
π
2
]
z
(1501)
The asymptotic expansion for the spherical Neumann function is given by an
analogous expression which is most easily found from eqn(1501) via the substi
tution l → − ( l + 1 ), and is given by
lim
z → ∞
η
l
(z) ∼
sin[ z − ( l + 1 )
π
2
]
z
(1502)
The explicit forms of the ﬁrst few spherical Bessel and Neumann functions are
given in Table(5).
The eigenfunctions for the free particle have to be square integrable over
any ﬁnite volume of space, as the integral of the modulus squared of the wave
function represents the probability that a particle is found in the volume. Since
only the spherical Bessel functions are integrable over the region near the ori
gin, they can represent physical wave functions near the origin. The spherical
Neumann functions have to be discarded near the origin.
The orthogonality condition for the spherical Bessel functions is given by
_
∞
0
dr r
2
j
l
(kr) j
l
(k
r) =
π
2 k
2
δ( k − k
) (1503)
The normalization condition corresponds to the continuous eigenvalue spectrum
associated with the delocalized wave functions. As the wave functions are pro
portional to the spherical harmonics, they are orthogonal for diﬀerent values of
l. Therefore, we only require that the Bessel functions with the same values of
l but diﬀerent energy eigenvalues are orthogonal.
The solution of the free particle energy eigenvalue equation, with angular
momentum l, also has uses in cases where there is a spherically symmetric
potential φ(r) which is short ranged. In this case, the energy eigenvalue equation
can be separated into radial and angular parts
Ψ(r, θ, ϕ) = R
l,k
(r) Y
l
m
(θ, ϕ) (1504)
since the potential is spherically symmetric. The wave functions of the spatially
extended states with energy eigenvalues E
k
> 0 have asymptotic large r
328
Table 5: The Spherical Bessel j
l
(z) and Neumann η
l
(z) Functions.
l j
l
(z)
l = 0 j
0
(z)
sin z
z
l = 1 j
1
(z)
sin z − z cos z
z
2
l = 2 j
2
(z)
( 3 − z
2
) sin z − 3 z cos z
z
3
l = 3 j
3
(z)
( 15 − 6 z
2
) sin z − ( 15 z − z
3
) cos z
z
4
l η
l
(z)
l = 0 η
0
(z) −
cos z
z
l = 1 η
1
(z) −
cos z + z sin z
z
2
l = 2 η
2
(z) −
( 3 − z
2
) cos z + 3 z sin z
z
3
l = 3 η
3
(z) −
( 15 − 6 z
2
) cos z + ( 15 z − z
3
) sin z
z
4
329
Spherical Bessel Functions
0.4
0.2
0
0.2
0.4
0.6
0.8
1
1.2
0 2 4 6 8 10 12
j
1
(x)
j
0
(x)
j
2
(x)
Figure 81: The spherical Bessel functions j
l
(z) as a function of z for various l.
limits which are expressible as linear superpositions of the spherical Bessel and
Neumann functions, since φ(r) ≈ 0 in this region. Thus,
R
l,k
(r) = A
l
j
l
(kr) + B
l
η
l
(kr) (1505)
The ratio of the amplitude of the two terms contains information about the short
ranged potential, and is usually expressed in terms of the phase shift δ
l
(k),
B
l
A
l
= − tan δ
l
(k) (1506)
On using this deﬁnition of the phase shift, and the asymptotic large r forms
of the spherical Bessel and Neumann functions, one ﬁnds that the asymptotic
form of the radial wave function is given by
R
l,k
(r) ∼
A
l
cos δ
l
(k)
sin
_
k r −
l π
2
+ δ
l
(k)
_
k r
(1507)
Hence, the large r form of the radial wave function resembles that of a free par
ticle. The main diﬀerence is that the phase of the radial oscillations is shifted
by δ
l
(k).
The normalization of the extended states, for an arbitrary short ranged
potential, can be inferred from the asymptotic large r behavior. This can be
330
Spherical Neumann Functions
0.4
0.3
0.2
0.1
0
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0 2 4 6 8 10 12
x
η
1
(x)
η
2
(x)
η
0
(x)
Figure 82: The spherical Neumann functions η
l
(z) as a function of z for various
l. The spherical Neumann functions diverge at the origin.
shown by rewriting radial part of the energy eigenvalue equation in the alternate
form
1
r
∂
2
∂r
2
_
r R
l,k
(r)
_
+
2 m E
¯h
2
R
l,k
(r) =
_
l ( l + 1 )
r
2
+
2 m q φ(r)
¯h
2
_
R
l,k
(r)
(1508)
A generalized continuity equation can be derived from the timeindependent
Schr¨odinger equation. The continuity equation has the form
( k
2
− k
2
)
_
R
0
dr r
2
R
∗
l,k
(r) R
l,k
(r) =
= −
_
r R
∗
l,k
(r)
∂
∂r
r R
l,k
(r) − r R
l,k
∂
∂r
r R
∗
l,k
_
R
0
(1509)
We note that as r → 0, R
l,k
(r) vanishes for nonzero l. Hence, the normaliza
tion is governed solely by the asymptotic behavior. As previously mentioned,
the radial wave function has the asymptotic large r form
R
l,k
(r) ∼
1
r
sin
_
k r −
l π
2
+ δ
l
(k)
_
(1510)
where δ
l
(k) is the phase shift and k
2
=
2 m E
¯ h
2
. Then, on substituting the
331
asymptotic form in the expression for the normalization, one ﬁnds
_
R
0
dr r
2
R
∗
l,k
(r) R
l,k
(r) =
=
1
k
2
− k
2
_
k sin
_
k
R −
l π
2
+ δ
l
(k
)
_
cos
_
k R −
l π
2
+ δ
l
(k)
_
− k
sin
_
k R −
l π
2
+ δ
l
(k)
_
cos
_
k
R −
l π
2
+ δ
l
(k
)
_ _
(1511)
The above expression can be rewritten in the form
=
π
2
_
sin
_
(k
−k) R +δ
l
(k
) −δ
l
(k)
_
( k
− k )
+
sin
_
(k
+k) R +δ
l
(k
) +δ
l
(k) −lπ
_
( k
+ k )
_
(1512)
The region of physical interest is that in which both k and k
are both positive.
In the limit r → ∞, the ﬁrst term dominates the above expression and so the
normalization integral can be expressed as
=
π
2
δ( k
− k ) (1513)
where we have used the representation of the delta function
lim
N→∞
sin N x
x
→ δ(x) (1514)
This shows that the orthonormality condition of the continuum states must
involve the Dirac delta function
_
∞
0
dr r
2
R
∗
l,k
(r) R
l,k
(r) =
π
2
δ( k
− k ) (1515)
The othonormality condition of the spherical Bessel functions provides one con
crete example of this relation. For the free particle, the radial wave function is
identiﬁed with the spherical Bessel function by
R
l
(r) = k j
l
(kr) (1516)
since we require that, when r →∞, the radial wave function has the same nor
malization as the asymptotic form given in eqn(1510). Therefore, one recovers
the identity
_
∞
0
dr r
2
j
l
(k
r) j
l
(kr) =
π
2 k
2
δ( k
− k ) (1517)
where k and k
are both restricted to have positive values.
332
The Dirac delta Function
20
10
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
0.5 0.4 0.3 0.2 0.1 0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5
x
s
i
n
N
x
/
π ππ π
x
200
100
50
25
N
Figure 83: The Dirac delta function δ(x) can be regarded as the limit N →∞
of the sequence of functions
sin N x
π x
.
4.6.4 The Spherical Square Well
The spherically symmetric potential represents a short ranged potential, in
which q φ(r) = − V
0
for r < a and q φ(r) = 0 for r > a. The
states of angular momentum l have radial wave functions which satisfy
−
¯h
2
2 m r
2
d
dr
_
r
2
d R
dr
_
+
¯h
2
l ( l + 1 )
2 m r
2
R = ( E + V
0
) R (1518)
for r < a and
−
¯h
2
2 m r
2
d
dr
_
r
2
d R
dr
_
+
¯h
2
l ( l + 1 )
2 m r
2
R = E R (1519)
for r > a. The condition for regularity at the origin leads us to select the
solution
R(r) = C
l
j
l
(k
r) (1520)
for r < a, where k
is given by
¯h
2
k
2
= 2 m ( E + V
0
) (1521)
If E > 0, the solutions outside the well are oscillatory and correspond to linear
combinations of the spherical Bessel and spherical Neumann functions. These
333
solutions correspond to scattering states. On the other hand, the bound states
have energies E < 0 which correspond to imaginary values of k. The bound
state radial wave functions ought to vanish as r → ∞.
Scattering States
Inside the well, the radial wave function with angular momentum l must be
proportional to the spherical Bessel function with wave vector k
R
l,E
(r) = C
l
j
l
(k
r) (1522)
for r < a. As previously mentioned, the spherical Neumann function diverges
at the origin and, therefore, is not an physically acceptable solution inside the
well. Outside the well, r > a, the scattering states can be written as the linear
combination
R
l,E
(r) = A
l
j
l
(kr) + B
l
η
l
(kr) (1523)
The ratio of the coeﬃcients A
l
and B
l
can be obtained from the continuity
conditions at r = a. These conditions are that the radial wave function is
continuous at r = a,
lim
→ 0
R
l,E
(a +) = lim
→ 0
R
l,E
(a −) (1524)
and that the derivative is also continuous at r = a
lim
→ 0
∂
∂r
R
l,E
(r)
¸
¸
¸
¸
a+
= lim
→ 0
∂
∂r
R
l,E
(r)
¸
¸
¸
¸
a−
(1525)
These equations can be divided, yielding
k
j
l
(k
a)
k j
l
(k
a)
=
A
l
j
l
(ka) + B
l
η
l
(ka)
A
l
j
l
(ka) + B
l
η
l
(ka)
(1526)
Thus, the ratio of B
l
to A
l
is determined as
B
l
A
l
=
k
j
l
(k
a) j
l
(ka) − k j
l
(ka) j
l
(k
a)
k η
l
(ka) j
l
(k
a) − k
j
l
(k
a) η
l
(ka)
(1527)
This ratio is usually written in terms of the tangent of the phase shift δ
l
(k). The
phase shift (modulo 2 π) can be inferred from experiments in which a beam of
particles of energy E falls incident on the potential. For low energies, the scat
tering is obviously dominated by the l = 0 phase shift, since classically the
angular momentum is given by l = k r. Hence, only the l = 0 contribution
is expected to be important at low energies where k → 0.
For the case l = 0, the matching procedure leads to
B
0
A
0
=
k
cos k
a sin ka − k cos ka sin k
a
k
cos k
a cos ka + k sin ka sin k
a
(1528)
334
The ratio of amplitudes can be expressed in terms of the l = 0 phase shift δ
0
(k),
via the deﬁnition
− tan δ
0
(k) =
B
0
A
0
(1529)
Hence, the phase shift is given by
tan δ
0
(k) =
_
(
k
k
) tan k
a − tan k a
1 + (
k
k
) tan k
a tan k a
_
(1530)
or
δ
0
(k) = tan
−1
_
k
k
tan k
a
_
− k a (1531)
where ¯h
2
k
2
= ¯h
2
k
2
+ 2 m V
0
. The phase shift vanishes identically for
k
= k and, therefore, is a nonlinear measure of the strength of the potential.
The phase shift δ
0
(k) (in units of π) is shown in ﬁg(84) as a function of
k
a
π
for
ﬁxed small values of the energy. The phase shifts are only slightly dependent on
k at low energies. It is seen that the phase shift rapidly increases by π at various
Phase Shift for the attractive spherical potential well
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
0 1 2 3 4 5 6
k'a/π ππ π
δ δδ δ
0
(
k
)
/
π ππ π
Figure 84: The l = 0 phase shift δ
0
(k) for lowenergy particles incident on an
attractive potential well, as a function of k
a.
values of k
a. These values are tabulated in Table(6). At these particular values
of k
a, the potential is almost strong enough to produce another bound state
with l = 0. This can be demonstrated by noting that these special values of k
a
correspond to k
a = (n+
1
2
) π, so the radial wave function inside the potential
335
Table 6: The values of (
k
a
π
) near which the l = 0 phase shift changes by π and
resonant scattering occurs.
l = 0 bound state
_
k
a
π
_
n = 1 0.48
n = 2 1.50
n = 3 2.51
n = 4 3.50
n = 5 4.51
n = 6 5.51
well has a node at the origin and has zero slope at the edge of the well. The
wave function with zero slope inside the well only matches to a wave function
with zero slope outside the well. Outside the well, the eigenfunction is constant
(since k = 0) and corresponds to having a zero value of the decay constant
κ and, therefore, represents a zero energy bound state. As seen in ﬁg(85), the
scattering crosssections are large for lowenergy particles incident on potentials
where V
0
is close to these critical values. This type of scattering is known as
Scattering crosssection
0 1 2 3 4 5 6
k'a/π
d
σ
/
d
Ω
Figure 85: The l = 0 scattering crosssection for lowenergy particles incident
on an attractive potential well, as a function of k
a.
336
resonant scattering.
In the limit k → 0, the matching condition reduces to
B
0
A
0
= k a
_
1 −
tan k
a
k
a
_
(1532)
Hence, the ratio vanishes proportionally to k, as k → 0. This means that the
asymptotic, large r, radial wave function has the form of
lim
k →0
R
0,k
(r) = A
0
_
sin kr
kr
−
B
0
A
0
cos kr
kr
_
= A
0
_
1 −
a
sc
r
_
(1533)
where
a
sc
= a
_
1 −
tan k
a
k
a
_
(1534)
is the scattering length
20
. In the limit of low energies, the diﬀerential scattering
crosssection is given by
dσ
dΩ
= [ a
sc
[
2
(1535)
which is isotropic, that is, independent of the scattering angle θ.
——————————————————————————————————
Example: l = 0 Scattering from a Repulsive Spherical Well Potential.
In this case, we consider the energy eigenstates with l = 0 of the spherically
symmetric potential
V (r) = V
0
if r < a
V (r) = 0 if r > a (1536)
We shall consider the case where E < V
0
. By analytic continuation from the
case where V
0
> E, the radial wave function on the inside of the well has the
form
R
0
(r) = C
0
sinh κ r
κ r
(1537)
which is proportional to the l = 0 spherical Bessel function for imaginary ar
gument. This function satisﬁes the radial equation, if the energy eigenvalue is
related to the potential V
0
and κ via
E = V
0
−
¯h
2
κ
2
2 m
(1538)
20
Note that if the magnitude of the potential is such that k
a is close to an odd multiple
of
π
2
, the scattering length can be anomalously large. When this occurs, low energy particles
are resonantly scattered.
337
Outside the well, the radial wave function is given by a linear combination of
the l = 0 spherical Bessel and Neumann functions
R
0
(r) = A
0
sin k r
k r
− B
0
cos k r
k r
(1539)
where k is related to the energy eigenvalue by
E =
¯h
2
k
2
2 m
(1540)
The matching conditions for the radial wave function at r = a lead to the
equation
tan( k a + δ
0
(k) )
k a
=
tanh κ a
κ a
(1541)
The matching condition leads to the phase shift being given by
δ
0
(k) = tan
−1
_
k
κ
tanh κ a
_
− k a (1542)
In the limit of a hard sphere, V
0
→ ∞, so κ a → ∞. In the hard sphere limit,
the above expression for the phase shift simpliﬁes to
lim
V0→∞
δ
0
(k) → − k a (1543)
The k → 0 limit of the scattering amplitude is found as
a
sc
= − lim
k→0
tan δ
0
(k)
k
= a (1544)
Therefore, at low energies where the scattering is isotropic and independent of
k, the total scattering crosssection of the hard sphere is found as
σ
T
=
_
dΩ
_
dσ
dΩ
_
=
_
dΩ a
2
sc
= 4 π a
2
(1545)
This derivation is only valid for small k. The total crosssection should be com
pared with geometrical crosssection, which is deﬁned as the area of (the front
half of) the target’s surface projected onto the plane of the beam. As seen in
ﬁg(86), the geometrical crosssection for the hard sphere is given by π a
2
, the
area of a disk of radius a. Therefore, as the total scattering crosssection of the
hard sphere potential is 4 π a
2
, the total crosssection is four times greater than
the geometrical crosssection.
338
Geometric crosssection
Target
Incident Beam
Wave Front
Figure 86: The geometrical scattering crosssection for particles incident on a
hard sphere.
——————————————————————————————————
Bound States
In order to determine the bound states it is necessary to examine the be
havior of the radial wave function for imaginary wave vectors as r → ∞. It
is useful to deﬁne certain combinations of the spherical Bessel and Neumann
functions that prove to be useful. From the asymptotic variation of the Bessel
and Neumann functions, one recognizes that the combinations
h
(1)
l
(ρ) = j
l
(ρ) + i η
l
(ρ)
h
(2)
l
(ρ) = j
l
(ρ) − i η
l
(ρ) (1546)
known as the spherical Hankel functions of the ﬁrst and second kind, have simple
exponential variations
h
(1)
l
(ρ) =
1
ρ
exp
_
+ i
_
ρ − ( l + 1 )
π
2
_ _
h
(2)
l
(ρ) =
1
ρ
exp
_
− i
_
ρ − ( l + 1 )
π
2
_ _
(1547)
For imaginary k, such that ρ = + i κ r, only the spherical Hankel functions
of the ﬁrst kind decay exponentially at r → ∞. Thus, when discussing bound
339
Table 7: The spherical Hankel Functions h
(m)
l
(z)
h
(1)
l
(z) h
(2)
l
(z)
l = 0 −
i
z
exp[ + i z ] +
i
z
exp[ − i z ]
l = 1 −i
(1−iz)
z
2
exp[ + i z ] i
(1+iz)
z
2
exp[ − i z ]
l = 2 −i
(3−3iz−z
2
)
z
3
exp[ + i z ] i
(3+3iz−z
2
)
z
3
exp[ − i z ]
l = 3 −i
(15−15iz−6z
2
+iz
3
)
z
4
exp[ + i z ] i
(15+15iz−6z
2
−iz
3
)
z
4
exp[ − i z ]
states it is useful to express the radial wave function outside the well in terms
of the spherical Hankel function of the ﬁrst kind.
The wave functions in the interior and exterior regions should be matched at
r = a. For the bound states, since E < 0, the radial wave functions exterior
to the well have the form h
(1)
l
(i κ r) while the wave functions interior to the
well have the form j
l
(k
r). Therefore, on equating the logarithmic derivatives,
one ﬁnds the condition
k
j
l
(k
a)
j
l
(k
a)
=
i κ h
(1)
l
(i κ a)
h
(1)
l
(i κ a)
(1548)
which, together with the relation
k
2
−
2 m V
0
¯h
2
= − κ
2
(1549)
leads to discrete values of κ and, hence, discrete energy eigenvalues E
κ,l
.
This procedure for graphically determining the allowed values of κ illustrated
for the l = 0 bound states in ﬁg(87). The dashed curves shows the relationship
between κ and k
of eqn(1549), for diﬀerent values of V
0
. The intersection of
the solid lines and the dashed lines yield the allowed values of κ for the l = 0
bound states. The number of intersections and the bound states increase as V
0
increases. The wave function for the lowest energy l = 0 bound state is shown
in ﬁg(88), for various values of V
0
.
——————————————————————————————————
340
Graphical Solution for Bound State Energies
4
2
0
2
4
6
8
0 0.5 1 1.5 2
k' a / π ππ π

c
o
t
k
'
a
/
k
'
a
κ κ κ κ a
Figure 87: The graphical solution of the l = 0 version of the self consistency
condition (eqn(1548)), for various values of V
0
.
4.6.5 Exercise 87
The deuteron consists of a neutron which is bound in an l = 0 state to a proton
by a shortranged attractive potential. The neutron and proton in the deuteron
are in a spin triplet state. Assume that the potential can be represented by a
spherically symmetric “square” well of depth V
0
and radius a. The experimen
tally determined binding energy E
0
is 2.21 MeV. The scattering length a
t
sc
for a
neutronproton system in a triplet spin state is inferred, from lowenergy elastic
scattering experiments
21
, to have a magnitude of 5.38 F. Using this data and
the reduced mass, estimate the depth of the potential V
0
and the radius a. The
estimated value of a can be compared with the value of 2.1 F for the rms radius
of the charge distribution deuteron and 0.8 F for the rms radius for the charge
distribution of the proton, obtained by the diﬀraction of highenergy electrons
22
.
The neutronproton interaction is highly spindependent. For example, the
experimentally determined singlet neutronproton scattering length is given by
a
s
sc
= − 23.7 F.
——————————————————————————————————
21
L.J. Rainwater, W.W. Havens, J.R. Dunning and C.S. Wu, Phys. Rev. 73, 733 (1948).
22
E.E. Chambers and R. Hofstadter, Phys. Rev. 103, 1454 (1956), and J.A. McIntyre and
R. Hofstadter, Phys. Rev. 98, 158 (1955).
341
The radial wave function for the l=0 bound state
0
0.5
1
1.5
0 0.5 1 1.5 2
r / a
r
R
0
(
r
)
Figure 88: The lowest energy l = 0 bound state wave function, for various
values of V
0
.
4.6.6 Solution 87
The triplet scattering length a
t
sc
= 5.38 F, was measured in experiments
involving the scattering of very lowenergy particles. For the model potential,
the scattering length is given by
a
sc
= a
_
1 −
tan k
a
k
a
_
(1550)
where the wave vector k
is associated with a zeroenergy particle within the
well. Therefore,
¯h
2
k
2
2 µ
= V
0
(1551)
If the potential only has one bound state and the scattering is resonant, then
the product k
a must be slightly greater than
π
2
.
The bound state energy E
0
is related to the imaginary wave vector κ via
E
0
= −
¯h
2
κ
2
2 µ
(1552)
where µ =
m
2
is the reduced mass of the neutronproton system. The bound
342
state energy is determined from the condition
k
cot k
a = − κ (1553)
where
V
0
=
¯h
2
2 µ
_
k
2
+ κ
2
_
(1554)
or
k
2
= k
2
+ κ
2
(1555)
There are two parameters that need to be determined a and k
. We shall
eliminate a in terms of k
, via
κ a =
κ
√
k
2
− κ
2
tan
−1
_
−
√
k
2
− κ
2
κ
_
(1556)
where the inverse tangent has to be understood as giving an angle greater than
π
2
. The equation involves the dimensionless variable x =
k
κ
. The resulting
value of a is to be substituted in the equation for the scattering length, yielding
the equation
κ a
t
sc
=
1
√
x
2
− 1
tan
−1
_
−
_
x
2
− 1
_
−
1
x
tan
_ x tan
−1
_
−
√
x
2
− 1
_
√
x
2
− 1
_
(1557)
This equation involves the dimensionless product κ a
t
sc
which for triplet scat
tering has a value κ a
t
sc
∼ 1.23. This leads to the value of x = 4.05. The
depth of the potential is then given by
V
0
= E
0
x
2
(1558)
which is estimated to be V
t
0
= 36.25 MeV. The width of the well is given by
a = 2.01 F.
Since the experimentally determined singlet neutronproton scattering length
is given by a
s
sc
= − 23.7 F, then using the value of a just calculated, one de
termines that the depth of the singlet potential is V
s
0
= 23.7 MeV. The singlet
potential is not deep enough to bind the neutron and proton. Similar results
were obtained by using a more realistic form of the potential
23
.
——————————————————————————————————
23
P.M. Morse, J.B. Fisk and L.I. Schiﬀ, Phys. Rev. 50, 748 (1936).
343
4.6.7 Exercise 88
Find the energy eigenvalues of the l = 0 states of the spherically symmetric
inﬁnite square well potential,
∞ if r > a
V (r) =
0 if r < a (1559)
——————————————————————————————————
4.6.8 Exercise 89
Show that the spherical square well has no bound states unless
V
0
a
2
>
¯h
2
π
2
8 m
(1560)
——————————————————————————————————
4.6.9 Solution 89
The bound state solution outside the well has to have the form of a decaying
exponential and, therefore, is given by a spherical Hankel function in which
k → i κ, and is given by a spherical Bessel function inside the well, with wave
vector k
, where
¯h
2
k
2
2 m
− V
0
= −
¯h
2
κ
2
2 m
(1561)
On matching the exponentially decaying spherical Hankel functions with imag
inary k with the spherical Bessel functions of argument k
r at r = a one
obtains a transcendental equation for the bound state. The largest value of κ
occurs, for ﬁxed V
0
, when l = 0 as this minimizes the eﬀect of the rotational
kinetic energy or centrifugal potential and, therefore, maximizes the eﬀect of
the attractive potential. For l = 0, the bound state condition simpliﬁes to
k
cot k
a = − κ (1562)
On squaring this equation, one obtains
k
2
cot
2
k
a = + κ
2
=
2 m V
0
¯h
2
− k
2
(1563)
344
which contains some spurious solutions. The left hand side is greater or equal
to zero, and only falls to zero for k
equal to every odd multiple of
π
2 a
. The
right hand side is an inverse parabola, which becomes negative for k
2
greater
than
2 m V0
¯ h
2
. The solutions of the squared equation are, therefore, restricted to
the region of relatively small k
where the inverted parabola is positive. The
solutions of the squared equation correspond to the solutions of the original
equation only in the restricted range where cot k
a is negative. Thus, the
lowest energy bound states occur for
π
2 a
< k
<
π
a
. Hence, on increasing the
strength of V
0
from zero, the lowest energy bound state ﬁrst occurs when
2 m V
0
¯h
2
≥
π
2
4 a
2
(1564)
——————————————————————————————————
4.6.10 Exercise 90
Show that if a square well just binds an energy level of angular momentum l,
the parameters satisfy the equation
j
l−1
_
_
2 m V
0
a
2
¯h
2
_
= 0 (1565)
which utilized the recurrence formulas for the Bessel functions.
——————————————————————————————————
4.6.11 Solution 90
Inside the well of radius a, a > r, the solution for the radial wave function,
with angular momentum l, is proportional to the spherical Bessel function
R
l
(r) = A
l
j
l
(kr) (1566)
The wave vector k is related to the energy eigenvalue by
E =
¯h
2
k
2
2 m
− V
0
(1567)
Since the spherical Neumann function η
l
(kr) diverges at r = 0, it yields an
unphysical probability density and, therefore, is discarded for r < a.
Outside the well, r > a, the solution is proportional to the spherical Hankel
function
R
l
(r) = B
l
h
(1)
l
(iκr) (1568)
345
where
h
(1)
l
(iκr) = j
l
(iκr) + i η
l
(iκr) (1569)
Since E ≤ 0, the momentum is imaginary and is given by
E = −
¯h
2
κ
2
2 m
(1570)
The spherical Hankel function h
(1)
l
(iκr) represents the combination of the pos
sible solutions which decays exponentially as r → ∞. The other combination
h
(2)
l
(iκr) blows up as r → ∞ and so is not normalizable and, therefore, the
unphysical solution is discarded.
The bound state wave functions must satisfy the continuity conditions at
r = a, which can be combined to yield
k j
l
(ka)
j
l
(ka)
=
i κ h
(1)
l
(iκa)
h
(1)
l
(iκa)
(1571)
If the potential is so weak that it just binds the particle, then E ∼ 0, and
hence κ = 0. The spherical Hankel functions are dominated by the spherical
Neumann functions as they diverge like ( κ a )
−(l+1)
in the limit κ → 0. Hence,
in the limit κ → 0, the matching condition becomes
k j
l
(ka)
j
l
(ka)
= −
( l + 1 )
a
(1572)
and we have the condition
k a j
l
(ka) + ( l + 1 ) j
l
(ka) = 0 (1573)
The recurrence relations for the spherical Bessel functions can be combined to
yield
( l + 1 ) j
l
(ka) + ka j
l
(ka) = ka j
l−1
(ka) (1574)
Hence, on using the above recurrence relation, we ﬁnd that the condition that
the spherical square potential well is just suﬃciently strong that it starts have
a bound state of angular momentum l is given by
j
l−1
(ka) = 0 (1575)
in which
k
2
=
2 m V
0
¯h
2
(1576)
since E = 0. Thus, we have derived the required condition.
——————————————————————————————————
346
4.6.12 Exercise 91
Find the bound states corresponding to angular momentum l = 0 for the
attractive delta function spherical shell potential
V (r) = − V
0
a δ( [ r [ − a ) (1577)
Find the minimum value of V
0
for which a bound state occurs.
——————————————————————————————————
4.6.13 Solution 91
The energy eigenfunction function for a spherically symmetric Hamiltonian can
be separated in terms of a radial function R(r) and an angular function Y
l
m
(θ, ϕ),
Φ(r) = R
n,l
(r) Y
l
m
(θ, ϕ) (1578)
The solution for the radial function inside the potential shell is given by the
analytic continuation of the spherical Bessel function, of angular momentum l,
R
n,l
(r) = A
l
j
l
( i κ r ) for r < a (1579)
since the wave function must be normalizable at the origin. However, outside
the shell it is given by a linear combination of the spherical Bessel and Neumann
functions that decay as r → ∞ exponentially. This combination deﬁnes the
spherical Hankel functions,
R
n,l
(r) = B
l
j
l
( i κ r ) + C
l
η
l
( i κ r ) for r > a (1580)
The wave function is continuous at r = a. Thus,
R
n,l
(a +) = R
n,l
(a −) (1581)
The delta function only depends on r and so the ﬁrst derivative has a discon
tinuous slope at r = a, given by integrating the radial equation
_
a+
a−
dr r
2
_
¯h
2
2 m
1
r
2
∂
∂r
r
2
∂
∂r
+ V
0
a δ( r − a ) + E
_
R
n,l
(r) = 0 (1582)
Taking the limit → 0, one obtains
R
n,l
(a +) − R
n,l
(a −) +
2 m V
0
a
¯h
2
R(a) = 0 (1583)
The energy eigenvalue is given by
E = −
¯h
2
κ
2
2 m
(1584)
347
For l = 0, one has
R
n,0
(r) = A
0
sinh κ r
r
for r < a
R
n,0
(r) = B
0
exp
_
− κ r
_
r
for r > a (1585)
On eliminating B and A, we ﬁnd the eigenvalue equation for α
exp
_
κ a
_
κ =
2 m V
0
a
¯h
2
sinh κ a (1586)
The bound state just forms when the solution κ → 0, where sinh κ a → κ a.
In this case we have
V
0
=
¯h
2
2 m a
2
(1587)
——————————————————————————————————
4.6.14 Exercise 92
A particle is conﬁned to move in the volume between two concentric spheres of
radius R
0
and radius R
1
, where R
1
> R
0
. The potential is radially symmetric
and has the form
V (r) = 0 if R
1
> r > R
0
V (r) → ∞ elsewhere (1588)
(a) Find the values of the energy eigenvalues if the particle has angular mo
mentum given by l = 0.
(b) Consider the limit R
1
→ R
0
, which resembles a particle rigidly bound
at radius R
1
, but is free to rotate. Assume that the particle is in the ground
state. The excitation energy of any energy state is deﬁned as the diﬀerence
between its energy eigenvalue and the energy of the ground state. In this limit,
show that the excitation energies for ﬁxed l are independent of the value of l.
Also, evaluate all of the remaining ﬁnite excitation energies.
——————————————————————————————————
4.6.15 Solution 92
The general solution for the energy eigenstates of angular momentum l is of the
form
φ
l
(r) =
_
A
l
j
l
(kr) + B
l
η
l
(kr)
_
Y
l
m
(θ, ϕ) (1589)
348
for R
1
> r > R
0
, and zero elsewhere. The wave function has to satisfy the
boundary conditions
_
A
l
j
l
(kR
1
) + B
l
η
l
(kR
1
)
_
= 0 (1590)
at r = R
1
and
_
A
l
j
l
(kR
0
) + B
l
η
l
(kR
0
)
_
= 0 (1591)
at r = R
0
. These equations can be used to eliminate the ratio of a to B,
yielding a transcendental equation for k
j
l
(kR
0
)
η
l
(kR
0
)
=
j
l
(kR
1
)
η
l
(kR
1
)
(1592)
For l = 0, this can be rewritten as
sin k ( R
0
− R
1
) = 0 (1593)
which yields the allowed values of k as
k
n
=
n π
R
1
− R
0
(1594)
and has the energy eigenvalue
E
n,l=0
=
¯h
2
n
2
π
2
2 m ( R
1
− R
0
)
2
(1595)
In the limit R
1
→ R
0
, the energy diﬀerences between the eigenstates of
diﬀerent n (with ﬁxed l) are independent of l as the radial equation becomes
−
¯h
2
2 m R
2
0
∂
∂r
_
r
2
∂R
l
(r)
∂r
_
R
l
(r) =
_
E −
¯h
2
l ( l + 1 )
2 m R
2
0
_
R
l
(r) (1596)
Thus, the diﬀerences in the eigenvalues, for ﬁxed l, are identical to the diﬀerences
with l = 0, which we have shown tend to inﬁnity. The only remaining ﬁnite
excitation energies correspond to states of the same n values but with diﬀerent
rotational energies. That is we have a rigid rotor, with excitation energies
E
l
−l
=
¯h
2
2 m R
2
0
_
l
( l
+ 1 ) − l ( l + 1 )
_
(1597)
This corresponds to the excitation energies of a threedimensional rigid rotor,
with moment of inertia I = m R
2
0
. The diﬀerence between successive excita
tion energies increase with increasing l as
¯ h
2
I
( l + 1 ). These diﬀerences in
excitation energies are frequently observed in the optical absorption spectra of
molecules.
——————————————————————————————————
349
4.6.16 Ladder operators for a free particle
The radial wave function R
l
(r) for a free particle with angular momentum l
satisﬁes the eigenvalue equation
0 = −
_
∂
2
R
l
∂ρ
2
_
−
2
ρ
_
∂R
l
∂ρ
_
+
_
l ( l + 1 )
ρ
2
− 1
_
R
l
0 = −
1
ρ
_
∂
2
ρR
l
∂ρ
2
_
+
_
l ( l + 1 )
ρ
2
− 1
_
R
l
(1598)
where the dimensionless variable ρ is deﬁned by
ρ = k r (1599)
and k is related to the energy eigenvalue E via
E =
¯h
2
k
2
2 m
(1600)
We shall introduce ladder operators that transform radial wave functions R
l
(r)
into radial wave functions with the same value of the energy but with diﬀerent
values of the angular momentum
24
. Since the ladder operators that are to
be introduced keep the energy E unchanged, the raising and lowering operators
can be expressed in terms of the variable ρ and the derivative with respect to ρ.
The raising operator
ˆ
A
+
l
is deﬁned via
ˆ
A
+
l
= −
1
ρ
∂
∂ρ
ρ +
l
ρ
(1601)
The lowering operator
ˆ
A
−
l
is the Hermitean conjugate of the raising operator
ˆ
A
+
l
. In three dimensions, the lowering operator
ˆ
A
−
l
is calculated as
ˆ
A
−
l
= +
1
ρ
∂
∂ρ
ρ +
l
ρ
(1602)
The products of the raising and lowering operators are given by
ˆ
A
+
l
ˆ
A
−
l
= −
1
ρ
∂
2
∂ρ
2
ρ +
l ( l + 1 )
ρ
2
(1603)
or, when taken in the opposite order
ˆ
A
−
l
ˆ
A
+
l
= −
1
ρ
∂
2
∂ρ
2
ρ +
l ( l − 1 )
ρ
2
(1604)
On comparing the above two forms, we ﬁnd the relation
ˆ
A
−
l
ˆ
A
+
l
=
ˆ
A
+
l−1
ˆ
A
−
l−1
(1605)
24
L. Infeld, Phys. Rev. 59, 737 (1941).
350
Radial distribution function
0
0.5
1
1.5
0 1 2 3 4 5 6
ρ / π ρ / π ρ / π ρ / π
j
l
2
(
ρ
)
ρ
)
ρ
)
ρ
)
ρ ρρ ρ
2
l0
l=1
l=2
l=3
Figure 89: The (unnormalized) radial distribution for a free particle with an
gular momentum l. The centrifugal barrier excludes particles with ﬁnite values
of l from a region surrounding the origin.
Thus, we have found two equivalent forms of the operator that appears in the
radial equation with angular momentum (l −1).
When acting on R
l
, the lowering operator
ˆ
A
−
l
produces the radial wave
function R
l−1
which is an energy eigenstate with the same energy. This can be
seen by ﬁrst using eqn(1603) to write the radial equation in the form
_
ˆ
A
+
l
ˆ
A
−
l
− 1
_
R
l
= 0 (1606)
and then acting on this with
ˆ
A
−
l
. This yields the equation
ˆ
A
−
l
_
ˆ
A
+
l
ˆ
A
−
l
− 1
_
R
l
= 0 (1607)
which can be rewritten as
_
ˆ
A
−
l
ˆ
A
+
l
− 1
_
ˆ
A
−
l
R
l
= 0 (1608)
Hence, on using eqn(1605), one ﬁnds
_
ˆ
A
+
l−1
ˆ
A
−
l−1
− 1
_
ˆ
A
−
l
R
l
= 0 (1609)
351
which indicates that
ˆ
A
−
l
R
l
is proportional to the radial wave function R
l−1
with angular momentum (l −1) and the same energy E
R
l−1
∝
ˆ
A
−
l
R
l
(1610)
Since the angular momentum is reduced by unity, the above relation justiﬁes
naming
ˆ
A
−
l
as the lowering operator.
The raising operator
ˆ
A
+
l+1
acting on R
l
produces a radial wave function R
l+1
where the angular momentum is raised by one unit. This can be shown by ﬁrst
substituting l by (l + 1) in eqn(1605), to produce
ˆ
A
−
l+1
ˆ
A
+
l+1
=
ˆ
A
+
l
ˆ
A
−
l
(1611)
The radial equation for R
l
can be written as
_
ˆ
A
−
l+1
ˆ
A
+
l+1
− 1
_
R
l
= 0 (1612)
If the raising operator
ˆ
A
+
l+1
acts on the radial equation as expressed in eqn(1612),
one has
0 =
ˆ
A
+
l+1
_
ˆ
A
−
l+1
ˆ
A
+
l+1
− 1
_
R
l
0 =
_
ˆ
A
+
l+1
ˆ
A
−
l+1
− 1
_
ˆ
A
+
l+1
R
l
(1613)
The factor in the parentheses is identiﬁed as the radial equation operator with
angular momentum (l + 1), therefore the product
ˆ
A
+
l+1
R
l
must be the radial
wave function with angular momentum (l + 1). Hence, we have
R
l+1
∝
ˆ
A
+
l+1
R
l
(1614)
so the raising operator
ˆ
A
+
l+1
increases the angular momentum of the radial wave
function R
l
by one unit, but keeps the energy unchanged.
The radial wave function with l = 0 can be determined from the radial
equation, which we write in the form
_
∂
2
ρR
0
∂ρ
2
_
= − ρR
0
(1615)
The general solution is easily found and is given by
ρ R
0
(r) = A
0
sin ρ + B
0
cos ρ (1616)
The physically acceptable solution has B
0
= 0 since the probability of ﬁnding
the particle in the neighborhood of ρ →0 must be ﬁnite. Hence, the radial wave
function with l = 0 is given by
R
0
(r) = A
0
_
sin ρ
ρ
_
(1617)
352
which is proportional to the zeroth order spherical Bessel function j
0
(ρ) which
is given by
j
0
(ρ) =
_
sin ρ
ρ
_
(1618)
The radial wave functions with l ,= 0 can be found by successive use of the
raising operators. For example, the radial wave function with l = 1 is found
from j
0
(ρ) by
R
1
(r) ∝
_
−
1
ρ
∂
∂ρ
ρ +
1
ρ
_
R
0
(r)
= − A
1
1
ρ
∂
∂ρ
_
sin ρ
_
+ A
0
1
ρ
sin ρ
ρ
= A
1
_
sin ρ − ρ cos ρ
ρ
2
_
(1619)
The radial wave function R
1
(r) is proportional to the spherical Bessel function
j
1
(ρ), which is given by
j
1
(ρ) =
_
sin ρ − ρ cos ρ
ρ
2
_
(1620)
It is seen that the spherical Bessel function of order one tends to zero like ρ when
ρ → 0. Repeated applications of the raising operators yield the unnormalized
radial functions in the form
R
l
(r) = A
l
j
l
(ρ) (1621)
where the coeﬃcient A
l
is an arbitrary complex number. These solutions, like
the spherical Bessel functions, are all wellbehaved at the origin. Furthermore,
the probability of ﬁnding the particle near the origin must decrease as l in
creases, due to the increase of the centrifugal barrier in the eﬀective potential.
The spherical Neumann functions η
l
(ρ) of order l are independent solutions
of the radial equation with angular momentum l. However, these solutions are
singular at the origin, as can be seen by examining the spherical Neumann
function of order zero
η
0
(ρ) = −
_
cos ρ
ρ
_
(1622)
which diverges like ρ
−1
when ρ →0. Other independent solutions of the radial
equation can be obtained by successive actions of the raising operators. For
example, the spherical Neumann function of order one is obtained from η
0
(ρ)
by
η
1
(ρ) =
_
−
1
ρ
∂
∂ρ
ρ +
1
ρ
_
η
0
(ρ)
353
= −
_
−
1
ρ
∂
∂ρ
ρ +
1
ρ
_ _
cos ρ
ρ
_
= −
_
cos ρ + ρ sin ρ
ρ
2
_
(1623)
The function η
1
(ρ) diverges like ρ
−2
as ρ → 0. The general form of η
l
(ρ) as
ρ →0 can be determined by induction. One can show that if
lim
ρ→0
η
l
(ρ) ∼ −
1
ρ
l+1
(1624)
then since
η
l+1
(ρ) =
_
−
1
ρ
∂
∂ρ
ρ +
(l + 1)
ρ
_
η
l
(ρ) (1625)
one must have
lim
ρ→0
η
l+1
(ρ) ∼ −
_
−
1
ρ
∂
∂ρ
1
ρ
l
+
(l + 1)
ρ
l+2
_
= −
1
ρ
l+2
(1626)
Since the asymptotic form holds true for l = 0, one has shown that
lim
ρ→0
η
l
(ρ) ∼ −
1
ρ
l+1
(1627)
is true for all values of l. The asymptotic ρ →0 behavior of the spherical Bessel
functions is given by
lim
ρ→0
j
l
(ρ) ∼ ρ
l
(1628)
The above two asymptotic forms of the independent solutions can be simply
obtained from the radial equation, if one assumes that the leading terms of the
solutions are of the form R ∼ ρ
α
for some unknown values of α.
4.6.17 The Rayleigh Equation
A plane wave can be expanded in a series of spherical waves, via the Rayleigh
equation
exp
_
i k r cos θ
_
=
l
i
l
( 2 l + 1 ) j
l
( kr ) P
l
( cos θ ) (1629)
The expansion can be thought of in terms as the decomposition of a wave
front (a plane of constant phase) of a beam in terms of its angular momentum
components, as is indicated schematically in ﬁg(90). The above expansion is to
be expected since the eigenstates of the Laplacian with eigenvalue − k
2
, which
are simultaneous eigenfunctions of the linear momentum must be related to
354
Classical decomposition of a beam into angular
momentum eigenstates
l = k r
l = 1
l = 2
l = 3
l = 4
l = 0
Cross section of
the Beam
Figure 90: A semiclassical description of the decomposition of a plane wave in
terms of states with angular momentum l. If a point on the wave front at a
distance r from the axis with ( l +
1
2
) ¯h > p r > ( l −
1
2
) ¯h has angular
momentum l.
the eigenstates of the Laplacian which are simultaneous eigenfunctions of the
angular momentum. The Rayleigh expansion can be veriﬁed by diﬀerentiating
the above relation with respect to k r leading to
i cos θ exp
_
i k r cos θ
_
=
l
i
l
( 2 l + 1 ) j
l
( kr ) P
l
( cos θ )
cos θ
l
i
l+1
( 2 l + 1 ) j
l
( kr ) P
l
( cos θ ) =
l
i
l
( 2 l + 1 ) j
l
( kr ) P
l
( cos θ )
(1630)
The recurrence relation
( 2 l + 1 ) z P
l
(z) = ( l + 1 ) P
l+1
(z) + l P
l−1
(z) (1631)
can be used to write
l
i
l+1
j
l
( kr )
_
( l + 1 ) P
l+1
( cos θ ) + l P
l−1
( cos θ )
_
=
l
i
l
( 2 l + 1 ) j
l
( kr ) P
l
( cos θ ) (1632)
355
The recurrence relation for j
l
( kr ) given by
( 2 l + 1 ) j
l
( kr ) = l j
l−1
( kr ) − ( l + 1 ) j
l+1
( kr ) (1633)
can be used in eqn(1632) to obtain
l
i
l+1
j
l
( kr )
_
( l + 1 ) P
l+1
( cos θ ) + l P
l−1
( cos θ )
_
=
l
i
l
_
l j
l−1
( kr ) − ( l + 1 ) j
l+1
( kr )
_
P
l
( cos θ ) (1634)
which, on changing the index from l + 1 to l in the ﬁrst term and l − 1 to l in
the second term, yields the equality
l
i
l
_
j
l−1
( kr ) l P
l
( cos θ ) − j
l+1
( kr ) ( l + 1 ) P
l
( cos θ )
_
=
l
i
l
_
l j
l−1
( kr ) − ( l + 1 ) j
l+1
( kr )
_
P
l
( cos θ ) (1635)
This concludes the proof of the Rayleigh expansion.
An alternate proof can be found by using the orthogonality of the Legendre
polynomials and forming the matrix elements with the plane wave expansion
exp
_
i k r cos θ
_
=
l
a
l
P
l
( cos θ ) (1636)
with unknown expansion coeﬃcients a
l
. Then, on multiplying by P
l
(cos θ) sin θ
and integrating w.r.t θ, and using the orthogonality condition, one ﬁnds
_
1
−1
d cos θ P
l
( cos θ ) exp
_
i k r cos θ
_
=
l
a
l
2 δ
l,l
2 l + 1
(1637)
Thus, the expansion coeﬃcients are evaluated as
a
l
=
( 2 l + 1 )
2
_
1
−1
ds exp
_
i s k r
_
P
l
(s)
= ( 2 l + 1 ) i
l
j
l
( kr ) (1638)
where we have used the Rodriguez formula expression for the Legendre polyno
mial
P
l
(s) =
1
2
l
l!
∂
l
∂s
l
( s
2
− 1 )
l
(1639)
and integrated by parts l times and then used an integral representation of the
spherical Bessel function
j
l
(z) =
z
l
2
l+1
l!
_
+1
−1
ds exp
_
i z s
_
( 1 − s
2
)
l
(1640)
356
The above two expressions allowed us to express the integral involving the Leg
endre polynomial in terms of the spherical Bessel function. The Rayleigh ex
pansion is often used in considerations of scattering.
4.6.18 The Isotropic Planar Harmonic Oscillator
The potential for the Isotropic Planar Harmonic Oscillator is given by
V (r) =
m ω
2
2
r
2
(1641)
which only depends on the radial distance r. In planar polar coordinates (r, ϕ),
the energy eigenvalue equation for the isotropic twodimensional Harmonic Os
cillator is of the form
_
−
¯h
2
2 m
1
r
∂
∂r
r
∂
∂r
−
¯h
2
2 m r
2
∂
2
∂ϕ
2
+
m ω
2
r
2
2
− E
_
Ψ(r, ϕ) = 0 (1642)
The Laplacian in the eigenvalue equation is expressed in the form appropriate
for twodimensional motion. In particular, it can be seen that this operator is
Hermitean if one uses the twodimensional measure of “volume”, dr r dϕ, in
the deﬁnition of the inner product. The potential only depends on the radial
distance r, and so the twodimensional angular momentum operator
ˆ
L
z
com
mutes with the Hamiltonian. Thus, the energy and angular momentum are
conserved. Also, it is possible to ﬁnd simultaneous eigenfunctions of
ˆ
H and
ˆ
L
z
.
The eigenvalue of
ˆ
L
z
is denoted by ¯ h m
z
. On introducing the separable form
for the eigenfunction
Ψ(r, ϕ) = R(r)
1
√
2 π
exp
_
i m
z
ϕ
_
(1643)
the diﬀerential equation for the radial wave function becomes
_
−
¯h
2
2 m
1
r
∂
∂r
r
∂
∂r
+
¯h
2
m
2
z
2 m r
2
+
m ω
2
r
2
2
− E
_
R(r) = 0 (1644)
On introducing the dimensionless variable, ρ, deﬁned by
ρ =
m ω r
2
¯h
(1645)
it is found that the derivative with respect to r is given in terms of the diﬀerential
with respect to ρ, via
∂
∂r
=
∂ρ
∂r
∂
∂ρ
= 2 ρ
1
2
_
m ω
¯h
∂
∂ρ
(1646)
357
Thus, the radial diﬀerential equation takes the dimensionless form
¯h ω
_
− 2 ρ
∂
2
∂ρ
2
− 2
∂
∂ρ
+
m
2
z
2 ρ
+
ρ
2
−
E
¯h ω
_
R(r) = 0 (1647)
Furthermore, the radial function is parameterize in the form
R(r) = ρ

mz
2

exp
_
−
ρ
2
_
L(ρ) (1648)
which has the physically acceptable asymptotic variation at the boundaries,
ρ → 0 and ρ → ∞. The term proportional to ρ

mz
2

indicates that we seek
the solution which is normalizable at ρ = 0. The exponential factor indicates
that we seek the solution which decays exponentially as ρ → ∞. The ﬁrst
order derivative of R(r) is evaluated as
∂R
∂ρ
= ρ

mz
2

exp
_
−
ρ
2
_
_
∂L
∂ρ
+
[m
z
[
2 ρ
L −
1
2
L
_
(1649)
and the second order derivative is given by a lengthier, but analogous, expres
sion. The diﬀerential equation becomes
− 2 ρ
∂
2
L
∂ρ
2
+ 2 ( ρ − [m
z
[ − 1 )
∂L
∂ρ
+
_
[m
z
[ + 1 −
E
¯h ω
_
L = 0 (1650)
which is the diﬀerential equation for the associated Laguerre polynomials. The
diﬀerential equation can be solved by the Fr¨obenius method, in which we expand
the solution in powers of ρ
L(ρ) =
∞
n=0
a
n
ρ
n
(1651)
On substituting the series into the diﬀerential equation, and demanding that
the coeﬃcient of ρ
n
should vanish, one ﬁnds the recurrence relation
( n + 1 ) ( n + [m
z
[ + 1 ) a
n+1
=
_
n +
1
2
( [m
z
[ + 1 −
E
¯h ω
)
_
a
n
(1652)
which relates a
n+1
to a
n
. Thus, all the coeﬃcients in the series are determined
in terms of a
0
. The value of a
0
is only determined from the normalization of the
wave function. If the series did not truncate, then one can show that the solution
would diverge exponentially as ρ → ∞, and would not be normalizable. Thus,
in order to satisfy the boundary conditions the series must truncate. The series
truncates at the n
r
th term, so a
nr+1
= a
nr+2
= a
nr+3
= . . . = 0, if the
energy eigenvalue is given by
E = ¯ h ω ( 2 n
r
+ [m
z
[ + 1 ) (1653)
358
In Cartesian coordinates, the energy eigenvalue equation separates into two
ordinary diﬀerential equations, and each diﬀerential equation represents a one
dimensional Harmonic Oscillator. The energy eigenvalue corresponds to the
sum of the energy eigenvalues for the two onedimensional problems. Therefore,
the energy is given by
E = ¯ h ω ( n
x
+
1
2
+ n
y
+
1
2
) (1654)
which contains a contribution of ¯ h ω from the energy of the zeropoint motion.
4.6.19 The Spherical Harmonic Oscillator
The potential for the spherically symmetric Harmonic Oscillator is given by
V (r) =
m ω
2
2
r
2
(1655)
As the potential is only a function of r, the angular momentum operators
´
L
2
and
ˆ
L
z
commute with the Hamiltonian. Thus, angular momentum is conserved,
and one can ﬁnd simultaneous eigenstates of the operators
ˆ
H,
´
L
2
and
ˆ
L
z
.
The energy eigenvalue equation for the Spherically Symmetric Harmonic
Oscillator is separable in spherical polar coordinates. If the wave function is
assumed to be of the form
Ψ(r, θ, ϕ) = R
l
(r) Y
l
m
(θ, ϕ) (1656)
then, after using the properties of the spherical harmonics, it is found that the
radial wave function R(r) satisﬁes an equation independent of the variables, θ
and ϕ. The radial equation for the spherically symmetric harmonic oscillator is
given by
−
¯h
2
2 m r
2
d
dr
_
r
2
d R
dr
_
+
_
¯h
2
l ( l + 1 )
2 m r
2
+
m ω
2
r
2
2
_
R = E R
(1657)
The solution can be written in the form
R
l
(r) = r
l
exp
_
−
m ω
2 ¯h
r
2
_
f(r) (1658)
which minimizes the eﬀect of the centrifugal potential barrier at the origin, and
the exponential term takes care of the binding at asymptotic large values of
r. It should be noted that a second solution exists which, at large r, varies
asymptotically as
R(r) ∼ exp
_
+
m ω
2 ¯h
r
2
_
(1659)
359
This solution has been discarded as it is not normalizable, and hence, unphysical.
On changing variable to
ρ =
m ω r
2
¯h
(1660)
and on substituting the wave function into eqn(1657), one ﬁnds
ρ
∂
2
f
∂ρ
2
+
_
3
2
+ l − ρ
_
∂f
∂ρ
+
1
2
_
E
¯h ω
− (
3
2
+ l )
_
f = 0 (1661)
which leads to f(
_
¯ hρ
mω
) being recognized as being proportional to an associated
Laguerre polynomial in the variable ρ. The associated Laguerre polynomial
L
c
a
(z) is a solution of the diﬀerential equation
z
∂
2
∂z
2
L(z) + ( c + 1 − z )
∂
∂z
L(z) + a L(z) = 0 (1662)
The solutions of this equation only satisfy the appropriate boundary conditions
at z → ∞ for speciﬁc values of a. This discrete set of a values give rise to
the discrete eigenvalues of the energy E of the harmonic oscillator. This can be
seen by substituting the Fr¨obenius series for L(z)
L(z) =
n
a
n
z
n
(1663)
into the radial equation and combining like powers of z
n
. The form of L(z)
satisﬁes the diﬀerential equation if the coeﬃcients of each power of z vanish
identically. This procedure results in the recursion relations for the coeﬃcients
a
n
,
( n + 1 ) ( n + c + 1 ) a
n+1
= ( n − a ) a
n
(1664)
If the series did not terminate, then the asymptotic large n behavior would
result in the sum of the series L(ρ) having a positive exponential variation
(L(ρ) ∼ exp[ + ρ ]) since a
n
∼
an−1
n
. If this hypothetical form of the
exponential factor for the series sum was combined with the explicit exponential
factor which we extracted from the radial wave function via the substitution
R(ρ) = ρ
l
2
exp
_
−
ρ
2
_
L(ρ) (1665)
this would lead to a solution which has the second form of asymptotic variation
(R(ρ) ∼ exp[ +
ρ
2
]) as r → ∞. If this were the case, the radial wave
function would not be square integrable and would not represent a bound state.
Therefore, the series must terminate. For the series to terminate, one requires
that n = a for some n. For an integer value of a, say equal to n
r
, the Laguerre
polynomials truncate after the ﬁrst ( n
r
+ 1 ) terms, and all the higher order
coeﬃcients vanish, a
nr+1
= a
nr+2
= . . . = 0. The series expansion always
converges and the wave function satisﬁes appropriate boundary conditions at
r → 0 and at r → ∞. For the isotropic threedimensional harmonic oscillator,
360
enforcing the requirement that the boundary conditions are satisﬁed, i.e. the
series truncates, yields the eigenvalues as
E = ¯ h ω
_
3
2
+ l + 2 n
r
_
(1666)
The factor of
3
2
is the sum of the three independent zeropoint motions, and
2 n
r
+ l are the number of excited quanta. Since each state with given l has a
degeneracy of 2 l + 1, and states with N quanta have a degeneracy corresponding
to the range of values of l from 0 to N, the states with N quanta are highly
degenerate. The degeneracy of a state with energy E = ¯ h ω (
3
2
+ N ) is
equal to
( N + 2 ) ( N + 1 )
2
.
Radial wave functions for the
spherical harmonic oscillator
1
0
1
2
3
0 1 2 3 4
ρ ρρ ρ
1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2
R
n
,
l
1s
2s
3s
n
r
=0,1,2
l=0
Figure 91: The radial wavefunction R
n,l
(r) for the simple harmonic oscillator
for l = 0 and n
r
= 0 , 1 , 2. The radial quantum number n
r
determines the
number of nodes in the radial wave function.
——————————————————————————————————
4.6.20 Exercise 93
Show that the substitution of
R(r) = ρ
l
2
exp
_
−
ρ
2
_
L(ρ) (1667)
361
Radial wave functions for the
spherical harmonic oscillator
0
0.5
1
1.5
2
0 1 2 3 4
ρ ρρ ρ
1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2
R
n
l
1s
1p
1d
n
r
=0
l=0,1,2
Figure 92: The radial wavefunction R
n,l
(r) for the simple harmonic oscillator
for n
r
= 0 and l = 0 , 1 , 2. For nonzero values of l, the centrifugal barrier
prevents particles from reaching the origin.
where
ρ =
m ω
¯h
r
2
(1668)
into the radial equation
−
¯h
2
2 m
1
r
2
∂
∂r
r
2
∂R
∂r
+
¯h
2
l ( l + 1 )
2 m r
2
R +
m ω
2
2
r
2
R = E R (1669)
leads to the diﬀerential equation for the associated Laguerre polynomials.
——————————————————————————————————
4.6.21 Solution 93
On deﬁning the dimensionless variable ρ through
ρ =
m ω
¯h
r
2
(1670)
one ﬁnds that
∂
∂r
=
∂ρ
∂r
∂
∂ρ
= 2
_
m ω
¯h
ρ
1
2
∂
∂ρ
(1671)
362
The radial diﬀerential equation becomes
0 = −
¯h ω
2
_
4
ρ
ρ
1
2
∂
∂ρ
ρ
3
2
∂
∂ρ
−
l ( l + 1 )
ρ
− ρ +
2 E
¯h ω
_
R
= −
¯h ω
2
_
4 ρ
∂
2
∂ρ
2
+ 6
∂
∂ρ
−
l ( l + 1 )
ρ
− ρ +
2 E
¯h ω
_
R
(1672)
The derivatives of
R(r) = ρ
l
2
exp
_
−
ρ
2
_
L(ρ) (1673)
are evaluated as
∂R
∂ρ
=
l
2
ρ
l
2
−1
exp
_
−
ρ
2
_
L(ρ) −
1
2
ρ
l
2
exp
_
−
ρ
2
_
L(ρ) +ρ
l
2
exp
_
−
ρ
2
_
∂
∂ρ
L(ρ)
(1674)
and
∂
2
R
∂ρ
2
=
l
2
(
l
2
− 1 ) ρ
l
2
−2
exp
_
−
ρ
2
_
L(ρ) −
l
4
ρ
l
2
−1
exp
_
−
ρ
2
_
L(ρ)
+
l
2
ρ
l
2
−1
exp
_
−
ρ
2
_
∂
∂ρ
L(ρ)
−
l
4
ρ
l
2
−1
exp
_
−
ρ
2
_
L(ρ) +
1
4
ρ
l
2
exp
_
−
ρ
2
_
L(ρ)
−
1
2
ρ
l
2
exp
_
−
ρ
2
_
∂
∂ρ
L(ρ)
+
l
2
ρ
l
2
−1
exp
_
−
ρ
2
_
∂
∂ρ
L(ρ) −
1
2
ρ
l
2
exp
_
−
ρ
2
_
∂
∂ρ
L(ρ)
+ ρ
l
2
exp
_
−
ρ
2
_
∂
2
∂ρ
2
L(ρ) (1675)
Hence, we have
4 ρ
∂
2
R
∂ρ
2
= ρ
l
2
exp
_
−
ρ
2
_ _
4 ρ
∂
2
∂ρ
2
+ 4 ( l −ρ )
∂
∂ρ
+
l ( l − 2 )
ρ
+ρ −2 l
_
L(ρ)
(1676)
and
6
∂R
∂ρ
= ρ
l
2
exp
_
−
ρ
2
_ _
6
∂
∂ρ
− 3 +
3 l
ρ
_
L(ρ) (1677)
which on substituting into the radial equation leads to
−
¯h ω
2
ρ
l
2
exp
_
−
ρ
2
_
_
4 ρ
∂
2
∂ρ
2
+ ( 4 l + 6 −4 ρ )
∂
∂ρ
+
2 E
¯h ω
−( 2 l + 3 )
_
L(ρ) = 0
(1678)
363
On cancelling the common factor and dividing by 4, one obtains
_
ρ
∂
2
∂ρ
2
+ ( l +
3
2
− ρ )
∂
∂ρ
+
E
2 ¯h ω
−
1
4
( 2 l + 3 )
_
L(ρ) = 0 (1679)
which is the associated Laguerre equation, as was to be shown.
——————————————————————————————————
4.6.22 Exercise 94
Consider the set of energy eigenstates of the isotropic harmonic oscillator with
E
¯ h ω
=
3
2
,
5
2
and
7
2
. Show that the eigenfunctions of the lowest energy eigen
states are degenerate and that the wave functions and degeneracy found in the
spherical polar representation coincide with the representation in terms of three
independent onedimensional harmonic oscillators. Evaluate the degeneracy of
the energy eigenvalue with N quanta present.
——————————————————————————————————
The symmetry group of the spherical harmonic oscillator.
The degeneracy of a spherical harmonic oscillator can be discussed in terms
of operators which, when acting on one state, produce other states degenerate
with it. These operators only have ﬁnite matrix elements between degenerate
states and must commute with the Hamiltonian. The commutators of these op
erators must also commute with the Hamiltonian and, therefore, the operators
should generate a Lie algebra. Since the angular momentum must commute
with the Hamiltonian, the Lie algebra of the threedimensional harmonic oscil
lator should be greater than, and include, the angular momentum Lie algebra.
The Hamiltonian of the threedimensional harmonic oscillator can be written
in terms of the creation and annihilation operators of the three onedimensional
harmonic oscillators via
ˆ
H =
¯hω
2
3
i=1
( a
†
i
a
i
+ a
i
a
†
i
) (1680)
Using the expressions for the position and momentum operators in terms of the
creation and annihilation operators
ˆ x
j
=
_
¯h
2 m ω
_1
2
_
a
†
j
+ a
j
_
(1681)
and
ˆ p
k
= i
_
¯h m ω
2
_1
2
_
a
†
k
− a
k
_
(1682)
364
one can show that the operators representing the components of the angular
momentum are given by
ˆ
L
i
= − i ¯h
j,k
i,j,k
a
†
j
a
k
(1683)
where
i,j,k
is the antisymmetric LeviCivita symbol. The states which corre
spond to the same total number of quanta are degenerate. The Lie algebra of
the twodimensional x −y subspace is generated by the diagonal operator
ˆ τ
z
=
1
2
( a
†
1
a
1
− a
†
2
a
2
) (1684)
and the ladder operators
ˆ τ
+
= a
†
1
a
2
ˆ τ
−
= a
†
2
a
1
(1685)
These bilinear ˆ τ operators do not change the total number of quanta and trans
form an energy eigenstate into eigenstates that are degenerate with it. The set
of ˆ τ operators are linearly independent and obey similar commutation rela
tions to the angular momentum operators. Hence, the degeneracy of the two
dimensional harmonic oscillator is describable by a SU(2) symmetry group and
is a Lie algebra of rank unity
25
. The symmetry group of the threedimensional
harmonic oscillator must contain the SU(2) group as a subgroup. For the
threedimensional harmonic oscillator, the Lie algebra is supplemented by the
diagonal operator
ˆ
λ =
1
2
√
3
( a
†
1
a
1
+ a
†
2
a
2
− 2 a
†
3
a
3
) (1686)
and, therefore, is a Lie algebra of rank 2. The Lie algebra of the three
dimensional harmonic oscillator also involves the following set of ladder op
erators
ˆ
β
+
= a
†
1
a
3
ˆ
β
−
= a
†
2
a
3
ˆ γ
+
= a
†
3
a
2
ˆ γ
−
= a
†
3
a
1
(1687)
Hence, the Lie algebra contains eight generators and corresponds to the SU(3)
Lie group
26
.
25
The rank of a Lie algebra is given by the maximal number of (linearly independent)
simultaneously commuting operators in the algebra, excluding the Casimir operators. The
Casimir operators are nonlinear combinations of the generators that commute with every
generator of the Lie algebra. For semisimple Lie groups of rank r, there are r Casimir
operators, and their eigenvalues uniquely characterize the multiplets of the group.
26
The special unitary group in N dimensions SU(N) contains N
2
−1 generators. The SU(N)
symmetry groups are discussed by S. Sternberg in Group Theory and Physics, Cambridge
University Press, (1994).
365
4.6.23 The Bound States of the Coulomb Potential
The timeindependent Schr¨odinger equation
27
for the attractive Coulomb po
tential is
_
−
¯h
2
2 m r
2
∂
∂r
_
r
2
∂
∂r
_
+
¯h
2
l ( l + 1 )
2 m r
2
−
Ze
2
r
_
R
E,l
(r) = E R
E,l
(r)
(1688)
where Z is the atomic number.
0.75
0.5
0.25
0
0.25
30 20 10 0 10 20 30
r/r
0
V
(
r
)
/
V
(
r
0
)
=

r
0
/
r
E
0
E
1
E
2
E
3
Figure 93: The radially symmetric potential, V (r), for the hydrogen atom. The
energy eigenvalues are denoted by horizontal lines.
We introduce a dimensionless parameter
ρ =
_
− 2 m E
¯h
2
r (1689)
and a dimensionless constant ρ
0
such that
V (r)
E
=
ρ
0
ρ
(1690)
so that
ρ
0
=
_
2 m
− E
Z e
2
¯h
(1691)
27
E. Schr¨odinger, Ann. Phys. (Leipzig) 79, 361 (1926).
366
Then, the radial wave function is expressed in the form
R
E,l
(r) = ρ
l
exp[ − ρ ] f(ρ) (1692)
which explicitly displays the limiting behavior needed at the boundaries. The
factor proportional to ρ
l
is introduced so that the wave function satisﬁes the
Schr¨odinger equation near the origin, where the centrifugal barrier dominates
the potential. The exponential term describes the localization of the bound
particle to the region around the origin. It should be noted that there is a
second independent solution for which R would diverge at large ρ as exp[ + ρ ]
but this second solution is to be discarded as it is not normalizable. Substituting
the expression (1692) in the Schr¨odinger equation yields
∂
2
f
∂ρ
2
+ 2
_
l + 1
ρ
− 1
_
∂f
∂ρ
−
_
2 ( l + 1 ) − ρ
0
ρ
_
f = 0 (1693)
——————————————————————————————————
Mathematical details
In terms of the dimensionless variables, the equation for the radial wave
function R(r) takes the form
−
∂
2
R
∂ρ
2
−
2
ρ
∂R
∂ρ
+
_
l ( l + 1 )
ρ
2
+ 1
_
R −
ρ
0
ρ
R = 0 (1694)
We shall substitute the radial wave function in the form
R(r) = ρ
l
exp[ − ρ ] f(ρ) (1695)
into the above equation. The detailed form of R was chosen to satisfy our
boundary conditions. The ﬁrst derivative of R is calculated as
∂R
∂ρ
= ρ
l
exp[ − ρ ]
_
l
ρ
− 1 +
∂
∂ρ
_
f(ρ) (1696)
The second derivative of R is calculated as
∂
2
R
∂ρ
2
= ρ
l
exp[ − ρ ]
_
l ( l − 1 )
ρ
2
−
2 l
ρ
+ 1
_
f(ρ)
+ ρ
l
exp[ − ρ ] 2
_
l
ρ
− 1
_
∂f
∂ρ
+ ρ
l
exp[ − ρ ]
∂
2
f
∂ρ
2
(1697)
On substituting these expressions in eqn(1694), one ﬁnds
∂
2
f
∂ρ
2
+ 2
_
l + 1
ρ
− 1
_
∂f
∂ρ
−
_
2 ( l + 1 ) − ρ
0
ρ
_
f = 0 (1698)
367
——————————————————————————————————
On multiplying by ρ, this equation reduces to the diﬀerential equation for the
associated Laguerre polynomials. On multiplying by ρ, this equation reduces
to the equation for the associated Laguerre polynomials L(z) in the variable
z = 2 ρ,
z
∂
2
L
∂z
2
+
_
2 ( l + 1 ) − z
_
∂L
∂z
+
_
ρ
0
2
− l − 1
_
L = 0 (1699)
The solution has to satisfy the boundary condition at the origin ρ = 0 and at
ρ → ∞. The solution for f(ρ) can be obtained as a Fr¨obenius series
f(ρ) =
n=0
a
n
ρ
n
(1700)
On introducing this power series ansatz for the solution into the diﬀerential
equation (1693) and combining terms of similar order, one ﬁnds a polynomial
equation. The coeﬃcients of the terms of various powers of ρ in the resulting
polynomial must vanish identically. This procedure leads to a recursion relation
which relates the coeﬃcients a
n
with diﬀerent n. The recursion relation is found
as
a
n+1
( n + 1 ) ( n + 2 l + 2 ) = a
n
_
2 ( n + l + 1 ) − ρ
0
_
(1701)
If the series did not terminate, then one can show that the sum of the inﬁnite
series would be of order exp[ + 2 ρ ] for large ρ. This would result in the
appearance of the second solution with the unphysical asymptotic behavior at
large r
lim
r → ∞
R(r) ∼ ρ
l
exp
_
+ ρ
_
(1702)
but this would not satisfy our boundary conditions. Therefore, one insists that
the series must truncate if it is to represent a bound state. The series truncates
at an integer value of n, say n
r
, if
ρ
0
= 2 ( n
r
+ l + 1 ) (1703)
and represents a bound state with radial quantum number n
r
. On using
ρ
0
=
_
2 m
− E
Z e
2
¯h
(1704)
one ﬁnds the nonrelativistic formula for the energy eigenvalues
E = −
Z
2
e
4
m
2 ¯h
2
( n
r
+ l + 1 )
2
(1705)
368
Furthermore, on deﬁning a characteristic length scale r
0
in terms of ρ
0
and
eqn(1689), one has
r
0
=
¸
¯h
2
− 2 m E
ρ
0
(1706)
Therefore, one has
r
0
= 2 ( n
r
+ l + 1 )
2
¯h
2
Z m e
2
(1707)
and one identiﬁes the characteristic length scale with twice the Bohr radius.
The principal quantum number n is usually deﬁned as
n =
ρ
0
2
= ( n
r
+ l + 1 ) (1708)
where l is the quantum number corresponding to the orbital angular momentum
and n
r
is the radial quantum number.
The lowest energy state or ground state corresponds to l = 0 and n
r
=
0. The states with higher values of E are degenerate since for these energies,
diﬀerent values of n
r
and l can be combined to give the same value of ρ
0
or n.
The possible values of l for a ﬁxed ρ
0
are given by l = 0, 1, 2, ..... ,
ρ0
2
− 1.
Since each l value has a degeneracy of 2 l + 1 due to the diﬀerent m values,
the total degeneracy is
ρ
0
2
−1
l=0
( 2 l + 1 ) =
_
ρ
0
2
_
2
= n
2
(1709)
Thus, the energy eigenfunctions corresponding to the bound state energy E
n
are n
2
fold degenerate, if we neglect spin.
Note that if we had deformed the Coulomb potential slightly, the degeneracy
between the states with principal quantum number n but with diﬀerent orbital
angular momentum l would be lifted. This occurs in H, if one considers the
eﬀect of the ﬁnite size of the nucleus.
The “accidental degeneracy” of the energy eigenvalues E
n
of the hydrogen
atom, corresponding to the states with principal quantum number n but with
diﬀerent angular momentum quantum numbers l, involves the group SO(4).
More speciﬁcally, it can be shown that the energy eigenstates of the hydrogen
atom can be transformed into the eigenstates of a free rotor in a fourdimensional
space
28
.
——————————————————————————————————
28
V.A. Fock, Z. Phys. 98, 145 (1935).
369
0.2
0.1
0
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.8
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20
r / a
R
n
,
0
(
r
)
l = 0
n = 1
n = 2
n = 3
Figure 94: The radial wave functions for the hydrogen atom R
n,l
(r), for l =
0 , 1 , 2. The radial quantum number n
r
determines the number of nodes in
the wave function.
0.05
0
0.05
0.1
0.15
0.2
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20
r / a
R
n
,
1
(
r
)
l = 1
n = 2
n = 3
0
0.01
0.02
0.03
0.04
0.05
0.06
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20
r / a
R
n
,
2
(
r
)
l = 2
n = 3
370
0
0.2
0.4
0.6
0 1 2 3 4
r/a
0
r
2
R
1
,
0
2
(
r
)
n = 1
l = 0
Figure 95: The probability density P(r) = r
2
[ R
n,l
(r) [
2
for ﬁnding an electron
at a distance r from the nucleus, for n = 1 , 2 , 3 and diﬀerent l values.
0
0.05
0.1
0.15
0.2
0.25
0 2 4 6 8 10 12
r/a
0
r
2
R
2
,
l
2
(
r
)
n = 2
l = 1 l = 0
0
0.03
0.06
0.09
0.12
0 4 8 12 16 20
r/a
0
r
2
R
3
,
l
2
(
r
)
n = 3
l = 0
l = 1
l = 2
371
0
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
r / a
0
P
(
r
)
n = 2
l = 1 l = 0
Figure 96: The probability density P(r) = r
2
[ R
n,l
(r) [
2
for ﬁnding an electron
at a distance r from the nucleus, for n = 2 , 3 and diﬀerent l values. The
classical probability densities are also shown. The classical probability densities
are calculated with a ﬁxed energy E and angular momentum l, but unknown
initial position r. Only the classical particle with l = 0 reaches the origin,
however, it has a vanishing probability density there as the speed tends to
inﬁnity as r → 0.
0
0.05
0.1
0.15
0.2
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20
r / a
0
P
(
r
)
n = 3
l = 1
l = 0
l = 2
372
4.6.24 Exercise 95
Derive the recursion relation for the series expansion of the associated Laguerre
polynomials that occur in the radial wave functions of electrons in the bound
states of Hydrogen atoms and determine the condition that the series terminates
after n terms.
——————————————————————————————————
4.6.25 Exercise 96
An atom of tritium is in its ground state when the nucleus suddenly decays
into a helium nucleus along with the emission of a fast electron (and an anti
neutrino) which leaves the atom without perturbing the extranuclear electron.
Find the probability that the remaining He
+
atom will be left in the state with
n = 1, l = 0 and n = 2, l = 0. What is the selection rule for the l quantum
number?
——————————————————————————————————
4.6.26 Solution 96
The electronic state immediately before the decay is identical to that of the
n = 1, l = 0 state of H, i.e. Z = 1. Then,
Ψ
Z=1,n=1,l=0
(r) =
1
√
π
a
−
3
2
0
exp
_
−
r
a
0
_
(1710)
The probability that the electron falls into the energy levels of He
+
is given by
the overlap with the respective Z = 2 wave functions
Ψ
Z=2,n=1,l=0
(r) =
1
√
π
_
2
a
0
_3
2
exp
_
− 2
r
a
0
_
(1711)
and
Ψ
Z=2,n=2,l=0
(r) =
1
√
π
_
1
a
0
_3
2
_
1 −
r
a
0
_
exp
_
−
r
a
0
_
(1712)
The matrix elements between the Z = 1 and Z = 2 states are evaluated via
scaling and repeated integration by parts as
C
n=1,l=0
= 4 π
_
∞
0
dr r
2
Ψ
∗
Z=1,n=1,l=0
(r) Ψ
Z=2,n=1,l=0
(r)
= 4 π
8
1
2
π a
3
0
_
∞
0
dr r
2
exp
_
− 3
r
a
0
_
373
= 2
7
2
_
∞
0
dx x
2
exp
_
− 3 x
_
=
2
9
2
3
3
(1713)
Thus, the probability of the electron falling into the ground state is equal to
P(0) =
2
9
3
6
(1714)
Similarly,
C
n=2,l=0
= 4 π
_
∞
0
dr r
2
Ψ
∗
Z=1,n=1,l=0
(r) Ψ
Z=2,n=2,l=0
(r)
= 4 π
1
π a
3
0
_
∞
0
dr r
2
_
1 −
r
a
0
_
exp
_
− 2
r
a
0
_
= 4
_
∞
0
dx x
2
_
1 − x
_
exp
_
− 2 x
_
= −
1
2
(1715)
Thus, the probability of the electron falling into the ﬁrst excited state is equal
to
P(1) =
1
2
2
(1716)
The selection rule is ∆l = 0. This follows as the potential is spherically symmet
ric, and so angular momentum is conserved. Mathematically this is manifested
by the angular part of the wave function being given by spherical harmonics,
and also by the fact that the spherical harmonics with diﬀerent l are orthogonal.
——————————————————————————————————
4.6.27 Exercise 97
A tritium atom decays via the nuclear reaction
3
H →
3
He + e
−
+ ν (1717)
and a fast electron leaves the atom almost instantaneously. Calculate the ex
pectation value of the energy for the remaining electron. The probability that
the remaining energy is in the nth bound state is denoted by P(n). It is found
that
∞
n=1
P(n) = 0.9755 (1718)
and
∞
n=1
P(n)
1
n
2
= 0.76660 (1719)
374
What is the probability that the Helium ion is doubly ionized and what is the
average energy of the second emitted electron?
——————————————————————————————————
4.6.28 Ladder Operators for the Hydrogen Atom
The radial equation for the energy eigenstates of Hydrogen atom can be written
in a dimensionless form. This is achieved by introducing a length scale b deﬁned
by
b =
¯h
2
Z e
2
m
(1720)
and a dimensionless variable ρ deﬁned by
ρ =
r
b
(1721)
The energy eigenvalue can then be expressed in dimensionless form as
= E
_
2 m b
2
¯h
2
_
= E
_
2 ¯h
2
Z
2
e
4
m
_
=
_
E
R
_
(1722)
Thus, the dimensionless energy corresponds to the value of E when expressed
in units of Rydbergs. In dimensionless units, the radial equation takes the form
_
−
∂
2
∂ρ
2
+
l ( l + 1 )
ρ
2
−
2
ρ
_
u
n,l
= u
n,l
(1723)
where
u
n,l
(ρ) = ρ R
n,l
(ρ) (1724)
is the reduced radial wave function. The bound state wave functions have nega
tive eigenvalues, are normalizable, satisfy the boundary condition lim
ρ→0
u
n,l
(ρ) →
ρ
l+1
at ρ = 0, and vanish asymptotically as
lim
ρ→∞
u
n,l
(ρ) → exp
_
−
√
− ρ
_
(1725)
when ρ → ∞. The radial equation can be solved for the bound states using
appropriate raising and lowering operators.
The lowering operator
ˆ
A
−
l
is deﬁned as
ˆ
A
−
l
=
∂
∂ρ
+
l + 1
ρ
−
1
l + 1
(1726)
375
and the raising operator
ˆ
A
+
l
is deﬁned as the Hermitean conjugate of the low
ering operator
ˆ
A
+
l
= −
∂
∂ρ
+
l + 1
ρ
−
1
l + 1
(1727)
It immediately follows that
ˆ
A
−
l
ˆ
A
+
l
=
_
−
∂
2
∂ρ
2
+
l ( l + 1 )
ρ
2
−
2
ρ
+
1
( l + 1 )
2
_
(1728)
so the radial Schr¨odinger equation can be written as
_
ˆ
A
−
l
ˆ
A
+
l
−
1
( l + 1 )
2
_
u
n,l
= u
n,l
(1729)
The product of the raising and lowering operators, taken in the reverse order,
can be expressed as
ˆ
A
+
l
ˆ
A
−
l
=
_
−
∂
2
∂ρ
2
+
( l + 2 ) ( l + 1 )
ρ
2
−
2
ρ
+
1
( l + 1 )
2
_
(1730)
Hence, one has the relation
ˆ
A
+
l
ˆ
A
−
l
−
1
( l + 1 )
2
=
ˆ
A
−
l+1
ˆ
A
+
l+1
−
1
( l + 2 )
2
(1731)
On multiplying the radial Schr¨odinger equation (as expressed in the form of
eqn(1729)) by the raising operator
ˆ
A
+
l
, one has
ˆ
A
+
l
_
ˆ
A
−
l
ˆ
A
+
l
−
1
( l + 1 )
2
_
u
n,l
=
ˆ
A
+
l
u
n,l
_
ˆ
A
+
l
ˆ
A
−
l
−
1
( l + 1 )
2
_
ˆ
A
+
l
u
n,l
=
ˆ
A
+
l
u
n,l
(1732)
On substitution of the relation expressed by eqn(1731) in the above equation,
one ﬁnds
_
ˆ
A
−
l+1
ˆ
A
+
l+1
−
1
( l + 2 )
2
_
ˆ
A
+
l
u
n,l
=
ˆ
A
+
l
u
n,l
(1733)
Hence, we see that
ˆ
A
+
l
u
n,l
is an eigenstate of the radial Schr¨odinger equation
with angular momentum l
= l + 1 and energy eigenvalue . Thus,
ˆ
A
+
l
is a
raising operator for the radial wave function.
The eigenstates with angular momentum l
= l −1 can be obtained with the
aid of the lowering operator. This can be shown by considering the Schr¨odinger
equation written in the form
_
ˆ
A
+
l−1
ˆ
A
−
l−1
−
1
l
2
_
u
n,l
= u
n,l
(1734)
376
On applying
ˆ
A
−
l−1
to this equation, one ﬁnds
ˆ
A
−
l−1
_
ˆ
A
+
l−1
ˆ
A
−
l−1
−
1
l
2
_
u
n,l
=
ˆ
A
−
l−1
u
n,l
_
ˆ
A
−
l−1
ˆ
A
+
l−1
−
1
l
2
_
ˆ
A
−
l−1
u
n,l
=
ˆ
A
−
l−1
u
n,l
_
ˆ
A
+
l−2
ˆ
A
−
l−2
−
1
( l − 1 )
2
_
ˆ
A
−
l−1
u
n,l
=
ˆ
A
−
l−1
u
n,l
(1735)
where we have used eqn(1731) in the second line. On comparison of eqn(1735)
with eqn(1734), one ﬁnds that
ˆ
A
−
l−1
u
n,l
is an eigenstate with eigenvalue and
angular momentum l
= l −1.
The energy eigenvalue satisﬁes an inequality which can be found directly
from the Radial Schr¨odinger equation
ˆ
A
−
l
ˆ
A
+
l
u
n,l
=
_
1
( l + 1 )
2
+
_
u
n,l
(1736)
by multiplying by u
∗
n,l
and integrating over ρ
29
_
∞
0
dρ u
∗
n,l
ˆ
A
−
l
ˆ
A
+
l
u
n,l
=
_
∞
0
dρ u
∗
n,l
_
1
( l + 1 )
2
+
_
u
n,l
(1737)
However, u
n,l
is normalized to unity and
ˆ
A
−
l
is the Hermitean conjugate of
ˆ
A
+
l
,
so
_
∞
0
dρ [
ˆ
A
+
l
u
n,l
[
2
=
_
1
( l + 1 )
2
+
_
(1738)
Since the lefthand side is positive, one ﬁnds the inequality
≥ −
1
( l + 1 )
2
(1739)
The inequality
≥ −
1
( l + 1 )
2
(1740)
involving the (negative) bound state energy eigenvalue and the angular mo
mentum indicates that the angular momentum raising process must terminate.
If this terminates for some value of l, say l
max
, then the termination condition
is expressed as
ˆ
A
+
lmax
u
n,lmax
= 0 (1741)
29
Due to the factor of ρ which appears in the deﬁnition of u
n,l
in terms of the radial func
tion R
n,l
(ρ), the threedimensional radial equation is reduced to an eﬀective onedimensional
Schr¨odinger equation. The factor of ρ in u
n,l
also reduces the appropriate measure for the
radial integration is reduced from ρ
2
to unity, as expected for an eﬀective onedimensional
geometry.
377
On using the termination condition in the eigenvalue equation
_
ˆ
A
−
lmax
ˆ
A
+
lmax
−
1
( l
max
+ 1 )
2
_
u
n,lmax
= u
n,lmax
(1742)
so that the ﬁrst term in the parenthesis is zero, one ﬁnds
= −
1
( l
max
+ 1 )
2
(1743)
or
= −
1
n
2
(1744)
where n = ( l
max
+ 1 ) is the principal quantum number.
The radial functions u
n,l
can be obtained by ﬁrst solving the ﬁrst order dif
ferential equation for u
n,lmax
that expresses the termination and then, using the
lowering operator successively to ﬁnd all the eigenfunctions with lower l values.
The termination condition
ˆ
A
+
lmax
u
n,lmax
= 0 (1745)
is expressed as
∂u
n,lmax
∂ρ
=
_
n
ρ
−
1
n
_
u
n,lmax
(1746)
This can be integrated to yield
ln u
n,lmax
= A + n ln ρ −
ρ
n
(1747)
where A is a constant of integration. On exponentiating, one ﬁnds the radial
wave function has the form
u
n,lmax
= C ρ
n
exp
_
−
ρ
n
_
(1748)
where the constant C has to be determined from the normalization condition.
The above form of u
n,l
(ρ) yields a solution for the radial wave function which
does satisfy the correct boundary conditions.
The radial wave function with angular momentum l = l
max
−1 is obtained
from u
n,lmax
by the action of the lowering operator
u
n,lmax−1
∝
ˆ
A
−
lmax−1
u
n,lmax
(1749)
or, more explicitly
u
n,lmax−1
∝
_
∂
∂ρ
+
( n − 1 )
ρ
−
1
( n − 1 )
_
u
n,lmax
∝
_
1 −
ρ
n ( n − 1 )
_
ρ
n−1
exp
_
−
ρ
n
_
(1750)
378
Table 8: Radial wave functions R
n,l
(ρ) for the Coulomb potential, where ρ =
Z r
a
. The Radial wave functions are normalized so that
_
∞
0
dρ ρ
2
R
n,l
(ρ)
2
= 1.
n = 1 l = 0 2 exp
_
− ρ
_
n = 2 l = 0
1
√
2
_
1 −
ρ
2
_
exp
_
−
ρ
2
_
l = 1
1
2
√
6
ρ exp
_
−
ρ
2
_
n = 3 l = 0
2
3
3
2
_
1 −
2
3
ρ +
2
27
ρ
2
_
exp
_
−
ρ
3
_
l = 1
2
5
2
3
7
2
_
1 −
ρ
6
_
ρ exp
_
−
ρ
3
_
l = 2
2
3
2
3
9
2
√
5
ρ
2
exp
_
−
ρ
3
_
Therefore, the radial functions corresponding to smaller values of l can be ob
tained by sequentially operating with the appropriate
ˆ
A
−
l−1
.
4.6.29 Rydberg Wave Packets
The correspondence between the classical picture of the orbital motion of elec
trons in the hydrogen atom and the quantum mechanical picture can be seen by
examining the time dependence of the peak in the probability density [ Ψ(r, θ, ϕ; t) [
2
.
For convenience, we shall consider motion in the plane θ =
π
2
, and so shall
set m to the maximal value m = l. In this case, due to the θ dependence
given by Θ
l
l
(θ) ∝ sin
l
θ, the probability density is maximal at θ =
π
2
. To
obtain a time dependence of the probability, it is necessary to superimpose en
ergy eigenstates to produce a wave packet. In particular, to obtain a probability
density that shows a timedependent variation in the ϕ dependence, eigenstates
corresponding to diﬀerent energy eigenvalues must be superimposed. We shall
superimpose the energy eigenstates with l = n − 1, which are given by
Ψ
n,n−1,n−1
(r, θ, ϕ) = ℵ
−1
_
r
a
0
_
n−1
exp
_
−
r
n a
0
_
sin
n−1
θ exp
_
i ( n −1 ) ϕ
_
(1751)
379
where a
0
=
¯ h
2
m e
2
is the Bohr radius, and ℵ is the normalization. This set of
energy eigenstates correspond to circular orbits, as the radial quantum number
n
r
= 0. For the circular orbits, the principal quantum number n is just given
by l + 1. The energy eigenvalues are given by
E
n
= −
m e
4
2 ¯h
2
n
2
(1752)
These states have radii deﬁned by the maxima in
r
2
¸
¸
¸
¸
Ψ
n,n−1,n−1
(r, θ, ϕ)
¸
¸
¸
¸
2
(1753)
which occur at r = n
2
a
0
. The products of the uncertainties in the radial
position and the radial momentum are given by
( ∆r )
rms
( ∆p
r
)
rms
=
¯h
2
_
1 +
1
2 n
+ . . .
_
(1754)
and also for the angular coordinates
( ∆θ )
rms
( ∆p
θ
)
rms
=
¯h
2
_
1 +
1
4 n
+ . . .
_
(1755)
A particular wave packet is represented by the wave function
Ψ(r; t) =
n
C
n
Ψ
n,n−1,n−1
(r, θ, ϕ) exp
_
−
i t
¯h
E
n
_
(1756)
where the distribution of C
n
produces a mean value of n denoted by n, and a
width given by ∆n
rms
.
The probability density shows that the wave packet describes periodic cir
cular orbits, with period given by the Kepler period T
K
. This is seen in ﬁg(98).
This can be derived from the expansion of the exponential factor in the wave
packet about n
exp
_
i ( n ϕ −
t
¯h
E
n
)
_
exp
_
i ( n − n )
_
ϕ −
t
¯h
_
∂E
n
∂n
_¸
¸
¸
¸
n=n
_ _
. . . (1757)
The ﬁrst factor being a common overall phase factor does not appear in the
probability density. If the terms of order ( n − n )
2
can be neglected, the
sum over n of the second factor produces a ﬁnite Fourier series. The resulting
approximation to the wave packet is 2 π periodic in the variable
ϕ −
t
¯h
_
∂E
n
∂n
_¸
¸
¸
¸
n=n
(1758)
380
0
0.01
0.02
0.03
0.04
0.05
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
r / a
0
P
(
r
)
n = 6
l = 5 l = 0
Figure 97: A comparison of the quantum mechanical probability densities of the
circular orbit with l = n − 1 (blue) and the linear orbit l = 0 (red). For the
circular orbit with n = l + 1, the zeropoint radial motion becomes negligible
for large values of l and the radial wave function becomes highly peaked at the
radius of the orbit. The classical probability densities are denoted by the broken
lines.
Thus, the Kepler period is given by
2 π
T
K
=
1
¯h
_
∂E
n
∂n
_¸
¸
¸
¸
n=n
=
m e
4
¯h
3
n
3
(1759)
or
T
K
=
2 π ¯h
3
n
3
m e
4
= 2 π
_
¯ h
2
n
2
m e
2
_
_
e
2
¯ h n
_
=
2 π a
0
n
2
v
(1760)
which is the size of the circular orbit divided by the average speed v. The
381
average speed is given in terms of the ﬁne structure constant and the velocity
of light c via
v =
e
2
¯h n
=
c
n
e
2
¯h c
(1761)
The terms of order ( n − n )
2
have the eﬀect of dephasing the oscillations. At
ﬁrst, the ϕ dependence of the wave packets distort by spreading slowly in time.
This increases the range of ϕ in which the wave packets have an appreciable
magnitude. The initial spreading is similar to the spreading of a wave packet
for a free particle. However, at large times, the wave packet recurs or reforms as
is shown in ﬁg(99). The time scale for this phenomenon is found by expanding
the energy about the average value of n,
E
n
= E
n
+ ( n − n )
∂E
∂n
¸
¸
¸
¸
n=n
+
1
2
( n − n )
2
∂
2
E
∂n
2
¸
¸
¸
¸
n=n
(1762)
The recurrence time T
R
is deﬁned via
−
1
¯h
∂
2
E
∂n
2
¸
¸
¸
¸
n=n
=
2 π
T
R
(1763)
which yields
T
R
=
n
3
T
K
(1764)
The recurrence time causes the wave function to dephase and recur at time
t = T
R
but with a phase shift of π. The phenomenon of recurrence is a quan
tum eﬀect involving the nonlinear dependence of the energy eigenvalues
30
.
4.6.30 Laguerre Polynomials
Laguerre’s diﬀerential equation is
z
∂
2
φ
n
∂z
2
+ ( 1 − z )
∂φ
n
∂z
+ n φ
n
= 0 (1765)
The solution can be represented by a contour integral
φ
n
(z) =
_
dt
2 π i
exp
_
−
z t
1 − t
_
1
( 1 − t ) t
n+1
(1766)
where the contour runs around a circle centered on the origin, with radius less
than unity. We shall show that this is a solution of the diﬀerential equation.
First we shall evaluate the derivatives
∂φ
n
(z)
∂z
= −
_
dt
2 π i
exp
_
−
z t
1 − t
_
t
( 1 − t )
2
t
n+1
(1767)
30
C. R. Stroud Jr. Physics and Probability, Essays in honor of E. T. Jaynes, Grandy and
Milonini editors, Cambridge University Press (1993).
382
Figure 98: The time dependence of the probability density for an electron in a
circular orbit, at times of order T
K
. The wave packet rotates with period T
k
.
[After C. R. Stroud Jr. (1993).]
and
∂
2
φ
n
(z)
∂z
2
= +
_
dt
2 π i
exp
_
−
z t
1 − t
_
t
2
( 1 − t )
3
t
n+1
(1768)
383
Figure 99: The time dependence of the probability density for an electron in
a circular orbit, at large times. At large times the wave packet recurs. [After
C. R. Stroud Jr. (1993).]
Then, on substituting the derivatives into the diﬀerential equation, one obtains
0 =
_
dt
2 π i
exp
_
−
z t
1 − t
_
1
( 1 − t )
3
t
n+1
_
z t
2
−t ( 1 −t ) ( 1 −z ) +n ( 1 −t )
2
_
(1769)
The right hand side is identiﬁed as the integral of a perfect diﬀerential
0 = −
_
dt
2 π i
∂
∂t
_
exp
_
−
z t
1 − t
_
1
( 1 − t ) t
n
_
(1770)
On integrating the perfect diﬀerential around a closed contour without crossing
a branch point, we ﬁnd zero. Thus, we have veriﬁed that the expression given
by the contour integral does satisfy Laguerre’s equation.
We shall denote the solution of Laguerre’s equation by
L
n
(z) =
_
dt
2 π i
exp
_
−
z t
1 − t
_
1
( 1 − t ) t
n+1
(1771)
The generating function for the Laguerre polynomials, G(z, t) can be found
directly from this representation. Let
G(z, t) =
∞
n=0
L
n
(z) t
n
(1772)
384
then divide by t
n+1
and integrate around a closed contour containing the origin.
This procedure yields
Contour of Integration
2
1
0
1
2
2 1 0 1 2
Re t
I
m
t
Figure 100: The contour for the integration in eqn(1771). The circular contour
encloses the pole at the origin but excludes the pole at t = 1. The two poles of
the integrand are marked by the crosses.
_
dt
2 π i
G(z, t)
t
n+1
=
m
L
m
(z)
_
dt
2 π i
t
m
t
n+1
= L
n
(z) (1773)
since Cauchy’s theorem implies only the term with n = m is nonzero. On
comparing the ﬁrst line with the integral expression for L
n
(z), we identify
G(z, t) =
exp
_
−
z t
1 − t
_
( 1 − t )
(1774)
Thus, we have the generating function series expansion
exp
_
−
z t
1 − t
_
( 1 − t )
=
∞
n=0
L
n
(z) t
n
(1775)
for t < 1.
385
A Rodriguez formula for the solution can be found by performing the non
linear transformation
t z
1 − t
= s − z (1776)
which can be solved for t as
t =
s − z
s
(1777)
In this variable, the contour integral in eqn(1771) takes on the form
L
n
(z) = exp [ z ]
_
ds
2 π i
s
n
exp[ − s ]
( s − z )
n+1
(1778)
where the new contour encloses the point s = z which corresponds to t = 0.
By Cauchy’s theorem, this integral can be seen to be the nth order derivative
of the numerator evaluated at the pole
L
n
(z) =
exp [ z ]
n!
∂
n
∂z
n
_
z
n
exp[ − z ]
_
(1779)
for integral n.
The Laguerre diﬀerential operator is not Hermitean, but if the solution is
expressed as
Φ
n
(z) = exp
_
−
z
2
_
L
n
(z) (1780)
then the corresponding operator is Hermitean, and the diﬀerential equation
becomes
z
∂
2
Φ
n
∂z
2
+
∂Φ
n
∂z
+ ( n +
1
2
−
z
4
) Φ
n
(z) = 0 (1781)
Therefore, the Laguerre polynomials satisfy the orthogonality condition
_
∞
0
dz exp
_
− z
_
L
m
(z) L
n
(z) = δ
m−n
(1782)
The Associated Laguerre polynomials are deﬁned by
L
k
n
(z) = ( − 1 )
k
∂
k
∂z
k
L
n+k
(z) (1783)
For ﬁxed k, one can ﬁnd a generating function for L
k
n
(z) from the generating
function for the Laguerre polynomials
exp
_
−
z t
1 − t
_
( 1 − t )
=
∞
n=−k
L
n+k
(z) t
n+k
(1784)
386
by diﬀerentiating k times, with respect to z, obtaining
exp
_
−
z t
1 − t
_
t
k
( 1 − t )
k+1
=
∞
n=−k
( − 1 )
k
∂
k
∂z
k
L
n+k
(z) t
n+k
(1785)
Hence, since L
n+k
(z) is a polynomial with highest order term of z
n+k
, the sum
has its ﬁrst nonzero term when n = 0 and
exp
_
−
z t
1 − t
_
( 1 − t )
k+1
=
∞
n=0
L
k
n
(z) t
n
(1786)
which is the generating function expansion for the associated Laguerre poly
nomials. The expansion also shows that the associated Laguerre polynomials
reduce to the Laguerre polynomials when k = 0.
The associated Laguerre polynomials satisfy the diﬀerential equation
z
∂
2
∂z
2
L
k
n
+ ( k + 1 − z )
∂
∂z
L
k
n
+ n L
k
n
= 0 (1787)
The associated Laguerre polynomials have the Rodriguez representation
L
k
n
(z) =
1
n!
exp
_
+ z
_
z
− k
∂
n
∂z
n
_
exp
_
− z
_
z
n + k
_
(1788)
The diﬀerential equation for the associated Laguerre polynomials can be written
in the form of a Hermitean operator eigenvalue equation by using the substitu
tion
φ
k
n
(z) = z
k
2
exp
_
−
z
2
_
L
k
n
(z) (1789)
The functions φ
k
n
(z) form a complete orthonormal set because they satisfy the
diﬀerential equation
z
∂
2
φ
k
n
∂z
2
+
∂φ
k
n
∂z
−
_
z
4
−
2 n + k + 1
2
+
k
2
4 z
_
φ
k
n
= 0 (1790)
The normalization integral is
_
∞
0
dz z
k
exp
_
− z
_
L
k
n
(z) L
k
m
(z) =
( n + k )!
n!
δ
n−m
(1791)
The normalized hydrogen atom wave function is given by
Ψ
n,m,l
(r, θ, ϕ) = C
l,n,m
ρ
l
exp
_
− ρ
_
L
2l+1
n−l−1
( 2 ρ ) Y
l
m
(θ, ϕ) (1792)
387
Table 9: The Associated Laguerre Polynomials L
k
n
(z)
k = 0 k = 1
n L
0
n
(z) L
1
n
(z)
n = 0 1 1
n = 1 1 −z 2 −z
n = 2
1
2
(2 −4z +z
2
)
1
2
(6 −6z +z
2
)
n = 3
1
6
(6 −18z + 9z
2
−z
3
)
1
6
(24 −36z + 12z
2
−z
3
)
k = 2 k = 3
n L
2
n
(z) L
3
n
(z)
n = 0 1 1
n = 1 3 −z 4 −z
n = 2
1
2
(12 −8z +z
2
)
1
2
(20 −10z +z
2
)
n = 3
1
6
(60 −60z + 15z
2
−z
3
)
1
6
(120 −90z + 18z
2
−z
3
)
388
where we have written
ρ =
Z r
n a
0
(1793)
and a
0
is the Bohr radius. The normalization constant is given by
[ C
l,n,m
[
2
=
_
2 Z
n a
0
_
3
2
2l
( n − l − 1 )!
2 n ( n + l )!
(1794)
——————————————————————————————————
4.6.31 Exercise 98
Show that for the hydrogen atom, the average values of the moments of the
radial distance of the electron from the proton satisfy the following relations,
4 ( s + 1 )
ρ
2
0
r
s
− ( 2 s + 1 ) a
0
r
s−1
+
s
4
_
( 2 l + 1 )
2
− s
2
_
a
2
0
r
s−2
= 0
s > − ( 2 l + 1 )
(1795)
where a
0
is the Bohr radius.
Also show that
r = a
0
ρ
2
0
4
_
1 +
1
2
_
1 − 4
l ( l + 1 )
ρ
2
0
_ _
r
−1
=
4
a
0
ρ
2
0
(1796)
——————————————————————————————————
4.6.32 Solution 98
We shall use the dimensionless variable ρ where
ρ = κ r =
_
− 2 m E
¯h
2
r (1797)
and write the Radial part of the wave function as R(ρ) =
f(ρ)
ρ
. We also
introduce a constant ρ
0
by
−
Z e
2
E r
=
ρ
0
ρ
(1798)
389
Then, the radial part of the energy eigenvalue equation becomes
_
∂
2
f
∂ρ
2
+
_
−
l ( l + 1 )
ρ
2
+
ρ
0
ρ
− 1
_
f
_
= 0 (1799)
We shall multiply this equation by
ρ
s+1
∂f
∂ρ
− C ρ
s
f (1800)
and integrate over ρ. Then, as the average of the powers of ρ are given by
ρ
s
=
_
∞
0
dρ f(ρ) ρ
s
f(ρ) (1801)
this will give us terms that are equal to the required expectation values.
The terms proportional to C are evaluated as
C
_
l ( l + 1 ) ρ
s−2
− ρ
0
ρ
s−1
+ ρ
s
_
− C
_
∞
0
dρ ρ
s
f
∂
2
f
∂ρ
2
(1802)
The last term can be integrated by parts, and the boundary terms vanish for
appropriately large l. Then we obtain
C
_
l ( l + 1 ) ρ
s−2
− ρ
0
ρ
s−1
+ ρ
s
_
+ C
_
∞
0
dρ ρ
s
f
_
∂f
∂ρ
_
2
− C
s ( s − 1 )
2
ρ
s−2
(1803)
The remaining terms are rewritten as
_
∞
0
dρ ρ
s+1
∂f
∂ρ
_
∂
2
f
∂ρ
2
+
_
−
l ( l + 1 )
ρ
2
+
ρ
0
ρ
− 1
_
f
=
1
2
_
∞
0
dρ ρ
s+1
_
−
l ( l + 1 )
ρ
2
+
ρ
0
ρ
− 1
_ _
∂f
2
∂ρ
_
+
_
∞
0
dρ ρ
s+1
_
∂f
∂ρ
_ _
∂
2
f
∂ρ
2
_
(1804)
These terms are evaluated as
1
2
_
l ( l + 1 ) ( s − 1 ) ρ
s−2
− s ρ
0
ρ
s−1
+ ( s + 1 ) ρ
s
_
−
( s + 1 )
2
_
∞
0
dρ ρ
s
_
∂f
∂ρ
_
2
(1805)
390
The terms involving
_
∂f
∂ρ
_
2
vanish if we choose the constant C as
C =
( s + 1 )
2
(1806)
As the sum of the two terms are equal to zero, due to F satisfying the diﬀerential
equation, one has the equation relating the expectation values of powers of ρ
s
_
l ( l + 1 ) −
1
4
( s
2
− 1 )
_
ρ
s−2
−
2 s + 1
2
ρ
0
ρ
s−1
+ ( s + 1 ) ρ
s
= 0
(1807)
On putting s = 0 and noting ρ
0
= 1 we have
ρ
−1
=
2
ρ
0
(1808)
and then with s = 1 we have
2 ρ =
3
2
ρ
0
−
1
4
_
( 2 l + 1 )
2
− 1
_
ρ
−1
=
3
2
ρ
0
−
1
2
_
( 2 l + 1 )
2
− 1
_
ρ
−1
0
(1809)
On converting back from dimensionless variables, we ﬁnd the result given.
——————————————————————————————————
4.6.33 Exercise 99
Find the momentum space wave functions for the two lowest m = 0 energy
eigenstates of the hydrogen atom, given by
Ψ
1,0,0
(r) =
1
√
π
_
Z
a
0
_3
2
exp
_
−
Z r
a
0
_
(1810)
and
Ψ
2,1,0
(r) =
_
3
4 π 4!
_
Z
a
0
_3
2
_
Z r
a
0
_
exp
_
−
Z r
2 a
0
_
cos θ (1811)
——————————————————————————————————
391
4.6.34 Solution 99
The momentum space wave function is given by the Fourier transform
Φ(p) =
_
1
2 π ¯h
_3
2
_
d
3
r exp
_
−
i
¯h
p . r
_
Ψ(r) (1812)
For the (1, 0, 0) wave function, the angular integration can be easily performed
leading to
Φ
1,0,0
(p) =
_
Z
2 π ¯h a
0
_3
2
2
√
π ¯h
_
∞
0
dr r
2
_ exp
_
+
i
¯ h
p r
_
− exp
_
−
i
¯ h
p r
_
i p r
_
exp
_
−
Z r
a
0
_
(1813)
The ﬁrst factor in the integrand is recognized as being proportional to the l = 0
spherical Bessel function. The integral is easily evaluated to yield
Φ
1,0,0
(p) =
_
Z ¯h
2 π a
0
_3
2
2
√
π
i
p
_
_
1
p + i
Z ¯ h
a0
_
2
−
_
1
p − i
Z ¯ h
a0
_
2
_
=
_
Z ¯h
2 π a
0
_3
2
8
√
π
_
Z ¯ h
a0
_
p
2
+ (
Z ¯ h
a0
)
2
_
2
_
(1814)
The second momentum space wave function is found by using the Rayleigh
expansion of the exponential plane wave. The Legendre polynomial is given in
terms of the angle between the momentum and the position vector. The spher
ical harmonic addition theorem is used to expand the Legendre polynomials in
terms of the products of the spherical harmonics, each separately involving the
directions of the momentum and position. On integrating over the directions
of the position vector and using orthonormality, one ﬁnds that the momentum
space wave function depends upon the spherical harmonic with the same (l, m)
as the real space wave function, except that it depends on the direction of the
momentum, (θ
p
, ϕ
p
), with respect to the Cartesian axes. The coeﬃcient of the
spherical harmonic Y
l
m
(θ
p
, ϕ
p
) is given by an integration involving the product
of the spherical Bessel function j
l
(kr) and the radial dependence of the real
space wave function. The result entails evaluating integrals of the form
_
∞
0
dz z
(2+m)
exp
_
− α z
_
j
l
(z) (1815)
which for l = 2 simpliﬁes to
_
∞
0
dz z
(2+m)
exp
_
− α z
_ _
sin z − z cos z
z
2
_
392
Table 10: The Gegenbauer Functions C
µ
ν
(x).
µ = 1 µ = 2 µ = 3 µ = 4 µ = 5
ν = 0 1
ν = 1 2x 1
ν = 2 4x
2
−1 4x 1
ν = 3 8x
3
−4x 12x
2
−2 6x 1
ν = 4 16x
4
−12x
2
+ 1 32x
3
−12x 24x
2
−3 8x 1
ν = 5 32x
5
−32x
2
+ 6x 80x
4
−48x
2
+ 3 80x
3
−24x 40x
2
−4 10x
= ( − 1 )
m
∂
m
∂α
m
_
∞
0
dz exp
_
− α z
_ _
sin z − z cos z
_
= ( − 1 )
m
∂
m
∂α
m
_
2
( 1 + α
2
)
2
_
(1816)
The momentum space wave function of a general energy eigenstate of a
Hydrogenlike atom has been calculated by Podolsky and Pauling
31
. The mo
mentum eigenfunctions Φ
n,l,m
(p, θ, ϕ) are found to be given by the general ex
pression
Φ
n,l,m
(p, θ, ϕ) = Y
l
m
(θ, ϕ)
_
n a
0
Z 2 π ¯h
_3
2
_
− ( − i )
l
π 2
2l+4
l!
_
n(n −l −1)!
(n +l)!
_1
2
_
ξ
l
(ξ
2
+ 1)
l+2
C
l+1
n−l−1
_
ξ
2
−1
ξ
2
+ 1
_
(1817)
where
ξ =
n p a
0
Z ¯h
(1818)
and C
µ
ν
(x) are the Gegenbauer functions. Some of the Gegenbauer functions are
given in Table(10), and the others can be generated from the recursion relation
C
µ
ν
(x) =
2 µ
ν
_
x C
µ+1
ν−1
(x) − C
µ+1
ν−2
(x)
_
(1819)
The momentum space distribution of the electrons in Hydrogen was determined
experimentally
32
. The experiments involved the ionization of atomic hydrogen
by a beam of highenergy electrons.
——————————————————————————————————
31
B. Podolsky and L. Pauling, Phys. Rev. 34, 109 (1929).
32
B. Lohman and E. Weigold, Phys. Letts. 86 A, 139 (1981).
393
Momentum Space Probability Distribution
0
1
2
3
4
0 0.5 1 1.5 2
k a
4
π
P
n
,
l
(
k
)
k
2
n=2,l=0
n=2,l=1
n=1,l=0
(spherically averaged)
Figure 101: The spherically averaged momentumspace distribution function for
the few lowest energy eigenstates of Hydrogen.
4.6.35 Exercise 100
Find the scalar potential and vector potential produced by an electron in a
l = 1 state of a hydrogen atom by ﬁrst calculating the charge and current
densities and then by using Maxwell’s equations.
——————————————————————————————————
4.6.36 Solution 100
The hydrogen atom in a 2p orbital has a charge distribution
ρ(r, t) = [ Ψ(r, t) [
2
=
e
64 π a
5
0
r
2
exp
_
−
r
a
0
_
sin
2
θ (1820)
where a
0
is the Bohr radius
¯ h
2
m e
2
. In this case, the charge density is independent
of time. The electrostatic potential φ(r) is given by
φ(r) =
1
4 π
_
d
3
r
ρ(r
)
[ r − r
[
(1821)
394
We shall ﬁrst perform the angular integral. The denominator is expanded
in terms of the Legendre Polynomials via the expansion
1
[ r − r
[
=
1
r
>
l
_
r
<
r
>
_
l
P
l
(cos γ) (1822)
where γ is the angle between r and r
. Then using the addition theorem one
has
1
[ r − r
[
=
1
r
>
l
_
r
<
r
>
_
l
4 π
2 l + 1
m=+l
m=−l
Y
∗ l
m
(θ
, ϕ
) Y
l
m
(θ, ϕ) (1823)
The angular dependence of the numerator can be expressed in terms of the
spherical harmonics
sin
2
θ
= ( 1 − cos
2
θ
)
=
2
3
√
4 π Y
0
0
(θ
, ϕ
) −
_
4 π
5
2
3
Y
2
0
(θ
, ϕ
) (1824)
The angular integration can be performed using the orthogonality of the spher
ical harmonics. Hence,
φ(r) =
_
e
64 π a
5
0
_ _
∞
0
dr
r
4
1
r
>
exp
_
−
r
a
0
_
l
_
r
<
r
>
_
l
1
2 l + 1
Y
l
0
(θ, ϕ)
_
2
3
√
4 π δ
l,0
−
_
4 π
5
2
3
δ
l,2
_
=
2
3
_
e
64 π a
5
0
_ _
I
0
−
1
5
I
2
_
3 cos
2
θ −1
2
_ _
(1825)
where
I
0
=
_
∞
0
dr
r
4
_
1
r
>
_
exp
_
−
r
a
0
_
(1826)
and
I
2
=
_
∞
0
dr
r
4
_
r
2
<
r
3
>
_
exp
_
−
r
a
0
_
(1827)
The radial integrations are broken into two parts, one for r > r
and the other
for r < r
. One ﬁnds
I
0
=
a
5
0
r
_
24 −
_
24 + 24
_
r
a
0
_
+ 12
_
r
a
0
_
2
+ 4
_
r
a
0
_
3
+
_
r
a
0
_
4
_
exp
_
−
r
a
0
_
+
_
6
_
r
a
0
_
+ 6
_
r
a
0
_
2
+ 3
_
r
a
0
_
3
+
_
r
a
0
_
4
_
exp
_
−
r
a
0
_ _
(1828)
395
and
I
2
=
a
7
0
r
3
_
6! −
_
6! + 6!
_
r
a
0
_
+
6!
2
_
r
a
0
_
2
+
+ 5!
_
r
a
0
_
3
+ 30
_
r
a
0
_
4
+ 6
_
r
a
0
_
5
+
_
r
a
0
_
6
_
exp
_
−
r
a
0
_
+
_ _
r
a
0
_
5
+
_
r
a
0
_
6
_
exp
_
−
r
a
0
_ _
(1829)
Hence, for r ¸ a
0
where all the exponential terms are suppressed, one ﬁnds
that the electrostatic potential reduces to
φ(r) =
e
4 π
_
1
r
− 6
a
2
0
r
3
3 cos
2
θ − 1
2
_
(1830)
which is interpreted as the sum of a charge monopole and a quadrupole term.
The deviation of the electron wave function from spherical symmetry has set up
a quadrupolar electric ﬁeld. When r < a
0
, the potential is reduced from that
of the monopole of charge e, since a Gaussian surface enclosing the origin only
contains a fraction of the total electron charge.
To ﬁnd the vector potential, ﬁrst we ﬁnd the current density j. The current
density is found from the expression
j(r, t) =
e ¯h
2 m i
_
Ψ
∗
(r, t) ∇Ψ(r, t) − Ψ(r, t) ∇Ψ
∗
(r, t)
_
(1831)
In spherical polar coordinates, the gradient is written as
∇ = ˆ e
r
∂
∂r
+ ˆ e
θ
1
r
∂
∂θ
+ ˆ e
ϕ
1
r sin θ
∂
∂ϕ
(1832)
Therefore, the current density of the p electron is evaluated as
j(r, t) = ˆ e
ϕ
_
e ¯h
64 π m a
5
0
_
exp
_
−
r
a
0
_
r sin θ (1833)
The current density is resolved into Cartesian components, via
ˆ e
ϕ
= cos ϕ
ˆ e
y
− sin ϕ
ˆ e
x
(1834)
and is then expressed in terms of spherical harmonics. The result is
j(r, t) = i
_
e ¯h
64 π m a
5
0
_
exp
_
−
r
a
0
_
r
_
8 π
3
_
Y
1
1
(θ, ϕ)
ˆ e
x
− i ˆ e
y
2
− Y
1
−1
(θ, ϕ)
ˆ e
x
+ i ˆ e
y
2
_
(1835)
396
which is time independent. The vector potential is given by
A(r) =
1
4 π
_
d
3
r
j(r
)
[ r − r
[
(1836)
Then the Legendre polynomial generating function expansion and the spherical
harmonic addition theorem are used to perform the angular integral over the
variables (θ
, ϕ
). The integrations utilize the orthonormality of the spherical
harmonics. The end result of the integrations over the angles (θ
, ϕ
) is
A(r) = i
_
e ¯h
64 π m a
5
0
_ _
∞
0
dr
r
3
_
r
<
r
2
>
_
exp
_
−
r
a
0
_
_
8 π
3
1
3
_
Y
1
1
(θ, ϕ)
ˆ e
x
− i ˆ e
y
2
− Y
1
−1
(θ, ϕ)
ˆ e
x
+ i ˆ e
y
2
_
= ˆ e
ϕ
1
3
_
e ¯h
64 π m a
5
0
_ _
∞
0
dr
r
3
_
r
<
r
2
>
_
exp
_
−
r
a
0
_
sin θ
(1837)
The vector potential has a directional dependence which is similar to the cur
rent density. The radial integration can be performed, leading to the vector
potential being dominated by a dipole contribution at large distances.
——————————————————————————————————
397
4.7 A Charged Particle in a Magnetic Field
Consider a particle of mass m and charge q moving in a uniform magnetic ﬁeld
B oriented along the z axis.
B = ˆ e
z
B
z
(1838)
The vector potential A(r) can be found as a solution of
B = ∇ ∧ A(r) (1839)
One solution is given by
A(r) = − y B
z
ˆ e
x
(1840)
which corresponds to a particular choice of the gauge. The Hamiltonian of the
charged particle in the ﬁeld can be written as
ˆ
H =
1
2 m
_
ˆ p
x
−
q
c
A
x
(r)
_
2
+
1
2 m
_
ˆ p
2
y
+ ˆ p
2
z
_
=
1
2 m
_
ˆ p
x
+
q
c
y B
z
_
2
+
1
2 m
_
ˆ p
2
y
+ ˆ p
2
z
_
(1841)
We note that the x and z components of the momentum commute with the
Hamiltonian, as x and z do not appear in
ˆ
H . Thus,
[
ˆ
H , ˆ p
x
] = 0
[
ˆ
H , ˆ p
y
] = 0 (1842)
which means that they are constants of motion. As the energy eigenstates are
also eigenstates of ˆ p
x
and ˆ p
z
, we shall write the energy eigenfunction as
φ
n,px,py
(r) =
1
2 π ¯h
exp
_
i
p
x
x + p
z
z
¯h
_
φ
n
(y) (1843)
The energy eigenvalue equation can then be written in terms of the unknown
function φ
n
(y), as
_
ˆ p
2
y
2 m
+
m
2
_
q B
z
m c
_
2
_
y +
c p
x
q B
z
_
2
_
φ
n
(y) =
_
E −
p
2
z
2 m
_
φ
n
(y) (1844)
This equation looks like the energy eigenvalue equation for the onedimensional
harmonic oscillator, in which we have shifted the origin of the y coordinate
through a distance
c px
q Bz
. The frequency of the oscillator corresponds to the
Larmor precession frequency ω
L
, which is given by
ω
2
L
=
_
q B
z
m c
_
2
(1845)
Using our previously gained knowledge of the onedimensional harmonic oscil
lator, we ﬁnd that the energy eigenvalues are then given by
E
n,pz
= ¯ h ω
L
_
n +
1
2
_
+
p
2
z
2 m
(1846)
398
We note that these energy levels (known as Landau levels
33
) are degenerate, as
the introduction of the B ﬁeld causes states with diﬀerent values of the (quasi
continuous quantum numbers) p
x
and p
y
to collapse onto states where the value
of the energy is determined by the integer n. The wave functions with the dif
ferent values of p
x
have the “oscillations” in the y coordinate centered around
diﬀerent points.
——————————————————————————————————
4.7.1 Exercise 101
Show that both x
0
and y
0
commute with the Hamiltonian, where
ˆ x
0
= ˆ x +
c ˆ p
y
q B
z
ˆ y
0
= −
c ˆ p
x
q B
z
(1847)
but x
0
and y
0
do not commute,
[ ˆ x
0
, ˆ y
0
] ,= 0 (1848)
Show that in the classical limit, these variables correspond to the projection of
the particle’s orbit on the x  y plane. Hence, x
0
and y
0
cannot be simultane
ously known for the quantum system.
——————————————————————————————————
4.7.2 Exercise 102
Consider a particle of mass m and charge e in perpendicular uniform electric
and magnetic ﬁelds, E and B. Find the eigenfunctions and eigenvalues. Find
the average velocity in the x direction for any eigenstate.
——————————————————————————————————
4.7.3 Solution 102
Let the vector potential be written in the gauge
A(r) = B z ˆ e
x
(1849)
and the scalar potential is also a function of z
φ(z) = − [ E [ z (1850)
33
L.D. Landau, Z. f. Physik, 64, 629 (1930).
399
The Hamiltonian is given by
ˆ
H =
1
2 m
_ _
ˆ p
x
−
e
c
B z
_
2
+ ˆ p
2
y
+ ˆ p
2
z
_
− e [ E [ z (1851)
which only depends on z. The momentum components ˆ p
x
and ˆ p
y
are good
quantum numbers. The eigenfunctions can be written as
Φ
kx,ky,n
(r) = exp
_
i ( k
x
x + k
y
y )
_
φ
n
(z) (1852)
and φ
n
(z) satisﬁes
_
E −
¯h
2
k
2
y
2 m
_
φ
n
(z) =
_
1
2 m
_ _
¯h k
x
−
e
c
B z
_
2
+ ˆ p
2
y
+ ˆ p
2
z
_
−e [ E [ z
_
φ
n
(z)
(1853)
This is recognized as the eigenvalue equation for a linear harmonic oscillator
centered on z
0
z
0
= ¯ h k
x
c
e B
+ m c
2
[ E [
e B
2
(1854)
Thus, the energy eigenvalue is given by
E = ¯ h ω
c
( n +
1
2
) +
¯h
2
k
2
y
2 m
− m c
2
[ E [
2
2 B
2
−¯h k
x
c
[ E [
B
(1855)
The group velocity is given by
v
x
=
∂E
∂p
x
= − c
[ E [
B
(1856)
——————————————————————————————————
4.7.4 The Degeneracy of the Landau Levels
We shall consider a particle in a uniform magnetic ﬁeld aligned along the z
direction. The particle is conﬁned to move within a large volume. Let the
volume be bounded by surfaces, so that the accessible volume is described by
L
x
> x > 0
L
y
> y > 0
L
z
> z > 0 (1857)
and the wave function should be zero outside this volume. Instead of apply
ing these boundary conditions, we shall impose Bornvon Karman or periodic
400
boundary conditions.
The vector potential A(r) is deﬁned to be the solution of
B = ∇ ∧ A(r) (1858)
One solution is given by
A(r) = − y B
z
ˆ e
x
(1859)
which corresponds to a particular choice of the gauge. The Hamiltonian of the
charged particle in the ﬁeld can be written as
ˆ
H =
1
2 m
_
ˆ p
x
−
q
c
A
x
(r)
_
2
+
1
2 m
_
ˆ p
2
y
+ ˆ p
2
z
_
=
1
2 m
_
ˆ p
x
+
q
c
y B
z
_
2
+
1
2 m
_
ˆ p
2
y
+ ˆ p
2
z
_
(1860)
in the region where the conﬁning potential is zero.
The wave function that satisﬁes the boundary conditions, can be written as
Ψ(r) =
1
√
L
x
L
z
exp
_
i
2 π n
x
x
L
x
_
exp
_
i
2 π n
z
z
L
z
_
f(y) (1861)
where n
x
and n
z
are integers, n
x
= 0 , ± 1 , ± 2 , . . . etc. It is then found
that the function f(y) satisﬁes the eigenvalue equation
_
1
2 m
_
2 π ¯h n
x
L
x
+
q
c
y B
z
_
2
−
¯h
2
2 m
∂
2
∂y
2
_
f(y) =
_
E −
2 π
2
¯h
2
n
2
z
m L
2
z
_
f(y)
(1862)
or
_
−
¯h
2
2 m
∂
2
∂y
2
+
q
2
B
2
z
2 m c
2
_
2 π ¯h c n
x
q B
z
L
x
+y
_
2
_
f(y) =
_
E −
2 π
2
¯h
2
n
2
z
m L
2
z
_
f(y)
(1863)
which can be rewritten in the form of a displaced harmonic oscillator equation,
by writing
ω
c
=
q B
z
m c
(1864)
Then, the eigenvalue equation becomes
_
−
¯h
2
2 m
∂
2
∂y
2
+
m ω
2
c
2
_
y +
n
x
L
y
Φ
0
Φ
_
2
_
f(y) =
_
E −
2 π
2
¯h
2
n
2
z
m L
2
z
_
f(y)
(1865)
where we have introduced the ﬂux Φ, deﬁned by
Φ = L
x
L
y
B
z
(1866)
401
and the fundamental ﬂux quantum Φ
0
deﬁned by
Φ
0
=
2 π ¯h c
q
(1867)
Therefore, the eigenvalue E is just given by
E = ¯ h ω
c
( n +
1
2
) (1868)
and the eigenfunctions f(y) are the harmonic oscillator wave functions, φ
n
(y)
shifted through − n
x
Φ0
Φ
L
y
. That is, the normalized wave function is given by
f(y) = φ
n
_
y + n
x
L
y
Φ
0
Φ
_
(1869)
The degeneracy can be found, in the semiclassical approximation, by as
suming that the deviation of the position of the harmonic oscillator from the
equilibrium value y
0
= − n
x
L
y
Φ0
Φ
is minimal. Under these circumstances,
one has 0 < y
0
< L
y
. Hence, n
x
is restricted to be such that
L
y
> − n
x
L
y
Φ
0
Φ
> 0 (1870)
Hence, the degeneracy is the given by the maximum number of values that n
x
can take. The degeneracy N is given by
N =
_
Φ
Φ
0
_
(1871)
which is controlled by the number of ﬂux quanta, threading through the area
L
x
L
y
.
——————————————————————————————————
4.7.5 Exercise 103
Find the energy eigenvalues and eigenfunctions of a particle of charge q and
mass m moving in two dimensions, in the presence of a uniform magnetic ﬁeld.
Calculate the degeneracy of the lowest Landau level. Use the symmetric gauge
where
A =
Φ
2 π R
2
0
r ˆ e
ϕ
(1872)
and Φ is the total ﬂux enclosed in the circular area π R
2
0
.
——————————————————————————————————
402
4.7.6 Solution 103
The energy eigenvalue equation is
_
−
¯h
2
2 m
1
r
∂
∂r
_
r
∂φ
∂r
_
+
1
2 m
_
− i
¯h
r
∂
∂ϕ
−
q
c
Φ
2 π R
2
0
r
_
2
φ
_
= E φ
(1873)
The z component of the angular momentum
ˆ
L
z
commutes with the Hamiltonian,
and so one can ﬁnd simultaneous eigenfunctions which are of the form
φ(r, ϕ) =
1
√
2 π
exp
_
i µ ϕ
_
R(r) (1874)
Hence, the radial wave function R(r) is given by
_
−
¯h
2
2 m
1
r
∂
∂r
_
r
∂R
∂r
_
+
1
2 m
_
¯h µ
r
−
q
c
Φ
2 π R
2
0
r
_
2
R
_
= E R (1875)
The radial wave function must satisfy boundary conditions at r = 0 and
r → ∞. The physically acceptable form of the solution is
R(r) = ρ
µ
2
exp
_
− ρ
_
f(ρ) (1876)
where
ρ =
q Φ
c 4 π ¯h R
2
0
r
2
(1877)
and f(ρ) is a ﬁnite order polynomial. The derivatives w.r.t. r can be expressed
as derivatives with respect to ρ via
∂
∂r
=
∂ρ
∂r
∂
∂ρ
=
q Φ
c 2 π ¯h R
2
0
r
∂
∂ρ
(1878)
and
∂
2
∂r
2
=
_
q Φ
c 2 π ¯h R
2
0
_
∂
∂ρ
+
_
q Φ
c 2 π ¯h R
2
0
_
2
r
2
∂
2
∂ρ
2
=
_
q Φ
c 2 π ¯h R
2
0
_ _
∂
∂ρ
+ 2 ρ
∂
2
∂ρ
2
_
(1879)
Thus, the eigenvalue equation becomes
¯h q Φ
m c 2 π R
2
0
_
− ρ
∂
2
R
∂ρ
2
−
∂R
∂ρ
+
1
ρ
_
µ
2
− ρ
_
2
R
_
= E R (1880)
On substituting the form
R(r) = ρ
µ
2
exp
_
− ρ
_
f(ρ) (1881)
403
into the diﬀerential equation, we ﬁnd
_
¯h q Φ
m c 2 π R
2
0
_ _
−ρ
∂
2
∂ρ
2
+ ( 2 ρ −µ −1 )
∂f
∂ρ
+
_
1 −
E m c 2 π R
2
0
¯h q Φ
_
f
_
= 0
(1882)
This diﬀerential equation can be solved by the Fr¨obenius method, by expanding
the solution in the form
f(ρ) =
n=nr
n=0
a
n
ρ
n
(1883)
On substituting the series into the diﬀerential equation, one ﬁnds the recursion
relation
a
n+1
( n + 1 ) ( n + µ + 1 ) =
_
2 n + 1 −
E m c 2 π R
2
0
¯h q Φ
_
a
n
(1884)
The series for the polynomial f(ρ) truncates if the energy is given by
E =
_
¯h q Φ
m c 2 π R
2
0
_
( 2 n
r
+ 1 ) (1885)
where n
r
is an integer. In this case the boundary conditions are satisﬁed, and
f(ρ) is a polynomial of degree n
r
.
The lowest energy eigenstates corresponds to n
r
= 0 and the eigenfunction
can be written as
φ(r, ϕ) ∝ r
µ
exp
_
i µ ϕ
_
exp
_
−
q Φ
c 4 π ¯h R
2
0
r
2
_
∝ ( x + i y )
µ
exp
_
−
q Φ
c 4 π ¯h R
2
0
( x
2
+ y
2
)
_
∝ ( x + i y )
µ
exp
_
−
_
Φ
Φ
0
_ _
x
2
+ y
2
2 R
2
0
_ _
(1886)
The probability density is peaked on a circle around the origin. The radius of
the circle, r
m
, is given by
r
2
m
= µ
c 2 π ¯h R
2
0
q Φ
= µ
_
Φ
0
Φ
_
R
2
0
(1887)
All the states with diﬀerent µ are degenerate. The degeneracy is given by the
maximum number of diﬀerent allowed µ values. For a disk of area π R
2
0
the
allowed values of r
µ
satisfy r
µ
< R
0
, thus, the degeneracy is given by
µ
max
=
_
Φ
Φ
0
_
(1888)
——————————————————————————————————
404
4.7.7 The AharonovBohm Eﬀect
The AharonovBohm eﬀect
34
provides a conclusive demonstration that a charged
quantum mechanical particle is sensitive to the vector potential, and not to the
magnetic induction ﬁeld B. In the AharonovBohm eﬀect, a charged particle
moves in a region of space where the magnetic ﬁeld is zero. The magnetic ﬁeld
free region is multiply connected, as a magnetic ﬁeld threads through regions
where the particle is excluded from
35
.
In order to provide a simple example of the AharonovBohm eﬀect, consider
a charged particle which is conﬁned to move on ring of radius R. A magnetic
ﬂux of strength Φ threads through the center of the ring and is contained within
a cylinder of radius a.
Flux contained in a cylinder of radius a
B
R
a
Figure 102: In the version of the AharonovBohm eﬀect being considered, the
applied magnetic ﬂux Φ is conﬁned within a cylinder of radius a. The charged
particle is conﬁned to move on a ring of radius R which encircles the cylinder.
The magnetic induction is in the z direction, so B = ˆ e
z
B
z
. The magnetic
ﬂux through the center of the ring is given by
Φ =
_
dx dy B
z
34
Y. Aharonov and D. Bohm, Phys. Rev. 115, 485 (1959).
35
A. Tonomura, N. Osakabe, T. Matsuda, T. Kawasaki, J. Endo, S. Yano, and H. Yamada,
Phys. Rev. Lett. 56, 792 (1986).
405
=
_
d
2
S . B (1889)
in which the integral runs over the area inside the ring, where B is ﬁnite. Since
the magnetic ﬁeld is related to the vector potential via
B = ∇ ∧ A (1890)
then the ﬂux is given by
Φ =
_
d
2
S .
_
∇ ∧ A
_
(1891)
On using Stoke’s theorem, one ﬁnds the total ﬂux is given by
Φ =
_
dr . A (1892)
where the integral is around the perimeter of a ring of radius r and r > a.
If the tangential component of the vector potential is denoted by A
ϕ
, then the
loop integral is given by
Φ = 2 π r A
ϕ
(1893)
Hence, on considering the symmetry of the problem, one ﬁnds the vector po
tential is given by
A =
Φ
2 π r
ˆ e
ϕ
(1894)
There is no magnetic ﬁeld present at this radius, since the deﬁnition
B = ∇ ∧ A (1895)
yields the zcomponent as
B
z
= ( ˆ e
r
∂
∂r
+ ˆ e
ϕ
1
r
∂
∂ϕ
) ∧
Φ
2 π r
ˆ e
ϕ
= ˆ e
r
∧ ˆ e
ϕ
∂
∂r
_
Φ
2 π r
_
+ ˆ e
ϕ
1
r
∧
∂ˆ e
ϕ
∂ϕ
Φ
2 π r
= ˆ e
r
∧ ˆ e
ϕ
∂
∂r
_
Φ
2 π r
_
−
1
r
ˆ e
ϕ
∧ ˆ e
r
Φ
2 π r
= 0 (1896)
The magnetic induction is zero since the total ﬂux Φ contained within a loop is
constant, if r ≥ a. The vector potential in the region where the magnetic ﬁeld
is ﬁnite 0 < r < a is given by
A =
r Φ
2 π a
2
ˆ e
ϕ
(1897)
406
The energy eigenvalue equation for the particle conﬁned on the ring of radius
R is
1
2 m
_
− i
¯h
R
∂
∂ϕ
−
q Φ
c 2 π R
_
2
Ψ(ϕ) = E Ψ(ϕ) (1898)
This has normalized eigenfunctions given by
Ψ(ϕ) =
1
√
2 π R
exp
_
i µ ϕ
_
(1899)
where the energy eigenvalue E is determined by µ from
1
2 m R
2
_
µ ¯h −
q Φ
2 π c
_
2
= E (1900)
Thus, the energy is given by
¯h
2
2 m R
2
_
µ −
q Φ
2 π ¯h c
_
2
= E (1901)
where
2 π ¯ h c
q
= Φ
0
is the fundamental ﬂux quantum. The modulus of the
wave function must be single valued, therefore
Ψ(ϕ) = Ψ(ϕ + 2π) (1902)
or
1 = exp
_
i µ 2 π
_
(1903)
Hence, µ must be an integer, m = 0 , ± 1 , ± 2 . . . etc. The energy is given
by
E =
¯h
2
2 m R
2
_
m −
Φ
Φ
0
_
2
(1904)
and the ground state energy and wave function is determined by the integer
value of m which minimizes E and, therefore, depends on the ratio of
_
Φ
Φ0
_
.
The ground state corresponds to the value of m such that
m − 1
2
<
_
Φ
Φ
0
_
<
m + 1
2
(1905)
Thus, the energy depends on the vector potential but not on the magnetic ﬁeld
B in the region where the particle moves. Furthermore, the ground state energy
is a periodic function of Φ with periodicity Φ
0
, as the value m changes discon
tinuously from m to m+ 1 as Φ increases by an amount Φ
0
.
The current I produced by the charged particle ﬂowing around the ring is
deﬁned classically as
I = c
∂E
∂Φ
(1906)
407
Energy eigenvalues
0
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
4 3 2 1 0 1 2 3 4
Φ/Φ Φ/Φ Φ/Φ Φ/Φ
0 00 0
E
(
Φ ΦΦ Φ
)
Figure 103: The energy eigenvalues E
m
in the AharonovBohm eﬀect, as a
function of the applied magnetic ﬂux Φ threading the ring.
The quantum mechanical current operator is deﬁned as
ˆ
I = c
∂
ˆ
H
∂Φ
=
q ¯h
2 π m R
2
_
i
∂
∂ϕ
+
Φ
Φ
0
_
(1907)
Thus, in the ground state the current has an expectation value I , given by
I = −
q ¯h
2 π m R
2
_
m −
Φ
Φ
0
_
(1908)
The current jumps discontinuously as the ﬂux through the loop is increased by
Φ
0
.
——————————————————————————————————
Example
Find the energy eigenvalues and eigenfunctions of a particle of charge q and
mass m moving in two dimensions, in the presence of a uniform magnetic ﬁeld.
408
Flux induced current
0.75
0.5
0.25
0
0.25
0.5
0.75
4 3 2 1 0 1 2 3 4
Φ/Φ Φ/Φ Φ/Φ Φ/Φ
0 00 0
I
(
Φ ΦΦ Φ
)
/
I
0
Figure 104: The dependence of the current I in the ground state on the applied
ﬂux Φ.
Use the circularly symmetric gauge where
A =
Φ
2 π r
ˆ e
ϕ
(1909)
where Φ is the magnetic ﬂux penetrating a ring of radius R
0
¸ r.
——————————————————————————————————
Solution
The energy eigenvalue equation is
_
−
¯h
2
2 m
1
r
∂
∂r
_
r
∂φ
∂r
_
+
1
2 m
_
− i
¯h
r
∂
∂ϕ
−
q
c
Φ
2 π r
_
2
φ
_
= E φ (1910)
The z component of the angular momentum
ˆ
L
z
commutes with the Hamiltonian,
and so one can ﬁnd simultaneous eigenfunctions which are of the form
φ(r, ϕ) =
1
√
2 π
exp
_
i µ ϕ
_
R(r) (1911)
Hence, the radial wave function R(r) is given by
_
−
¯h
2
2 m
1
r
∂
∂r
_
r
∂R
∂r
_
+
1
2 m r
2
_
¯h µ −
q
c
Φ
2 π
_
2
R
_
= E R (1912)
409
The radial wave function must satisfy boundary conditions at r = 0 and
r → ∞. The acceptable form for the solution at r = R
0
→ 0 vanishes at
the origin as
R(r) = r
α
(1913)
which minimizes the eﬀect of the centrifugal potential. On introducing a di
mensionless variable
ρ = k r (1914)
where
E =
¯h
2
k
2
2 m
(1915)
and the elemental ﬂux quantum Φ
0
, deﬁned by
Φ
0
=
c 2 π ¯h
q
(1916)
one ﬁnds that the equation can be put in the dimensionless form
1
ρ
∂
∂ρ
_
ρ
∂R
∂ρ
_
+
_
1 −
1
ρ
2
_
µ −
Φ
Φ
0
_
2
_
R = 0 (1917)
This is Bessel’s equation. The physically acceptable solution is ﬁnite in the limit
as r → 0 and, therefore, the required solution is proportional to the Bessel
function of order ν where
ν = µ −
_
Φ
Φ
0
_
(1918)
The eigenfunction is given by
φ(r, ϕ) =
1
√
2 π
exp
_
i µ ϕ
_
J
ν
(kr) (1919)
The Bessel function has the asymptotic variation
J
ν
(ρ) ∼ ρ
ν
(1920)
as ρ → 0 and varies as
J
ν
(ρ) ∼
_
2
π ρ
cos
_
ρ − ( ν +
1
2
)
π
2
_
(1921)
when ρ → ∞. Note that, if the ﬂux quantum threading the origin is changed so
that ν increases, the maxima of the probability density moves radially outward,
however, there is no change in energy. The absence of any energy change is not
surprising in view of the fact that B = 0 in the region where the particle is
moving and so, the eﬀect of the vector potential can be absorbed into the phase
of the wave function by a Gauge transformation.
——————————————————————————————————
410
4.8 The Pauli Spin Matrices
The Pauli Matrices are three two by two matrices, which have commutation
relations similar to the commutation relations of the three components of the
angular momentum operators. The Pauli matrices are represented by
σ
x
=
_
0 1
1 0
_
(1922)
σ
y
=
_
0 − i
i 0
_
(1923)
σ
z
=
_
1 0
0 − 1
_
(1924)
These matrices are traceless, and have the properties that their square is equal
to the unit matrix, σ
0
,
σ
2
x
= σ
2
y
= σ
2
z
= σ
0
(1925)
where the unit matrix is given by
σ
0
=
_
1 0
0 1
_
(1926)
The three Pauli matrices and the unit matrix are linearly independent, and
form a basis for the two by two matrices. That is, any two by two matrix
can be expressed as a linear combination of the identity and Pauli matrices.
Furthermore, they also satisfy the commutation relations
[ σ
x
, σ
y
] = 2 i σ
z
[ σ
z
, σ
x
] = 2 i σ
y
[ σ
y
, σ
z
] = 2 i σ
x
(1927)
When the Pauli matrices are multiplied by a factor of
¯ h
2
, these commutation
relations become identical to the commutation relations of the components of
angular momentum, for ﬁxed l. Thus, if one multiplies the Pauli matrices by
¯ h
2
, one can identify these matrices as representing angular momentum operators
where the total angular momentum corresponds to l = 1/2. The spin angular
momentum operators are deﬁned in terms of the Pauli matrices via
ˆ
S
i
=
¯h
2
σ
i
(1928)
where the index i can take on the values x, y and z.
The Pauli spin operators act on the space of twocomponent column vectors,
Ψ,
Ψ =
_
Ψ
+
Ψ
−
_
(1929)
411
An arbitrary operator
ˆ
A given by
ˆ
A =
_
A
1,1
A
1,2
A
2,1
A
2,2
_
(1930)
transforms the state Ψ according to the laws of matrix multiplication. That is,
ˆ
A acting on the state Ψ produces another state given by
ˆ
A Ψ =
_
A
1,1
A
1,2
A
2,1
A
2,2
_ _
Ψ
+
Ψ
−
_
=
_
A
1,1
Ψ
+
+ A
1,2
Ψ
−
A
2,1
Ψ
+
+ A
2,2
Ψ
−
_
(1931)
A vector Ψ
†
which is the dual of the column vector Ψ is deﬁned as the complex
conjugate of the row vector
Ψ
†
=
_
Ψ
∗
+
Ψ
∗
−
_
(1932)
An inner product can be deﬁned for any two vectors on this space as the complex
number formed from the components of the vectors
Φ
†
Ψ =
_
Φ
∗
+
Φ
∗
−
_ _
Ψ
+
Ψ
−
_
=
_
Φ
∗
+
Ψ
+
+ Φ
∗
−
Ψ
−
_
(1933)
which, again, uses the laws of matrix multiplication. Physical states Ψ are to
be normalized such that
Ψ
†
Ψ = 1 (1934)
which results in the normalization condition
_
[ Ψ
+
[
2
+ [ Ψ
−
[
2
_
= 1 (1935)
The existence of the inner product allows one to deﬁne the adjoint or Her
mitean conjugate of the operator
ˆ
A as the operator
ˆ
A
†
which has the eﬀect
Φ
†
ˆ
A Ψ =
_
Φ
∗
+
Φ
∗
−
_ _
A
1,1
A
1,2
A
2,1
A
2,2
_ _
Ψ
+
Ψ
−
_
=
_
Ψ
+
Ψ
−
_ _
A
1,1
A
2,1
A
1,2
A
2,2
_ _
Φ
∗
+
Φ
∗
−
_
=
_
Ψ
†
ˆ
A
†
Φ
_
∗
(1936)
412
Hence, the Hermitean conjugate of
ˆ
A is given by the transpose of the complex
conjugate of
ˆ
A
ˆ
A
†
=
_
A
∗
1,1
A
∗
1,2
A
∗
2,1
A
∗
2,2
_
(1937)
A Hermitean matrix is a matrix for which
ˆ
A =
ˆ
A
†
.
The Pauli spin operators are Hermitean, and hence can represent physical
quantities such as the components of the angular momentum. The vector spin
angular momentum is deﬁned as
S =
¯h
2
σ
= ˆ e
x
¯h
2
σ
x
+ ˆ e
y
¯h
2
σ
y
+ ˆ e
z
¯h
2
σ
z
(1938)
and the magnitude is given by
´
S
2
=
ˆ
S
2
x
+
ˆ
S
2
y
+
ˆ
S
2
z
=
¯h
4
2
σ
2
x
+
¯h
4
2
σ
2
y
+
¯h
4
2
σ
2
z
=
3
4
¯h
2
σ
0
(1939)
The unit matrix σ
0
is the identity operator as, when it acts on an arbitrary
state, Ψ, it has the eﬀect
σ
0
Ψ = Ψ (1940)
and so the eigenvalues of the unit matrix are unity. As the eigenvalues of the
magnitude of the spin angular momentum are s ( s + 1 ) ¯h
2
, this means that
s =
1
2
. The Pauli spin operators only act on the space formed by s =
1
2
.
This space is twodimensional as the eigenvalues of
´
S
2
have a degeneracy of
( 2 s + 1 ) = 2. Thus, there are two independent basis states which can be
chosen as the two column vectors that are the eigenvectors of σ
z
σ
z
χ
±
= ± χ
±
(1941)
The eigenvector corresponding to the upspin state with spin eigenvalue of +
¯ h
2
is
χ
+
=
_
1
0
_
(1942)
while the eigenvector corresponding to the downspin state, with spin eigenvalue
−
¯ h
2
is represented by
χ
−
=
_
0
1
_
(1943)
413
It should be noted that any pair of Pauli matrices, with diﬀerent indices i and
j, anticommute. That is
σ
i
σ
j
+ σ
j
σ
i
= 2 σ
0
δ
i,j
(1944)
The raising and lowering operators are deﬁned as
σ
±
= σ
x
± i σ
y
(1945)
which yields the representations
σ
+
=
_
0 2
0 0
_
(1946)
and
σ
−
=
_
0 0
2 0
_
(1947)
——————————————————————————————————
4.8.1 Exercise 104
Prove that the above two column vectors of eqn(1942) and eqn(1943) are eigen
states of the z component of the spin operator S
z
=
¯ h
2
σ
z
, and ﬁnd the eﬀect
of the raising and lowering operators on these states.
——————————————————————————————————
4.8.2 Solution 104
The column vector χ
+
is an eigenvalue of σ
z
, since it satisﬁes the eigenvalue
equation
σ
z
χ
+
=
_
1 0
0 − 1
_ _
1
0
_
=
_
1
0
_
= χ
+
(1948)
with eigenvalue 1. Also, the column vector χ
−
is an eigenvalue of σ
z
, since it
satisﬁes the eigenvalue equation
σ
z
χ
−
=
_
1 0
0 − 1
_ _
0
1
_
414
=
_
0
− 1
_
= −
_
0
1
_
= − χ
−
(1949)
with eigenvalue − 1. Hence, χ
±
are eigenstates of
ˆ
S
z
with eigenvalues of ±
¯ h
2
.
The eﬀect of the raising operator,
ˆ
S
+
=
ˆ
S
x
+ i
ˆ
S
y
on the eigenstates of
ˆ
S
z
with eigenvalue −
¯ h
2
is found from the eﬀect of σ
+
ˆ
S
+
=
¯h
2
σ
+
=
¯h
2
_
σ
x
+ i σ
y
_
(1950)
acting on the eigenstates. This leads to
σ
+
χ
−
=
_
0 2
0 0
_ _
0
1
_
=
_
2
0
_
= 2 χ
+
(1951)
This shows that the raising operator increases the eigenvalue from −
¯ h
2
to +
¯ h
2
.
When the raising operator acts on the state χ
+
it has the eﬀect
σ
+
χ
+
=
_
0 2
0 0
_ _
1
0
_
=
_
0
0
_
= 0 (1952)
The raising operator annihilates the state with the maximal eigenvalue of
ˆ
S
z
,
since by deﬁnition it cannot raise it any further.
The eﬀect of the lowering operator, σ
−
= σ
x
− i σ
y
on the eigenstates of
ˆ
S
z
are given by
σ
−
χ
+
=
_
0 0
2 0
_ _
1
0
_
= 2
_
0
1
_
(1953)
415
which lowers the eigenvalue. However, since the state χ
−
has the lowest eigen
value of σ
z
one ﬁnds
σ
−
χ
−
=
_
0 0
2 0
_ _
0
1
_
=
_
0
0
_
= 0 (1954)
Thus, the lowering operator produces zero when it acts on the state with the
lowest eigenvalue.
These equations can be summarized as
ˆ
S
+
χ
−
= ¯ h χ
+
ˆ
S
+
χ
+
= 0
ˆ
S
−
χ
+
= ¯ h χ
−
ˆ
S
−
χ
−
= 0 (1955)
——————————————————————————————————
4.8.3 Exercise 105
Show that any two by two matrix can be expressed as a linear combination of the
Pauli matrices and the unit matrix. Also show that any twocomponent column
vector Ψ can be represented as the linear superposition of the two eigenstates
of σ
z
, where
Ψ =
_
Ψ
+
Ψ
−
_
(1956)
——————————————————————————————————
4.8.4 Solution 105
Consider an arbitrary two by two matrix
_
A B
C D
_
(1957)
416
This can be expressed as the sum of four two by two matrices each with just
one nonzero element
_
A B
C D
_
= A
_
1 0
0 0
_
+ B
_
0 1
0 0
_
+ C
_
0 0
1 0
_
+ D
_
0 0
0 1
_
(1958)
The four by four matrices with components on the diagonal can be expressed
in terms of the sum of the unit matrix σ
0
and σ
z
via
_
1 0
0 0
_
=
1
2
_ _
1 0
0 1
_
+
_
1 0
0 − 1
_ _
(1959)
while the matrix
_
0 0
0 1
_
=
1
2
_ _
1 0
0 1
_
−
_
1 0
0 − 1
_ _
(1960)
can be expressed as the diﬀerence.
The oﬀdiagonal matrices can be expressed in terms of σ
x
and σ
y
via
_
0 1
0 0
_
=
1
2
_ _
0 1
1 0
_
+ i
_
0 − i
i 0
_ _
(1961)
while the matrix
_
0 0
1 0
_
=
1
2
_ _
0 1
1 0
_
− i
_
0 − i
i 0
_ _
(1962)
can be expressed as the diﬀerence.
Hence, we have the result that the arbitrary two by two matrix can be
expressed as
_
A B
C D
_
=
1
2
( A+D ) σ
0
+
1
2
( A−D ) σ
z
+
1
2
( B +C ) σ
x
+
i
2
( B −C ) σ
y
(1963)
This proves that the Pauli matrices and the identity span the linear space formed
by two by two matrices.
The states χ
+
and χ
−
are eigenstates of σ
z
. Since σ
z
is a Hermitean operator,
the eigenstates form a complete set. Thus, χ
+
and χ
−
spans the space of the
417
column vectors as an arbitrary vector can be expressed as
Ψ =
_
Ψ
+
Ψ
−
_
=
_
Ψ
+
0
_
+
_
0
Ψ
−
_
= Ψ
+
_
1
0
_
+ Ψ
−
_
0
1
_
= Ψ
+
χ
+
+ Ψ
−
χ
−
(1964)
as was expected.
——————————————————————————————————
4.8.5 Exercise 106
Prove the identity
_
σ . a
_ _
σ . b
_
= σ
0
_
a . b
_
+ i σ .
_
a ∧ b
_
(1965)
in which the spin vector is written in terms of the Pauli matrices as
σ = ˆ e
x
σ
x
+ ˆ e
y
σ
y
+ ˆ e
z
σ
z
(1966)
——————————————————————————————————
4.8.6 Solution 106
First we note that the Pauli matrices satisfy the commutation relations
[ σ
i
, σ
j
] = 2 i
k
i,j,k
σ
k
(1967)
where
i,j,k
is the antisymmetric LeviCivita symbol.
Also we note that the Pauli matrices satisfy
σ
i
σ
j
= − σ
j
σ
i
(1968)
if i ,= j, whereas if i = j then
σ
i
σ
i
= σ
0
(1969)
418
where σ
0
is the unit matrix. These relations can be combined in the anti
commutation relation
¦ σ
i
, σ
j
¦
+
= 2 δ
i,j
σ
0
(1970)
in which the anticommutator of two operators
ˆ
A and
ˆ
B is deﬁned as ¦
ˆ
A ,
ˆ
B ¦
+
,
where
¦
ˆ
A ,
ˆ
B ¦
+
=
ˆ
A
ˆ
B +
ˆ
B
ˆ
A (1971)
Hence, on adding the commutation and anticommutation relations, one has
the identity
σ
i
σ
j
= δ
i,j
σ
0
+ i
k
i,j,k
σ
k
(1972)
The identity to be proved follows immediately by expressing the scalar prod
uct in terms of the sum of Cartesian components
_
σ . a
_ _
σ . b
_
=
i
σ
i
a
i
j
σ
j
b
j
=
i,j
σ
i
σ
j
a
i
b
j
=
i,j
_
δ
i,j
σ
0
+ i
k
i,j,k
σ
k
_
a
i
b
j
=
i,j
δ
i,j
σ
0
a
i
b
j
+i
k
σ
k
i,j
i,j,k
a
i
b
j
= σ
0
_
a . b
_
+ i
k
σ
k
_
a ∧ b
_
k
= σ
0
_
a . b
_
+ i σ .
_
a ∧ b
_
(1973)
This completes the proof.
——————————————————————————————————
4.8.7 Exercise 107
Find all the eigenfunctions and eigenvalues for the Pauli matrix σ
x
, and show
that they form a complete orthonormal set.
——————————————————————————————————
419
4.8.8 Solution 107
The matrix σ
x
is given by
σ
x
=
_
0 1
1 0
_
(1974)
and the eigenfunctions satisfy the eigenvalue equation
σ
x
χ
x
= λ χ
x
(1975)
The eigenfunctions are represented by column vectors of the form
χ
x
=
_
α
β
_
(1976)
which are normalized when
[ α [
2
+ [ β [
2
= 1 (1977)
The eigenvalue equations are expressed as the coupled algebraic equations for
the components of Ψ as
_
0 1
1 0
_ _
α
β
_
= λ
_
α
β
_
(1978)
or
_
− λ 1
1 − λ
_ _
α
β
_
= 0 (1979)
This equation only has a solution if the inverse matrix does not exist. Since
the inverse matrix is inversely proportional to the determinant, the determinant
must vanish for there to be a nontrivial solution for the components. Therefore,
the eigenvalue λ is given by the solution of
¸
¸
¸
¸
¸
− λ 1
1 − λ
¸
¸
¸
¸
¸
= 0 (1980)
or
λ
2
= 1 (1981)
which is consistent with the relation
σ
2
x
= σ
0
(1982)
The eigenvalues of σ
x
, are given by
λ = ± 1 (1983)
420
The eigenfunction χ
x
+1
corresponding to λ = 1 is found from
_
0 1
1 0
_ _
α
β
_
=
_
α
β
_
(1984)
which yields α = β. Thus, the normalized eigenfunction is given by
χ
x
+1
=
1
√
2
_
1
1
_
(1985)
up to an arbitrary phase.
The eigenfunction corresponding to λ = − 1 is found from
_
0 1
1 0
_ _
α
β
_
= −
_
α
β
_
(1986)
which yields α = − β. Thus, the normalized eigenfunction is given by
χ
x
−1
=
1
√
2
_
1
− 1
_
(1987)
up to an arbitrary phase.
The eigenstates of σ
x
are orthogonal as
χ
x
+1
†
χ
x
−1
=
1
2
_
1 1
__
1
− 1
_
=
1
2
_
1 − 1
_
= 0 (1988)
Furthermore, since the space of column vectors is twodimensional, the set of
eigenfunctions are complete. That is, any arbitrary vector
Ψ =
_
α
β
_
(1989)
can be expressed as
_
α
β
_
=
( α + β )
√
2
1
√
2
_
1
1
_
+
( α − β )
√
2
1
√
2
_
1
− 1
_
(1990)
421
where the expansion coeﬃcients were determined from the inner products with
the eigenstates
χ
x
+1
†
Ψ =
( α + β )
√
2
(1991)
and
χ
x
−1
†
Ψ =
( α − β )
√
2
(1992)
Thus, we have shown that an arbitrary state can be expanded in terms of the
eigenstates of σ
x
as
Ψ =
( α + β )
√
2
χ
x
+1
+
( α − β )
√
2
χ
x
−1
(1993)
——————————————————————————————————
Thus, the Pauli matrices form a representation of halfinteger angular mo
mentum, called spin. The spin quantum numbers are intrinsic to the particle
and, therefore, the operators cannot be represented in terms of the position and
momentum of the particle. The spin of a particle ﬁrst became manifest in the
anomalous Zeeman eﬀect, in which there is a coupling between the spin state
and an external magnetic ﬁeld.
——————————————————————————————————
4.8.9 Exercise 108
Find the eigenvalues and eigenvectors of the component of the spin along the
unit vector ˆ η, where
ˆ η = sin θ cos ϕ ˆ e
x
+ sin θ sin ϕ ˆ e
y
+ cos θ ˆ e
z
(1994)
Work in the basis in which ˆ σ
z
is diagonal.
Hence, ﬁnd the unitary matrix U
ˆ e
(θ) which produces a rotation of the spin
states through an angle θ, about the axis
ˆ e = − sin ϕ ˆ e
x
+ cos ϕ ˆ e
y
(1995)
perpendicular to the plane of ˆ e
z
and ˆ η.
Hint: In addition to producing the transformation of the spin state “aligned”
parallel to the axis z to the spin state “aligned” with ˆ η, it is also required that
the rotation does not change the “direction” of spin states aligned parallel to
the rotation axis. This is indicated schematically in ﬁgs(105) and (106) for a
422
Rotation of a set of Spin States
Rotation angle θ
η
φ
z
x
y
ε axis of rotn.
S
η
= 0
S
η
= 1
S
η
=  1
Figure 105: A spin state with eigenvalue of
ˆ
S
z
equal to +¯ h is to be transformed
to a spin state which an eigenstate of
ˆ
S
η
, with eigenvalue of +¯h.
spin one particle.
——————————————————————————————————
4.8.10 Solution 108
We seek the eigenvalues and eigenfunctions of the operator
η . σ = sin θ cos ϕ ˆ σ
x
+ sin θ sin ϕ ˆ σ
y
+ cos θ ˆ σ
z
(1996)
which has the matrix representation
η . σ = ¯ h
_
cos θ sin θ exp[ − i ϕ ]
sin θ exp[ + i ϕ ] − cos θ
_
(1997)
in the basis where ˆ σ
z
is diagonal. The eigenvalues µ ¯h are determined from the
secular equation
0 =
¸
¸
¸
¸
¸
cos θ − µ sin θ exp[ − i ϕ ]
sin θ exp[ + i ϕ ] − cos θ − µ
¸
¸
¸
¸
¸
(1998)
423
Rotation of a set of Spin States
θ
η
φ
z
x
y
ε
S
ε
eigenstates are invariant
S
ε
= 1
S
ε
=  1
S
ε
= 0
Figure 106: It is also required that a spin rotation around the axis ˆ e does not
change the eigenstates of
ˆ
S
e
.
and, thus, are found to be µ = ± ¯h. The eigenfunction χ
η
µ
corresponding to
the eigenvalue µ, is expressed in terms of its components through
χ
η
µ
=
_
α
η
µ
β
η
µ
_
(1999)
The components for µ = + 1 are found from the eigenvalue equation
_
0
0
_
=
_
( cos θ − 1 ) sin θ exp[ − i ϕ ]
sin θ exp[ + i ϕ ] − ( cos θ + 1 )
_ _
α
η
+
β
η
+
_
(2000)
Thus, the normalized eigenfunction of the operator in eqn(1996) corresponding
to the µ = 1 eigenvalue is found as
χ
η
+
=
_
cos
θ
2
sin
θ
2
exp[ + i ϕ ]
_
(2001)
Likewise, one ﬁnds the eigenfunction corresponding to µ = − 1 is given by
χ
η
−
=
_
− sin
θ
2
exp[ − i ϕ ]
cos
θ
2
_
(2002)
424
The rotation is about an axis in the plane perpendicular to the unit vectors ˆ e
z
and ˆ e
η
. The matrix U
ˆ e
(θ) is determined from its action on the three eigenstates
of
ˆ
L
z
χ
η
µ
= U
ˆ e
(θ) χ
z
µ
(2003)
Thus, we have
_
α
η
µ
β
η
µ
_
=
_
cos
θ
2
− sin
θ
2
exp[ − i ϕ ]
sin
θ
2
exp[ + i ϕ ] cos
θ
2
_ _
α
z
µ
β
z
µ
_
(2004)
On recognizing that the component of the spin operator along the rotation axis
is given by
_
ˆ e . ˆ σ
_
=
_
0 − i exp[ − i ϕ ]
+ i exp[ + i ϕ ] 0
_
(2005)
and that the square is the unit matrix
_
ˆ e . ˆ σ
_
2
=
_
1 0
0 1
_
= σ
0
(2006)
we ﬁnd that the spin rotation operator may be written in the form
U
ˆ e
(θ) = cos
θ
2
ˆ σ
0
− i sin
θ
2
_
ˆ e . ˆ σ
_
(2007)
Hence, the spin rotation operator is given by
U
ˆ e
(θ) = exp
_
− i
θ
2
ˆ e . ˆ σ
_
= exp
_
−
i θ
¯h
ˆ e .
ˆ
S
_
(2008)
where the spin is deﬁned as
ˆ
S =
¯h
2
ˆ σ (2009)
——————————————————————————————————
4.8.11 The Pauli Equation
The existence of spin was ﬁrst inferred by Uhlenbeck and Goudschmit
36
as a
result of experiments where atoms were placed in a strong magnetic ﬁeld and
36
G.E. Uhlenbeck and S.A. Goudsmit, Naturwissenschaften, 13, 953 (1925) and Nature,
117, 264 (1926).
425
the absorption lines were measured. In the ordinary Zeeman eﬀect, the orbital
angular momentum of a charged electron produces a magnetic moment which
couples to the ﬁeld and, therefore, raises the degeneracy of the electronic levels.
This results in a splitting of the absorption lines, when the ﬁeld is applied. The
number of lines that are seen is equal to the degeneracy of the atomic levels in
the absence of the ﬁeld which are labeled by n and l. In general, the degeneracy
is expected to be given by 2 l + 1 corresponding to the diﬀerent m values.
However, due to the presence of spin, there are more lines seen than predicted
by the spinless version of the Schr¨odinger equation. Even the l = 0 state is
split into two levels corresponding to a degeneracy of 2. On introducing a spin
operator S representing spin angular momentum and equating the degeneracy
2 S + 1 = 2, one ﬁnds that the spin must be halfinteger S =
1
2
.
The Pauli equation
37
assumes that the wave function for a spin half particle
has two components
Ψ(r) =
_
Ψ
+
(r)
Ψ
−
(r)
_
(2010)
and expresses the kinetic energy operator of the free particle in terms of the
product of a Laplacian and the unit two by two matrix,
ˆ
T =
ˆ p
2
2 m
(2011)
which can be rewritten as
ˆ
T =
( ˆ p . σ ) ( ˆ p . σ )
2 m
(2012)
by using the identity
_
σ . a
_ _
σ . b
_
= σ
0
_
a . b
_
+ i σ .
_
a ∧ b
_
(2013)
with a = b = ˆ p. Thus, the timedependent Schr¨odinger equation for the
twocomponent (column vector) wave function Ψ(r) representing a free particle
can be written in the form of the ﬁeldfree Pauli equation
i ¯h
∂
∂t
Ψ(r, t) =
_
−
¯h
2
2 m
( σ . ∇ )
2
_
Ψ(r, t) (2014)
The corresponding equation for a charged particle in an electromagnetic ﬁeld is
obtained by using the minimum coupling assumption p
µ
→ p
µ
−
q
c
A
µ
. The
resulting equation is found as
i ¯h
∂
∂t
Ψ(r, t) =
_
1
2 m
_
σ . ( − i ¯h ∇ −
q
c
A(r, t) )
_
2
+ σ
0
q φ(r, t)
_
Ψ(r, t)
(2015)
37
W. Pauli, Z. f. Physik, 43, 601 (1927).
426
which, on using the identity, becomes
i ¯h
∂
∂t
Ψ(r, t) =
_
1
2 m
σ
0
_
− i ¯h ∇ −
q
c
A(r, t)
_
2
−
¯h q
2 m c
σ .
_
∇ ∧ A(r, t) + A(r, t) ∧ ∇
_
+ σ
0
q φ(r, t)
_
Ψ(r, t) (2016)
Furthermore, since
∇ ∧ A Ψ(r) = Ψ(r)
_
∇ ∧ A
_
− A ∧ ∇ Ψ(r) (2017)
and B = ∇ ∧ A, one ﬁnds
i ¯h
∂
∂t
Ψ(r, t) =
_
1
2 m
σ
0
_
− i ¯h ∇ −
q
c
A(r, t)
_
2
−
¯h q
2 m c
σ . B(r, t) + σ
0
q φ(r, t)
_
Ψ(r, t) (2018)
Since the spin angular momentum S is given by
¯ h
2
σ, one ﬁnds that the spin
couples to the magnetic ﬁeld giving rise to the anomalous Zeeman eﬀect, but
the relation between spin angular momentum and magnetic moment M is
M = 2
_
q
2 m c
_
S (2019)
which is diﬀerent from the relation between the orbital angular momentum L
and the magnetic moment found in the ordinary Zeeman eﬀect
M =
_
q
2 m c
_
L (2020)
The extra factor of 2 found for the spin half particle is known as the gyro
magnetic ratio, g, and the magnitude of the factor
q ¯ h
2 m c
is known as the Bohr
magneton µ
B
.
4.8.12 Spin Dynamics
We shall consider the dynamics of a particle with spin S =
¯ h
2
that is localized
at some point in space, when a timeindependent magnetic ﬁeld B is applied to
the system. The direction of the ﬁeld may be taken to deﬁne the direction of
the z axis of our Cartesian coordinate system. We shall only be concerned with
the dynamics of the spin and, therefore, suppress any mention of the coordinate
dependence of the wave function.
427
The wave function is then represented as a linear superposition of spinup
and spindown states
Ψ(t) =
_
Ψ
+
(t)
Ψ
−
(t)
_
(2021)
where Ψ
±
(t) are the timedependent expansion coeﬃcients. The Pauli equation
is then given by the matrix equation
i ¯h
∂
∂t
Ψ(t) = − µ
B
B
z
σ
z
Ψ(t) (2022)
where the Hamiltonian only consists of the Zeeman term. Since the energy
eigenstates correspond to eigenstates of the z component of the spin, S
z
=
¯ h
2
σ
z
,
one may decompose the timedependent wave function into energy eigenstates
Ψ(t) = Ψ
+
(t) χ
+
+ Ψ
−
(t) χ
−
(2023)
On substituting this into the timedependent Schr¨odinger equation, one ﬁnds
that
i ¯h
∂
∂t
Ψ
±
(t) = ∓ µ
B
B Ψ
±
(t) (2024)
which have the solutions
Ψ
±
(t) = exp
_
± i
µ
B
B t
¯h
_
Ψ
±
(0) (2025)
Hence, we have found the time dependence of our arbitrary initial spin wave
function Ψ(0) as
Ψ(t) = exp
_
+ i
µ
B
B t
¯h
_
Ψ
+
(0) χ
+
+ exp
_
− i
µ
B
B t
¯h
_
Ψ
−
(0) χ
−
(2026)
If the initial state was known at t = 0 to be an eigenstate of, say S
x
with the
eigenvalue +
¯ h
2
, then one has
Ψ(0) =
1
√
2
_
χ
+
+ χ
−
_
(2027)
or
Ψ(0) =
1
√
2
_
1
1
_
(2028)
Thus, we have found that the time dependence of the wave function at later
times, t, is given by
Ψ(t) =
1
√
2
_
exp
_
+ i
µ
B
B t
¯h
_
χ
+
+ exp
_
− i
µ
B
B t
¯h
_
χ
−
_
(2029)
428
From this one can see that the probability of ﬁnding the particle in an eigenstate
of S
x
with eigenvalue +
¯ h
2
is going to oscillate with time, as is the probability
that the particle is in the S
x
eigenstate with eigenvalue −
¯ h
2
. This oscillation
corresponds to the classical precession of a spin around the z axis, with a fre
quency given by ω =
2 µ
B
B
¯ h
, known as the Larmor precession frequency.
B Μ
Figure 107: A classical magnetic moment M in an applied magnetic ﬁeld B
experiences a torque τ = M ∧ B and, hence, precesses around the direction of
the ﬁeld.
——————————————————————————————————
4.8.13 Exercise 109
Evaluate the time dependence of the probability that a spin
1
2
in a magnetic
ﬁeld B aligned along the z  axis is found in the eigenstates of S
y
, if the initial
state is an eigenstate of S
x
with eigenvalue +
¯ h
2
.
——————————————————————————————————
4.8.14 Solution 109
The initial state is an eigenstate of
ˆ
S
x
with eigenvalue +
¯ h
2
. The initial state
can be represented as
Ψ(0) =
1
√
2
_
1
1
_
(2030)
429
which evolves with time as
Ψ(t) = exp
_
−
i t
¯h
ˆ
H
_
Ψ(0) (2031)
where the Hamiltonian is given by
ˆ
H = − µ
B
B σ
z
(2032)
The timedependent state is given by
Ψ(t) =
1
√
2
exp
_
i t µ
B
B
¯h
_
_
1
0
_
+
1
√
2
exp
_
−
i t µ
B
B
¯h
_
_
0
1
_
(2033)
The matrix σ
y
has eigenvalues of ± 1 and the eigenvalues are given by
χ
y
±1
=
1
√
2
_
1
± i
_
(2034)
respectively. The state Ψ(t) is expanded in terms of the eigenstates χ
y
±
as
Ψ(t) =
±
C
±
(t) χ
y
±
(2035)
where
C
±
(t) =
1
2
_
exp
_
i t µ
B
B
¯h
_
∓ i exp
_
−
i t µ
B
B
¯h
_ _
(2036)
Thus, we have the timedependent probability given by
P
y
±
(t) =
1
2
_
1 ∓ sin
2 µ
B
B t
¯h
_
(2037)
——————————————————————————————————
4.8.15 Exercise 110
A spin half nucleus is placed in a static magnetic ﬁeld B
0
aligned along the z
axis and a smaller rotating magnetic ﬁeld B
1
in the x  y plane. The frequency
of the a.c. ﬁeld is ω. If the nucleus is initially pointing in the + z direction at
t = 0, what is the probability that it will be aligned with the + z axis at later
times?
430
Experiments were suggested and preformed by I.I. Rabi and coworkers
38
which were based on calculations of the above type.
——————————————————————————————————
4.8.16 Solution 110
The spin vector can be written as
Ψ(t) =
_
α(t)
β(t)
_
(2038)
and the Schr¨odinger equation is
i ¯h
∂
∂t
Ψ(t) = − µ
N
_
B
0
σ
z
+ B
1
σ
x
cos ωt − B
1
σ
y
sin ωt
_
Ψ(t)
(2039)
or
i
∂
∂t
Ψ(t) = −
_
µ
N
B0
¯ h
µ
N
B1
¯ h
exp[ + i ω t ]
µ
N
B1
¯ h
exp[ − i ω t ] −
µ
N
B0
¯ h
_
Ψ(t)
(2040)
We should note that the sense of the rotation of B
1
about the zaxis is such
that the axis of rotation is antiparallel to B
0
. We are also implicitly assuming
that µ
N
is positive. The equations for the components of the spinors are
i
∂
∂t
α(t) = −
_
µ
N
B
0
¯h
_
α(t) −
_
µ
N
B
1
¯h
_
exp
_
+ i ω t
_
β(t)
(2041)
and
i
∂
∂t
β(t) = +
_
µ
N
B
0
¯h
_
β(t) −
_
µ
N
B
1
¯h
_
exp
_
− i ω t
_
α(t)
(2042)
On solving the ﬁrst equation for β and substituting this into the second, one
obtains a second order diﬀerential equation for α
∂
2
∂t
2
α(t) − i ω
∂
∂t
α(t) +
_ _
µ
N
¯h
_
2
( B
2
0
+ B
2
1
) − ω
µ
N
B
0
¯h
_
α(t) = 0
(2043)
38
I.I. Rabi, Phys. Rev. 51, 652 (1937), I.I. Rabi, J.R. Zacharias, S. Millman and P. Kusch,
Phys. Rev. 53, 318 (1938).
431
This is solved by assuming that α(t) has the form
α(t) = α(0) exp
_
i λ t
_
(2044)
The characteristic equation is a quadratic equation in λ which can be solved,
yielding
λ
±
= +
ω
2
±
¸
_
µ
N
B
0
¯h
−
ω
2
_
2
+
_
g µ
N
B
1
¯h
_
2
(2045)
The general solution can be written as
α(t) = a
+
exp
_
i λ
+
t
_
+ a
−
exp
_
i λ
−
t
_
(2046)
The components of β can be written as
β(t) =
_
b
+
exp
_
i λ
+
t
_
+ b
−
exp
_
i λ
−
t
_ _
exp
_
− i ω t
_
(2047)
However, b
+
and b
−
are given in terms of the a’s via the original diﬀerential
equations. Thus, b
+
is linear in a
+
and b
−
is linear in a
−
b
±
a
±
=
_
(
¯ h ω
2
− µ
N
B
0
) ∓
¸
_
¯ h ω
2
− µ
N
B
0
_
2
+
_
µ
N
B
1
_
2
_
µ
N
B
1
(2048)
To satisfy the initial conditions one must have α(0) = a
+
+ a
−
= 1 and
β(0) = b
+
+ b
−
= 0. These conditions allows one to solve for α(t). The
probability of ﬁnding the spinup eigenvalue is given by [ α(t) [
2
and
[ α(t) [
2
= 1 −
_
_
µ
N
B
1
_
2
_
µ
N
B
0
−
¯ hω
2
_
2
+
_
µ
N
B
1
_
2
_
sin
2
¸
_
µ
N
B
0
¯h
−
ω
2
_
2
+
_
µ
N
B
1
¯h
_
2
t (2049)
As the spin one half wave function is normalized and has an overall phase factor,
the spin state only depends on two variables. Therefore, the spin one half wave
function can always be interpreted in terms of a classical state in which the
spin has a deﬁnite direction. When the frequency ω is away from the resonance
frequency
ω = 2
_
µ
N
B
0
¯h
_
(2050)
432
the spin precesses around the zaxis with frequency ω and the z component also
makes makes small amplitude oscillations. That is, the spin motion is conﬁned
within a small ring parallel the equator of the unit sphere. However, for fre
quencies near the resonance frequency, the z component of the spin performs
large amplitude oscillations and almost ﬂips to the other pole with frequency
2
_
µ
N
B1
¯ h
_
.
——————————————————————————————————
4.8.17 The Berry Phase
In the presence of a magnetic ﬁeld, an isolated spin will ﬁnd an equilibrium
state which is the ground state. In the ground state the spin is aligned parallel
to the ﬁeld. If the direction of the ﬁeld is subsequently changed, suﬃciently
slowly, one expects that the direction of the spin will continue to align with the
magnetic ﬁeld at every instant of time. That is, one does not expect the slowly
time varying ﬁeld to cause the spin to make a transition to states of higher
energy. This expectation is borne out by detailed calculations on systems of
various spin magnitudes. However, although the spin state does follow the ﬁeld
direction, the spin wave function does acquire an additional phase. If the ﬁeld is
returned to the original direction, the additional phase factor is determined by
the topology of the spin’s motion
39
. The motion of the spin can be visualized
by projecting the spin direction onto the unit sphere. The direction of the spin
can be speciﬁed by specifying the polar coordinates (θ(t), ϕ(t)). As the ﬁeld
is changed, the spins direction will map out a path on the unit sphere. The
additional phase, or Berry phase δ, acquired by the spin is determined by the
solid angle Ω enclosed by the spin’s orbit. The Berry phase is determined by
the solid angle and the magnitude of the spin, in units of ¯ h. The path of the
spin is parameterized as θ(ϕ). Since the inﬁnitesimal solid angle dΩ is given by
dΩ = dϕ dθ sin θ (2051)
on integrating from the pole θ = 0 to θ(ϕ), the solid angle enclosed by the
inﬁnitesimal wedge is
dΩ = dϕ ( 1 − cos θ(ϕ) ) (2052)
Then, the solid angle enclosed by the complete orbit is given by
Ω =
_
dϕ ( 1 − cos θ(ϕ) ) (2053)
where the integral over ϕ runs over 2 π.
39
M.V. Berry, Proc. R. Soc. Lond. A 392, 45 (1984).
433
(θ(t),ϕ(t))
Ω
Figure 108: The Berry Phase is determined by the solid angle Ω swept out by
the spins orbit on the unit sphere.
The Berry phase can be illustrated by considering a spin one half in a mag
netic ﬁeld of constant magnitude, B, oriented along the direction (θ, ϕ). In this
case, the Zeeman Hamiltonian is given by
ˆ
H
Z
= − µ
B
( B . σ )
= − µ
B
B
_
cos θ σ
z
+ sin θ ( sin ϕ σ
y
+ cos ϕ σ
x
)
_
(2054)
which, on using the Paulispin matrices, can be expressed as
ˆ
H
Z
= − µ
B
B
_
cos θ sin θ exp[− i ϕ ]
sin θ exp[ + i ϕ ] − cos θ
_
(2055)
For ﬁxed (θ, ϕ), the timeindependent Hamiltonian
ˆ
H
Z
has an eigenstate with
eigenfunction given by
χ
+
=
_
cos
θ
2
sin
θ
2
exp[ + i ϕ ]
_
(2056)
corresponding to the eigenvalue
E
0
= − µ
B
B (2057)
434
Thus, in this eigenstate the spin is aligned parallel to the applied ﬁeld. For a
static ﬁeld one has the timedependent wave function given by
χ
+
(t) =
_
cos
θ
2
sin
θ
2
exp[ + i ϕ ]
_
exp
_
+ i
µ
B
B
¯h
t
_
(2058)
where the time dependence is given purely by the exponential phase factor.
If the direction of the ﬁeld (θ(t), ϕ(t)) is changed very slowly, one expects the
spin will adiabatically follow the ﬁeld direction. That is, if the ﬁeld is rotated
suﬃciently slowly, one does not expect the spin to make a transition to the
state with energy E = + µ
B
B where the spin is aligned antiparallel to the
ﬁeld. However, the wave function may acquire a phase which is diﬀerent from
the time and energy dependent phase factor expected for a static ﬁeld. This
extra phase is the Berry phase δ, which can be calculated from the Schr¨odinger
equation
i ¯h
∂
∂t
_
α(t)
β(t)
_
= −µ
B
B
_
cos θ(t) sin θ(t) exp[− i ϕ(t) ]
sin θ(t) exp[ + i ϕ(t) ] − cos θ(t)
_ _
α(t)
β(t)
_
(2059)
We shall assume that the wave function takes the adiabatic form
_
α(t)
β(t)
_
=
_
cos
θ(t)
2
sin
θ(t)
2
exp[ + i ϕ(t) ]
_
exp
_
+ i
_
µ
B
B
¯h
t − δ(t)
_ _
(2060)
which instantaneously follows the direction of the ﬁeld, but is also modiﬁed
by the inclusion of the Berry phase δ(t). On substituting this ansatz into the
Schr¨odinger equation, one ﬁnds that the nonadiabatic terms satisfy
−
∂δ
∂t
_
cos
θ(t)
2
sin
θ(t)
2
exp[ + i ϕ(t) ]
_
+
∂ϕ
∂t
_
0
sin
θ(t)
2
exp[ + i ϕ(t) ]
_
=
i
2
∂θ
∂t
_
− sin
θ(t)
2
cos
θ(t)
2
exp[ + i ϕ(t) ]
_
(2061)
The above equation is then projected onto the adiabatic state by multiplying it
by the row matrix
_
cos
θ(t)
2
sin
θ(t)
2
exp[ − i ϕ(t) ]
_
(2062)
One ﬁnds that the derivative of θ w.r.t. t cancels and that the equation simpliﬁes
to
−
∂δ
∂t
+
∂ϕ
∂t
sin
2
θ
2
= 0 (2063)
435
Hence, the Berry phase is given by integrating w.r.t. to t,
δ(t) =
_
t
0
dt
∂ϕ
∂t
sin
2
θ(t
)
2
=
_
dϕ sin
2
θ(ϕ)
2
=
1
2
_
dϕ ( 1 − cos θ(ϕ) ) (2064)
On completing one orbit in spin space, the extra phase is given by
δ =
1
2
Ω (2065)
as was claimed.
436
4.9 Transformations and Invariance
The assumption underlying the application of quantum mechanics to physical
systems is that the basic structure and predictions of experimental results on
quantum mechanical systems are independent of the inertial coordinate system
used. If we consider spacetime which is governed by Galilean invariance, time
being absolute and space being isotropic and governed by the laws of Euclidean
geometry, we have nonrelativistic quantum mechanics. Transformations be
tween diﬀerent coordinate systems (passive transformations) leave the physical
system unaltered and merely provide relations between reference systems of dif
ferent observers. Alternately, two diﬀerent physical systems may be related to
each other by a transformation of the physical position of the physical system
and measuring devices. Under an active transformation such as a physical ro
tation of one system, the two systems may be brought into coincidence.
Equivalent quantum mechanical systems can be transformed into each other,
via a unitary transformation associated with a unitary operator
ˆ
U. The unitary
operator is deﬁned as an operator that has a Hermitean conjugate which is
identical to the inverse operator
ˆ
U
†
=
ˆ
U
−1
(2066)
This has a consequence that the eigenvalues of a unitary operator are complex
numbers of magnitude unity, and the eigenfunctions form an orthonormal set.
This can be seen by considering the matrix elements of
ˆ
U
−1
ˆ
U between two
diﬀerent eigenfunctions φ
λ1
and φ
λ2
_
d
3
r φ
∗
λ2
(r)
ˆ
U
−1
ˆ
U φ
λ1
(r) = λ
∗
2
λ
1
_
d
3
r φ
∗
λ2
(r) φ
λ1
(r)
=
_
d
3
r φ
∗
λ2
(r) φ
λ1
(r) (2067)
since
ˆ
U is unitary. Thus, we have
_
λ
∗
2
λ
1
− 1
_ _
d
3
r φ
∗
λ2
(r) φ
λ1
(r) = 0 (2068)
Hence, the eigenvalues have modulus unity as
λ
∗
1
λ
1
= 1 (2069)
and eigenfunctions corresponding to diﬀerent eigenvalues are orthogonal.
Physically equivalent states are related via unitary transformations. Under
a unitary transformation the states are transformed according to
Ψ(r) → Ψ
(r) =
ˆ
U Ψ(r) (2070)
437
which preserves the normalization of Ψ
as
_
d
3
r Ψ
∗
(r) Ψ
(r) =
_
d
3
r Ψ
∗
(r)
ˆ
U
†
ˆ
U Ψ(r)
=
_
d
3
r Ψ
∗
(r) Ψ(r)
= 1 (2071)
The operators are transformed according to
ˆ
A →
ˆ
A
=
ˆ
U
ˆ
A
ˆ
U
†
(2072)
as the expectation values of the transformed operators sandwiched between the
transformed states leads to the same expectation values as the untransformed
operators in the untransformed states
_
d
3
r Ψ
∗
(r)
ˆ
A
Ψ
(r) =
_
d
3
r Ψ
∗
(r)
ˆ
A Ψ(r) (2073)
4.9.1 Time Translational Invariance
The time translational operator
ˆ
U(t, t
0
) is a unitary operator which is deﬁned
by its action on a wave function
ˆ
U(t, t
0
) Ψ(r, t
0
) = Ψ(r, t) (2074)
Since the wave function Ψ(r, t) has the same normalization as Ψ(r, t
0
), the time
evolution operator is a unitary operator as it is norm conserving.
The time translational operator can be expressed in terms of the time deriva
tive, since
exp
_
( t − t
0
)
∂
∂t
0
_
Ψ(r, t
0
) = Ψ(r, t) (2075)
Thus, we ﬁnd that the operator
∂
∂t
0
(2076)
is the inﬁnitesimal generator of time translations and the time translational
operator can be expressed as
ˆ
U(t, t
0
) = exp
_
( t − t
0
)
∂
∂t
0
_
(2077)
The time dependence of the Schr¨odinger equation is governed by the Hamilto
nian
ˆ
H, and if this is time independent then
i ¯h
∂
∂t
≡
ˆ
H (2078)
438
which gives the explicit term for the time translational operator
ˆ
U(t, t
0
) = exp
_
− i
( t − t
0
)
¯h
ˆ
H
_
(2079)
The time translational operator only depends on the time diﬀerence t − t
0
.
The time translation operators can be compounded, thereby forming a group
operation
ˆ
U(t
2
− t
1
)
ˆ
U(t
1
− t
0
) =
ˆ
U(t
2
− t
0
) (2080)
since
ˆ
U only depends on the time diﬀerences t
2
− t
1
. The identity operator is
ˆ
U( 0 ) = 1 (2081)
The inverse of
ˆ
U( t ) is
ˆ
U
−1
( t ) =
ˆ
U( − t ) (2082)
such that
ˆ
U( t )
ˆ
U( − t ) =
ˆ
U( 0 ) (2083)
If a physical quantity is represented by a timeindependent operator
ˆ
A in
the Schr¨odinger picture, and its expectation values are given by
_
d
3
r Ψ
∗
(r, t)
ˆ
A Ψ(r, t) =
_
d
3
r Ψ
∗
(r, t
0
)
ˆ
U
†
(t, t
0
)
ˆ
A
ˆ
U(t, t
0
) Ψ(r, t
0
)
(2084)
this is independent of time if
ˆ
U
†
(t, t
0
)
ˆ
A
ˆ
U(t, t
0
) =
ˆ
A (2085)
which is satisﬁed if the operator
ˆ
A commutes with the Hamiltonian
ˆ
H,
[
ˆ
H ,
ˆ
A ] = 0 (2086)
In particular, since time is homogeneous, and hence the Hamiltonian of a
closed system is independent of time, the energy is conserved as
ˆ
H commutes
with itself.
4.9.2 Translational Invariance
A translation of a system by a distance a changes the wave function of the
system
Ψ(r) → Ψ
(r) =
ˆ
S(a) Ψ(r) (2087)
439
The unitary operator that represents a displacement of a system from r to r + a
is given by
ˆ
S(a) = exp
_
− a . ∇
_
(2088)
so
Ψ
(r) =
ˆ
S(a) Ψ(r)
= exp
_
− a . ∇
_
Ψ(r)
= Ψ(r − a) (2089)
Thus, the wave function Ψ
evaluated at r+a has the same value as Ψ evaluated
at r. The translational operators
ˆ
S(a) can be combined to yield other operators
of the same type
ˆ
S(a)
ˆ
S(b) =
ˆ
S(a +b) (2090)
The translation operators form a representation of a group. The group is
Abelian and it is a continuous group.
Translation through distance a
0
0.2
0.4
0.6
0.8
1
Ψ(x) Ψ(xa)
x
0
x
0
+a
0 0 1 2 2 3 1 3
x
x
Ψ'(x)=Ψ(T
1
x)=Ψ(xa)
x'=Tx=x+a
Figure 109: The translation of an arbitrary state Ψ(r) through a distance a.
For an inﬁnitesimally small displacement ξ, one has
ˆ
S(ξ) = 1 − i ξ .
_
− i ∇
_
+ O(ξ
2
)
= 1 −
i
¯h
ξ . ˆ p + O(ξ
2
) (2091)
440
so − i ∇ is the generator of inﬁnitesimal transformations. The generator of
inﬁnitesimal transformations corresponds to the momentum operator.
If a system is invariant under displacements then the expectation values of
physical operators in these states should be the same for Ψ as Ψ
. In particular,
the Hamiltonian is invariant under the transformation
ˆ
S(ξ)
†
ˆ
H
ˆ
S(ξ) =
ˆ
H (2092)
From the inﬁnitesimal translation, we ﬁnd that ˆ p and
ˆ
H must commute
[ ˆ p ,
ˆ
H ] = 0 (2093)
Hence, we ﬁnd ˆ p is a constant of motion. Thus, for translationally invariant
systems the momentum is conserved.
If we translate the state of the system and the measuring devices then, as
space is homogeneous, this is equivalent to a passive transformation in which the
system remains unchanged but is represented in a diﬀerent coordinate system.
The measuring devices in this new coordinate system are represented by the
operators
ˆ
C
which are given in terms of the operators of the old coordinate
system via
ˆ
C
=
ˆ
S(a)
ˆ
C
ˆ
S
†
(a) (2094)
The momentum and coordinate operators are transformed accordingly as
ˆ p
=
ˆ
S(a) ˆ p
ˆ
S
†
(a)
= exp
_
− a . ∇
_
ˆ p exp
_
+ a . ∇
_
= ˆ p
and
r
=
ˆ
S(a) r
ˆ
S
†
(a)
= exp
_
− a . ∇
_
r exp
_
+ a . ∇
_
= r − a (2095)
For an active transformation, in which only the system is translated and the
measuring systems are kept in place, the corresponding operators are those of
the original system.
When the homogeneity of space is disturbed, for example by the application
of a magnetic ﬁeld, the translation operators take a diﬀerent form. For a uniform
magnetic ﬁeld and no electrostatic potential, the system should be uniform and
441
so the translation operator should commute with the Hamiltonian. In this case,
the correct generator of the translation is given by the pseudomomentum
ˆ
K = ˆ p −
q
c
A +
q
c
B ∧ r (2096)
where the sum of the ﬁrst two terms is recognized as the canonical momentum.
The translation through a distance a is given by
ˆ
S(a) = exp
_
−
i
¯h
a .
ˆ
K
_
(2097)
The components of the pseudomomenta do not commute, as
[
ˆ
K
i
,
ˆ
K
j
] = − i ¯h
q
c
i,j,k
B
k
(2098)
and so the translation operators also do not commute
ˆ
S(a)
ˆ
S(b) =
ˆ
S(b)
ˆ
S(a) exp
_
+ i
q
¯h c
B . ( a ∧ b )
_
(2099)
The noncommutivity of the translational operators is a manifestation of the
presence of an Aharonov  Bohm phase.
4.9.3 Periodic Translational Invariance
Consider a potential V (x) which is periodic in translations through any integer
multiple of a discrete repeat distance a. That is,
V (x +na) = V (x) (2100)
This potential is periodic in x with period a. We seek eigenvalues of the energy
eigenvalue equation
ˆ
H φ(x) = E φ(x)
_
ˆ p
2
2 m
+ V (x)
_
φ(x) = E φ(x) (2101)
The unitary operator
ˆ
S(na) deﬁned by
ˆ
S(na) = exp
_
−
i n a
¯h
ˆ p
_
(2102)
produces a translation of the wave function by a distance n a.
φ(x −na) =
ˆ
S(na) φ(x)
= exp
_
−
i n a
¯h
ˆ p
_
φ(x) (2103)
442
since the operator generates a TaylorMacLaurin expansion in the displacement
n a. Furthermore, a displacement of (n + m) a can be generated by successive
displacements of n a and m a. The unitary transformation corresponding to
the combined displacement can be expressed as
ˆ
S((n +m)a) =
ˆ
S(na)
ˆ
S(ma) =
ˆ
S(ma)
ˆ
S(na) (2104)
Thus, the unitary operators corresponding to translations through any integer
multiple of the basic periodicity a commute.
Since under the displacement the potential transforms as
V (x −na) =
ˆ
S(na) V (x)
ˆ
S
†
(na) (2105)
and as the potential is periodic
V (x −na) = V (x) (2106)
one ﬁnds that
ˆ
S(na) V (x)
ˆ
S
†
(na) = V (x) (2107)
and so
ˆ
S(na) commutes with the Hamiltonian, as
ˆ
H =
ˆ
S(na)
ˆ
H
ˆ
S
†
(na) (2108)
or, on post multiplying by
ˆ
S(na), one has
ˆ
H
ˆ
S(na) =
ˆ
S(na)
ˆ
H (2109)
Thus, the set of operators
ˆ
H, and
ˆ
S(na), form a set of mutually commuting
operators and can be diagonalized.
We seek a simultaneous solution of the set of eigenvalue equations
ˆ
H φ(x) = E φ(x)
ˆ
S(na) φ(x) = λ
n
φ(x) (2110)
for all n. The eigenvalues of a unitary operator must have modulus of unity, so
one has
[ λ
n
[
2
= 1 (2111)
Since, the discrete translation operator satisﬁes the equation
ˆ
S((n +m)a) =
ˆ
S(na)
ˆ
S(ma) (2112)
the eigenvalues must be related by the multiplicative relation
λ
n+m
= λ
n
λ
m
(2113)
443
Hence, the eigenvalues may be written as
λ
n
= exp
_
i n ϕ
_
(2114)
where ϕ is a real phase. This is a onedimensional version of Bloch’s theorem,
which states that eigenfunctions of a Hamiltonian with a periodic potential,
with periodicity a, can be chosen such that
φ(x −na) = exp
_
i n ϕ
_
φ(x) (2115)
Therefore, by demanding that φ(x) is an eigenfunction of
ˆ
S(na) we have ensured
that the solution is ﬁnite at x → ± ∞.
——————————————————————————————————
Example
As an example, consider a periodic potential composed of repulsive delta
functions of strength V
0
a,
V (x) =
n=+∞
n=−∞
V
0
a δ( x − n a ) (2116)
Classically, a particle of energy E > 0 would be free to move in the regions
between the repulsive delta functions. Quantum mechanically, we expect the
particle to be able to tunnel through the narrow potential barrier.
——————————————————————————————————
Solution
The diﬀerential equation can be solved in the region between the barriers,
say, in the region n a < x < ( n + 1 ) a the eigenfunction has the form
φ(x) = A
n
exp
_
i k x
_
+ B
n
exp
_
− i k x
_
(2117)
corresponding to a linear superposition of a forward and backward travelling
waves. The wave vector k is related to the energy through
E =
¯h
2
k
2
2 m
(2118)
The wave function in the region ( n + 1 ) a < x < ( n + 2 ) a also has the
same form
φ(x) = A
n+1
exp
_
i k x
_
+ B
n+1
exp
_
− i k x
_
(2119)
444
V(x)
0
5
10
15
20
4 3 2 1 0 1 2 3 4
x/a
Figure 110: A periodic array of repulsive delta function potentials.
The pairs of coeﬃcients (A
n
, B
n
) and (A
n+1
, B
n+1
) on each side of the delta
function barrier at x = ( n + 1 ) a are related by demanding that the forms
also satisfy the eigenvalue equation at the boundary. Continuity of the wave
function at x = ( n + 1 ) a yields the equation
( A
n+1
−A
n
) exp
_
i k ( n + 1 ) a
_
+ ( B
n+1
−B
n
) exp
_
−i k ( n + 1 ) a
_
= 0
(2120)
The discontinuity in the derivative at the boundary is related to the strength of
the delta function barrier through
( A
n+1
− A
n
) exp
_
i k ( n + 1 ) a
_
− ( B
n+1
− B
n
) exp
_
− i k ( n + 1 ) a
_
=
_
2 m V
0
a
i k ¯h
2
_ _
A
n
exp
_
i k ( n + 1 ) a
_
+ B
n
exp
_
− i k ( n + 1 ) a
_ _
(2121)
This pair of equations can be solved to yield (A
n+1
, B
n+1
) in terms of (A
n
, B
n
).
Thus, on adding the pair of equations one has
2 ( A
n+1
− A
n
) exp
_
i k ( n + 1 ) a
_
=
_
2 m V
0
a
i k ¯h
2
_ _
A
n
exp
_
i k ( n + 1 ) a
_
+ B
n
exp
_
− i k ( n + 1 ) a
_ _
445
(2122)
while on subtracting them one obtains
2 ( B
n+1
− B
n
) exp
_
− i k ( n + 1 ) a
_
= −
_
2 m V
0
a
i k ¯h
2
_ _
A
n
exp
_
i k ( n + 1 ) a
_
+ B
n
exp
_
− i k ( n + 1 ) a
_ _
(2123)
The pair of equations may be rewritten as
A
n+1
=
_
1 +
m V
0
a
i k ¯h
2
_
A
n
+
_
m V
0
a
i k ¯h
2
_
exp
_
− 2 i k ( n + 1 ) a
_
B
n
(2124)
and
B
n+1
=
_
1 −
m V
0
a
i k ¯h
2
_
B
n
−
_
m V
0
a
i k ¯h
2
_
exp
_
+ 2 i k ( n + 1 ) a
_
A
n
(2125)
These two equations are not suﬃcient to determine a solution uniquely (up to
an undetermined phase factor) since the ratio of the coeﬃcients A
n
and B
n
are
unknown. However, Bloch’s theorem gives the additional relation
φ(x −a) = exp
_
i ϕ
_
φ(x) (2126)
which uniquely speciﬁes the simultaneous eigenfunctions.
On using Bloch’s theorem, one ﬁnds
φ(x −a) = exp
_
i ϕ
_
φ(x)
= exp
_
i ϕ
_ _
A
n+1
exp
_
i k x
_
+ B
n+1
exp
_
− i k x
_ _
= A
n
exp
_
i k ( x − a )
_
+ B
n
exp
_
− i k ( x − a )
_
(2127)
which, on equating the coeﬃcients of the independent exponential functions,
yields
A
n+1
= exp
_
− i ( ϕ + k a )
_
A
n
(2128)
and
B
n+1
= exp
_
− i ( ϕ − k a )
_
B
n
(2129)
446
This insures that the wave functions do not diverge in the limits x → ± ∞. On
using these relations to eliminate B
n+1
and A
n+1
, one ﬁnds the two equations
_
m V
0
a
i k ¯h
2
_ _
B
n
A
n
_
exp
_
− 2 i k ( n + 1 ) a
_
= exp
_
− i ( k a + ϕ )
_
−
_
1 +
m V
0
a
i k ¯h
2
_
(2130)
_
m V
0
a
i k ¯h
2
__
A
n
B
n
_
exp
_
+ 2 i k ( n + 1 ) a
_
=
_
_
1 −
m V
0
a
i k ¯h
2
_
− exp
_
+ i ( k a − ϕ )
_
_
(2131)
The above two equations can be combined to eliminate the ratio of A
n
/ B
n
,
which leads to the equation
_
exp
_
− i (ka +ϕ)
_
−
_
1 +
m V
0
a
i k ¯h
2
_
_ _
_
1 −
m V
0
a
i k ¯h
2
_
− exp
_
+ i (ka −ϕ)
_
_
=
_
m V
0
a
i k ¯h
2
_
2
(2132)
On rearranging this equation, one ﬁnds
exp
_
− i 2 ϕ
_
− 2 exp
_
− i ϕ
_ _
cos k a + sin k a
m V
0
a
k ¯h
2
_
+ 1 = 0
(2133)
Multiplying this equation by exp
_
+ i ϕ
_
leads to
cos ϕ =
_
cos k a + sin k a
m V
0
a
k ¯h
2
_
= 1 (2134)
This equation only has real solutions for ϕ, when the right hand side has a
magnitude less than unity. In these ranges of k, the above equation can be
solved to yield k as a function of ϕ. We note that ϕ is only deﬁned up to
multiples of 2 π. We shall examine the equation graphically, the righthand side
is plotted as a function of k a in ﬁg(111). As a function of k, the function
F(k) =
_
cos k a + sin k a
m V
0
a
k ¯h
2
_
(2135)
has a maximum at k = 0 with the value
F(0) = 1 +
m V
0
a
2
¯h
2
(2136)
447
and behaves as cos ka in the asymptotic large k limit. The allowed values of k
are those for which cos ϕ exists and, therefore, the function F(k) has a magni
tude less than unity. Hence, not all values of k will give rise to a solution. In
particular, the values of k for which [ F(k) [ > 1 do not yield a solution. The
range of forbidden k values (at large k) are near k a = µ π, for integer µ.
2
1
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
0 1 2 3 4 5 6
k a / π
F
(
k
)
Figure 111: The graphical determination of the allowed ranges of k.
Since, E and k are related via
E =
¯h
2
k
2
2 m
(2137)
and not all k values are allowed, we ﬁnd that the spectrum of energy eigenvalues
have “gaps” centered near the energies
E =
¯h
2
µ
2
π
2
2 m a
2
(2138)
The allowed energies form bands, which are separated by band gaps. As k → ∞
the band gaps become very narrow. Since the discontinuities become negligible
at high energies, the band energies closely follow the parabolic dispersion rela
tion. Since k is not a good quantum number and due to the gaps in the E(k)
relation, the energies are not plotted as E(k). However, ϕ is a good quantum
number as it determines the eigenvalue of the
ˆ
S(a), thus the bands are usually
plotted as E(ϕ), against ϕ. Typical energy bands are shown in ﬁg(112). It is
448
seen that there are energy gaps between the bands at the origin ϕ = 0 and
at the boundary ϕ = π. The sizes of the gaps diminish and the widths of the
bands increase as one successively inspects higher energy intervals.
Dispersion Relation
0
6
12
18
24
30
36
0 0.25 0.5 0.75 1
φ/π φ/π φ/π φ/π
E
(
φ φφ φ
)
Figure 112: The band dispersion relation E(ϕ) plotted as a function of the
Bloch eigenvalue ϕ.
——————————————————————————————————
4.9.4 Exercise 111
Calculate the energy eigenvalues associated with a potential constructed from
a periodic array of attractive delta function potentials
V (x) = −
n=∞
n=−∞
V
0
a δ( x − n a ) (2139)
Explicitly, consider the eigenfunctions corresponding to E > 0 and E < 0.
——————————————————————————————————
449
4.9.5 Solution 111
The solution for the states with energy E > 0 and wave vector k can be
expressed as
φ(x) = A
n
exp
_
i k x
_
+ B
n
exp
_
− i k x
_
(2140)
in the intervals between the delta functions. The relation between the coeﬃ
cients A
n
and B
n
in successive intervals can be expressed in terms of the Bloch
label ϕ. The Bloch label is given by the solution of the equation
cos ϕ =
_
cos k a − sin k a
m V
0
a
k ¯h
2
_
≤ 1 (2141)
Not all values of k yield solutions for ϕ, and as the energy eigenvalues are given
by
E =
¯h
2
k
2
2 m
(2142)
one ﬁnds band gaps, for E > 0.
4
3
2
1
0
1
2
0 1 2 3 4 5 6
k a / π ππ π
F
(
k
)
Figure 113: The graphical determination of the allowed ranges of k.
In addition to the E > 0 solutions, one has solutions which can be written
as
φ(x) = A
n
exp
_
+ κ x
_
+ B
n
exp
_
− κ x
_
(2143)
450
in each interval. These solutions correspond to negative energy eigenvalues
E = −
¯h
2
κ
2
2 m
(2144)
The eigenvalue of the translation operator can be expressed in terms of ϕ where
cos ϕ =
_
cosh κ a − sinh κ a
m V
0
a
κ ¯h
2
_
≤ 1 (2145)
This only produces solutions for one ﬁnite range of κ values. Hence, we ﬁnd a